Press Alt + R to read the document text or Alt + P to download or print.
This document contains no pages.
HomeMy WebLinkAbout1936 E 1st St Technical - BuildingTECHNICAL
Permit 5 5
Address 1 "5(0 E
Project description
s+
1240 s si-
P �v ►ovS
of r, (rem d el d'h�
f dd�� a sal�
s+ei .0 rant
Date the permit was finaled 10- I (0,o 1
Number of technical pages
N Q\ s )050,1 c.6'}`1`o v,
y-v c u ra\ Cal Cu o Y)5
5 e, c s n. i YH- f o r s-f o e, 12c,c. s
?y03 ect c i ca*h °ls 0 5 61
Project Specifications
Store #4110
1936 EAST FIRST STREET
PORT ANGELES, WA 98362
t REGISTERED
ARCH ITECf
ILI ARTHUR RAY NAVE
STATE OF WASHINQTON
AutoZone Dept 8322
P 0 Box 2198
Memphis, TN 38101
May 20, 2009
1998 All Rights Reserved AutoZone Inc. Issue Date 05/20/09
J \Production Masters\Docs\A11 Project Specs \Cover
AutoZone Store Number 4110
Address: 1936 EAST FIRST STREET
City State Zip: Port Angeles, WA 98362
TABLE OF CONTENTS FOR REMODEL PROJECTS
Note The following sections of the specification listed below in this Table of Contents will NOT be
applicable to this project.
DIVISION 2 SITEWORK
02510 HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING
02900 LANDSCAPE
02910 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION
DIVISION 5 METALS
05210 STEEL JOISTS AND METAL DECK (AutoZone Furnished Contractor Installed)
DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07520 PVC ROOFING Membrane Option 2
DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS
08250 OVERHEAD ROLLING DOOR
J \Production Masters \Docs\Project Specs \Table of Contents\Remodel 05/20/09
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS PROTOTYPE
Note: The specification sections listed in this Table of Contents are to be used for all ground -up
`Build to Suit" and prototype projects. Sections shown in italics may also be applicable and
Contractor shall review the drawings to determine if that category of work is indicated to be a part
of this project. Contractor shall disregard those sections that do not apply to his project.
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01010 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01020 AUTOZONE VENDOR LIST
01030 AUTOZONE SUPPLIER SOURCE LIST
01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
DIVISION 2 SITEWORK
02010 SITE CLEARING
02020 EROSION CONTROL
02200 EARTHWORK
02215 TERMITE CONTROL
02510 HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING
02520 SITE CONCRETE
02900 LANDSCAPE
02910 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION
DIVISION 3 CONCRETE
03100 CAST -IN- PLACE CONCRETE
03150 COLORLESS LIQUID PENETRATING SEALER
DIVISION 4 MASONRY
04200 UNIT MASONRY
DIVISION 5 METALS
05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL
05210 STEEL JOISTS and METAL DECK (AutoZone Furnished Contractor Installed)
05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING
05500 METAL FABRICATION
DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS
06100 CARPENTRY
06200 PLASTIC SLEEVES for PIPE GUARDS
DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07100 BELOW GRADE WATERPROOFING
07200 BUILDING INSULATION
07220 ROOF INSULATION
07240 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (E.I F.S.)
07500 ROOFING MEMBRANE
07510 BUILT -UP ROOFING Membrane Option 1
07520 PVC ROOFING Membrane Option 2
07600 SHEET METAL FLASHING
07700 ROOF ACCESSORIES
07900 SEALANTS
DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS
08100 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES AND WOOD DOORS
08250 OVERHEAD ROLLING DOOR
08400 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT, GLAZING and ENTRANCE DOORS
08700 HARDWARE
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs \Table of Contents 05/20/09
1
DIVISION 9 FINISHES
09220 CEMENT PLASTER (Stucco)
09250 GYPSUM WALL BOARD
09660 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
09900 PAINTING
09986 SANITARY WALL PANELS
DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES
10426 SIGNAGE (AutoZone Furnished Contractor Installed)
10800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL
15400 PLUMBING
15500 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
(Equipment AutoZone Furnished Contractor Installed)
DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL
16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
16400 ELECTRIC SERVICE ENTRANCE
16480 PANELBOARDS (AutoZone Furnished Contractor Installed)
16500 LIGHTING (AutoZone Furnished Contractor Installed)
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs \Table of Contents 06/30/08
2
DIVISION 1 SECTION 01010 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.00 SPECIFICATION NOTES
A. These specifications contain information and requirements for masonry bearing wall buildings, wood frar
buildings, steel stud bearing wall buildings and a variety of exterior wall finishes. Contractor shall be
responsible for reviewing both the drawings and the specifications to insure he has complete informatior
and a thorough understanding of the requirements.
B. The specifications have been structured so that if the section heading does not specifically say to what
building type the information is applicable to, then the information contained therein will apply to all buildi
types.
2.00 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT NOTES
A. Drawings will not be scaled. Dimensional data is to be obtained through written information only Verify
existing conditions, elevations, and dimensions.
B. Make no changes to the Contract Documents without first receiving written permission from AutoZone.
C Where detailed information is lacking, or if discrepancies should appear within the contract documents,
request interpretation from AutoZone prior to the bid due date, or before proceeding with that portion of t
work whichever comes first.
D All work, as outlined in these documents, shall strictly conform to all applicable codes and ordinances. 1
most stringent shall govern.
E. When a material system is called out, all parts and materials required to complete the system will be
furnished and installed as part of the contract.
F Unless otherwise noted, electrical conduits, plumbing lines, etc. are to be concealed, and framing shall I
of adequate size to accomplish this result without changes in the wall plan.
1 It is the intent of these Contract Documents to define a complete finished facility Any discrepancies
omissions found which normally would be required shall be provided and finished as if specifically
noted.
G Any unresolved conflicts or discrepancies with the contract documents are to be brought to the attention
AutoZone for resolution prior to the work being installed.
3.00 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION NOTES
A. Contractor shall be responsible for and furnish all materials and labor necessary to complete the project
unless a specific item is called out to be furnished and /or installed by others.
B. Contractor shall secure and pay for all necessary permits, utility taps, etc. required. AutoZone shall
reimburse the Contractor only for the actual amounts expended with no mark -ups or administrative fees
added and Contractor must furnish a paid receipt from the issuing authority along with the invoice.
C Contractor to coordinate all utility lines and meter locations with the appropriate utilities and other trades
avoid conflicts and problems. Utility services shall include (but not be limited to) water, sanitary, gas,
electric power and telephone. Refer to Site Plan for proposal locations.
D Any additional work, whether on -site or off-site, requested or required by a governing regulatory agency
being required for completion or occupancy permit shall first be discussed with AutoZone before being
commenced in order to clearly define the required scope of work. Then a cost estimate and change orde
shall be prepared and executed prior to the installation of any work.
E. AutoZone retains the right to adjust finish grades 6' or to conform to adjacent grades or to facilitate
drainage. The contractor may adjust grades to balance cut and fill provided AutoZone agrees to the
adjustment in writing prior to beginning work.
F The Contractor will take whatever steps necessary to prevent erosion resulting from increased runoff dui
site work construction, in accordance with all local codes.
G The Contractor will maintain positive drainage to prevent ponding on the sub and /or surface grade.
H. Contractor is to verify and coordinate location and routing of all underground services to the building, as
as any landscape sleeving prior to paving.
I. Any areas, whether on -site or off -site, disturbed during the construction process shall be returned to their
original or natural state by the contractor prior to final acceptance of the project by AutoZone.
J. Contractor shall inspect the site and take whatever precautions He deems appropriate to undertake the
work.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -1\Sec -01010 05/2
1
K. Paint manufacturers listed shall be the only ones accepted for the project. No substitutions shall be
allowed.
4.00 UTILITIES and SERVICE
A. Contractor shall, upon receipt of Notice to Proceed, contact utility companies and place in his name all
services required for the project. Contractor shall pay all deposits and charges required for the initiation of
service and shall pay monthly use charges during the course of construction.
B. With the submission of the first draw request, Contractor shall include all pertinent information regarding
utilities and services. The information shall include the utility company name, address, phone number
contact person, meter number amount of deposit paid, whether the deposit is refundable and if so, to
whom Failure to provide this information will place the draw request on hold until it is furnished.
C At the time of submission of the 90 percent draw request, AutoZone will contact the utility companies and
have the accounts transferred to his name, and will pay all monthly charges going forward. Contractor must
pay past due balances.
D For those municipalities that require the utilities to be in AutoZone's name from the beginning of the project,
Contractor shall, upon receipt of Notice to Proceed, contact utility companies and place in AutoZone's name
all services required for the project. Contractor shall pay all deposits and charges required for the initiation
of service, and AutoZone shall pay monthly use charges during the course of construction. Contractor shall
submit to AutoZone copies of all charges or deposits paid for the initialization of service and AutoZone will
reimburse Contractor for same. When AutoZone will be paying for utilities from the beginning of the project,
Contractor shall make an appropriate adjustment in the General Conditions line item to account for this
cost.
E. It will be the Contractors responsibility to recover deposits previously paid to the utility company With
proper documentation, AutoZone will reimburse Contractor fees paid to utility companies for the setting of
meters and utility taps.
5.00 ITEMS FURNISHED BY AUTOZONE AND INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR OR AUTOZONE VENDOR
A. Division 5 Metals:
1 Section 05210: Steel joists and joist girders, including bridging.
2. Section 05300: Metal deck and deck screws.
B. Division 8 Doors and Windows:
1 Section 08700• Cylindrical locks for the glass and aluminum doors and doors to telephone closet.
2. Section 08700: Push bar exit device.
C Division 9 Finishes
1 Section 09900: Pounce patterns for interior graphics.
D Division 10: Specialties
1 Section 10426: Pylon and wall signs installed by AutoZone Vendor on Contractor installed foundations
and prepared wall surfaces.
E. Division 15 Mechanical:
1 Section 15400: Hot water heater
2. Section 15500: Mechanical Equipment.
a. AutoZone shall furnish rooftop heating/cooling unit, curbs, plenums, ducts, diffusers, thermostatic
controls, Venstar sensors, and accessories (firestats, smoke detectors, fresh air intakes and or
economizers) where indicated in the Drawings.
b. Unit shall come internally pre -wired to disconnect switch. Electrical Contractor shall energize the
unit at the disconnect switch
c. Installation shall include necessary repairs and replacements during one -year correction period.
Applicable manufacturer's warranties for parts and service reimbursement shall extend to installer
d. Bathroom exhaust fans, Contractor to furnish duct and wall cap.
e. Venstar HVAC equipment.
F Division 16 Electrical:
1 Section 16480: Panel boards, circuit breakers and fused disconnects.
2. Section 16500: Interior light fixtures and lamps; exterior light fixtures and lamps; site light poles, anchor
bolts and bolt setting templates; and accessories.
3. Section 16500: Venstar automatic lighting control panel; accessories and control relay
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -1\Sec -01010 05/20/09
2
7.00 AUTOZONE FURNISHED VENDORS and SOURCES
A. AutoZone has entered into an agreement for a number of specific items, at pre- determined pricing, with t
vendors and suppliers listed below The general contractor will order and pay for the quantity of each iter
necessary to complete the work.
1 Section 02520: Cap seal for expansion and construction joints.
2. Section 08250: Overhead Rolling Door
3. Section 08400: Aluminum storefront, glazing and entrance doors.
4 Section 09660: Resilient tile flooring and underlayment.
5. Section 09660: Floor wax.
8.00 SUBMITTALS ERECTION DRAWINGS
A. AutoZone's vendors shall furnish shop or erection drawings for the following:
1 Steel joists and deck
2. Pylon sign foundations
3. Aluminum storefront, glazing and entrance doors
B Contractor shall review and maintain shop drawings and submittals as part of his work and shall be sole')
responsible for compliance with Contract Documents.
C Products and/or systems identified in the Specifications are the only ones approved for incorporation into
the work. AutoZone will not consider any substitutions or alternates unless written request has been
submitted at least seven (7) days prior to the date for receipt of bids. Incorporation of requested
substitutions would only be acceptable with written approval of AutoZone. This approval if granted will be
for the specific project requested and should not be considered a blanket approval.
9.00 TYPE OF CONTRACT
A. This is a lump sum (stipulated sum) General Contract. The General Contractor shall be responsible for
phases of work, to the extent required by the Contract Documents.
B. "AutoZone Inc. Standard Construction Agreement', dated September 1996 and First Reissued June 12,
1998, Articles 1 through 18, inclusive, along with Addendums 1 through 3 are part of this Contract as thoi
fully set forth herein and shall govern all work under this Contract.
10.00 INSURANCE COVERAGE
A. Subject to the specific provisions and requirements of the AutoZone Inc. Standard Construction Agreeme
the Contractor will be obligated to take out and maintain the following coverage:
1 Workman's Compensation
2. Comprehensive General Liability
3. Comprehensive Automobile Liability
4 Excess Liability (Umbrella Policy)
B. AutoZone will be obligated to take out and maintain Owner's Liability (Builder's Risk) for the duration of th
project.
C. Contractor shall provide any other rider or endorsement to cover any project situation not covered by one
the coverages listed above.
D Contractor shall furnish to AutoZone certificates of insurance naming AutoZone as an additional insured f
each specific project.
11.00 BONDS
A. Contractor will be required to furnish a Performance and Payment Bond for the full amount of the contrac
A bonding company rated "A -8' or better per the latest edition of AM Best Key Rating Guide must write ti
bond.
B. AutoZone may from time to time waive the bond requirements and reserves the right to do so at his
discretion.
C AutoZone will furnish any required bond for off -site work unless other arrangements are agreed to in writi
D Contractor shall ensure that all inspections relating to bonded work have been made and shall furnish prc
to AutoZone of such approved inspections. Contractor shall also provide assistance to AutoZone in
obtaining the release of such bonds.
End of Section
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -1\Sec -01010 05/20
3
This Page Left Blank
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div- 1 \Sec-01010 05/20/09
4
r
DIVISION 1 SECTION 01020 AZ VENDOR LIST
01020 AUTOZONE FURNISHED VENDOR LIST
Division 5 Metals Sections 05210 05300 Steel Bar Joists Metal Deck
CMC Joist Company 800 -643 -1577 Fax 800 -237 7571
Division 8 Doors Windows Section 08700 Hardware Cylinder Locks
Best Locking Systems, Inc. 800 -227 2378 Fax 901 366 -9741
Division 8 Doors Windows Section 08700 Hardware Push Bar Exit Device
Best Locking Systems, Inc. 800 -227 2378 Fax 901- 366 -9741
Division 9 Finishes Section 09900 Painting Pounce Patterns
Signs Now 866 -278 -7371 Fax 901- 368 -1415
Division 10 Specialties Section 10426 Signage
Jones Sign 920 983 -6700 Fax 920 983 -9145
Division 15 Mechanical Section 15400 Electric Water Heater Toilet Exhaust Fans
Graybar Electric Company 800 -477 7150 Fax 901 278 -3534
Division 15 Mechanical Section 15500 Heating Air Conditioning Equipment
Carrier Company 800 -264 -2512 Fax 901- 366 -3324
Division 15 Mechanical Section 15500 Venstar HVAC Controls
Venstar Inc. 818- 341 -8760 Fax 818- 341 -8763
Division 16 Electrical Section 16400 Fused Main Disconnects
Graybar Electric Company 800 -477 7150 Fax 901 278 -3534
Division 16 Electrical Section 16480 Panelboards Circuit Breakers
Graybar Electric Company 800 -477 7150 Fax 901 278 -3534
Division 16 Electrical Section 16500 Light Fixtures, Lamps Accessories
Graybar Electric Company 800 -477 7150 Fax 901 278 -3534
Division 16 Electrical Section 16500 Lighting Control Panel Accessories
Venstar Inc. 818- 341 -8760 Fax 818 341 -8763
Note: Not all items listed above will be furnished on every project review drawings to determine if specific produc
will be required to complete your project.
End of Section
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -1\Sec -01020 05/20/09
1
This Page Left Blank
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -1\Sec -01020 05/20/09
2
DIVISION 1 SECTION 01030 AZ SUPPLIER LIST
01030 AUTOZONE SUPPLIER SOURCE LIST
Division 2 Site Work Section 02520 Joint Cap Seal
Greenstreak, Inc. 800 325 -9504 Fax 800 551 -5145
Division 8 Doors Windows Section 08250 Overhead Rolling Door
Advanced Door Technologies 570 421 -5929 Fax 570 -421 1795 contact Brian Santore
Division 8 Doors Windows Section 08400 Aluminum Storefront, Glazing and Entrance Doors
Vistawall Architectural Products 800- 869 -4567 Fax 972 551 -6264 contact Kent Baumann
United States Aluminum 800 220 -0126 Fax 972 937 -0405 contact Clark Folsom
Division 9 Finishes Section 09900 Painting Paint
Sherwin Williams Paint Company 678 361 -6108 Fax 678 261 -6769 Dwight LeClair
Division 9 Finishes Section 09660 Resilient Tile Flooring Underlayment
Ito Armstrong World Industries 800 442 -4212 Fax 813 973 -4517
Division 9 Finishes Section 09660 Resilient Tile Flooring Floor Wax
Johnson Diversey, Inc. 800 558 -2332
End of Section
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div- 1 \Sec-01030 05/20/09
1
This Page Left Blank
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -1\Sec -01030 05/20/09
2
DIVISION 1 SECTION 01410 TESTING LAB SERVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED.
A. Selection and payment.
B. Authorities and duties of the Testing Laboratory
C Testing Laboratory reports.
D Limits of Testing Laboratory authority
E. Contractor responsibilities.
F Schedule of observations and tests.
1.02 SELECTION AND PAYMENT
A. Contractor or "build to suit" Developer will employ and pay for services of an independent Testing
Laboratory to perform specified observations and testing. For Earthwork Testing the Contractor shall
make ever effort to use to use the services of the firm that prepared the Geotechnical Report for the
project. If unable to reach an agreement, Contractor shall notify the AutoZone Project Manager before
engaging another firm The firm engaged to do earthwork testing may or may not be engaged to do the
balance of the testing required for the project.
B. Testing Laboratory shall be licensed in the state in which the project is located. All work performed shall
be under the supervision of a licensed engineer
C Employment of Testing Laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor of obligation to perform work in
accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
1.03 AUTHORITIES AND DUTIES OF TESTING LABORATORY
A. Cooperate with AutoZone, Architect and Contractor provide qualified personnel after due notice.
B. Perform specified inspections, sampling and testing of materials and methods of construction. Comply
with specified standards. Ascertain compliance of materials with requirements of Contract Documents.
C Notify Contractor and AutoZone of observed irregularities or deficiencies in work or products.
D Perform additional tests as required by AutoZone.
1.04 LIMITS OF TESTING LABORATORY AUTHORITY
A. Testing Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter or enlarge requirements of Contract Documents.
B. Testing Laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the work.
C. Testing Laboratory may not assume any duties of Contractor
D Testing Laboratory has no authority to stop the work.
1.05 TESTING LABORATORY REPORTS
A. After each observation and test, promptly submit two copies of report to AutoZone, the Engineer of Reco
and to Contractor
1 Reports to AutoZone shall be addressed to Project Coordinator Dept 8322, P O.Box 2198, Memphis
TN 38101
B. Reports shall include the following information:
1 Date issued
2. Store number and location
3. Name, address and telephone number of Testing Laboratory
4 Name and signature of inspector
5. Type of observation or test
6. Date and time of sampling, observation or test
7 Record of temperature and weather conditions
8. Identification of product and Specifications Section
9 Location of sample or test
10. Results and or interpretation of tests or observations
11 Conformance with Contract Documents
C. Upon completion of the work, Testing Laboratory shall furnish a certified statement that all required tests
and observations were made in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
J•1Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs \Div -1\Sec -01410 05/20/09
1
1.06 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Cooperate with Testing Laboratory personnel at all times and provide access to the work and storage
areas as required.
B. Provide a copy of the structural documents, project specifications and geotechnical report as a minimum
to the Testing Laboratory prior to the beginning of required inspections.
C. Provide incidental labor and facilities to obtain and handle samples at the site, to facilitate tests and
inspections; and to store and cure test samples.
D Based on Project Schedule, notify AutoZone and Testing Laboratory 72 hours in advance of operations
requiring observation and or testing services. If for any reason tests or observations cannot be
performed after such notice, Contractor shall be responsible for the reimbursement to the AutoZone and
or Testing Laboratory for personnel and travel expenses incurred due to Contractor's negligence.
E. Make arrangements with Testing Laboratory and pay for additional samples and tests required for
Contractor's convenience.
F Make arrangements with Testing Laboratory and pay for additional inspections, sampling and testing
required when initial tests indicate work does not comply with Contract Documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The work to be performed by the Testing Laboratory shall be as specified in this Section and as
determined in meetings with AutoZone.
3.02 EARTHWORK (section 02200)
A. Testing Laboratory shall conduct a survey of the Contractor's proposed location of borrow soil materials
and shall establish the suitability of any proposed fill material by determining the required engineering
properties. Soil tests shall include soil classification, mechanical analysis, moisture density curve
determination, and plasticity index determination.
B. Testing Laboratory shall provide one optimum moisture density curve for each type of soil, natural,
imported fill, or on -site fill, encountered in subgrade and fills under building slabs and paved areas.
Curves shall be generated in accordance with ASTM D -1557, 'Test Methods for Moisture Density
Relationships of Soil and Soil Aggregate Mixtures'
C Testing Laboratory shall observe that subgrade and fill layers are firm unyielding and meet the
specification compaction requirements before further construction work is performed thereon.
D Perform field density tests in accordance with ASTM D 1556 (sand cone method) or ASTM D 2922
(nuclear method), as applicable. If field tests are performed using nuclear methods, make calibration
checks of both density and moisture gauges at the beginning of work, on each different type material
encountered, and at intervals as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer
1 Footing Subgrade: For each strata of soil on which footings will be placed, perform at least one test to
verify required design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of each footing
subgrade may be based on a visual comparison of each subgrade with related tested strata.
2. Paved Areas and Building Slab Subgrade: Perform at least one field density test 9f subgrade for every
2,000 sq. ft. of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests. In each compacted
fill layer perform one field density test for each 2,000 sq. ft. of overlaying building slab or paved area,
but in no case fewer than three tests
3. Foundation Wall Backfill: Perform at least two field density tests at locations and elevations as
directed by AutoZone or its representative.
4 If reports by Testing Laboratory indicate field densities lower than specified requirements, the
Contractor shall perform additional compaction as necessary until the specified density is obtained
and Testing Laboratory shall run additional tests to confirm results. This work shall be performed at
no additional expense to AutoZone.
E. Testing Laboratory shall inspect and verify that field conditions are consistent with soils report test results
and that pier foundations, if required, are being correctly installed in proper soil strata and at proper
elevation.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -1\Sec -01410 05/20/09
2
3.03 ASPHALT (section 02510)
A. Testing Laboratory shall secure all necessary asphalt samples, make density tests determine thickness
and check finished surfaces of each course for smoothness. Record location within project documents o
where cores are taken and the results found all in accordance with ASTM D -3549.
B. Contractor shall be responsible for patching all surfaces where cores are taken.
C Furnish copies of all reports to AutoZone, Contractor and other officials as required.
3.04 SITE CONCRETE (section 02520)
A. Testing Laboratory shall secure all necessary concrete samples, make air content and slump tests, recoi
location within project of concrete tested, mold, cure, store and deliver required cylinders to the laborator
B. Testing Laboratory shall review concrete design mix prior to placement.
C. Each class of concrete shall be tested for the following, and sampling shall be taken from fresh concrete:
1 Slump: ASTM C -143; one test for concrete at point of discharge; and one test for each set of
compressive strength test specimens. Any water added to bring mix to specified water cement ratic
shall be noted on the batch ticket and in report. All slumps and test cylinders will be taken after the
addition of any water
2. Air Content; ASTM C 173; volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight concrete; ASTM C 23'
pressure for normal weight concrete; one for each set of compressive strength test specimens.
3. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F and below or when 80
degrees F and above; and each time a set of compression test specimens made.
4 Compression Test Specimen. ASTM C -31 one set of four 6 by 12 inch cylinders for each
compression strength test; mold and store cylinders for field cured test specimens.
D The above listed sampling and testing shall be done for each 40 cubic yards placed each day, or at a
minimum of each day's concreting.
E. One cylinder shall be tested at 7 days for information and two cylinders shall be tested at 28 -days for
acceptance. One cylinder shall be held in reserve for future testing if 28 -day results do not comply with
specified requirements. A report of 7 and 28 -day strength tests shall be made directly by Testing
Laboratory on the day testing is done as follows:
1 Two copies to AutoZone
2. One copy to Structural Engineer of record
3. One copy to Contractor
F Average of any three consecutive 28 -day strength tests shall be equal to or greater than specified
strength, and not more than 10 percent of tests shall have values less than specified strength. In no case
shall a test have a value less than 90 percent of specified strength.
G. In event test results do not meet specification requirements; the fourth cylinder shall be tested at 56 days
at no cost to AutoZone. If this test does not meet specification requirements, AutoZone shall determine
the next course of action to be taken by Contractor All work pursuant to this action shall be at
Contractor's sole expense.
H. Once site paving has been completed, Testing Laboratory shall core the concrete to determine actual
thickness that has been placed. For full concrete parking lots take a minimum of ten cores, four in the
drive aisles, four in the parking areas, and two in the loading area. For combination parking lots (asphalt
and concrete) take a minimum of six cores four in the parking areas and two in the loading area. Core
diameters shall be 2' or smaller and locations shall be determined by the Testing Laboratory randomly
placed, and shall cover all thickness of paving called for on the drawings. If any core does not indicate th
required thickness, then additional cores shall be taken to determine the magnitude of the substandard
area. Patching or repair of paving where cores are taken shall be made with 4000 psi grout mix, packed
tight and struck flush with surrounding surfaces and will be the responsibility of the Contractor Once
coring has been completed, Testing Laboratory shall fumish a report which includes each core taken
individually identified, the dimensional location of the core and the thickness of the core. Send two copies
of report to AutoZone and one copy to the Contractor If cores indicate that concrete does not meet
specification requirements, AutoZone shall determine the next course of action to be taken by Contractor
All work pursuant to this action shall be at Contractor's sole expense.
3.05 BUILDING CONCRETE (section 03100)
A. Testing Laboratory shall secure all necessary concrete samples, make air content and slump tests,
record location within project of concrete tested, mold, cure, store and deliver required cylinders to the
laboratory
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project SpecsOiv 1\Sec 01410 05/20/09
3
B. Testing Laboratory shall review concrete design mix prior to placement.
C. Testing Laboratory shall inspect reinforcement placement in foundations and concrete stemwalls.
D Each class of concrete shall be tested for the following, and sampling shall be taken from fresh concrete:
1 Slump: ASTM C -143; one test for concrete at point of discharge; and one test for each set of
compressive strength test specimens. Any water added to bring mix to specified water cement ratio
shall be noted on the batch ticket and in report. All slumps and test cylinders will be taken after the
addition of any water
2. Air Content: ASTM C -173; volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight concrete, ASTM C -231
pressure for normal weight concrete; one for each set of compressive strength test specimens.
3. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F and below or when 80
degrees F and above; and each time a set of compression test specimens made.
4 Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C -31 one set of four 6 by 12 inch cylinders for each
compression strength test; mold and store cylinders for field cured test specimens.
E. The above listed sampling and testing shall be done for each 40 cubic yards placed each day or at a
minimum of each day's concreting.
F One cylinder shall be tested at 7 days for information and two cylinders shall be tested at 28 -days for
acceptance. One cylinder shall be held in reserve for future testing if 28 -day results do not comply with
specified requirements. A report of 7 and 28 -day strength tests shall be made directly by Testing
Laboratory on the day testing is done as follows:
1 Two copies to AutoZone
2. One copy to Structural Engineer of record
3. One copy to Contractor
G. Average of any three consecutive 28 -day strength tests shall be equal to or greater than specified
strength, and not more than 10 percent of tests shall have values Tess than specified strength. In no
case shall a test have a value less than 90 percent of specified strength.
H In event test results do not meet specification requirements; the fourth cylinder shall be tested at 56 days
at no cost to AutoZone. If this test does not meet specification requirements, AutoZone shall determine
the next course of action to be taken by Contractor All work pursuant to this action shall be at
Contractor's sole expense.
I. Once building slab has been poured, Testing Laboratory shall core the concrete to determine actual
thickness that has been placed. Take a minimum of two cores. Core diameters shall be 2' or smaller
and locations shall be determined by the Testing Laboratory randomly placed. If any core does not
indicate the required thickness, then additional cores shall be taken to determine the magnitude of the
substandard area. Patching or repair of slab where cores are taken shall be made with 4000 psi grout
mix, packed tight and struck flush with surrounding surfaces and will be the responsibility of the
Contractor Once coring has been completed, Testing Laboratory shall furnish a report which includes
each core taken individually identified, the dimensional location of the core and the thickness of the core.
Send two copies of report to AutoZone and one copy to the Contractor If cores indicate that concrete
does not meet specification requirements, AutoZone shall determine the next course of action to be
taken by Contractor All work pursuant to this action shall be at Contractor's sole expense.
3.06 UNIT MASONRY (section 04200)
A. Testing Laboratory shall make observations, perform tests, and make reports as follows:
1 Verify that reinforcing dowels have been positioned as required by the drawings.
2. Observe and test masonry construction at frequency necessary to determine whether or not work
conforms to Contract Documents. Items to be inspected include but are not limited to size, spacing,
location, lap and grade of reinforcing; type and placement of masonry units; grouting of cells and
construction procedure.
a. Mortar properties will be per requirements of ASTM C -270 and test and evaluation report per
ASTM C -780.
b. Grout properties will be per requirements of ASTM C -476 and test and evaluation report per
ASTM C -1019.
c. Tests shall be performed for each 1000 square feet of wall or portion thereof
3. Furnish daily inspection reports to all required parties. Bring discrepancies to the immediate attention
of Contractor for correction then if uncorrected, to AutoZone and building official.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -1\Sec -01410 05/20/09
4
4 Submit final report stating whether masonry construction was, to the best of Testing Laboratory's
knowledge, in conformance with the Contract Documents and applicable provisions of governing
building code.
5. Furnish copies of all reports to AutoZone and Contractor as well as building official, if required.
3.07 STRUCTURAL STEEL AND STEEL JOISTS (sections 05120 05210)
A. Testing Laboratory shall make observations, perform tests, and make reports as follows.
B. Field Welding: Observe and test in accordance with AWS D1 1 and as follows:
1 Perform visual inspection of all welds. Check for size, pinholes, undercut and overlap. Any visual
indication of cracks shall be checked further using nondestructive methods.
2. Perform nondestructive tests of welds as follows:
a. Fillet Welds: One spot test per member Magnetic particle testing may be used.
b. Partial Penetration Welds: One spot test per weld using magnetic particle testing.
c. Full Penetration Welds: Test the entire length of all field welds. Use radiographic or ultrasonic
testing techniques.
3. All welds that fail shall be reweided and retested until they pass. When spot testing is designated,
each spot test shall cover at least 4 inches of weld length When spot testing reveals indications of
flaws requiring repair the entire length of the weld in that welded joint shall be tested. The cost of all
retesting shall be at Contractor's expense.
C. High Strength Bolted Connections: Inspect in accordance with AISC Specifications for Structural Joints
and as follows:
1 Visually inspect all bolts.
2. In connections which transfer tension or are slip critical type, check a minimum of two bolts of every
connection between girders and columns for proper torque with a calibrated torque wrench.
3. All bolted connections that fail shall be corrected and retested. The cost of all retesting shall be at
Contractor's expense.
D Verify anchor bolt condition, position, size, projection and embed prior to placing concrete
E. Verify bearing and connections of steel joists and joist girders. Verify spacing and connections of bridginc
and bracing for steel joists and joist girders.
F Verify location, sizes, bearing and connections of steel framing.
G. Verify metal deck connections to structure.
H. Verify light gage framing sizes and connections.
3.08 POST INSTALLED CONCRETE ANCHORING
A. Testing Laboratory shall make observations, perform tests, and make reports as follows:
1 Inspection during installation of adhesive anchors to verify the depth and diameter of the hole and
preparation per manufacturer's specifications and applicable ICC reports.
3.09 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
A. Refer to structural drawings and local building department requirements for additional required special
inspections over and beyond those required above.
End of Section
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs \Div-1 \Sec-01410 05/20/09
5
This Page Left Blank.
JAProduction Masters\Docs'Project Specs\Div -1\Sec -01410 05/20/09
6
DIVISION 2 SECTION 02010 SITE CLEARING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS
A. AutoZone makes no warranty and assumes no responsibility for the condition or type of construction of
any building(s) or structures on site existing at the time new construction commences.
B. Contractor shall accept premises as found; clear building site as specified.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following:
1 Protection of existing trees
2. Removal of trees and other vegetation
3. Topsoil stripping
4 Clearing and grubbing
5. Removing above grade improvements
6. Removing below grade improvements
1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Traffic: Conduct site clearing operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks and
other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks or other occupied or
used facilities without permission from authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Protection of Existing Improvements: Provide protections necessary to prevent damage to existing
improvements indicated to remain in place.
1 Protect improvements on adjoining properties and on the Project Site.
2. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition as acceptable to property owners.
3. Existing boundary or control monuments provided by AutoZone shall be maintained throughout
construction. Any control damaged shall be replaced at Contractor's expense.
C Protection of Existing Trees and Vegetation. Protect existing trees and other vegetation indicated to
remain in place against:
1 Unnecessary cutting, breaking or skinning of roots; skinning or bruising of bark.
2. Smothering of trees by stockpiling construction materials or excavated materials within drip line.
3. Excess foot or vehicular traffic; or parking of vehicles within drip line.
4 Provide temporary guards to protect trees and vegetation to be left standing.
a. Contractor shall be responsible for all fines, penalties, or fees levied due to removal of trees in
wetlands, right -of -ways, or off the Project Site.
b. Water trees and other vegetation to remain within limits of contract work as required in order to
maintain their health during the course of construction operations.
c. Provide protection for roots over 1 1/2 inch diameter cut during construction operations. Coat
cut faces with emulsified asphalt, or other acceptable coating formulated for use on damaged
plant tissues. Temporarily cover exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying
out; cover with earth as soon as possible.
5. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain which are damaged by construction
operations in a manner acceptable to AutoZone or governing jurisdiction. Employ a licensed
arborist to repair damages to trees and shrubs.
6. Replace trees, which cannot be repaired and restored to full growth status as determined by the
arborist.
D Improvements on Adjoining Property Authority for performing removal and alteration work on property
adjoining the Project Site will be obtained by AutoZone prior to issuance of Notice to Proceed. Extent
of work on adjacent property is indicated on Drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. All work is to be accomplished in strict accordance with all ordinances and requirements of the
governing local, state and/or federal agency applicable to this project.
J•1Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -2\Sec -02010 05/20/09
1
B. Within the subject property the intent is to have a clean, clear site free of all existing items noted to be
removed in order to permit the construction of the new project.
C. Remove all utilities to existing structures whether shown or not. Cut and cap all underground lines at
the property line.
D For all items noted to be removed, remove not only above ground elements but all underground
elements as well, including but not necessarily limited to foundations, gravel fills, tree roots, etc.
E. Tree roots shall be excavated to a depth of at least 6' below footings and to 2 ft. below slab sub base
and surrounding finish grades.
F If this work is being performed under a separate contract, notify the project manager immediately upon
completion of work in order to allow new construction to commence at the earliest possible date.
G The contractor shall obtain any required permits and /or notices authorizing building demolition and
disposal of debris. The contractor shall obtain all required certificates of severance of utility services
as may be required by local utility companies.
H. Where items have been removed or left a depression the contractor shall fill same back to surrounding
natural grade. The fill material shall be placed in accordance with the requirements contained in the
soils report and /or section 02200 Earthwork which ever is more stringent.
3.02 SITE CLEARING
A. General: Remove trees, shrubs, grass and other vegetation, improvements, or obstructions as
required to permit installation of new construction. Remove similar items elsewhere on site or
premises as specifically indicated. Removal includes digging out and off -site disposal of stumps and
roots. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where
such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction.
B. Topsoil: Topsoil is defined as friable clay loam surface soil found in a depth of not Tess than 4 inches.
Satisfactory topsoil is reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones and other objects over 1 1/2
inches in diameter and without weeds, roots and other objectionable material.
1 Strip topsoil to whatever depths encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying
subsoil or other objectionable material.
a. Remove heavy growths of grass from areas before stripping.
b. Where existing trees are indicated to remain, leave existing topsoil in place within drip lines to
prevent damage to root systems.
2. Stockpile topsoil in storage piles in areas indicated or directed. Construct storage piles to provide
free drainage of surface water Cover storage piles to prevent wind erosion if required.
3. Dispose of unsuitable or excess topsoil same as specified for disposal of waste material.
C Clearing and Grubbing: Clear site of trees, shrubs and other vegetation except for those indicated to be
left standing.
1 Completely remove stumps, roots and other debris protruding through ground surface.
2. Use only hand methods for grubbing inside drip line of trees indicated to remain.
3. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless
further excavation of earthwork is indicated.
a. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 9 inches loose depth and thoroughly
compact to a density equal to adjacent original ground.
D Removal of Improvements: Remove existing above -grade and below -grade improvements as indicated
and as necessary to facilitate new construction.
1 Removal of abandoned underground piping or conduit interfering with construction is included
under this Section.
3.03 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL
A. Burning on the Project Site: Burning is not permitted on the Project Site.
B. Removal from the Project Site: Remove waste materials and unsuitable or excess topsoil from the
Project Site. Waste materials shall be disposed of in a certified landfill.
End of Section
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -2\Sec -02010 05/20/09
2
DIVISION 2 SECTION 02020 EROSION CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. This section consists of furnishing, installing and maintaining temporary erosion controls and
temporary sedimentation controls. Contractor shall remove existing erosion control material from site
after all other work is complete.
B. Temporary erosion controls shall include grassing, mulching, watering and reseeding on -site sloped
surfaces, providing berms at the top of slopes and providing interceptor ditches at the ends of berms
and at those locations which will ensure that erosion during construction will be either eliminated or
minimized.
C Temporary sedimentation controls shall include silt dams, traps barriers and appurtenances at the toe
of slopes.
D Provide erosion control methods in accordance with methods as indicated on the erosion control plan
and /or requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Contractor shall comply with all National
Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) rules and regulations. Control measures shown on
plans are minimum measures. Additional requirements may be imposed, at Contractor's expense,
during the course of work.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SILT BARRIER MATERIALS
A. Hay bales shall be dean, seed free, cereal hay type, securely bound.
B. Netting shall be 1/2 inch, galvanized steel wire mesh.
C Filter stone shall be crushed 1 inch stone without excessive fines or dust.
D Silt barrier shall be Mirofi 100X or approved equal with a water flow capacity of 40 gallons per minute
per square foot.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractor shall construct sedimentation ponds and control devices prior to clearing and grubbing the
site to insure complete silt control. When the silt or debris level is greater than 1 foot above bottom of
pond, remove the silt or debris to restore the proper elevation for the bottom of the pond.
B. Silt dams, traps, barriers and appurtenances shall be installed and maintained in place for duration of
construction.
C Hay bales shall be staked with two 2 inch by 2 inch wood stakes or two rebars per bale driven 18 to 24
inches into the ground and finishing flush with the top of the bale.
D Hay bale, which have deteriorated shall be replaced with new material.
E. Erosion and sedimentation controls shall be maintained in a condition, which will retain unfiltered water
F Contractor shall be solely responsible for insuring that no silt or debris leaves the immediate
construction site. Any silt or debris that does leave the immediate site shall be cleaned up and the
area disturbed shall be returned to its natural state as directed by the Project Manager at the
Contractor's expense.
End of Section
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -2\Sec -02020 05/20/09
1
This Page Left Blank
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -2\Sec -02020 05/20/09
2
DIVISION 2 SECTION 02200 EARTHWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. A Geotechnical Investigation has been prepared by a foundation consultant; and the result is herein
referred to as the Soils Report. The report was prepared for AutoZone's use in foundation and
pavement design, and the foundation and pavement designs are based upon the conclusions
contained in the report. The data contained in the report should not be construed as being
representational of the entire site nor warranty the continuity of the soil condition. AutoZone shall not
be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn by the Contractor from the report.
B. All work performed under this section shall be done in strict conformance with the requirements of this
section or the Soils Reports which ever is the more stringent.
C. The required earthwork to be accomplished is to provide a minimum bearing value equal to the value
called for in the Soils Report and or shown on the drawings, which ever is the more restrictive
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1 Preparing of subgrade for building slabs, walks and pavements.
2. Excavating and backfilling of trenches required for foundations and buried appurtenances.
3. Excavating and backfilling of trenches required for underground mechanical and electrical utilities
and buried appurtenances.
4 Final grading, together with, placement and preparation of topsoil for lawns.
1.03 DEFINITIONS OF EXCAVATION
A. Excavation consists of removal of materials encountered to subgrade elevations indicated and
subsequent disposal of materials removed.
B. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or
dimensions without specific direction of the Project Manager Unauthorized excavation, as well as
remedial work directed by the Project Manager shall be at Contractor's expense.
1 Backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations of same
classifications unless otherwise directed by Project Manager
2. Under footings, foundation bases or retaining walls, fill unauthorized excavation by extending
indicated bottom elevation of footing or base to excavation bottom without altering required top
elevation. Lean concrete or self leveling gravel fill may be used to bring elevations to proper
position, when acceptable to the Project Manager
C Additional Excavation: When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations notify the testing
service that will make an inspection of conditions. If the bearing materials at required sub -grade
elevations are unsuitable, testing service and Project Manager will determine what course of action will
be required to complete the excavation. Work required beyond the scope of the original requirements
will be paid for on the basis of Contract Conditions relative to changes in the work.
D Sub- grade: The layer of earth immediately below granular base, drainage fills or topsoil materials. This
layer will usually require the top 12 inches to be scarified and recompacted.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Testing Service: For Earthwork Testing the Contractor shall make ever effort to use to use the services
of the firm that prepared the Geotechnical Report for the project. If unable to reach an agreement,
Contractor shall notify the AutoZone Project Manager before engaging another firm. The firm engaged
to do earthwork testing shall perform services in accordance with the requirements of this section as
well as Section 01410.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Site Information: Data on indicated subsurface conditions are not intended as representations or
warranties of accuracy or continuity between soil borings. It is expressly understood that Owner will
not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom by Contractor Additional test
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -2\Sec -02200
1
05/20/09
borings and other exploratory operations may be made by Contractor at the Contractor's option;
however no change in the Contract Sum will be authorized for such additional exploration.
B. Existing Utilities: Existing underground utilities are shown on the contract documents in their
approximate locations according to the best available information. The Contractor shall be responsible
for determining the exact location of the existing utilities during probing or construction. The Contractor
shall notify the local Utilities Protection Service and the respective utility companies as shown on the
survey contained in the contract documents at least two (2) working days prior to the start of work. If
utilities are indicated to remain in place, the Contractor shall provide adequate means of support,
protection and maintenance of service during earthwork operations.
C. Use of Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted unless written permission is obtained from
AutoZone and from authorities having jurisdiction.
D Protection of Persons and Property Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and
post with warning lights. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction.
Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout and other hazards caused by earthwork
operations.
E. Dust Control: Conduct all operations and maintain the areas of activities including sweeping and
sprinkling water on roadways and haul roads so as to prevent creation and dispersion of dust.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SOIL MATERIALS
A. Satisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with classification groups GW GP GM, SW
SM, SC SP ML and CL. Soils classed ML and CL shall only be used as permitted by the
Geotechnical Engineer
B. Unsatisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with classification groups OL, MH, CH,
OH, GC and PT
C. Sub -base Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone
and natural or crushed sand. Other natural materials shall be as permitted by the Geotechnical
Engineer
D Drainage Fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone or crush or uncrushed gravel, with 100
percent passing a 1 1/2 inch sieve and not more than 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve.
E. Fill and Backfill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials free of unsatisfactory soil material, rock or gravel
larger than 2 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation and other deleterious
matter
F It is the intent of this division to verify the quality of fill materials used at or as a part of this project
whose origin was other than the project site (trucked in fill). To safeguard the interest of the AutoZone,
the Testing Laboratory shall conduct a survey of the borrow pit and material as called for in Section
01410. In all cases AutoZone reserves the right to reject all fills, or borrow pit material if deemed
unacceptable.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXCAVATION
A. Excavation is unclassified and includes excavation to subgrade elevations indicated, regardless of
character of materials and obstructions encountered. Remove and dispose of existing underground
foundations and rubble required to complete the work.
3.02 STABILITY OF EXCAVATIONS
A. Side slope of excavations shall comply with local codes, ordinance and requirements of agencies
having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or
stability of material being excavated. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until
completion of backfilling. All slope areas shall not exceed a 2 -foot horizontal to 1 -foot vertical grade
(2:1).
B. Install and maintain materials for shoring and bracing, such as sheet piling, uprights, stringers and
cross braces in good serviceable condition. Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to
comply with local codes and authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain shoring and bracing in
excavations regardless of time period excavations will be open. Extend shoring and bracing as
excavation progresses.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -2\Sec -02200 05/20/09
2
3.03 DEWATERING
A. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations and from flooding
project site and surrounding area. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to
prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings and soil changes detrimental to stability
of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain all system components necessary to convey
water away from excavations.
B. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits to
convey rainwater and water removed from excavations to collecting or runoff areas. Do not use trench
excavations as temporary drainage ditches.
3.04 STORAGE OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS
A. Stockpile excavated materials acceptable for fill and backfill where directed by the Project Manager
Do not place stockpiles near edge of excavations or within drip line of trees indicated to remain.
Provide for proper drainage. Dispose of excess material as specified in this Section.
3.05 TRENCH EXCAVATION FOR PIPES AND CONDUIT
A. Excavate trenches to uniform width, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room and a minimum of
6 to 9 inches of clearance on both sides of pipe or conduit.
B. Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required to establish indicated slope and invert elevations and
to support bottom of pipe or conduit on undisturbed soil. Beyond building perimeter keep bottom of
trenches sufficiently below finish grade to avoid freeze -ups.
1 Where rock is encountered, carry excavation 6 inches below required elevation and backfill with a
6 -inch layer of crushed stone or gravel prior to installation of pipe or conduit.
2. Grade bottom of trenches notching under pipe bell or conduit fittings to provide solid bearing for
entire body of pipe or conduit.
3. See Section 15400 for depth requirements of water bearing pipe.
4 Backfill trenches with concrete where trench excavations pass within 18 inches of column or wall
footings and which are carried below bottom of such footings or which pass under wall footings.
Place concrete to level of bottom of adjacent footing.
5. Do not backfill trenches until tests and inspections have been made and backfilling has been
authorized by the Project Manager or the authority having jurisdiction. Use care in backfilling to
avoid damage or displacement of pipe system
6. For pipe or conduit less that 2' -6" below the surface of roadways, provide 4 inch thick concrete
base slab support as well as minimum 4 inch concrete encasement (sides and top) prior to
backfilling or placement of roadway sub -base. Do not install encasement until completion of
testing of piping or conduit.
3.06 COLD WEATHER PROTECTION
A. Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is less that 32 degrees
Fahrenheit.
3.07 EXCAVATION FOR PAVEMENTS
A. Cut surface under pavements to comply with cross sections, elevations and grades as indicated.
3.08 FILL AND BACKFILL
A. Fill: Place soil material in layers to required subgrade elevations, for each area classification listed
below using materials specified in Part 2 of this Section. In excavations, Contractor may use
satisfactory excavated or borrow material.
1 Under grassed areas, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material.
2. Under walks and pavements, use aggregate base materials as indicated on the contract
documents.
3. Under piping, conduit and equipment, use 3/4 -inch maximum granular bedding or per pipe
manufacturer's recommendations for a finer granular bedding. Shape excavation bottom to fit
bottom 90 degrees of cylinder
B. Backfill: Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following;
including, where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing and perimeter insulation.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -2\Sec -02200
3
05/20/09
1 Acceptances of construction below finish grade.
2. Inspection, testing, approval and recording locations of underground utilities.
3. Removal of concrete formwork
4 Removal of shoring and bracing and backfilling voids with satisfactory materials. Cut off temporary
sheet piling driven below bottom of structures and remove in a manner to prevent settlement of the
structure or utilities or leave in place if required.
5. Removal of trash and debris from excavation
6. Permanent or temporary horizontal bracing is in place on horizontally supported walls.
3.09 PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION
A. Ground Surface Preparation: Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions
and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placement of fills. Plow strip or break up
surface steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing surface.
1 When existing ground surface has a density less than specified under `Compaction" for particular
area classification, break up ground surface pulverize, moisture condition to optimum moisture
content and compact to required depth and percentage of maximum density
B. Place fill and backfill materials in layers not more than 9 inches in loose depth for material compacted
by heavy compaction equipment and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by
hand operated tampers.
C Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum moisture content.
Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each
area classification Do not place fill or backfill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen or contain
frost or ice.
D Place fills and backfill materials evenly adjacent to structures, piping or conduit to required elevations.
Prevent wedging action of material against structures or displacement of piping or conduit by carrying
material uniformly around structure, piping or conduit to approximately same elevation in each lift.
E. Control compaction of soils and fills, providing minimum percentage of density specified for each area
classification indicated below unless a greater requirement is called for in either the Soils Report or on
the Drawings. Correct improperly compacted areas or lifts as directed by Project Manager if soil
density tests indicate inadequate compaction.
1 Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following
percentages of maximum density in accordance with ASTM D 698 'Standard Proctor'
a. Under structures and building floor slabs: Compact top 12 inches of subgrade and each layer
of fill or backfill material at 95 percent maximum density
b. Under all paved areas: For concrete compact top 12 inches of subgrade and each layer of fill
or backfill material at 95 percent maximum density For asphalt compact top 12 inches of
subgrade and each layer of fill or backfill material at 98 percent maximum density
c. Trenches for underground utility lines shall be backfilled with suitable material compacted at 95
percent maximum density
d. Under lawns or unpaved areas: Compact the top 6 inches of sub -grade and each layer of fill or
backfill material at 90 percent maximum density
e. If required compaction is unattainable during the normal course of construction, contact
Project Manager for direction and steps to be taken. Do not immediately start undercutting
and replacement operations.
2. Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before
compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade or layer of soil material. Apply water in
minimum quantity as necessary to prevent free water from appearing on surface during or
subsequent to compaction operations. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry soil material
that is too wet to permit compaction to specified density Soil material that has been removed
because it is too wet to permit compaction may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry Assist
drying by disking, harrowing or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory level.
3.10 GRADING
A. Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this Section, including transition areas. Smooth
finished surface within specified tolerances, compact with uniform levels or slopes between points
where elevations are indicated or between such points and existing grades.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -2\Sec -02200 05/20/09
4
B. Grading Outside Building Lines: Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain away from structures
and to prevent ponding. Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes and as follows:
1 Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Finish areas to receive 3 inches of topsoil. The finish topsoil grades shall
be within not more than 1 /2 inch above or below required elevation.
2. Walks and Pavements: Shape surface of areas to line, grade and cross section with finished
surface not more than 1 /2 inch above or below required subgrade elevation.
C Grading of Fill under Building Slab: Grade smooth and even, free of voids, compacted as specified and
to indicated elevation. Slope surface for positive drainage to under floor drains. Provide final grades
within a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10 -foot straightedge
3.11 BUILDING SLAB DRAINAGE COURSE
A. Drainage course consists of placement of crushed sand or gravel fill material, in layers of indicated
thickness, over subgrade surface to support concrete building slab.
B. Place gravel fill material on prepared subgrade. Place gravel in layers of uniform thickness,
conforming to required cross section and thickness. Maintain optimum moisture content for
compacting material during placement operation. When a compacted drainage course is shown to be
6 inches thick or less, place material in equal layers, except no single layer shall be more than 6 inches
or Tess than 3 inches in thickness when compacted.
3.12 PAVEMENT BASE COURSE
A. Pavement base course consists of placement of gravel fill material, in layers of indicated thickness,
over subgrade surface to support pavement.
B. Place gravel fill material on prepared subgrade. Place gravel in layers of uniform thickness,
conforming to required cross section and thickness. Maintain optimum moisture content for
compacting material during placement operation. When a compacted drainage course is shown to be
6 inches thick or less, place material in equal layers, except no single layer shall be more than 6 inches
or less than 3 inches in thickness when compacted.
3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Quality Control Testing during Construction: Allow testing service to inspect and approve each
subgrade and fill layer before further fill, backfill or construction work is performed. See Section 01410
for testing laboratory services and requirements.
3.14 EROSION CONTROL
A. See Section 02020 for erosion control requirements.
3.15 MAINTENANCE
A. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.
B. Repair and re- establish grades in settled, eroded and rutted areas to specified tolerances.
C Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse
weather scarify surface, reshape, and compact to required density prior to further construction at no
additional cost to AutoZone.
D Where settling is measurable or observable at excavated areas during general project warranty period,
remove surface (pavement, lawn or other finish), add backfill material, compact and replace surface
treatment. Restore appearance, quality and Condition of surface or finish to match adjacent work and
eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible, all at no additional cost to AutoZone.
3.16 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIAL
A. Remove waste materials, including unacceptable excavated material, trash, debris and dispose of it off
the Project Site in a legal and approved disposal area.
End of Section
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -2\Sec -02200 05/20/09
5
This Page Left Blank
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -2\Sec -02200 05/20/09
6
DIVISION 2 SECTION 02215 TERMITE CONTROL
(to be used for all wood framed buildings and if required by code)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide certifications that products used comply with U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)
regulations for termiticides. Use only product that bear a federal registration number of the EPA and
are approved by the local authority having jurisdiction.
B. Engage a professional pest control operator who is licensed according to regulations of governing
authorities to apply soil treatment solution.
C Do not apply soil treatment solution until excavating, filling and grading operations are complete,
except as otherwise required in the construction operations. Do not apply soil treatment to frozen or
excessively wet soils or during inclement weather
1.02 WARRANTY
A. Furnish written warranty executed by Applicator and Contractor certifying that applied soil termiticide
treatment will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity is
discovered during warranty period, Contractor will re -treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by
termite infestation.
B. Warranty period will be 5 years from the date of Substantial Completion and shall not deprive
AutoZone of other rights that may be occuring under other provisions of the Contract Documents.
Warranty will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by Contractor under
requirements of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SOIL TREATMENT SOLUTION
A. Use an emulsible concentrated termiticide that dilutes with water specially formulated to prevent
termite infestation. Fuel oil will not be permitted as a dilutant. Provide a solution consisting of one of
the following elements:
1 Chloropyrifos: Dursban -TC Dow Chemical Co.
2. Permethrin: Dragnet -FT FMC Corp. or Torpedo, ICI Americas Inc.
3. Cypermethrine: Prevail -FT FMC Corp. or Demon, ICI Americas Inc.
4 Bifenthrin: Baseline, FMC Corp.
B. Dilute with water to concentration level recommended by manufacturer
C. Other solutions may be used as recommended by Applicator if approved for intended application by
local authorities having jurisdiction. Use only soil treatment solutions that are not harmful to plants and
vegetation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION
A. Remove foreign matter that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen
rake and level soil to be treated, except previously compacted areas under slabs and foundations.
Toxicants may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended by toxicant
manufacturer
B. Apply soil treatment solution as follows:
1 Under Slab on Grade Structures: Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 linear feet to the
entire inside perimeter of the foundation wall, around plumbing pipes and conduits which penetrate
the foundation wall and or slab, and around interior column footings.
2. Perimeter of Slab on Grade Structures: Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 lineal feet for
each foot of depth from finished grade to bottom of footing. Along outside edge of building dig a
trench 6 to 8 inches wide to a depth not less than 12 inches. Punch holes to the top of the footing
at not more than 12 inches on center and apply chemical solution. Mix chemical solution with soil
as it is being replaced in trench.
3. At hollow masonry foundations, treat voids at the rate of 2 gallons of chemical solution per 10
linear feet, poured directly into the hollow spaces.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -2\Sec -02215 05/20/09
1
4 At expansion joints, control joints and other areas where the slab will be penetrated, apply 4
gallons of chemical solution per 10 lineal feet.
C. Post signs in areas of application to warn workers that soil termiticide treatment has been applied.
Remove signs after areas are covered by other construction
D Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, landscape grading or
other construction activity following application.
End of Section
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -2\Sec -02215 05/20/09
2
DIVISION 2 SECTION 02510 ASPHALT PAVING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. All work done under this Section shall conform to the appropriate specification of the state or local
highway Department of Transportation (DOT) under whose jurisdiction this project falls.
B. Submit an asphalt mix design for review and approval for each type of pavement course specified.
The mix design shall not be older than 2 years from the date paving work is performed and shall bear
some type of marking indicating acceptance by the governing authority having jurisdiction.
C Material for aggregate base course, hot mix asphalt binder and surfaces courses shall meet or exceed
the State DOT material specifications for road materials.
D The use of 'superpave asphalt" for AutoZone parking will be prohibited.
E. Submit material certificates signed by material producer and Contractor certifying that each material
item complies with or exceeds specified requirements.
1.02 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Apply tack coats when air temperature is above 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) and when air
temperature has not been below 35 degrees F (1 degree C) for 12 hours immediately prior to
application. Do not apply when base is wet or contains an excess of moisture.
B. Construct hot -mixed asphalt surface course when air temperature is above 40 degrees F (4 degrees
C) and when base is dry Base course may be placed when air temperature is above 35 degrees F (1
degree C) and rising.
C. Establish and maintain required lines and elevations, including crown and cross -slope for each course
of pavement during construction operations.
D Verify that earthwork subgrade is completed to the correct lines and grade elevations. Do not
commence work until conditions are satisfactory and acceptable for pavement construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Use locally available materials and gradations that exhibit a satisfactory record of previous installations.
A maximum of 10 percent recycled asphalt pavement (RAP) can be used.
B. Course Aggregate: Sound, angular crushed stone, crushed gravel or properly cured crushed blast
furnace slag, complying with ASTM D 692 -88.
C Fine Aggregate: Sharp -edged natural sand or sand prepared from stone, properly cured blast furnace
slag gravel or combinations thereof, complying with ASTM D 1073
D Asphalt: Conform to DOT Specifications for plant -mix pavements.
E. Tack Coat: Conform to DOT Specifications.
F Off Site Traffic Marking Paint: Chlorinated rubber -alkyd complying with AASHTO M 248, Type III, and
(FS -TT -P -115) or meeting local DOT requirements. Colors will be White or Yellow as required.
G Parking Lot Paint: See Section 09900 of these Specifications.
H. Asphalt Aggregate Mixture: Provide plant- mixed, hot laid asphalt- aggregate mixture complying with the
applicable sections of DOT Standard Specifications and other authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Examine the subgrade on which bituminous pavement shall be installed. Notify the Project Manager in
writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with
the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. General: Remove loose material from compacted subgrade surface immediately before applying
aggregate base course.
B. Tack Coat: Apply to contact surfaces of previously constructed asphalt or Portland cement concrete
and surfaces abutting or projecting into hot -mix asphalt pavement. Distribute at rate of 0.03 to 0.08
gallons per square yard of surface.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -2\Sec -02510 05/20/09
1
C Allow to dry until at proper condition to receive paving. Prevent contamination of tack coat prior to
paving.
D Exercise care in applying bituminous materials to avoid smearing of adjoining concrete surfaces.
Remove and clean damaged surfaces.
3.03 PLACING MIX
A. General: Place plant- mixed, hot -laid asphalt aggregate mixture in accordance with standard
specifications on prepared surface, spread and strike off Spread mixture at minimum temperature of
225 degrees F (107 degrees C). Place areas inaccessible to equipment by hand. Place each course
to required grade, cross section and compacted thickness. When mixes are transported at
temperatures below 50 degrees F or when haul lengths exceed 20 miles, insulate truck beds and
provide tarp to cover mix.
B. Pavement Placing: Place in strips not less than 10 feet wide, unless otherwise acceptable to Project
Manager After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to
overlap previous strips. Complete base course for a section before placing surface course.
C. Immediately correct surface irregularities in finish course. Remove excess material from high spots
with shovel or lute.
D Joints: Make joints between old and new pavements, or between successive days' work, to ensure
continuous bond between adjoining works. Construct joints to have same texture, density and
smoothness as other sections of hot -mix asphalt course. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat.
3.04 ROLLING
A. General: Begin rolling when mixture will bear roller weight without excessive displacement, and
compact mixture with hand tampers or vibrating plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.
B. Breakdown Rolling: Accomplish breakdown or initial rolling immediately following rolling of joints and
outside edge. Check surface after breakdown rolling and repair displaced areas by loosening and
filling, if required, with hot material.
C. Second Rolling: Follow breakdown rolling as soon as possible, while mixture is hot. Continue second
rolling until mixture has been evenly compacted.
D Finish Rolling: Perform finish rolling while mixture is still warm enough for removal of roller marks.
Continue rolling until roller marks are eliminated and the surface has a smooth, evenly compacted
appearance.
E. Patching: Remove and replace defective areas of paving, or areas mixed with foreign materials. Cut
out such areas and fill with fresh, hot -mixed asphalt, compacting by rolling to specified surface density
and smoothness.
F Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and
hardened. Erect barricades to protect pavement from all traffic.
3.05 TRAFFIC AND LANE MARKINGS
A. Cleaning: Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust. Surface shall be clean and
dry free from loose dirt, grease, oil, etc.
B. Striping: Do not apply traffic and lane marking paint until layout and placement have been verified with
the Construction Documents. Do not apply on damp surfaces or when relative humidity is above 85
percent or when air or surface temperatures are below 40 degrees F If miss marking occurs, correct
as directed by Project Manager Use color of paint as required by authority having jurisdiction.
C Apply paints with mechanical equipment to produce uniform straight edges. Apply at manufacturers
recommended rates to provide minimum 10.0 to 15.0 mils wet thickness. Paint shall not be thinned
more than 1/2 gallon to 5 gallons of paint.
D See Section 09900 for parking lot painting requirements.
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing laboratory will test in -place work for compliance with requirements for thickness
and surface smoothness. Repair or remove and replace unacceptable paving as directed by the
Project Manager
B. In -place compacted thickness, tested in accordance with ASTM D 3549, will not be acceptable if
exceeding following allowable variations:
1 Asphalt Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -2\Sec -02510 05/20/09
2
2. Asphalt Surface Course: Plus or minus 1/4 inch
C The mixture shall have a density when thoroughly compressed, of not Tess than 93 percent of the
calculated density of a voidless mixture composed of the same materials in like proportions.
D Test finished surface of each course for smoothness, using a 10 foot straightedge applied parallel with
and at right angles to centerline of paved area. Surfaces will not be acceptable if exceeding the
following tolerances for smoothness:
1 Asphalt Base Course Surface: 1/4 inch.
2. Asphalt wearing Course Surface: 3/16 inch.
3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown. Maximum
allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch.
4 Areas of ponding or standing water in excess of 1/8 inch will not be acceptable.
End of Section
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div- 2\,Sec -02510 05/20/09
3
This Page Left Blank
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -2\Sec -02510 05/20/09
4
DIVISION 2 SECTION 02520 SITE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. This section specifies cast -in -place concrete, including formwork, reinforcing, mix design, placement
procedures and finishes for concrete curb and gutter paving, light pole bases, site retaining walls and
other miscellaneous concrete.
B. Cast -in -place concrete for building retaining walls, loading docks, floor slab and foundations is
specified in Section 03100.
C Prepare sub -grade and base as specified in other sections.
D All layout work including setting of elevations shall be from established control points.
E. Unless otherwise shown or specified, the work shall conform to the appropriate standards of the
American Concrete Institute (ACI) latest criteria.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's product data with application and installation instructions for admixtures, curing
compounds, expansion joint fillers and sealant.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FORM MATERIALS
A. Forms for Exposed Finished Concrete: Plywood metal metal- framed plywood faced, or other
acceptable panel type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces.
B. Forms for Unexposed Concrete: No. 2 common boards of dimensioned lumber of uniform thickness.
C Form Coatings: Provide commercial formulation form coating compounds with a maximum VOC of 350
mg/I that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent
treatment of concrete surfaces.
D Form Ties: Factory fabricated, removable, or snap -off metal or glass fiber reinforced plastic form ties
designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spelling of concrete on
removal.
2.02 REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Primary Structural Reinforcing:
1 Reinforcing steel shall be deformed bars, conforming to ASTM A 615, Grade 60, as shown on
drawings.
2. Steel shall be clean, free from scale and rust, flat and level. Reinforcing steel shall be located at
depths and positions indicated on drawings. Provide dowels, accessories, etc. required for
completing the work.
B. Secondary Temperature- Shrinkage Reinforcement:
1 Collated fibrillated polypropylene (CFP) micro fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete
complying with ASTM C1116, Type III with a minimum fiber bundle length of 3 4-inch, added at the
time of concrete batching, at the rate of 1.5 pounds per cubic yard of concrete in accordance with
the fiber manufacturers instructions.
2. Waste stream CFP fibers or POY (partially oriented yarn) fibers shall not be used under any
conditions.
3. If conditions require the addition of a high -range (super plasticizer) water reducer, fibrous
reinforcement should be added prior to the incorporation of the super plasticizer This will insure
the optimum mixing friction required to properly distribute the fiber
4 Contractor shall have the option of using welded wire mesh in lieu of the polypropylene fibers if he
so chooses. Mesh used for temperature shrinkage control shall be 6x6 10x10 at a minimum or as
sized and indicated on the drawings.
2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Concrete: Ready mix concrete conforming to ASTM C -94
B. Portland Cement: ASTM C -150, Type 1 II, or I /II unless another type is called for in Soils Report.
1 Use same brand of cement throughout project unless otherwise directed by AutoZone Construction
Project Manager
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -2\Sec -02520 05/20/09
1
C. Aggregates:
1 Maximum size of coarse aggregate shall not exceed 1/5 the narrowest dimension between forms,
1/3 the thickness of unreinforced slabs; or 3/4 of the minimum clear spacing between reinforcing
bars or 1 1/2 inch. Maximum coarse aggregate size shall be 1 inch for slabs Tess than 5 inches
thick.
2. Coarse and fine aggregate shall conform to applicable requirements of ASTM C33. Provide
aggregates from a single source. Aggregates shall be washed and screened, consist of hard
durable particles without adherent coatings and free of deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
Fine aggregate shall be graded from coarse to fine to produce a minimum percentage of voids.
3. Use no coal or lignite in concrete that will not be covered by building materials or soil.
4 Aggregate shall not be alkali reactive, cause pop -outs, "D" cracking, or other disruptions due to
moisture gain, freezing or other mechanisms based on tests.
5. Absorption level of coarse aggregate shall not exceed five percent.
D. Water Potable or must comply with ASTM C 1602
E. Admixtures: Purpose for admixtures used shall be clearly stated on concrete mix design. Provide
admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures. Set control
admixtures may be used only when adverse weather conditions are anticipated and require approval of
the AutoZone Construction Project Manager
1 Air Entraining Admixture: ASTM C -260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other
required admixtures.
2. Fly Ash Pozzolans: ASTM C -618, Class C or F Carbon content not greater than 3 percent by
volume. Use only one type and source throughout the project.
3. Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. Use only one type and
source throughout the project.
4 Prohibited Admixtures: Calcium chloride, thiocyanates or admixtures containing more than 05
percent chloride ions.
5. Water reducers, non chloride, non corrosive accelerators, and retarders ASTM C 494
6. Superplasticizer (high range water reducer): ASTM C494 Type F or G
7 Evaporation Reducer Monomolecular film manufactured for application to fresh concrete
F Liquid Membrane Curing Compound: Complying with ASTM C -309, Type 1 Class A unless other type
approved by AutoZone. Moisture loss, when applied at a rate of 200 square feet per gallon shall not be
more than 0.055 gr. /sq.cm Material used shall dry clear
G Water Repellant Sealer Penetrating, breathable, non yellowing, waterborne silane siloxane sealer
complying with ASTM C -672, and NCHRP 244 Material used shall dry clear
H. Bonding Agent: ASTM C1059/C1059M, Type 11 non redispersible, acrylic emulsion.
I. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C881 two- component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and
bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit
requirements.
J Form Releasing Agent: Non staining.
K. Waterstop: Rubber minimum 1750 psi tensile strength, minus 50 degrees F to plus 175 degrees F
temperature range; 6 inches wide minimum by maximum possible length.
2.04 JOINT MATERIALS
A. Expansion and Construction Joints:
1 Joint Filler shall be asphalt impregnated cellular fiberboard conforming to ASTM D -1751 or
redwood of appropriate width.
2. Paving cap seal as manufactured by Greenstreak, Inc. St. Louis, Missouri.
a. Model number 610 for areas of vehicular paving
b. Model number 626 for transverse joints in sidewalks
c. Model number 632 for the joint between the sidewalk and the building.
2.05 CONCRETE MIX, DESIGN AND TESTING
A. Design mix to produce normal weight concrete to produce the following properties:
1 Compressive Strength: 4000 psi minimum at 28 days unless noted otherwise on the structural or
civil drawings.
2. Air Content: 6 percent plus or minus 1 1/2 percent for concrete exposed to freeze thaw
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -2\Sec -02520 05/20/09
2
3. Slump: 4 inch maximum verified in plant before adding water reducing admixture. Slump shall be
not more than 8 inches after adding water reducing admixture.
4 Concrete shall be composed of Portland cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, water and
admixtures where applicable. Determine proportions of ingredients in accordance with ACI 318, to
provide required strength, slump, resistance to weathering, place ability, durability and surface
hardness for each class of concrete. Provide admixtures as required or appropriate to enhance
workability control set, or improve strength. Design concrete mixes to be workable, and
appropriate for each application and type of placement or conveying in the field, to bond readily to
reinforcement without segregation or the formation of excessive free water on surfaces.
5. Note any special characteristics of mix which require precautions in mixing, placing, or finishing
techniques to achieve finished product specified.
B. The minimum Cementitious Materials Content of the concrete shall be as follows:
1 For Air Entrained Concrete 611 pounds per cubic yard.
2. For Non Air Entrained Concrete 564 pounds per cubic yard.
3. FIy ash may be used in cement mixture with a maximum fly ash content equal to 20 percent of
cement content by weight.
4 Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag (GGBFS) may be used in cement mixtures with a
maximum content of "GGBFS' equal to 30 percent of the total cement content by weight.
5. Mixes containing FIy Ash or Slag (GGBFS) shall be adjusted for cold weather
C In any mix, the maximum water cementitious materials ratio shall be between 0.45 and 0.50.
D Concrete shall be proportioned by either the trial batch method or the field experience method.
1 Where the trial batch method is used, make three test cylinders for each trial batch. Break one
cylinder at 7 days and two at 28 days to verify strength requirements. Adjust proportions to
produce a design mix at least 1200 psi greater than the specified strength.
2. Where the field experience method is used, the required average compressive strength shall be
determined in accordance with paragraph 5.3.2 of ACI 318. Documentation that proposed
concrete proportions will produce an average compressive strength equal to or greater than
required shall consist of at least 10 consecutive tests encompassing a period of time of not less
than 45 days and made within the past 18 months.
E. Sampling and testing for field quality control during placement of concrete shall conform to the
requirements of 'Section 01410.
F Distribute copies of test results to AutoZone, contractor and structural engineer of record. Non-
compliant test reports shall be e- mailed or faxed immediately from the laboratory doing the work with
non compliant items clearly noted.
G. Review and approval of concrete mix design by AutoZone Construction Project Manager, special
inspectors, or structural engineer of record is only for general conformance with the project
specifications. It is the responsibility of the contractor to provide a design mix that meets the
requirements of the specifications.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities.
B. Form, install reinforcements, pour strip, rub, cure and protect concrete walls, bases, curbs, sidewalks,
pavements and other concrete structures shown on drawings to size, shape and location required.
3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Remove loose material from compacted base surface immediately before placing concrete
B. Proof -roll prepared base surface to check for unstable areas and need for additional compaction.
3.03 FORM CONSTRUCTION
A. Forms shall be used wherever necessary to confine the concrete and shape it to the required
dimensions. Forms shall have sufficient strength to withstand the pressure resulting from placement
and vibration of concrete and shall have sufficient rigidity to maintain specified tolerances.
B. The design and engineering of the formwork, as well as its construction shall be the responsibility of
the Contractor
C. Forms shall be sufficiently tight to prevent loss of mortar from the concrete. All exposed corners shall
have a 3/4 -inch by 3/4 -inch chamfer unless otherwise noted.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -2VSec -02520 05/20/09
3
D Form ties shall leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the exposed surface of the concrete.
Form ties shall leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete surface when removed. Ties
shall be of size and weights for pressures developed and installed in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Form ties for exterior walls and grade beams shall be leak proof and water seal
type.
E. Forms for exposed surfaces shall be coated with non staining release agent applied before the
reinforcing steel is placed.
F Set forms to grades and lines, rigidly braced and secure. Install sufficient quantity of forms to allow
continuous progress of work and so that forms can remain in place for at least 24 hours after
placement or until concrete has adequately hardened. Care shall be taken to avoid spalling the
concrete surfaces.
G. Check complete formwork for grade and alignment to following tolerances:
1 Top of forms not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
2. Vertical face on longitudinal axis not more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet.
H. Clean forms after each use and coat form with release agent as often as required to ensure separation
from concrete without damage.
3.04 REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing steel shall be accurately fabricated to the dimensions required or shown and shall conform
to standards contained in the ACI Detailing Manual or CRSI Manual of Standard Practice, latest
edition. Bars shall be bent cold and shall not be straightened in a manner that will injure the material.
Welding as an aid to fabrication or installation will not be permitted unless specifically shown on the
drawings.
B. Reinforcing shall be placed so that the proper concrete cover is provided. It shall be the Contractors
responsibility to ensure the intended reinforcement location is maintained during concrete placement.
Tie bars at intersections with soft steel wire Do not drive nails into wood forms to support reinforcing.
Reinforcing bars partially imbedded in concrete shall not be field bent.
C. Lap splices of reinforcing as called for on drawings. Do no splicing at points of maximum stress. Lap
all bars at all corners and abrupt changes in direction within walls and beams. Provide, steel dowels
between foundations and walls, pilasters, columns and elsewhere, as indicated on drawings or as
conditions require.
D Protect reinforcing steel from excessive rusting or injury Store on skids or otherwise maintain at least
6 inches above ground. After bars are tied in place take whatever precautions are necessary to protect
bars from damage by construction equipment or careless workmen. Pay particular attention to bars
projecting out of previously placed concrete. Damaged steel shall be replaced at no cost to AutoZone.
E. For slabs on grade, provide bolsters chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing or fastening
reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric, where base material will not support chair legs, support
reinforcing with sand plates or horizontal runners. For exposed to view concrete where legs of
supports are in contact with forms, finish supports of legs shall be plastic protected.
3.05 JOINTS
A. Construct expansion, control, and construction joints true -to -line with face perpendicular to surface of
concrete. Construct traverse joints at right angles to the centerline unless otherwise indicated.
B. Control Joints: Provide weakened -plane control joints sectioning the paving into areas no larger than
15 foot square and sidewalks no larger than 5 foot square or as shown on drawings. Contraction joints
for curbs shall be provided at the same interval as the joints in the adjacent paving. Joints in paving
and curbs will be saw cut to a depth equal to 1/4 of the concrete thickness and sealed. Joints in
sidewalks will be tooled and left unsealed.
1 Tooled Joints: Form control joints in fresh concrete by grooving top portion with a recommended
cutting tool and finishing edges with a jointer
2. Sawed Joints: Form control joints using power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or
diamond rimmed blades. Cut joints into hardened concrete as soon as surface will not be torn,
abraded, or otherwise damaged by cutting action. Soft-Cut system joints shall be installed within 2
hours after final finish. Saw -cut control joints shall be cut within 12 hours after finishing.
C Construction Joints: Place construction joints at end of placements and at locations where placement
operations are stopped for a period of more than 1/2 hour except where such placements terminate at
expansion joints.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -2\Sec -02520 05/20/09
4
D Expansion Joints: Place expansion joints at all junctures between flatwork and vertical surfaces or
fixed objects such as bollards, manholes, storm drains, light pole bases, etc. and at additional locations
as follows:
1 Curbs: 50 -foot intervals on straight sections and at spring lines of radii.
2. Walks. 20 -foot intervals along linear length.
3. Vehicular Pavement: 50 -foot intervals along linear length.
E. At both construction and expansion joints install joint fillers in one -piece lengths wherever possible.
Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint filler sections together Make sure that joint
filler is set straight and at an elevation that will allow the top of the cap seal once installed to be slightly
below the surrounding surface of the concrete paving. Install the appropriate model Greenstreak cap
seal over the joint filler The top of the cap seal shall be slightly below the adjacent surface of the
concrete
F Sealant: All sawn contraction joints shall be filled with sealant appropriate for the location and usage.
All tooled joints and joints with cap seal will not require sealant.
3.06 PRODUCTION OF CONCRETE
A. Ready -mixed concrete shall be batched, mixed and transported in accordance with ASTM C -94 The
ready -mixed concrete producer shall furnish duplicate delivery tickets, one for the Contractor and one
for the Testing Laboratory's agent, for each batch of concrete. The information provided on the
delivery ticket shall include quantities of all materials batched including the amount of free water in the
aggregate. The quantity of water that can be added at the site without exceeding the maximum water
cement ratio specified shall be noted on the delivery ticket.
B. The independent testing agency shall have access at all times to the batching and mixing plant for
sampling of materials and inspection of all work performed for this job.
C In cold weather the temperature of the concrete when delivered at the site of the work shall be at least
50 degrees F
D In hot weather the ingredients shall be cooled before mixing. Flake ice or well crushed ice of a size
that will melt completely during mixing may be substituted for all or part of the mixing water When air
temperature is between 80 and 90 degrees F reduce maximum mixing and delivery time from If 1/2
hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature exceeds 90 degrees F further reduce maximum
mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
3.07 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. General Information and Requirements:
1 Comply with general requirements for mixing and placing concrete as herein specified.
2. Do not place concrete until base and forms have been checked for line and grade. Moisten base if
required to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place
concrete around manholes and other structures until they are at required finish elevation and
alignment.
3. Place concrete in such a manner to prevent segregation of mix, consolidate along face of forms
and adjacent to transverse joints with internal vibrator Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies,
reinforcement, or side of forms. Use only square faced shovels for hand spreading and
consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocation of reinforcing, dowels and joint devices.
4 Transport and place concrete not more than 90 minutes after water has been added to the dry
ingredients.
5. Use bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially
hardened concrete surfaces.
6. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints as far as
possible. If interrupted for more than 1/2 hour place a construction joint.
7 Tined rakes are prohibited as a means of conveying fibrous reinforced concrete. Come -a -long is
the appropriate tool to use.
8. If concrete pumping equipment is required, elevate the ready -mix truck chute approximately 12 to
14 inches above the pump grate in order to improve the movement of CPF fiber reinforced
concrete through the pumping equipment.
9. Automatic machine may be used for curb and gutter placement at Contractor's option. If machine
placement is to be used, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed
minimums specified. Machine placement must produce curbs and gutters to required cross
J•Wroduction Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div 2\Sec 02520 05/20/09
5
section, lines, grades, finish and jointing as specified for formed concrete. If results are not
acceptable, remove and replace with formed concrete as specified.
B. Preparation for Placing Concrete
1 The Testing Laboratory, to the extent required by the Specifications, prior to placement of concrete
shall have inspected all subgrade surfaces. AutoZone or its designee shall be the sole judge as to
the suitability of the bearing material.
2. Before concrete is placed, all debris, water ice or other material shall be removed from the spaces
to be occupied by the concrete. Remove surplus releasing agent from the contact faces of forms
and thoroughly clean reinforcement of other coatings. Concrete shall not be placed on frozen
ground.
3. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with a steel brush and applying bonding agent in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
4 Notify all trades concerned, including AutoZone's Construction Project Manager and the Testing
Laboratory sufficiently in advance to permit installation and inspection of all required work by other
trades.
5. Before placing concrete, all required imbedded items, including dovetail anchor slots, anchors,
inserts, angles, metal frames, fixtures, sleeves, drains, stair nosing, accessory devices for
mechanical and electrical installations shall be properly located, accurately positioned and built into
the construction and maintained securely in place.
6. Build into construction all items furnished by AutoZone and other trades. Provide all offsets,
pockets, slabs, chases and recesses, as job conditions require. Thicken slabs as required to
maintain the intended slab thickness at embedded items. Set anchor bolts and embedded plates
furnished under the structural steel section of these Specifications.
7 Place and properly support all required reinforcing. Hold bars in beams and slabs to exact location
during concrete placement.
C. Conveying
1 Concrete shall be conveyed from mixer to place of final deposit by method, which will prevent
separation or loss of material.
2. Equipment for chuting and conveying concrete shall be of such size and design as to insure a
practically continuous flow of concrete at the delivery without separation of material.
3. Provide runways or other means for wheeled equipment to convey concrete to point of deposit.
Construct runways so that supports will not bear upon reinforcement or fresh concrete.
4 Pumps or pneumatic equipment shall have adequate pumping capacity Slump loss due to
pumping shall not exceed 2 inches. Do not convey concrete through pipes made of aluminum or
aluminum alloy Maintain controls for proportioning, mixing, adjustment of mix and placement in
accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 304.2R.
D Depositing
1 Concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practicable in its final position to avoid segregation due to
rehandling or flowing. No concrete shall have a free fall of over three feet from truck, mixer,
buggies, chutes or tremies. The concreting shall be carried on at such a rate that the concrete is
at all times plastic and flows readily into the spaces between bars. Concrete that has partially
hardened, or been contaminated by foreign materials, shall not be deposited in the work, nor shall
retempered concrete be used.
2. When concreting is started, it shall be carried on as a continuous operation until the placing of the
section is completed. Do not allow cold joints to occur
3. Protect adjacent surfaces from concrete drippings, spillage or splashes. Hardened or partially
hardened splashes or accumulations of concrete on forms or reinforcement shall be removed
before the work proceeds. Clean all damaged surfaces immediately
4 All concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated by mechanical vibrators during the placing operation
and shall be thoroughly worked around the reinforcement and embedded fixtures and into the
corners of the forms. Mechanical vibrators shall be applied directly to the concrete and used only
under experienced supervision. Vibrators shall be carried on continuously with the placing of
concrete. Keep a minimum of two vibrators on the job during concreting operations. Consolidation
of concrete shall be in accordance with ACI 309.
5. Do not over vibrate concrete or use vibrators to transport concrete within forms. Insert vibrators
vertically at frequent intervals. Do not drag vibrators through concrete. Do not insert vibrators into
lower courses that have begun to set.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -2\Sec -02520 05/20/09
6
6. All conveyances shall be thoroughly cleaned at frequent intervals during the placing of concrete,
and before beginning a new run of concrete. All hardened concrete and foreign materials shall be
removed from the surfaces.
7 Maintain controls for proportioning, mixing, adjustment of mix and placement; use pumping
equipment in accordance with ACI 301 and 304.2R.
8. Do not drop concrete directly into standing water Use a tremie with the outlet near the bottom of
the place of deposit. Contractor shall obtain approval of AutoZone project manager in writing prior
to placing any concrete into standing water
E. Paving Slabs and Sidewalks
1 Place granular subbase if required over subgrade to thickness shown on drawings and consolidate
material. Bring material to optimum moisture content. The subgrade shall be free of frost before
concrete placing begins.
2. Edge forms, if required, and intermediate screed strips shall be set accurately to produce the
designated elevations and contours of the finished surface, and shall be sufficiently strong to
support vibrating screeds or roller pipe screeds. The concrete surface shall be aligned to the
contours of screed strips by the use of strike -off templates or acceptable compacting type screeds.
3. Mixing and placing shall be carefully coordinated with finishing. Concrete shall not be placed on
the granular sub base or forms more rapidly than it can be spread, straight edged and darbied or
bull floated. These operations must be performed before bleeding water has an opportunity to
collect on the surface.
4 Concrete in slabs shall be thoroughly consolidated. Internal vibration shall be used along the
bulkheads of slabs on grade. Consolidation of slabs shall be obtained with vibrating screeds, roller
pipe screeds, internal vibrators or other approved means. To obtain good surfaces and avoid cold
joints, the size of finishing crews shall be planned with due regard for the effects of concrete
temperature and atmospheric conditions on the rate of hardening of the concrete.
5. All finishes must be adequate in all respects to receive material to be applied to it, true to line and
free of defects or blemishes. No driers, dry cement, nor cement -sand mixture shall be used in
connection with any finish surfaces to absorb water stiffen mix or for any other purpose.
6. All paving, sidewalks, loading dock slabs and exterior stairs shall receive a light broom finish.
7 Areas which are called out, to receive a light broom finish shall be given a light traverse texture by
drawing a broom across the surface, and will not be trowelled.
8. Precautions to protect fresh concrete from developing plastic shrinkage cracks must be taken in
advance of concrete placement where evaporation rate due to any combination of temperature,
humidity and wind velocity is expected to approach 0.2 lbs. /sq.ft./hr as determined by ACI 305
Figure 2.1.5. Acceptable precautions to reduce the rate of evaporation include the use of wind
breaks, monomolecular film evaporation retarders, fog spray covering with polyethylene sheeting,
or wet cover
3.08 COLD WEATHER PLACING
A. Protect all concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength which could be caused by frost,
freezing actions, or low temperatures, in compliance with requirements of ACI 306 and as herein
specified.
B. When the air temperature has fallen to or may be expected to fall below 40 degrees F provide
adequate means to maintain the temperature in the area where concrete is being placed, at between
50 and 70 degrees F for at least 7 days after placing. Provide temporary housings or coverings
including tarpaulins or plastic film Maintain the heat and protection, if necessary to insure that the
ambient temperature does not fall more than 30 degrees F in the 24 hours following the 7 -day period.
Avoid rapid dry-out of concrete due to overheating and avoid thermal shock due to sudden cooling or
heating.
C. When air temperature has fallen or is expected to fall below 40 degrees F uniformly heat all water and
aggregates before mixing as required to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 55
degrees F and not more than 85 degrees F at point of placement.
D Do not use frozen materials containing ice or snow Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or
subgrade containing frozen materials. Ascertain that form reinforcing steel and adjacent concrete
surfaces are entirely free of frost, snow and ice before placing concrete.
E. Do not use salt or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators or set control
admixtures unless approved by AutoZone Construction Project Manager
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -2\Sec -02520 05/20/09
7
3.09 HOT WEATHER PLACING
A. When hot weather exists that would seriously impair the quality and strength of concrete, place
concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as herein specified.
B. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 80
degrees F when the temperature is rising and below 85 degrees F when the temperature is falling.
Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control the concrete temperature provided
the water equivalent of the ice is calculated in the total amount of mixing water
C Cover reinforcing steel with water soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that the steel temperature will
not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete.
D Wet forms thoroughly before placing concrete.
E. Do not place concrete at a temperature so as to cause difficulty from Toss of slump, flash -set, or cold
joints.
F Do not use set control admixtures unless approved by the AutoZone Construction Project Manager in
Mix Design.
G. Obtain Project Manager's approval of other methods and materials proposed for use prior to actually
commencing the work.
H. Precautions to protect fresh concrete from developing plastic shrinkage cracks must be taken in
advance of concrete placement where evaporation rate due to any combination of temperature,
humidity and wind velocity is expected to approach 0.2 lbs. /sq.ft./hr as determined by ACI 305 Figure
2.1.5. Acceptable precautions to reduce the rate of evaporation include the use of wind breaks,
monomolecular film evaporation retarders, fog spray covering with polyethylene sheeting, or wet
cover
3.10 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. General Information and Requirements:
1 Concrete with fibermesh reinforcing will appear to be slightly stiffer than plain concrete, because
the fibers act in a cohesive manner and bind the mix together However the workability of the mix
will remain, do not add excess water
2. Fibers do not float to the surface once they are distributed in the concrete. Fibers may appear on
or near the surface simply because they have been three dimensionally distributed.
3. A fibermesh slab will bleed Tess and slower than a wire mesh reinforced slab. Do not get on the
slab too early for finishing.
4 For a broom or textured finish, broom in one direction only (perpendicular from the adjacent
building wall). Fibers that may appear on the surface will wear off quickly under light traffic.
B. Flat Work:
1 After strike -off and consolidating concrete, smooth surface by screeding and floating. Use hand
method only where mechanical floating is not possible. Adjust floating to compact surface and
produce uniform texture.
2. After floating, test surface for trueness with a 10 foot straightedge. Distribute concrete as required
to remove surface irregularities, and refloat repaired areas to provide a continuous smooth finish.
3. Work edges of slabs and formed joints with an edging tool and round to 1/2 inch radius, unless
otherwise indicated. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surface.
4 After completion of floating and troweling, when excess moisture or surface sheen has
disappeared, complete surface finishing.
5. Concrete pavement, sidewalks, flow channels, flumes, curbs and other similar exterior slabs shall
have a non -slip finish by scoring the surface with a fine hair broom perpendicular to the line of
traffic. Provide a fine line texture acceptable to the AutoZone Construction Project Manager
C Formed Surfaces:
1 Do not remove forms until concrete has hardened sufficiently to support its own weight and
imposed construction loads, but in no case sooner than 24 hours after concrete has been placed.
2. After removal of forms all honeycombed and other defective concrete shall be removed down to
sound concrete. If chipping is necessary the edges shall be perpendicular to the surface or slightly
undercut. No feathering shall be permitted. The area to be patched as well as the area at least 6
inches wide surrounding it shall be dampened to prevent the absorption of water from the patching
mortar A bonding grout shall be prepared using a mix of approximately one part cement to one
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -2\Sec -02520 05/20/09
8
part fine sand passing a No. 300 mesh sieve, mixed to the consistency of thick cream and then
brushed into the surface.
3. Concrete surfaces not exposed to view shall be finished with a rough form finish and all surfaces
exposed to view shall be finished with a smooth rubbed finish.
4 For a rough form finish tie holes and defects shall be patched and fins exceeding 1 /4 inch in height
shall be chipped or rubbed off Otherwise, surfaces may be left with the texture imparted by the
forms.
5. For a smooth rubbed finish, the form facing material shall produce a smooth, hard, uniform texture
on the concrete. The arrangement of the facing material shall be orderly and symmetrical, with the
number of seams kept to the practical minimum Tie holes and defects shall be patched and all
fins shall be removed by rubbing.
6. Upon completion of the work, retaining walls, wing walls, light pole bases, bollards and other
surfaces exposed to view shall be given a rubbed finish. Immediately upon removal of the forms,
the surfaces to be rubbed shall be pointed up, thoroughly wetted and then rubbed with a No. 20
carborundum brick and water so as to produce a true, even and smooth surface. When necessary
to fill pinholes, and upon areas which have been reconstructed, rubbing shall be done by
carborundum brick and a thin cement grout composed of 1 part of cement and 2 parts of fine
washed silicone sand, all of which shall pass a No. 20 sieve. The surface finished with grout shall
be carefully scraped with a steel edge so as to remove all surplus grout, after which it shall be
given a final rub with a wood float until all skin and form marks are removed. No wash composed
of cement, sand and water shall be used in this process.
7 Remove wood forms from under floors, ramps, steps and similar places such as temporary
openings so no material will be left to rot or be infested by termites.
3.11 CURING and PROTECTION
A. Protect and cure all finished cast in place concrete work. Begin immediately after placement; protect
concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures and mechanical damage. Cure
in accordance with ACI 308. Use membrane forming curing and sealing compound or approved
continuously moist curing method for not less than 7 days, and in accordance with ACI 301
procedures. If used, apply curing compound as soon as final finishing operations are complete(within
2 hours) Apply curing compound uniformly in continuous operation by power sprayer or roller
according to manufacturer's written instructions, but as a minimum apply two coats perpendicular to
one another Recoat areas subject to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain
continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. After curing period has elapsed remove
non dissipating curing compounds without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by
curing compound manufacturer
B. Cold weather curing shall provide protection from freezing, polyethylene sheets covered with hay or
straw or curing blankets shall be used in accordance with ACI 306R procedures. If pavement is built
in the fall and is to be put into service before it has 30 days of drying (above 40 degrees F) after curing,
a water repellant sealer shall be applied. The material used shall allow the escape of water vapor
from the pavement, while preventing the intrusion of deicing salts into the concrete. Material used shall
be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturers' instructions.
C When concrete curing occurs during hot weather extra precautions must be taken to prevent rapid
drying and minimize evaporation. For additional information and requirements refer to ACI 305R.
D When rain is imminent or occurs during concrete placement, operations should be stopped, and all
steps necessary to protect the hardening concrete shall be taken. Contractor shall completely cover all
surfaces with plastic sheeting that may be damaged, and shall take precautions to prevent any water
from washing across the concrete surfaces. Provide weights to keep sheeting from blowing away
E. All formed concrete work subject to lateral loading (retaining walls) shall not receive such loads until 28
days of cure time unless approved by AutoZone Construction Project Manager
3.12 REPAIR AND CLEAN -UP
A. Repair or replace broken or defective concrete as directed by Project Manager
B. Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14
days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible
by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -2 \Sec -02520 05/20/09
9
C Upon completion and as directed by AutoZone Construction Project Manager remove all excess
material, debris, forms and equipment occasioned by the work. Prior to final inspection, sweep
concrete pavement and wash free of stains, discoloration, dirt and other foreign material.
End of Section
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -2\Sec -02520 05/20/09
10
DIVISION 2 SECTION 02900 LANDSCAPE
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK
A. This section includes the following:
1 Trees
2. Shrubs
3. Ground Covers
4 Plants
5. Lawns
6. Topsoil and Soil Amendments
7 Fertilizers and Mulches
8. Stakes, Guys and Edging
B. The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:
1 Section 02010 Site Clearing
2. Section 02200 Earthwork
1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Engage an experienced installer who has completed landscaping work similar in material, design and
extent indicated for this project and with a record of successful landscape establishment.
B. Provide quality size, genus, species and variety of trees and shrubs indicated, complying with
applicable requirements of American Standard for Nursery Stock"
C Measure trees and shrubs with branches and trunks or canes in their normal position. Do not prune to
obtain required sizes. Take caliper measurements 6 inches above ground for trees up to 4 -inch caliper
size and 12 inches above ground for larger sizes.
1.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer Protect
materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at site.
B. Deliver seed in original, sealed labeled and undamaged containers.
C Harvest, deliver store and handle sod according to the requirements of the American Sod Producers
Association's (ASPA) specifications for Turf grass Sod Materials and Transplanting Installing.
D Deliver freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune before delivery Protect bark, branches and root
system from sunscald, drying, sweating, whipping and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend
or bind -tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering
during delivery and do not drop trees or shrubs at any time.
E. Handle balled and burlapped stock by the root ball.
F Deliver trees, shrubs, ground covers and plants after preparations for planting have been completed
and install plant material immediately If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery set plant
materials in shade, keep roots moist, and protect from weather and mechanical damage.
1 Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss, sawdust or other acceptable
material.
2. Do not remove container -grown stock from containers before time of planting.
3. Water root system of trees and shrubs stored on site as often as necessary with a fine -mist spray
to maintain root system in a moist condition.
1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Determine location of above grade and underground utilities and perform work in a manner which will
avoid damage. Hand excavate as required. Maintain grade stakes until removal is mutually agreed
upon by parties concerned.
B. When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, adverse drainage
conditions or obstructions, notify Project Manager before planting.
1.04 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate installation of planting materials during normal planting seasons for each type of plant
material required.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -2\Sec -02900 05/20/09
1
B. If timing of construction will not permit installation of required plant materials, provide Owner with a
fixed cost and time schedule for future installation.
1.05 OFF -SITE REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractor shall include work in right -of -way or other off -site areas if required by authorities having
jurisdiction whether specifically shown on drawings or not. If no work is specifically required then
Contractor shall remove all weeds, trash and debris from adjacent right -of -way and reseed all bare
spots.
1.06 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintain all landscape plant material until Final Acceptance by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding,
fertilizing, restoring planting saucers, tightening and repairing stakes and guy supports and resetting to
proper grades or vertical position as required, establishing healthy viable plantings. Spray as required
to keep free of insects and disease. Restore or replace damaged tree wrappings
B. Maintain lawns until Final Acceptance, by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting
and other operations. Roll, regrade and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a
uniformly smooth lawn.
1 Water lawn at the minimum rate of 1 inch per week.
C Mow lawns as soon as there is enough top growth to cut with mower so that no more than 40 percent
of grass leaf growth is removed during initial or subsequent mowing. Do not mow when grass is wet.
D Apply fertilizer to lawn after first mowing and when grass is dry Use fertilizer that will provide actual
nitrogen of at least 1 pound per 1000 square feet of lawn area.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Warrant all living planting materials for a period of one year after the date of Final Acceptance.
Contractor shall warrant against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects
resulting from lack of adequate maintenance, neglect or abuse by AutoZone, abnormal weather
conditions unusual for warranty period, or incidents that are beyond Contractor's control.
B. Remove and replace dead planting materials immediately unless required to plant in the succeeding
planting season.
C Replace planting materials that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition at end of
warranty period.
D A limit of one replacement of each plant material will be required, except for losses or replacements
due to failure to comply with requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 TREE AND SHRUB MATERIAL
A. Furnish nursery-grown trees and shrubs with healthy root systems, which have been grown under
climatic conditions similar to those of the project location. Provide well- shaped, fully branched, healthy
vigorous stock free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries,
abrasions and disfigurement. All trees shall be delivered balled and burlapped.
B. Provide trees and shrubs of sizes and grades called for on drawings. Larger sizes may be used if
acceptable to Project Manager
C Where multiple trees or shrubs of the same type are required they shall be closely match in size,
spread and branch structure.
D Label each tree and shrub with a securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of
botanical and common name.
E. Single stem trees shall have straight trunk, well balanced crown and intact leader Branching height
shall be 1/3 to 1/2 of tree height. Multi stem trees shall have two or more main stems and follow the
same requirements as single stem trees.
F Shrubs up to 5- gallon size may be container stock; above 5- gallon size shall be ball and burlapped.
2.02 GROUND COVERS AND PLANTS
A. Provide ground covers and plants established and well rooted in removable containers or integral peat
pots and with not less than the minimum number and lengths of runners required for the pot size
indicated.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -2\Sec -02900 05/20/09
2
2.03 GRASS MATERIAL
A. All grasses utilized shall be of types that are slow growing, drought resistant, require low water
consumption and commonly found in the region of the project.
B. Grass seed shall be fresh, clean, dry new crop seed complying with the Association of Official Seed
Analysis for purity and germination tolerances. Seed shall be mixed to proportion that will insure full
coverage for the grass type utilized.
C Sod shall be certified turf grass sod complying with ASPA specifications for machine cut thickness,
size, strength, moisture content, mowed height and free of weeds and all undesirable matter Provide
viable sod of uniform density color, texture, strongly rooted and capable of vigorous growth and
development when planted of the grass type utilized.
2.04 TOPSOIL
A. Topsoil shall have a pH range of 5.5 to 7.0 and a minimum of 4 percent organic material, be free of
stones 1 1/2 inches or larger in any dimension and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth.
B. Reuse surface soil stockpiled on the site, clean soil of roots, plants, stones, lumps of clay and other
material harmful to plant growth. Verify suitability of surface soil to produce a topsoil meeting
requirements and amend where necessary
2.05 SOIL AMENDMENTS
A. Lime: Class T agricultural limestone containing a minimum 80 percent calcium carbonate equivalent,
with a minimum 99 percent passing a No. 8 sieve and a minimum 75 percent passing a No. 60 sieve.
B. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade, unadulterated.
C Sand: Clean washed, natural or manufactured sand free of toxic materials.
D Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade.
E. Peat Humus: Finely divided or granular texture, with a pH range of 6.0 to 7.5, composed of partially
decomposed moss peat (other than sphagnum), peat humus or reed -sedge peat.
F Sawdust or Ground -Bark Humus: Decomposed, nitrogen treated, of uniform texture, free of chips,
stones, sticks, soil or toxic materials. When site treated, mix with at least 015 pounds of ammonium
nitrate or 0.25 pounds of ammonium sulfate per cubic foot of loose sawdust or ground bark.
G Manure: Well rotted, unleached stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by volume
of straw sawdust or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances, stones, sticks, soil, weed seed
and materials harmful to plant growth.
H. Herbicides: EPA registered and approved, of type recommended by manufacturer for application
intended.
I. Water Potable.
2.06 FERTILIZER
A. Bone meal: Commercial, raw finely ground; minimum of 4 percent nitrogen and 20 percent phosphoric
acid.
B. Commercial Fertilizer Complete fertilizer of neutral character with some elements derived from
organic sources and containing following percentages of available plant nutrients:
1 For trees and shrubs, provide fertilizer with not less than 5 percent total nitrogen, 10 percent
phosphoric acid and 5 percent soluble potash.
2. For lawns, provide fertilizer with percentage of nitrogen required to provide not less than 1 pound
of actual nitrogen per 1,000 square feet of lawn area and not less than 4 percent phosphoric acid
and 2 percent potassium Provide nitrogen in a form that will be available to lawn during initial
period of growth; at least 50 percent of nitrogen to be organic form
2.07 MULCHES
A. Organic Mulch: Shredded hardwood, free from deleterious materials, and suitable for use as a top
dressing of trees and shrubs.
B. Fiber Mulch: Biodegradable dyed wood cellulose fiber nontoxic, free of plant growth- inhibitors
germination- inhibitors, with maximum moisture content of 15 percent and a pH range of 4.5 to 6.5.
C. Asphalt Emulsion Tackifier Grade SS -1 ASTM D -977 nontoxic and free of plant growth- inhibitors.
D Nonasphaltic Tackifier Colloidal tackifier recommended by fiber mulch manufacturer for slurry
application, nontoxic and free of plant growth- inhibitors.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -2\Sec -02900 05/20/09
3
2.08 WEED CONTROL BARRIERS
A. Polypropylene or polyester fabric, with a minimum weight of 3 ounces per squares yard.
2.09 EROSION CONTROL MATERIALS
A. Biodegradable twisted jute or spun -coir mesh, with 50 to 65 percent open area and a minimum weight
of 0.92 pounds per square yard. Include manufacturer's recommended steel wire 6 inch long staples.
2.10 STAKES AND GUYS
A. Upright and Guy Stakes, rough -sawn, sound, new hardwood, redwood or pressure preservative treated
softwood, free of knots, holes, cross grain and other defects, 2 by 2 inches by length required for
application, pointed at one end.
B. Guy and Tie Wire, Class 1 galvanized steel wire, 2 strand twisted, and 0.106 inch in diameter
C Hose Chafing Guard, reinforce rubber or plastic hose at least 1/2 inch in diameter black, cut to lengths
required to protect tree trunks from damage.
D Flags may be standard surveyor's plastic flagging tape, white, 6 inches long.
2.11 LANDSCAPE EDGINGS
A. Standard profile extruded aluminum edging, 1/8 by 4 inches, 6061 T6 alloy, fabricated in interlocking
sections with loops stamped from face of sections approximately 24 inches apart to receive stakes.
Stakes, 6061 T6 -alloy aluminum 1 1/2 inches wide by 12 inches long, designed to lock 1/2 inch below
the top of the edging. Finish of edging and stakes standard natural aluminum
2.12 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Antidesiccant: Water insoluble emulsion, permeable moisture retarder film forming for trees and
shrubs. Deliver in original, sealed and fully labeled containers.
B. Trunk -Wrap Tape: Two layers of crinkled paper cemented together with bituminous material, 4 inches
wide minimum with a stretch factor of 33 percent.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Examine areas to receive landscaping for compliance with requirements and for conditions affecting
performance of work of this section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
B. All dimensions shall be field verified prior to placing any material, report all discrepancies to Owner
Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake locations, outline
areas, and secure Project Manager's acceptance before start of planting work. Make minor
adjustments as may be required.
3.02 PLANTING SOIL PREPARATION
A. Before mixing; clean topsoil of roots, plants, sods, stones, clay lumps and other extraneous materials
harmful to plant growth.
B. Mix soil amendments and fertilizers with topsoil at rates specified by manufacturers for the specific
location being prepared. Delay mixing fertilizer if planting does not follow placing of planting soil within
a few days.
1 Minimum planting soil mixture requirements will be 25 percent humus; 25 percent compost or
manure; and 50 percent topsoil.
C For tree and shrub pits, mix planting soils before backfilling and stockpile at site.
D For planting beds, mix planting soil either prior to planting or apply on surface and mix thoroughly
before planting. Mix lime with dry soil prior to mixing fertilizer Prevent lime from contacting roots of
acid tolerant plants.
3.03 LAWN PLANTING PREPARATION
A. Limit subgrade preparation to areas that will be planted in the immediate future.
B. Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 4 inches. Remove stones larger than 1 1/2 inches in any
dimension as well as sticks, roots, rubbish and other extraneous materials.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -2\Sec -02900 05/20/09
4
C Spread planting soil mixture to a minimum depth of 3 inches, accounting for the thickness of sod
finished grade required, light rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade
is frozen.
D Grade lawn and grass areas to a smooth, even surface with loose uniformly fine texture. Roll and
rake, remove ridges and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit fine grading to areas that can be
planted in the immediate future. Remove trash, debris, stones larger than 1 1/2 inches in any
dimension and other objects that may interfere with planting or maintenance operations.
E. Moisten prepared lawn areas before planting when soil is dry Water thoroughly and allow surface to
dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil.
F Restore prepared areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after fine grading and before planting.
3.04 GROUND COVER AND PLANT BED PREPARATION
A. Loosen subgrade of planting bed areas to a minimum depth of 6 inches. Remove stones larger than
1 1/2 inches in any dimension as well as sticks, roots, rubbish and other extraneous materials.
B. Spread planting soil mixture in layers approximately 1/2 the thickness of the total required to a
minimum depth of 6 inches, taking into account the finished grade required, light rolling and natural
settlement. Work into top of loosened subgrade to create a transition layer and then place remainder
of planting soil mixture. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen.
3.05 EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS
A. Excavate tree and shrub pits with vertical sides and with bottom of excavation slightly raised at center
to assist drainage. Loosen hard subsoil in bottom of excavation.
1 For balled and buriapped trees and shrubs excavate approximately 2 times as wide as ball
diameter and equal to ball depth plus 6 inches to allow for a setting layer of planting soil.
2. For container grown trees and shrubs excavate approximately 1 1/2 times as wide as container
and equal to container depth plus 6 inches to allow for a setting layer of planting soil.
3. Where heavy clay or hard pan soils exist increase width of excavations to 3 times as wide as ball
diameter and 21/2 times as wide as container
B. Notify Project Manager if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees or shrubs are
encountered in excavations.
C Verify proper drainage prior to planting by filling pit with water If drainage does not occur within a 24-
hour period, auger a 12 -inch diameter hole 6 foot deep through hard pan and fill hole with crushed
rock. Slope bottom of pit to drain.
D Pits excavated before planting shall be protected for public safety with appropriate barriers.
3.06 PLANTING TREES AND SHRUBS
A. Set balled and buriapped stock plumb and in center of pit with top of ball raised slightly above adjacent
finish grade. Orient branch structure toward public view (street or parking lot) for fullest appearance
and symmetrical form
1 Place stock on setting layer of compacted planting soil.
2. Remove burlap and wire baskets from the top of ball and partially from sides, but do not remove
from under ball. Remove pallets, if any before setting. Do not use planting stock if ball is cracked
or broken before planting operation
3. Place backfill around ball in layers, tamping to settle backfill and eliminate voids and air pockets.
When backfill is half complete, water thoroughly before placing any more soil, after final layer of
backfill has been placed repeat watering until no more is absorbed.
B. Set container grown stock plumb and in center of pit with top of ball raised slightly above adjacent
finish grade. Orient branch structure toward public view (street or parking lot) for fullest appearance
and symmetrical form
1 Carefully remove container so root ball will not be damaged.
2. Place stock on setting layer of compacted planting soil.
3. Place backfill around ball in layers, tamping to settle backfill and eliminate voids and air pockets.
When backfill is half complete, water thoroughly before placing any more soil, after final layer of
backfill has been placed repeat watering until no more is absorbed.
C Dish and tamp top of backfill to form a 3 inch mound around the rim of the pit. Do not cover top of root
ball with backfill.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -2\Sec -02900 05/20/09
5
D. All trees and shrubs shall be planted in individual pits spaced as indicated on drawings. Shrubs shall
not be planted in continuous beds.
E. Wrap trees of 2 inch caliper and larger with trunk -wrap tape. Start at base of trunk and spiral cover
trunk to height of first branches. Overlap wrap, exposing half the width, and securely attach without
causing girdling. Inspect tree for injury improper pruning, and insect infestation and take corrective
measures required before wrapping.
3.07 TREE AND SHRUB PRUNING
A. Prune, thin and shape trees and shrubs according to standard horticultural practice. Prune trees to
retain required height and spread. Unless otherwise directed by Project Manager do not cut tree
leaders; remove only injured and dead branches. Prune shrubs to retain natural character Shrubs
sizes indicated are size after pruning.
3.08 GUYING AND STAKING
A. Each tree shall be staked with two stakes immediately following its planting, watering and
determination that it will settle to proper grade. Plants shall stand plumb after staking unless otherwise
specified.
B. Stakes shall be -of sufficient length to allow for a minimum of 8 feet to be left exposed above ground
after driving stake 24 inches into ground.
C Where trees are along walks or pavement, align stakes parallel to walk or pavement. Where trees
stand in open spaces align stakes parallel with direction of prevailing wind. All stakes are to be
consistent within each group.
D For multi -trunk trees use three stakes set in a triangular arrangement.
E. Wire twist braces shall be installed perpendicular to the trunk of the tree and shall run from the stake
loop around trunk and then back to stake. Provide hose chaffing guard for the portion looped around
trunk. The uppermost pair of braces shall be installed 6 inches below the top of the stake and. the
second pair installed 3 foot 3 inches below the top pair Anchor wire to stakes and staple.
3.09 PLANTING GROUND COVER AND PLANTS
A. Space ground cover and plants as indicated on drawings.
B. Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots and backfilling with 2 inch depth of planting soil.
Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around plants,
water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crown with wet soil.
3.10 WEED BARRIER FABRIC AND MULCHING
A. Mulch backfilled surfaces of pits, planted areas and other areas indicated.
B. Install weed control barrier prior to mulching. Completely cover area to be mulched lapping edges of
fabric a minimum of 6 inches.
C Organic mulch thickness shall be a minimum of 2 inches and shall be level with adjacent finish grades.
3.11 SEEDING NEW LAWNS
A. Sow seeds with a spreader or a seeding machine. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity
exceeds 5 mph. Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in two directions at right angles to
each other Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged in transit or storage.
B. Sow seed in the proportions appropriate for the season and job specific conditions so as to produce a
lawn with full and complete coverage.
C Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch of topsoil, roll lightly and water with fine spray
D Protect seeded slopes exceeding 1:3 against erosion with erosion control blankets installed and
stapled according to manufacturer's recommendations.
E. Protect seeded areas with slopes less than 1:6 against erosion by spreading straw mulch after
completion of seeding operations. Spread uniformly at a minimum rate of 2 tons per acre to form a
continuous blanket 1 1/2 inches loose depth over seeded areas. Spread by hand, blower or other
suitable equipment. Anchor straw mulch by spraying with asphalt emulsion tackifier at the rate of 10 to
13 gallons per 1000 square feet. Take precautions to prevent damage or staining of structures or
other plantings adjacent to mulched areas, immediately clean damaged or stained areas.
3.12 HYDRO SEEDING NEW LAWNS
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -2\Sec -02900 05/20/09
6
A. Mix seed fertilizer and fiber mulch in water using equipment specifically designed for hydro seed
application. Continue mixing until uniformly blended into homogenous slurry suitable for hydraulic
application
1 Mix slurry with non asphaltic tackifier
2. Apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded in a one -step process. Apply mulch at the
minimum rate of 1500 pounds per acre dry weight.
3.13 SODDING NEW LAWNS
A. Lay sod within 24 hours of stripping. Do not lay sod if dormant or if ground is frozen.
B. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod; do not stretch or
overlap. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Avoid damage to subgrade or
sod during installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with subgrade, eliminate air pockets and
to form a smooth surface. Work sifted soil or fine sand into minor cracks between pieces of sod;
remove excess to avoid smothering sod and adjacent grass. Lay sod across angles of slopes
exceeding 1:3.
C. Saturate sod with fine water spray within 2 hours of planting. During first week, water daily or more
frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a minimum depth of 1 1/2 inches below the sod.
3.14 INSTALLATION OF EDGINGS
A. Install aluminum edging between lawn areas and all trees, shrubs, ground covers and plants. Edgings
shall be installed according to manufacturer's recommendations. Anchor with aluminum stakes space
approximately 24 inches apart, driven below the top elevation of edging.
3.15 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Apply antidesiccant using power spray to provide an adequate film over trunk, branches, stems, twigs
and foliage when deciduous trees or shrubs are moved in full leaf Spray with antidesiccant at nursery
before moving and again 2 weeks after planting.
3.16 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION
A. During landscaping keep pavements clean and work areas in an orderly condition.
B. Protect landscape from damage due to landscape operations, operations by other contractors and
trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair or replace
damaged landscape work as directed.
3.17 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIAL
A. Remove and legally dispose off the Project Site all surplus soil and waste material, including excess
subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and other debris
End of Section
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div 2\Sec 02900 05/20/09
7
This Page Left Blank
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -2\Sec -02900 05/20/09
8
DIVISION 2 SECTION 02910 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION
(this section not required unless called for on drawings)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK
A. This section includes the following:
1 Irrigation Piping, Valves and Emitters
B. The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:
1 Section 02010 Site Clearing
2. Section 02200 Earthwork
1.02 IRRIGATION SYSTEM
A. Install a complete, electric solenoid controlled underground irrigation system to cover all landscape
areas in a manner to meet requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Controller to be installed in the closet with the alarm and telephone equipment.
C Provide sleeves where irrigation piping and wiring crosses or passes under concrete paving and walks
extend at least 12 inches beyond edge of pavement.
D Provide pop -up sprinkler heads for lawn areas and drip system emitters for trees, shrubs and plants.
E. All valves to be located in valve boxes with easy access to all parts of the valve.
F Backflow preventer to be in compliance with local authority have jurisdiction over project.
G. Accurately record on reproducible drawing actual locations of piping system backflow preventer
controller wiring, sleeves, gate valves, quick couplers and automatic control valves.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit to AutoZone a complete irrigation plan showing the location and size of piping, connection to
water supply valves, emitters, backflow preventor and any other devices required. Submit same
drawing to City authority having jurisdiction if required for permitting. Plan should include all
background information on AutoZone's landscape plan furnish at time of bid.
B. Submit maintenance instructions recommending procedures to be established by Owner for
maintenance of landscape and irrigation during the entire year Submittal to include irrigation system
operating instructions and manufacturers parts catalog.
C Submit schedule indicating length of time each valve is required to be open to provide a adequate
amount of water for all four seasons.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 IRRIGATION SYSTEM
A. Pipe: Poly- vinyl chloride (PVC) schedule 40 pressure rated upstream from controls, to downstream
laterals; solvent -weld sockets. Minimum pipe sizes, mains 1 inch diameter and branches 3/4 inch.
B. Fittings: Type, size and style to match pipe.
C. Solvent Cement: Type for PVC pipe and fittings.
D Sleeve Material: Schedule 40, PVC pipe, 4 inches in diameter by required length.
E. Ball Valves: Brass construction, non rising stem, inside screw with threaded ends.
F Valve Box and Cover Aluminum or plastic sized for application intended, with lockable covers.
G. Y- Strainer with 200 Mesh Screen: Attach downstream from valve on all lines with drip emitters.
H. Pressure Regulator Attach downstream from valve on all lines with drip emitters.
I. Backflow Preventer Commercial, meeting all requirements of local authority having jurisdiction.
J. Controller `Rainbird" model ESP -MC8, no substitutions.
K. Wire: Color- coded, 14 gauge or larger, single conductor solid copper with a minimum 1/16 inch
insulative covering of ICC -100 compound, UL approved for direct burial. Wire inside the store to be
placed in conduit.
L. Sprinkler Heads: Pop -up type, sized to adequately cover the area required without over spraying the
adjacent area. Heads shall be flush with the ground when not in use.
M. Flex Tubing: 3/4 inch PVC flexible tubing with 1/4 inch PVC flexible tubing runouts to emitters.
N. Emitters: 4 gallon per hour for trees and 1 gallon per hour for shrubs.
PART 3 EXECUTION
J•\Production Masters\Docs\A11 Prototype Specs\Div -2\Sec -02910 05/20/09
1
3.01 INSTALLATION OF IRRIGATION SYSTEM
A. Irrigation contractor shall be licensed in the locality have jurisdiction over project. Verify that required
utilities are available, in proper location, ready for use and that field conditions are acceptable and are
ready to receive work. Notify AutoZone of any discrepancies; the beginning of installation shall signify
acceptance of existing conditions.
B. Layout and stake locations of system components to avoid plants and structures. Review layout
requirements with other affected work. Coordinate locations of sleeves under paving to accommodate
system
C All main lines shall be placed a minimum of 18 inches below finished grade and all laterals and flexible
tubing shall be placed a minimum of 12 inches below finished grade. All trenches for piping and
control wiring shall be a minimum of 8 inches wide free of debris, materials or obstructions that may
damage or interfere with pipe or wire.
D Install pipe, flexible tubing, 1/4 -inch emitter tubing, valves, controls and outlets in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Provide for thermal movement of components in
system Use threaded nipples for risers to each lawn sprinkler outlet to facilitate easy replacement.
After piping is installed but before backfilling commences, open valves and flush system with a full
head of water also test system for leakage; main piping to maintain 150psi pressure for one hour
E. Install backflow preventer in location and manner to satisfy all local codes and authorities have
jurisdiction. Provide in ground vault or above ground cover as required.
F All valves shall be installed in valve boxes with easy access to all parts of the valve. Install pea gravel
to a depth of 6 inches across the bottom of each valve box to promote drainage.
G Install wye- strainer and pressure regulator on each flexible tubing drip line Each drip line shall be
continuous with no splices and have a flush cap at its end. Lines shall not exceed 200 feet in length.
Emitter heads shall be set at finish grade elevations prior to the application of mulch and be located at
outside edge of rootball unless directed otherwise.
H. Install controller and control wiring in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and wiring diagrams
Provide 10 -inch expansion coil at each valve to which controls are connected and at 100 -foot intervals.
Bury wire beside pipe. Any field splices must be approved by Project Manager and be placed in a
circular valve box and connected with a snap -tite connector as per manufacturer's recommendations.
I. Once all required components have been installed and tested, commence backfilling operations.
Backfill in 6 inch lifts with clean earth free of all rocks, debris or other foreign matter Compact each lift
to eliminate voids and air pockets. Protect piping from displacement. Continue backfilting and
compacting until adjacent subgrade is achieved.
J. Set controller to achieve time cycles required. Instruct AutoZone's personnel in operation and
maintenance of system including adjusting of sprinkler heads and replacement of emitters. Use
operation and maintenance manuals as basis for demonstration.
3.02 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION
A. During irrigation installation keep pavement clean and work areas in an orderly condition.
B. Protect plant material from damage due to irrigation operations, operations by other contractors and
trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair or replace
damaged landscape work as directed.
3.03 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIAL
A. Remove and legally dispose off the Project Site all surplus soil and waste material, including excess
subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, excess irrigation supplies or components and other debris.
End of Section
J•\Production Masters\Docs\A11 Prototype Specs\Div -2\Sec -02910 05/20/09
2
DIVISION 3 SECTION 03100 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. This section specifies cast -in -place concrete, including formwork, reinforcing, mix design, placement
procedures and finishes for retaining walls, grade beams, footings, foundations, pilasters, building slabs,
loading dock walls and slabs. All other concrete shall be as specified under Sitework Section 02520.
B. Installation of anchor bolts for steel columns, posts and other anchored work as may be required.
C. Prepare subgrade and base as specified in other sections.
D All layout work including setting of elevations shall be from established control points.
E. Unless otherwise shown or specified, the work shall conform to the appropriate standards of the America
Concrete Institute (ACI).
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's product data with application and installation instructions for admixtures, curing
compounds, expansion joint fillers, and sealant if requested by AutoZone Construction Project Manager
1.03 ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES
A. Interior floor slab shall conform to the following ACI F number requirements:
1 Specified overall value FF25 /FL20
2. Minimum local value FF18 /FL13
B. Walls, Beams and columns as follows:
1 Exposed plus or minus 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
2. Concealed plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet.
C. Floor flatness and levelness tolerances shall be conducted per ASTM E1155 with a `Dipstick' Floor
Profiler manufactured by Face Construction Technologies, Norfolk, VA or equal. The Contractor shall
make floor tolerance measurements within 48 hours after the completion of the final troweling operation
using a suitable flatness- measuring device. Results of all floor tolerance test shall be submitted to OwnE
within 48 hours after data collection.
D Remedy for out -of- tolerance work: All random Traffic Floor sections measuring at or above both of the
specified overall F Numbers shall be accepted for the tolerance compliance as constructed. All randon
Traffic Floor sections measuring below either or both of the specified minimum Local F Numbers shall I
replaced.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FORM MATERIALS
A. Forms for Exposed Concrete: Plywood, metal, metal- framed plywood faced, or other acceptable panel
type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces.
B. Forms for Unexposed Concrete: No. 2 common boards of dimension lumber of uniform thickness.
C Form Coatings: Commercial formulation, coating compounds with a maximum VOC of 350 mg liter that
will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatment c
concrete surfaces.
D Form Ties: Black iron snap ties with a minimum 1 -inch breakback
2.02 REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Primary Reinforcing Structural Reinforcing:
1 Reinforcing steel shall be deformed bars, conforming to ASTM A 615, Grade 60, as shown on
drawings.
2. Building slab reinforcing shall be welded wire fabric, in sheet form of size and weight as shown on
drawings.
3. Steel shall be clean, free from scale and rust, flat and level. Reinforcing steel shall be located at
depths and positions indicated on drawings. Provide dowels, accessories, etc. required for
completing the work.
B. Secondary Temperature- Shrinkage Reinforcement:
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -3 05/20/09
1
1 Collated fibrillated polypropylene (CFP) fibers with a minimum fiber bundle length of 3 A-inch, added at
the time of concrete batching, at the rate of 1.5 pounds per cubic yard of concrete in accordance with
the fiber manufacturers instructions.
2. Waste stream CFP fibers or POY (partially oriented yam) fibers shall not be used under any
conditions.
3. If conditions require the addition of a high -range (super plasticizer) water reducer fibrous
reinforcement should be added prior to the incorporation of the super plasticizer This will insure the
optimum mixing friction required to properly distribute the fiber
4 Contractor shall have the option of using welded wire mesh in lieu of polypropylene fibers if he so
chooses. Mesh used for temperature shrinkage control shall be 6x6 10x10 at a minimum or as sized
and indicated on the drawings.
2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Concrete: Ready mix concrete conforming to ASTM C -94
B. Portland Cement: ASTM C -150, Type 1 Type H and I /II unless another type is called for in Soils Report.
1 Use same brand of cement throughout project unless otherwise directed by AutoZone Construction
Project Manager
C. Aggregates:
1 Maximum size of coarse aggregate shall not exceed 1/5 the narrowest dimension between forms; 1/3
the thickness of unreinforced slabs; or 3/4 of the minimum clear spacing between reinforcing bars or
1 1/2 inch. Maximum coarse aggregate size shall be 1 inch for slabs less than 5 inches thick.
2. Coarse and fine aggregate shall conform to applicable requirements of ASTM C33. Provide
aggregates from a single source. Aggregates shall be washed and screened, consist of hard durable
particles without adherent coatings and free of deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. Fine
aggregate shall be graded from coarse to fine to produce a minimum percentage of voids.
3. Use no coal or lignite in concrete that will not be covered by building materials or soil.
4 Aggregate shall not be alkali reactive, cause pop -outs, "D" cracking, or other disruptions due to
moisture gain, freezing, or other mechanisms based on tests.
5. Absorption level of coarse aggregate shall not exceed five percent.
D Water Potable or must comply with ASTM C 1602
E. Admixtures: Purpose for admixture use shall be clearly stated on the concrete mix design. Provide
admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures. Set control
admixtures may be used only when adverse weather conditions are anticipated and require approval of
the AutoZone Construction Project Manager
1 Air Entraining Admixture: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures
and conforming to ASTM C -260.
2. Fly Ash Pozzolans: ASTM C -618, Class C or F Carbon content not greater than 3 percent by volume.
Use only one type and source throughout the project.
3. Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989 Grade 100 or 120. Use only one type and
source throughout the project.
4 Prohibited Admixtures: Calcium chloride, thiocyanates or admixtures containing more than .05 percent
chloride ions.
5. Water reducers, non chloride, non corrosive accelerators, and retarders ASTM C 494
6. Superplasticizer (high range water reducer): ASTM C494 Type F or G
7 Evaporation Reducer Monomolecular film manufactured for application to fresh concrete
F Liquid Membrane Curing Compound: Complying with ASTM C -309, Type 1 Class A unless other type
approved by Owner Moisture loss, when applied at a rate of 200 square feet per gallon shall not be more
than 0.055 gr. /sq.cm. Material used shall dry clear Use strippable curing compound on slabs receiving
subsequent finishes. Compound must be compatible with sealers, hardeners, mastics, adhesives, grouts,
paints and final finishes over concrete surfaces.
G Water Repellant Sealer Penetrating, breathable, non yellowing, waterborne silane- siloxane sealer
complying with ASTM C -672, and NCHRP 244 Material used shall dry clear
H. Bonding Compound: Acrylic based rewettable type.
I. Vapor Barrier 10 mil clear polyethylene film complying with curren recommendations of the ACI.
J Form Releasing Agent: Non staining.
K. Waterstop: Rubber minimum 1750 psi tensile strength, minus 50 degrees F to plus 175 degrees F
temperature range; 6 inch wide minimum by maximum possible length.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -3 05/20/09
2
2.04 JOINT FILLER MATERIALS
A. Expansion and Construction Joints: Asphalt impregnated cellular fiberboard conforming to ASTM D -1751
B. Semi -rigid Joint Filler Two component, semi rigid, 100 percent solids, with a minimum shore hardness o
80 per ASTM D2240.
2.05 CONCRETE MIX, DESIGN AND TESTING
A. Design mix to produce normal weight concrete to produce the following properties:
1 Compressive Strength: 3000 psi minimum at 28 days as indicated on the drawings unless noted
otherwise on the structural or civil drawings.
2. Air Content: 6 percent plus or minus 1 1/2 percent for concrete exposed to freeze thaw For
concrete not exposed to freeze thaw or that will receive a trowelled finish, do not add air entraining
agents.
3. Slump: 4 inch maximum verified at plant before adding water reducing admixture. Slump shall be no
more than 8 inches after adding water reducing admixture.
4 Concrete shall be composed of Portland cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, water and
admixtures where applicable. Determine proportions of ingredients in accordance with ACI 318, to
provide required strength, slump, and resistance to weathering, place ability durability and surface
hardness for each class of concrete. Provide admixtures as required or appropriate to enhance
workability control set, or improve strength. Design concrete mixes to be workable, and appropriate
for each application and type of placement or conveying in the field, to bond readily to reinforcement
without segregation or the formation of excessive free water on surfaces.
5. Note any special characteristics of mix which require precautions in mixing, placing, or finishing
techniques to achieve finished product specified.
B. The minimum Cementitious Materials Content of the concrete shall be as follows:
1 For Air Entrained Concrete 517 pounds per cubic yard.
2. For Non Air Entrained Concrete 470 pounds per cubic yard.
3. Fly ash may be used in cement mixture with a maximum fly ash content equal to 20 percent of cemei
content by weight.
4 Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag (GGBFS) may be used in cement mixtures with a maximum
content of `GGBFS" equal to 30 percent of the total cement content by weight.
5. Mixes containing Fly Ash or Slag (GGBFS) shall be adjusted for cold weather
C. In any mix, the maximum water cementitious materials ratio shall be between 0.45 and 0.50.
D Concrete shall be proportioned by either the trial batch method or the field experience method.
1 Where the trial batch method is used, make three test cylinders for each trial batch. Break one
cylinder at 7 days and two at 28 days to verify strength requirements. Adjust the mix proportions to
produce a design that is at least 1200 psi greater than the specified strength.
2. Where the field experience method is used, the required average compressive strength shall be
determined in accordance with paragraph 5.3.2 of ACI 318. Contractor shall furnish documentation
that the proposed concrete proportions will produce an average compressive strength equal to or
greater than required. Documentation shall consist of at least 10 consecutive tests encompassing a
period of time of not less than 45 days and made within the last 18 months.
E. Sampling and testing for field quality control during placement of concrete shall conform to the
requirements of Section 01410.
F Distribute copies of test results to AutoZone, contractor and structural engineer of record. Non complian
test reports shall be e- mailed or faxed immediately from the laboratory doing the work with non compliant
items clearly noted.
G. Review and approval of concrete mix design by AutoZone Construction Project Manager special
inspectors, or structural engineer of record is only for general conformance with the project specifications
It is the responsibility of the contractor to provide a design mix that meets the requirements of the
specifications.
H. Fiber reinforced test specimens prepared for quality control material acceptance shall be vibrated
externally per recommendations of ACI Committee 544
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -3 05/20/09
3
B. Form install reinforcements, pour strip, rub, cure and protect concrete walls, footings, foundations and
building slab shown on drawings to size, shape and location required.
3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Remove loose material from previously compacted base surface immediately before placing concrete.
B. Proof -roll prepared base surface to check for unstable areas and need for additional compaction.
3.03 FORM CONSTRUCTION
A. Forms shall be used wherever necessary to confine the concrete and shape it to the required dimensions.
Forms shall have sufficient strength to withstand the pressure resulting from placement and vibration of
concrete and shall have sufficient rigidity to maintain specified tolerances.
B. The design and engineering of the formwork, as well as its construction shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor
C Forms shall be sufficiently tight to prevent Toss of mortar from the concrete. All exposed corners shall
have a 3/4 -inch by 3/4 -inch chamfer unless otherwise noted.
D Form ties shall leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the exposed surface of the concrete. Form
ties shall leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete surface when removed. Ties shall be of
size and weights for pressures developed and installed in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Form ties for exterior walls and grade beams shall be leak proof and water seal type.
E. Forms for exposed surfaces shall be coated with non staining release agent applied before the reinforcing
steel is placed.
F Set forms to grades and lines, rigidly braced and secure. Install sufficient quantity of forms to allow
continuous progress of work and so that forms can remain in place for at least 24 hours after placement
or until concrete has adequately hardened. Care shall be taken to avoid spatting the concrete surfaces.
G Check complete formwork for grade and alignment to following tolerances:
1 Top of forms not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
2. Vertical face on longitudinal axis not more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet.
H. Clean forms after each use and coat form with release agent as often as required to ensure separation
from concrete without damage.
3.04 REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing steel shall be accurately fabricated to the dimensions required or shown and shall conform to
standards contained in the ACI Detailing Manual 1980(SP -66) or CRSI Manual of Standard Practice,
latest edition. Bars shall be bent cold and shall not be straightened in a manner that will injure the material.
Welding as an aid to fabrication or installation will not be permitted unless specifically shown on the
drawings.
B. Reinforcing shall be placed so that the minimum concrete cover is provided. It shall be the Contractors
responsibility to ensure the intended reinforcement location is maintained during concrete placement. Tie
bars at intersections with soft steel wire. Do not drive nails into wood forms to support reinforcing.
Reinforcing bars partially imbedded in concrete shall not be field bent.
C Lap splices of reinforcing as called for on drawings. Do no splicing at points of maximum stress. Lap all
bars at all corners and abrupt changes in direction within walls and beams. Provide steel dowels between
foundations and walls, pilasters, columns and elsewhere, as indicated on drawings or as conditions
require.
D Protect reinforcing steel from excessive rusting or injury Store on skids or otherwise maintain at least 6
inches above ground. After bars are tied in place take whatever precautions are necessary to protect bars
from damage by construction equipment or careless workmen. Pay particular attention to bars projecting
out of previously placed concrete. Damaged steel shall be replaced at no cost to AutoZone.
E. For slabs on grade, provide bolsters chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing or fastening
reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric, where base material will not support chair legs, support reinforcing
with sand plates or horizontal runners. For exposed to view concrete where legs of supports are in
contact with forms, finish supports of legs shall be plastic protected.
3.05 JOINTS
A. Construct expansion, control and construction joints true -to -line with face perpendicular to surface of
concrete. Construct traverse joints at right angles to the centerline unless otherwise indicated.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -3 05/20/09
4
B. Control Joints: Provide weakened -plane control joints sectioning the building slab into areas 24 times the
thickness of the slab but in no event larger than 15 foot square or as shown on drawings. Joints will be
cut to a depth equal to 1/4 of the concrete thickness and left unsealed.
1 Sawn Joints: Form joints using power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond rimmed
blades. Cut joints into hardened concrete as soon as surface will not be torn, abraded, or otherwise
damaged by cutting action. Soft-Cut system joints shall be installed within 2 hours after final finish.
Saw -cut control joints shall be cut within 12 hours after finishing.
C Construction Joints: Construction joints shall be either keyed or doweled and shall occur at end of
placements and at locations where placement operations are stopped for a period of more than 1/2 hour
except where such placements terminate at expansion joints. The building floor slab shall not contain an
construction joints.
D Expansion Joints: Place expansion joints at all junctures between flatwork and vertical surfaces or fixed
objects such as columns or bollards.
E. At both construction and expansion joints install joint fillers in one -piece lengths wherever possible.
Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint filler sections together Joint fillers shall be
placed so that top edge of filler is not Tess than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface of
concrete and shall extend the full depth of the joint.
F Sealant: Install sealant, appropriate for the location and usage, in the following joints.
1 Construction expansion joints in foundation walls.
2. Joints around structural columns.
3.06 PRODUCTION OF CONCRETE
A. Ready -mixed concrete shall be batched, mixed and transported in accordance with ASTM C -94 The
ready -mixed concrete producer shall furnish duplicate delivery tickets, one for the Contractor and one for
the Testing Laboratory's agent, for each batch of concrete. The information provided on the delivery tick(
shall include quantities of all materials batched including the amount of free water in the aggregate. The
quantity of water that can be added at the site without exceeding the maximum water cement ratio
specified shall be noted on the delivery ticket.
B. The independent testing agency shall have access at all times to the batching and mixing plant for
sampling of materials and inspection of all work performed for this job.
C In cold weather the temperature of the concrete when delivered at the site of the work shall be at least 51
degrees F
D In hot weather the ingredients shall be cooled before mixing. Flake ice or well crushed ice of a size that
will melt completely during mixing may be substituted for all or part of the mixing water When air
temperature is between 80 and 90 degrees F reduce maximum mixing and delivery time from 1 1/2
hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature exceeds 90 degrees F further reduce maximum mixing
and delivery time to 60 minutes.
3.07 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Preparation for Placing Concrete
1 The Testing Laboratory to the extent required by the Specifications, prior to placement of concrete
shall have inspected all subgrade surfaces. AutoZone or its designee shall be the sole judge as to th
suitability of the bearing material.
2. Before concrete is placed, all debris, water ice or other material shall be removed from the spaces tc
be occupied by the concrete. Remove surplus releasing agent from the contact faces of forms and
thoroughly clean reinforcement of other coatings. Concrete shall not be placed on frozen ground.
3. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with a steel brush and applying bonding agent in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
4 Notify all trades concerned, including AutoZone's Construction Project Manager and the Testing
Laboratory sufficiently in advance to permit installation of all required work by other trades.
5. Before placing concrete, all required imbedded items, including dovetail anchor slots, anchors, insert:
angles, metal frames, fixtures, sleeves, drains, stair nosing, accessory devices for mechanical and
electrical installations shall be properly located, accurately positioned and built into the construction
and maintained securely in place.
6. Build into construction all items furnished by AutoZone and other trades. Provide all offsets, pockets.
slabs, chases and recesses, as job conditions require. Thicken slabs as required to maintain the
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div 3 05/20/09
5
intended slab thickness at embedded items. Set anchor bolts and embedded plates furnished under
the structural steel section of these Specifications.
7 Place and properly support all required reinforcing. Hold bars in beams and slabs to exact location
during concrete placement.
8. Place vapor barrier sheeting, if required, with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour Lap
joints 6 inches minimum and seal with appropriate tape. Do not disturb or damage vapor barrier while
placing reinforcing or concrete. If damage occurs, repair before concrete covers area.
B. Conveying
1 Concrete shall be conveyed from mixer to place of final deposit by method, which will prevent
separation or loss of material.
2. Equipment for chuting and conveying concrete shall be of such size and design as to insure a
practically continuous flow of concrete at the delivery without separation of material.
3. Provide runways or other means for wheeled equipment to convey concrete to point of deposit.
Construct runways so that supports will not bear upon reinforcement or fresh concrete.
4 Pumps or pneumatic equipment shall have adequate pumping capacity Slump loss due to pumping
shall not exceed 2 inches. Do not convey concrete through pipes made of aluminum or aluminum
alloy Maintain controls for proportioning, mixing, adjustment of mix and placement in accordance
with ACI 301 and ACI 304.2R.
C Depositing
1 Concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practicable in its final position to avoid segregation due to
rehandling or flowing. No concrete shall have a free fall of over three feet from truck, mixer buggies,
chutes or tremies. The concreting shall be carried on at such a rate that the concrete is at all times
plastic and flows readily into the spaces between bars. Concrete that has partially hardened, or been
contaminated by foreign materials, shall not be deposited in the work, nor shall retempered concrete
be used.
2. When concreting is started, it shall be carried on as a continuous operation until the placing of the
section is completed. Do not allow cold joints to occur
3. Protect adjacent surfaces from concrete drippings, spillage or splashes. Hardened or partially
hardened splashes or accumulations of concrete on forms or reinforcement shall be removed before
the work proceeds. Clean all damaged surfaces immediately
4 All concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated by mechanical vibrators during the placing operation and
shall be thoroughly worked around the reinforcement and embedded fixtures and into the corners of
the forms. Mechanical vibrators shall be applied directly to the concrete and used only under
experienced supervision. Vibrators shall be carried on continuously with the placing of concrete.
Keep a minimum of two vibrators on the job during concreting operations.
5. Do not over vibrate concrete or use vibrators to transport concrete within forms. Insert vibrators
vertically at frequent intervals. Do not drag vibrators through concrete. Do not insert vibrators into
lower courses that have begun to set.
6. All conveyances shall be thoroughly cleaned at frequent intervals during the placing of concrete, and
before beginning a new run of concrete. All hardened concrete and foreign materials shall be
removed from the surfaces.
7 Maintain controls for proportioning, mixing, adjustment of mix and placement using pumping
equipment in accordance with ACI 301 and 304.2R.
8. Do not drop concrete directly into standing water Use a tremie with the outlet near the bottom of the
place of deposit. Contractor shall obtain approval of AutoZone project manager in writing prior to
placing any concrete into standing water
D Building Slab
1 Place granular subbase if required over subgrade to thickness shown on drawings and consolidate
material. Bring material to optimum moisture content. The subgrade shall be free of frost before
concrete placing begins. If the temperature inside a building where concrete is to be placed is below
freezing it shall be raised and maintained above 50 degrees F long enough to remove all frost from
the subgrade. Place vapor barrier sheeting over the subbase material with longest dimension parallel
with direction of pour Lap joints 6 inches minimum and seal with appropriate tape. Do not disturb or
damage vapor barrier while placing reinforcing or concrete. If damage occurs, repair before concrete
covers area.
2. Edge forms, if required, and intermediate screed strips shall be set accurately to produce the
designated elevations and contours of the finished surface, and shall be sufficiently strong to support
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -3 05/20/09
vibrating screeds or roller pipe screeds. The concrete surface shall be aligned to the contours of
screed strips by the use of strike -off templates or acceptable compacting type screeds.
3. Mixing and placing shall be carefully coordinated with finishing. Concrete shall not be placed on the
granular sub base or forms more rapidly than it can be spread, straightedged and darbied or bull
floated. These operations must be performed before bleeding water has an opportunity to collect on
the surface.
4 Concrete in slabs shall be thoroughly consolidated. Internal vibration shall be used along the
bulkheads of slabs on grade. Consolidation of slabs shall be obtained with vibrating screeds, roller
pipe screeds, internal vibrators or other approved means. To obtain good surfaces and avoid cold
joints, the size of finishing crews shall be planned with due regard for the effects of concrete
temperature and atmospheric conditions on the rate of hardening of the concrete.
5. All finishes must be adequate in all respects to receive material to be applied to it, true to line and fre
of defects or blemishes. No driers, dry cement, nor cement -sand mixture shall be used in connector
with any finish surfaces to absorb water stiffen mix or for any other purpose.
6. All loading dock slabs and exterior stairs shall receive a light broom finish; all interior building slabs
shall receive a troweled finish.
7 After the concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck off and leveled, the concrete shall not be
worked further until ready for floating. Floating with a hand float or with a bladed power trowel
equipped with float shoes, or with a power disk float shall begin when the water sheen has
disappeared and when surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit the operation. During or after the
first floating, planeness of surface shall be checked with a 10 foot straightedge applied at not less the
two different spots filled during this procedure, to produce a surface within a 1/4 inch in 10 foot
tolerance throughout. The slab shall then be refloated immediately to a uniform sandy texture. The
slab shall next be power troweled and finally hand troweled. The first trowelling after power floating
shall produce a smooth surface which is relatively free of defects but which may still show some
trowel marks. Additional trowelling shall be done by hand after the surface has hardened sufficiently
The final trowelling shall be done when a ringing sound is produced as the trowel is moved over the
surface. The surface shall be thoroughly consolidated by the hand troweling operations. The finishes
surface shall be essentially free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance and shall meet o
exceed the floor flatness requirements specified in paragraph 1 03 above.
8. Areas which are called out, to receive a light broom finish shall be given a light traverse texture by
drawing a broom across the surface, and will not be trowelled.
9. Precautions to protect fresh concrete from developing plastic shrinkage cracks must be taken in
advance of concrete placement where evaporation rate due to any combination of temperature,
humidity and wind velocity is expected to approach 0.2 lbs. /sq.ft./hr as determined by ACI 305 Figur
2.1.5. Acceptable precautions to reduce the rate of evaporation include the use of wind breaks,
monomolecular film evaporation retarders, fog spray covering with polyethylene sheeting, or wet
cover
3.08 COLD WEATHER PLACING
A. Protect all concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength which could be caused by frost,
freezing actions, or low temperatures, in compliance with requirements of ACI 306 and as herein
specified.
B. When the air temperature has fallen to or may be expected to fall below 40 degrees F provide adequate
means to maintain the temperature in the area where concrete is being placed, at between 50 and 70
degrees F for at least 7 days after placing. Provide temporary housings or coverings including tarpaulins
plastic film Maintain the heat and protection, if necessary to insure that the ambient temperature does n
fall more than 30 degrees F in the 24 hours following the initial 7 -days period. Avoid rapid dry out of
concrete due to overheating and avoid thermal shock due to sudden cooling or heating.
C. When air temperature has fallen or is expected to fall below 40 degrees F uniformly heat all water and
aggregates before mixing as required to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not Tess than 55
degrees F and not more than 85 degrees F at point of placement.
D Do not use frozen materials containing ice or snow Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or
subgrade containing frozen materials. Ascertain that form, reinforcing steel and adjacent concrete
surfaces are entirely free of frost, snow and ice before placing concrete.
E. Do not use salt or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators or set control
admixtures unless approved by AutoZone Construction Project Manager
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -3 05/20/09
7
3.09 HOT WEATHER PLACING
A. When hot weather exists that would seriously impair the quality and strength of concrete, place concrete in
compliance with ACI 305 and as herein specified.
B. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 80 degrees F
when the temperature is rising and below 85 degrees F when the temperature is falling. Mixing water may
be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control the concrete temperature provided the water equivalent
of the ice is calculated in the total amount of mixing water
C. Cover reinforcing steel with water soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that the steel temperature will
not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete
D Wet forms thoroughly before placing concrete.
E. Do not place concrete at a temperature so as to cause difficulty from loss of slump flash -set, or cold
joints.
F Do not use set control admixtures unless approved by the AutoZone Construction Project Manager in Mix
Design.
G Obtain Project Manager's approval of other methods and materials proposed for use prior to actually
commencing the work.
H. Precautions to protect fresh concrete from developing plastic shrinkage cracks must be taken in advance
of concrete placement where evaporation rate due to any combination of temperature, humidity, and wind
velocity is expected to approach 0.2 lbs. /sq.ft./hr as determined by ACI 305 Figure 2.1.5. Acceptable
precautions to reduce the rate of evaporation include the use of wind breaks, monomolecular film
evaporation retarders, fog spray covering with polyethylene sheeting, or wet cover
3.10 CONCRETE FINISHING OF FORMED SURFACES
A. Do not remove forms for 24 hours after concrete has been placed. After removal of forms all
honeycombed and other defective concrete shall be removed down to sound concrete. If chipping is
necessary the edges shall be perpendicular to the surface or slightly undercut. No feathering will be
permitted. The area to be patched and an area at least 6 inches wide surrounding it shall be dampened to
prevent absorption of water from the patching mortar A bonding grout shall be prepared using a mix of
approximately one part cement to one part fine sand passing a No. 300 mesh sieve, mixed to the
consistency of thick cream and then well brushed into the surface.
B. Concrete surfaces not exposed to view shall be finished with a rough form finish and all surfaces exposed
to view shall be finish with a smooth rubbed finish.
C. For a rough form finish, tie holes and defects shall be patched and fins exceeding 1/4 inch in height shall
be chipped or rubbed off Otherwise, surfaces may be left with the texture imparted by forms.
D For a smooth rubbed finish, the form facing material shall produce a smooth, hard, uniform texture on the
concrete. The arrangement of the facing material shall be orderly and symmetrical, with the number of
seams kept to the practical minimum Tie holes and defects shall be patched and all fins shall be
removed by rubbing.
E. Immediately upon removal of the forms, the surfaces to be rubbed shall be pointed up, thoroughly wetted
and then rubbed with a No. 20 carborundum brick and water so as to produce a true, even and smooth
surface. When necessary to fill pinholes, and upon areas which have been reconstructed, rubbing shall
be done by carborundum brick and a thin cement grout composed of one part of cement and two parts of
fine washed silicone sand, all of which shall pass a No. 20 sieve. The surface finished with grout shall be
carefully scraped with a steel edge so as to remove all surplus grout, after which it shall be given a final
rub with a wood float until all skin and form marks shall be removed. No "wash composed of cement and
water or cement, sand and water shall be used in this process.
3.11 CURING
A. Protect and cure all finished cast in place concrete work. Begin immediately after placement; protect
concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures and mechanical damage. Cure in
accordance with ACI 308. Use membrane forming curing and sealing compound or approved
continuously moist curing method for not less than 7 days, and in accordance with ACI 301 procedures. If
used, apply curing compound as soon as final finishing operations are complete(within 2 hours). Apply
curing compound uniformly in continuous operation by power sprayer or roller according to manufacturer's
written instructions, but as a minimum, apply two coats perpendicular to one another Recoat areas
subject to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -3 05/20/09
8
damage during curing period. After curing period has elapsed remove non dissipating curing compound;
without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer
B. All formed concrete work subject to lateral loading (retaining walls) shall not receive such loads until 28
days of cure time unless approved by AutoZone Construction Project Manager
C. Contractor shall be responsible for verifying that curing compound is compatible with and will have no
detrimental effect on adhesives and final finishes specified over concrete surfaces.
D. Refer to Specifications Section 03150 for curing and sealing of surfaces to receive Penetrating Liquid
Sealer
3.12 REPAIR, PROTECTION AND CLEAN -UP
A. Repair or replace broken or defective concrete as directed by AutoZone Construction Project Manager
B. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures, and
maintain, without drying, at a relatively constant temperature for the period necessary for hydration of the
cement and proper hardening of the concrete.
C. Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14
days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by
removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur
D Sweep concrete pavement and wash free of stains, discolorations, dirt and other foreign material just pric
to final inspection.
E. Upon completion and as directed by AutoZone Construction Project Manager remove all excess materia
debris, forms and equipment occasioned by the work.
End of Section
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -3 05/20/09
9
This Page Left Blank
J\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -3 05/20/09
10
DIVISION 3 SECTION 03150 PENETRATING SEALER
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 PRECAUTIONS
A. Protect material from freezing. If frozen thaw and agitate before using. Do not apply when temperature is
below 35 degrees F or above 135 degrees F
B. Apply with low- pressure sprayer only do not use airless sprayers.
C Avoid contact with glass, aluminum or finished surfaces. Where contact occurs, immediately wipe with a
damp cloth or flush with water When applying near windows mask the glass.
D Surfaces being treated will become slippery during application. Exercise care and caution to avoid falls
and injury
E. Do not apply to areas previously treated with curing or sealing agents unless these coatings have been
removed by chemical or mechanical means.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
A. Ashford Formula is a colorless, transparent liquid that penetrates concrete, protecting, preserving, and
strengthening it permanently by chemically reacting with the concrete.
B. Do not substitute for this product.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 AREA OF INSTALLATION
A. Install Ashford Formula over all interior concrete surfaces not scheduled to receive vinyl composition floor
tile. Ashford Formula may extend over the areas to receive floor tile without penalty
3.02 INSTALLATION ON FRESHLY FINISHED CONCRETE
A. Freshly finished concrete surfaces require no special surface preparation if the Ashford Formula is to be
applied immediately after the finishing operation as a curing agent.
B. Saw cutting may be done before or after the Ashford Formula is applied depending on the immediate nee
for curing. It is critical in either case that the dust or slurry from cutting be immediately and thoroughly
removed from the slab surface.
C. Immediately following the trowelling operation, and as soon as the slab is safe enough to walk on, saturat
the surface with Ashford Formula at approximately 200 square feet per gallon using a low pressure, high
volume sprayer Ashford Formula is a penetrant, not a membrane; enough material needs to be on the
surface to allow the Ashford to thoroughly soak in. As a guideline, there should be enough Ashford on the
floor to `fill -in' a footprint within several seconds of taking a step. This is often referred to as a "flood coat
or "wet coat" Once a wet coat has been achieved, work Ashford Formula into the concrete surface with
soft- bristled brooms. This will break surface tension and aid penetration.
D Keep the surface wet with Ashford for a minimum of 30 minutes, and then wait for the Ashford to become
slippery and gel -like under foot. In extremely cool, windless conditions, Ashford can take up to an hour or
longer to become slippery In hot, windy conditions, Ashford may become slippery and gel like in as lithe
as 15 minutes, if this occurs, lightly mist surface with water which will resolubilize the Ashford so that it is
no longer slippery or gel -like.
E. During the initial 30 minutes, no spot or area on the slab should be allowed to become dry Avoid dry
areas by either brooming excess Ashford over the more absorbent spots or by putting down more
Ashford. Pay particular attention to porous areas and slab edges, as these areas tend to dry out more
quickly
F After the slab has been wet with Ashford for a minimum of 30 minutes, and the Ashford becomes slippery
lightly mist the surface with water This can be done either with a low pressure sprayer or a hose and
nozzle (nozzle must be adjusted to create a mist) Agitate with a broom to aid penetration and wait for
Ashford to become slippery or gel -like a second time.
G. After Ashford become slippery a second time, thoroughly flush the surface with water During the flushinc
process, agitate the floor with brooms to help loosen and remove excess Ashford Formula from the
surface.
H. Squeegee the slab thoroughly by pushing the water ahead of the squeegee and off the slab edge. Once
completed the floor should look like bare concrete with nothing on it. During the squeegee process, there
JAProduction Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -3 05/20/09
1
may be some slippery patches. This is an indication that excess Ashford is still on the surface. These
areas should be re- flushed and squeegeed again until the entire surface dry and free from slippery
patches.
3.03 DRYING TIME
A. The surface may be used as soon as the application is complete and the surface is again dry to the touch.
This will occur usually in 1 to 3 hours after squeegeeing.
3.04 COVERING
A. On new concrete, allow a minimum of 30 days for the floor to cure before covering with flooring material.
3.05 EXISTING CONCRETE FLOORS
A. Do not install Ashford Formula over existing concrete floors without first consulting with a qualified Ashford
representative. Existing floors require entirely different procedures than do freshly placed floors. In some
cases the floor may need to be stripped. In other cases it may need to be thoroughly cleaned or
neutralized. For the name of a qualified technical representative, call:
Curecrete Distribution, Inc.
1203 West Spring Creek Place
Springville, Utah 84663
Telephone (800) 998 -5664
Monday Friday 8am to 5pm Mountain Time Zone
End of Section
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -3 05/20/09
2
DIVISION 4 SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This section includes both load bearing reinforced concrete unit masonry as well as veneered unit
masonry along with the installation of the follow products, which are specified in other sections:
1 Embedded Anchors and Plates
2. Steel Lintels and Miscellaneous Steel Frames
3. Hollow Metal Door Frames
4 Wood Nailers and Blocking
5. Sealant in Masonry Construction Joints
B. Consult drawings to determine which elements of this section are applicable to the specific project.
1.02 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE AND REFERENCES
A. Provide unit masonry that develops a minimum compressive strength (f'm) of 1500 psi.
B. Comply with all applicable requirements of the following masonry references:
1 American Concrete Institute No.530 Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures
2. American Concrete Institute No.530.1 R Specifications for Masonry Structures
3. International Masonry Industry All- Weather Council Recommended Practices and Guide
Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Obtain exposed masonry units of uniform texture and color or a uniform blend within the ranges
accepted for these characteristics, from one manufacturer for each different product required for each
continuous surface or visually related surfaces.
B. Special inspections and testing required by AutoZone and the governing building code will be paid by
the Contractor and performed by an independent testing laboratory Testing shall conform to the
requirements of Section 01410
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver masonry materials to project site in undamaged condition, store masonry units along with
accessories off the ground, under cover to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture
temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion and other causes.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not use masonry cement in seismic zones 2 or higher as defined by any national building code or
seismic design performance category D or higher as defined by the International Building Code.
B. All mortar used to bond masonry shall be type S, do not use type N, M, or O.
C. During erection, cover tops of walls, projections and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's
work. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place.
Maintain cover until wall is permanently protected.
D Do not apply uniform roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after
building masonry walls or columns.
E. Prevent grout, mortar and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted or other
embedded or attached items. Remove immediately any grout, mortar and soil that comes in contact
with masonry units, embeds or attached items.
F Do not lay masonry units that are wet or frozen; remove and replace masonry damaged by freezing
conditions. Comply with reference unit masonry standards for cold weather construction and the
following:
G. Comply with reference unit masonry standard for hot weather construction as well as the following:
1 When the ambient air temperature exceed 100 degrees F or 90 degrees F with a wind velocity
greater than 8 mph, do not spread mortar bed more than 4 feet ahead of masonry and set
masonry units within one minute of spreading mortar
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -4\Sec -04200 05/20/09
1
WORK DAY CONSTRUCTION
TEMPERATURE REQUIREMENT
Above 40 F Normal masonry procedures
32 F to 40 F Heat mixing water to produce
mortar temperatures between
40 F 120 F
25 F to 32 F
20 F to 25 F
0 F and below to 20 F
Heat mixing water to produce
mortar temperatures between
40 F 120 F Mortar on boards
should be maintained above 40 F
Heat mixing water and sand to
produce mortar temperatures
between 40 F 120 F Mortar on
boards should be maintained
above 40 F
Heat mixing water and sand to
produce mortar temperatures
between 40 F 120 F Mortar on
boards should be maintained
above 40 F
PROTECTION
REQUIREMENT
Cover walls with plastic at end of work day
to prevent water entering masonry
Cover walls and materials with plastic or
canvas to prevent wetting and freezing
With wind velocities over 15 mph provide
windbreaks during the work day and cover
walls and materials at the end of the work
to prevent wetting and freezing.
With wind velocities over 15 mph provide
windbreaks during the work day and cover
walls and materials at the end of the work
to prevent wetting and freezing. Maintain
masonry above freezing for 16 hours using
auxiliary heat or insulated blankets.
Provide enclosures and supply sufficient
heat to maintain masonry enclosure above
32 F for a minimum of 24 hours.
H. When conditions exist that are different from those outlined above the Project Manager may approve
alternative methods and practices for the placement of masonry
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MORTAR
A. Portland Cement, Type 1 shall meet the requirements of ASTM C150.
B. Masonry Cement, Type II shall meet the requirements of ASTM C91
C Sand shall meet the requirements of ASTM C144
D Water shall be potable, from local utility supply
E. Mortar shall be Type S, and shall consist of 1 part Cement, to 3 parts sand, and shall develop a
minimum strength of 1800 psi, and shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C270.
F Grout Mix, Non shrink, Type S, 1 part Portland cement, 21/4 parts sand, and shall develop a minimum
strength of 2000 psi, and shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C476.
2.02 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Hollow load bearing concrete masonry units shall conform to ASTM C90 and as follows:
1 Grade N, Type 1
2. Minimum average compressive strength of 1900 psi.
3. Light weight units weighing 103 pounds per cubic foot.
4 Manufactured to specified dimensions of 3/8 inch Tess than nominal widths by nominal heights by
nominal lengths indicated on drawings. Nominal face dimensions for full size units are 8 inch
height by 16 inch length. Thickness as indicated on drawings.
5. Exposed faces shall be manufacturer's standard gray color and texture for the type of unit
specified.
B. Type of concrete masonry units required will be smooth face, unless noted otherwise on the drawings,
provide units with both finished faces and ends of each type as required to construct outside corners.
C. Provide bond beam units with appropriate face finish as required by drawings.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -4\Sec -04200 05/20/09
2
2.03 BRICK MASONRY UNITS
A. Brick masonry units used as a veneer shall conform to ASTM C -216, grade SW Type FBS and shall
have a compressive strength of not less than 12,000 psi.
B. All brick units for the project shall be extruded shapes and shall come from the same manufacturer
C Brick sizes and colors shall be as indicated on drawings
2.04 STEEL BAR REINFORCING
A. Vertical and Bond Beams: Billet steel complying with ASTM A615 Grade 60 deformed, unless noted
otherwise. Steel bars sizes as shown on the drawings.
B. Vertical bars shall be held in position at top and bottom and at interval not exceeding 200 diameters of
the bar additionally bars shall be in place prior to grouting.
2.05 JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. Joint reinforcement for concrete masonry units shall be galvanized carbon steel, class 3, and truss
design, welded wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods into
straight lengths of not Tess than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units. Wire size shall be 9
gage minimum
B. If prefabricated corners are not available, Contractor may field form corners by cutting on side of a
straight section and bending to suit the wall condition.
C. Joint reinforcement where horizontal mortar joints do not align in composite, cavity or insulated walls,
or where interior wythe is to be constructed before exterior wythe shall be truss type Adjusto Flex Mesh
Model number AF -V or AF -H, as required, as manufactured by Hohmann Barnard, Inc. or approved
equal.
2.06 ANCHORS
A. Anchors for attaching masonry veneers to non masonry surfaces shall be galvanized triangle wire
veneer anchor sized for the thickness of the masonry units being used. The ties shall be made from
12 gage wire and the screw hole for attachment shall be 5/16 inch diameter and shall be equal to those
manufactured by Heckmann Building Products or Dur -O -Wall, Inc.
2.07 CONTROL JOINTS
A. Pre formed high grade rapid control joint rubber slot seal, D/A 2001 2 -1/8 inches by 1 11/16 inches, as
manufactured by Dur -O -Wall, Inc.
B. Where composite walls are constructed extend control joint through both Wythes.
2.08 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS for VENEERED INSTALLATIONS
A. Embedded flashing shall be copper fabric laminate consisting of a copper sheet weighing 3 ounces per
square foot, bonded with asphalt between two layers of glass fiber cloth.
B. Adhesive for flashing shall be of type recommended by manufacturer of flashing material for use
indicated.
C Weep holes shall be round medium density polyethylene tubing, 3/8 inch outside diameter
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Comply with referenced unit masonry standard and other requirements indicated applicable to each
type of installation included in Project.
B. Build single Wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal thickness
indicated.
C Cut masonry units with motor driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as
required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Use full size units without
cutting where possible.
D Provide temporary bracing for walls, lintels and other masonry work during erection. Maintain in place
until roof framing and other structural elements are complete and provide permanent bracing. Bracing
of masonry walls is a means and method of construction and is the sole responsibility of the General
Contractor and the masonry sub contractor As a minimum, provide bracing in accordance with the
J Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -4\Sec -04200 05/20/09
3
Mason Contractor's Association of America's 'Standard Practice for Bracing Masonry Walls Under
Construction"
E. Grout all cells solid in all walls from top of footing to finished floor line whether reinforced or not.
3.02 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXING
A. Machine mix dry materials thoroughly for approximately 2 minutes. Add optimum amount of water
gradually and mix for an additional 3 minutes, total mixing time, 5 minutes minimum Hand mixing of
mortar may be permitted for work requiring small batches with Owner's approval.
B. Mortar for grouting shall be mixed with the required amount of water to achieve pouring consistency
Continuously stir to prevent separation of materials.
C. Do not use admixtures, antifreeze compounds, or accelerators unless approved by Owner
D Place mortars in final position within 2.5 hours after mixing. Place grout into position within 1.5 hours
after mixing.
E. Pointing mortar shall be of as dry a consistency as will produce a mortar sufficiently plastic to be
worked into the joints.
3.03 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths and for
accurate location of openings, movement -type joints, returns and offsets. Avoid the use of less than
half size units at corners, jambs and where possible at other locations.
B. Lay up walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses accurately spaced and
coordinated with other construction.
C Lay masonry in running bond pattern with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses
above and below unless otherwise indicated.
D Lay concealed masonry with all units in a Wythe in running bond. Bond and interlock each course of
each Wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4 -inch horizontal face dimensions at
corners or jambs.
E. In each course, rack back one half unit length for one half running bond, do not tooth. Clean exposed
surfaces of set masonry and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry
F As construction progresses, build in items specified under this and other Sections of the Specifications.
Fill in solidly with masonry around built in items.
1 Fill spaces between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Where built in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal
lath in the joint below and rod grout into core.
G. Install knock out bond beam masonry units at bearing elevations of steel bar joists, top of wall and at
other locations called for on drawings. Units shall have faces to match adjacent courses or as called
for on drawings.
3.04 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells, bed
webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns and pilasters and
where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout.
B. Tool all exposed joints slightly concave.
C Joints at all locations to receive a plaster or EFS finish shall be struck flush rather than tooled.
3.05 GROUTING
A. Fully grout cavities, pilasters and vertical cells of concrete masonry containing steel reinforcement.
Fully grout bond beams and lintels, including head joints. Fully grout all cells in retaining walls and all
cells below grade in all walls. In addition, fully grout cavities and cells as directed by the Contract
Documents.
B Provide cleanouts when required by the grouting procedures. Cleanout openings shall be provided at
all cells to be filled at each pour of grout where such pour is in excess of five feet. Cleanouts shall be
sealed after inspections and before grouting.
C. Any overhanging mortar or other obstructions or debris shall be removed from the inside of cell walls.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -4\Sec -04200 05/20/09
4
D Stop grout 1 1/2 inches below top of masonry when grout is to stopped for one hour or more. All
horizontal steel shall be fully embedded in grout.
E. Consolidate pours exceeding 12 inches in height by mechanical vibration and reconsolidate by
mechanical vibration after initial water loss and settlement has occurred.
F Walls shall be constructed using a low lift grouting method with heights not to exceed five feet. High lift
grouting methods may only be used with the approval of the project construction manager the
structural engineer of record and the local building official. A procedure for high lift grouting method
and field quality control shall be submitted and approved prior to beginning work.
3.06 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. Install continuous horizontal joint reinforcement not less than 16 inches on center vertically (every other
block course) reduce spacing to 8 inches on center vertically below grade and in parapets. Install
longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side
of wall. Lap all joints a minimum of 8 inches. In seismic zones 3 and 4 and seismic design category D
as categorized by the International Building Code, horizontal joint reinforcement shall be replaced with
horizontal bond beams spaced not less than 48 inches on center vertically or as indicated on
drawings. Horizontal joint reinforcing may be required in addition to bond beam reiforcing for multiple
wythe construction.
B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated.
C Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections, by use of prefabricated 'L" and "T" sections except
at control and expansion joints. Cut and bend reinforcement as directed by manufacturer for continuity
at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.
D Reinforce masonry openings up to one foot in width, by placing horizontal joint reinforcement in the first
two courses immediately above and below the head and sill of the opening. Extend reinforcing a
minimum of 2 feet beyond the jambs of the opening.
E. Install horizontal steel bar reinforcing, sizes as shown on drawings, in all "U" shaped masonry bond
beams and all other locations where indicated on drawings.
3.07 VERTICAL REINFORCEMENT
A. Install vertical steel bar reinforcing, sizes as shown on drawings, each side of all openings, control
joints, and spaced or positioned in walls, columns and pilasters, or otherwise as shown on drawings.
Vertical reinforcing shall be held in place by means of bar positioners.
B. Reinforcing bars shall be spliced a minimum of 48 bar diameters or 30 inches which ever is greater
unless noted otherwise on structural documents.
3.08 ANCHORING VENEERED MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS
A. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch in width between masonry and structural member unless
otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar or other rigid materials.
B. Anchor masonry to structural members with triangle anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached
to structure.
C. Space anchors as required, but not more than 16 inches on center vertically and 32 inches on center
horizontally
3.09 CONTROL JOINTS
A. Install special shapes designed for control joints. Install bond breaker strips at joint. Keep head joint
free and clear of mortar Fill joint with elastomeric sealant.
3.10 LINTELS
A. Provide masonry lintels where shown and wherever openings are greater than 12 inches in width in all
block bearing walls and structural steel lintels for all opening greater than 12 inches in width in masonry
veneer walls.
B. Masonry lintels shall be specially formed 'U' shaped bond beam units with reinforcement bars placed
as indicated and filled with grout. Masonry and steel lintels shall have a minimum bearing of 8 inches
at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.
C. At service door opening, extend lintel bearing to 2 feet beyond each jamb and grout solid all cells in the
three courses above the lintel to facilitate the installation of the roll -up door
J•Wroduction Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -4\Sec -04200 05/20/09
5
D Install loose steel lintels and miscellaneous steel frames where indicated.
E. Construct temporary formwork and shores to support reinforced masonry elements during
construction. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened
sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary Toads that may be placed on them during
construction.
3.11 FLASHING WEEP HOLES FOR VENEERED WALLS
A. Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges and other
obstructions to the downward flow of water in the wall, and where indicated.
B. Prepare masonry surfaces so that they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture
flashing. Place thru -wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar Seal penetrations in
flashing with sealant as recommended by flashing manufacturer before covering with mortar
C Extend flashing from exterior face of the veneer through the outer Wythe and turn up and embed into
the next horizontal joint of the backing masonry• or if backing is solid turn up a minimum of 4 inches
and seal against vertical surface. Ensure the air space between the veneer and the backing is free
and clear of mortar from top to bottom of wall.
D At heads and sills, extend flashing as specified above unless otherwise indicated but turn up ends not
Tess than 2 inches to form a pan.
E. Cut off flashing flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed.
F Install weep holes in the head joints in exterior Wythe and in the first course of masonry immediately
above embedded flashing. Space weep holes 32 inches on center
3.12 REPAIRING, POINTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise damaged or
if units do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units in fresh mortar or grout,
point joints to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, and completely fill with mortar Point up all
joints including corners, openings and adjacent construction to provide a neat, uniform appearance
ready for the application of sealant.
C After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:
1 Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or
chisels.
2. Protect adjacent non masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid
strippable masking agent, polyethylene film or waterproof masking tape.
3. Wet wall surfaces with water prior to application of cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing
thoroughly with clear water
4 Clean concrete masonry by means of cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 45 applicable to
type of stain present on exposed surfaces.
End of Section
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -4\Sec -04200 05/20/09
6
DIVISION 5 SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Include all labor materials and appliances, and perform all operations in connection with the installation c
the structural steel and all related work, in strict accordance with the drawings and as specified herein.
Work includes:
1 All structural steel including columns, beams, girders, column base and cap plates, joist and beam
bearing plates, angles and channels.
2. Design of structural steel connections.
3. Framing for all openings in metal deck.
4 Connection angles, bolts and electrodes for welding work.
5. Anchor bolts and embedded plates and angles.
6. Connections for steel joist girders and steel joist to structural steel.
7 Connections of masonry to structural steel columns and beams.
8. Field touch -up of shop painting.
9. All other items required for completing the work of this section.
B. Related work which is specified in other sections
1 Steel joists and joist girders.
2. Metal decking.
3. Cold formed metal framing
4 Metal fabrications.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of
Structural Steel for Buildings.
1 AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges (1986) except as modified herein:
a. Paragraph 4.2.1 of the above code is hereby modified by deletion of the following sentence: `Thi;
approval constitutes the Owner's acceptance of all responsibility for the design adequacy of any
detail configuration of connections developed by the fabricator as part of his preparation of these
shop drawings.
2. AISC Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings Allowable Stress Design (ASD) (1989)
3. AISC Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts ASD (1985).
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1 ASTM A -36 Specifications for Structural Steel
2. ASTM A -123 Specifications for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
3. ASTM A -307 Specifications for Structural Bolts and Studs 60,000 psi Tensile
4 ASTM A -325 Specifications for Structural Bolts, Heat Treated, 120/105 psi Minimum Tensile.
5. ASTM A -500 Specifications for Cold- Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Tubing.
6. ASTM A -501 Specifications for Hot Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Tubing.
7 ASTM A -572/A -992 Specifications for High- Strength, Low Alloy Columbian- Vanadium Structural Stee
C. American Welding Society (AWS)
1 AWS (D1 1) Structural Welding Code Steel.
2. AWS (D1.3) Structural Welding Code Sheet Steel.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Fabricator may send with the first delivery a full set of shop drawings for Contractor's use.
B. Items requiring field measuring shall have all dimensions verified in the field before fabrication.
C All structural steel shall be detailed fabricated and erected in accordance with the AISC Code of Standarc
Practice, except as modified herein.
D Shop drawings if required should include the following information:
1 Details of cuts, connections, camber holes and other pertinent data.
2. Welds will be indicated by standard AWS symbols and show size, length and type of each weld.
3. Erection drawings will reference erection marks to shop detail drawing numbers.
4 Directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchorage
5. Type of fasteners will be clearly shown for all members.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -5\Sec -05120 05/20/09
1
E. Fabricator's engineer shall be responsible for the design, and adequacy of for all connections. Erection
drawings and shop details will clearly show the design loads of each connection design by the fabricator
All shop drawings shall be signed and sealed by the fabricator's engineer with the engineer's seal in the
state in which the project is located.
F AutoZone's review of any submittals is only for review of general conformance with the design concept. In
no case shall this review or any subsequent approval, if given, relieve the contractor of the responsibility
for the installation adequacy and safety of all connections, correctness of fit, general or detailed
dimensions, quality or quantity of materials, or any other conditions, functions, performance or guarantees
required.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Contractor shall employ an independent testing laboratory to perform special inspection and testing.
Testing shall conform to the requirements of Section 01410.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. W Shape columns and beams: ASTM A- 36/A -572/A -992, Fy 50 ksi.
B. Other steel shapes bars and plates: ASTM A 36, Fy 36 ksi.
C Structural tubing: ASTM A -500, Grade B, Fy 46 ksi.
D Anchor bolts: ASTM A -307 or ASTM F1554 Grade 55, typical unless noted otherwise.
E. Bolts: ASTM A -325 or A -490
F Welding electrodes: Series E -70 for arc welding.
G. Headed stud anchors: ASTM A -108, Grades 1010 to 1020, 50 ksi.
H. Galvanizing: All item exposed to weather or earth shall be hot -dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A -123
or A -153, Class B.
I. Paint (Shop Coat) Fabricator's standard rust inhibitive metal primer Paint shall be compatible with finish
coat.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS
A. Unless noted otherwise, shop connections may be either bolted or welded and field connections shall be
bolted. The fabricator is responsible for the design of all connections not fully detailed on the drawings.
Connections not fully detailed on the structural drawings are schematic and are only intended to show the
relationship of members connected. Connection details indicated on the drawings shall be incorporated
into the fabricator's connection design.
B. Unless noted otherwise, connections shall be designed as 'simple framing" connections (unrestrained,
free ended), to support the Toads indicated on the drawings, with the ends of beams and girders
connected for shear only and free to rotate with some inelastic, but self limiting deformation of connection
parts, under gravity load. Bolted connections shall be designed as bearing type connections using the
values for bearing type connections with threads included in the shear plane. A minimum of two bolts per
connection must be used.
C Single plate connections shall be designed in accordance with the design procedure given in AISC
'Engineering for Steel Construction'
D The fabricator is responsible for verifying the tension capacity of axially loaded members after a section is
reduced for bolt holes. Member size may be increased or connection plates added as required.
3.02 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in shop to greatest extent possible and as indicated on final
shop drawings. Provide camber in structural members where indicated.
B. Properly mark and match -mark materials for field assembly Fabricate for delivery sequence which will
expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials.
C. Structural steel fabricator must coordinate details, provide connections and punch holes for other trades
as shown on structural, architectural, mechanical and electrical drawings.
D Shop splicing of material will not be permitted.
E. All surfaces of steel to be painted shall be cleaned and primed according to Steel Structures Painting
Council Specifications SSPC- SP -3 -63, and given one shop coat applied at a rate to produce a minimum
dry film thickness of 1.0 mil.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div 5\Sec 05120 05/20/09
2
F In cases where material shown or specified is not readily available, proposed substitutions must be
submitted for review by AutoZone. All proposed substitutions shall be clearly noted as such on final shot
drawings. All substituted material must be of equivalent section to that specified and any additional cost
due to increased weight shall be borne by Contractor Substitutions shall not interfere with architectural,
mechanical or electrical requirements.
G. Steel shall be delivered as required in accordance with approved schedule.
3.03 ERECTION
A. The steel structure may be a non self supporting steel frame, dependent upon diaphragm action of meta
roof deck and attachment to masonry walls for stability and for resistance to wind and seismic forces.
Provide all temporary supports required for stability and for resistance to wind and seismic forces until
these elements are complete and are capable of providing this support.
B. Furnish to other contractors all required anchor bolts, embedded plates and other incidental items of
structural steel required to be built into concrete or masonry Furnish templates and location plans for
installing these items.
C. Thoroughly examine and check the placement of anchor bolts and any supports on which the structural
steel work is any way dependent and notify Contractor and AutoZone in writing of any defects which wou
affect the satisfactory completion of this work. The starting of structural steel erection shall imply
acceptance of the underlying surfaces.
D Set and shim all base plates to the elevations shown on drawings.
E. All work shall be carefully and accurately assembled to carry out the design as shown. Erect the steel in
order of sequence and schedule as previously arranged with Contractor
F Use care in handling and erection to insure that steel shall not be twisted, bent or otherwise damaged an
should any difficulty be encountered, it shall immediately be reported to AutoZone's Project Manager Kit
cutting of structural shapes will be done in field without written consent of AutoZone.
G. Furnish all erection equipment, power planking, bracing, guys, bolts, shims, etc. necessary in executing
this part of the work.
H. Welders shall be certified by an independent testing and inspection service. Tests for uncertified welder:
shall be at the expense of this contractor
I. Misfits, due to shop or drafting errors, will be corrected or replaced in field at fabricator's expense.
J. All steel shall be erected square, plumb and true to lines and levels. Any measures required to correct oL
of plumb steel columns, etc. will be at this contractor's expense.
K. Field touch -up painting shall be done with the same type of paint as the shop coat. Touch -up shall incluc
erection damage, cleaning and painting of field connections or welds, and areas adjacent to welds not
primed.
L. Coat all steel surfaces exposed to earth, with two heavy coats of asphaltic paint. Coating shall be applies
to within one inch of exposed surface above grade.
End of Section
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -5\Sec -05120 05/20/09
3
This Page Left Blank
J•\Production Masters \Docs\Project Specs \Div -5\Sec -05120 05/20/09
4
DIVISION 5 SECTION 05210 STEEL JOISTS DECK
(AutoZone Furnished Contractor Installed)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Include all labor materials and appliances, and perform all operations in connection with the installation
the steel joists, metal deck and all related work, in strict accordance with the drawings and as specified
herein. Work includes:
1 Open web steel joists, with extended ends, and bearing plates.
2. Joist girders and continuity angles for joist girders.
3. Bridging and connection angles for bridging at sidewalls.
4 Side wall anchors.
5. Steel roof deck and accessories.
6. The framing of openings up to 10 inches by 10 inches.
7 Welding, fastening and accessories for attachment of deck.
B. Steel roof deck and #12 Tek screw fasteners (if indicated on the drawings) along with #10 side lap
fasteners will be furnished by AutoZone under provisions of Section 01010. At time of receipt of material
Contractor shall verify quantity of fasteners delivered, compare to requirements of shop drawings, notify
AutoZone Project Manager of any shortages. If no notice given then additional fasteners required will be
at Contractor expense. If the Drawings do not specifically allow #12 Tek screws as a fastening option, or
if Contractor desires to use an alternative indicated fastener then Contractor shall furnish all required
fasteners.
C. The following items will be furnished by AutoZone under provisions of Section 01010.
1 Short Span Joists
2. Long Span Joists
3. Joists Substitutes
4 Joist Girders
5. Joist Bridging (horizontal welded, horizontal bolted, welded -X, and bolted -X)
6. Bridging Anchors
7 Bottom Chord Braces (BCB's girders to joists only)
8. Bolts connecting CMC steel to CMC steel (e.g. joists to girders and bolted bridging)
9. Metal Deck
10. Attachment Screws and Side Lap Screws for the Deck
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1 ASTM A -36 Specifications for Structural Steel
2. ASTM A -242 Specifications for High Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel.
3. ASTM A -572 Specifications for Low -Alloy Columbium- Vanadium Structural Steel.
B. American Welding Society (AWS)
1 AWS (D1 1) Structural Welding Code Steel.
C. Steel Joist Institute (SJI)
1 SJI Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K- Series and LH- Series.
2. SJI Standard Specifications for Joist Girders
D Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC)
E. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI)
1 Specifications for the Design of Cold- Formed Steel Structural Members.
F American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1 ASTM A -366 Specifications for Steel, Carbon, Cold Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality
G. American Welding Society (AWS)
1 AWS (D1 1 and D1.3) Structural Welding Code Steel and Sheet Steel.
H. Steel Deck institute (SDI)
1 Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks.
I. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC)
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -5\Sec -05210 05/20/09
1
A. Qualify welding operators in accordance with AWS Standard Qualification Procedures. Provide
certification that welders employed in work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification test within
previous 12 months. If recertification of welders is required it shall be provided without additional cost to
AutoZone.
1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. AutoZone's steel joist and deck supplier shall furnish to Contractor shop and erection drawings for the
steel joists, joist girders and bridging and fastener schedule for the steel roof deck.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Contractor shall pay particular attention to the storage and handling of the galvanized metal deck in order
to avoid damage- causing rust. Metal decking must be stored off the ground with one end elevated to
provide drainage and shall be protected from the weather with a water proof covering that is ventilated to
avoid condensation.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Open web joists members.
1 SJI type K.
2. SJI type LH Long span.
3. SJI Joist Girders
B. Bridging: ASTM A -36, A -242 or A -570.
C Paint: SSPC primer and finished coats to be applied in a dip tank; color to be AutoZone Orange. SSPC
20, touch -up primer for galvanized surfaces.
D Steel roof deck: ASTM A -446, Grade C 33,000 psi, 1.5 inch Type B wide rib, galvanized, with gauge as
called for on the drawings.
E. Fasteners: The following fasteners will come with the deck if indicated on the drawings.
1 Screw fasteners will be self drilling, self- tapping, No.12 HWH Teks by Buildex or equivalent.
2. Side lap fasteners will be self drilling screws, No.10 -16/1 by Buildex or equivalent.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Furnish anchors and fasteners required for installation and attachment of joists, joist girders and bridging.
B. Welding materials: AWS 01 1
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Steel joists and joist girders shall be fabricated in accordance with SJI Standard Specifications including
headers and other supplementary framing. Top and bottom chord extensions will be provided where
indicated on drawings.
B. Joists, joist girders and accessories will be prepared and shop painted with both primer and finished coat.
Touch -up paint will be furnished and this contractor will be responsible for restoring material damaged
during the erection process.
C Fabrication of joist and joist girders is subject to inspection and testing at the Owner's discretion.
D Steel roof deck shall be galvanized sheet steel, gauge as shown on the drawings, 1 1/2 inches high, fluted
profile to SDI wide rib multiple span, and lapped.
E. Fabricate metal decking in accordance with the SDI Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks,
Roof Decks and AISI to accommodate maximum working stress of 20,000 psi and maximum span
deflection of span 240.
F Fabricate roof sump pans, if required, of 14 gauge sheet steel, flat bottom sloped sides, recessed 1 1/2
inches below roof deck surface, bearing flange 3 inches wide, watertight.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 JOIST ERECTION
A. Erect steel joists, joist girders and bridging in accordance with approved shop drawings and SJI Standard
Specifications.
B. Joists and joist girders shall bear on supports in accordance with approved shop drawings and SJI
Standard Specifications. During erection, provide temporary bracing as required by joist manufacturer for
induced Toads and stresses on joists and joist girders.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -5\Sec -05210 05/20/09
2
C. Limit sweep (horizontal displacement from a straight -line end to end) of joist to span length 180 or a
maximum of 2 inches.
D Coordinate placement of anchorage in concrete and masonry construction for making connections to
joists and joist girders and for securing bearing plates.
E. Connect or field weld joist seat to placed bearing plates after alignment and positioning for installation of
bridging. Do not permit erection of decking until joists are braced and bridged. All joists shall be welded
to bearing plates or supporting joist girders or steel beams in addition to temporary bolting required for
stability during erection.
F Do not field cut or alter joists or joist girders.
G. Remove all dirt, oil, foreign materials from joists and joist girders prior to deck installation.
H. Touch up all areas damaged during erection with matching paint.
3.02 METAL DECK INSTALLATION
A. Erect metal decking and connect to structure in accordance with SDI requirements. Coordinate
attachment sequence and procedures with placing of units as shown on shop drawings.
B. On steel support members provide 1 1/2 inch minimum bearing.
C. Align decking on structural supports.
D Lap properly nested decking sheets at supports only
E. Provide temporary shoring, as required, during application of dead loads to maintain decking level to avoi
damage. Do not leave placed sheets unattached at the end of the day
F Do not install any dull, oxidized or rusted metal decking. Contact the AutoZone's Project Manager for
instructions.
G. Provide welding, fasteners and side lap connectors of size, spacing and location as indicated on design
and shop drawings.
H. Do not alter or cut deck without AutoZone's approval. Trimming at edges and cutting of openings for rool
top units will be permitted
I. Provide and install steel angle frame around all ancillary openings such as roof drains, exhaust fans, etc.
J. Position roof sump pans, if required, with flange bearing on top surface of deck. Weld at each deck flute.
K. Touch up all areas damaged during erection with matching paint.
End of Section
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -5\Sec -05210 05/20/09
3
r
This Page Left Blank
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -5\Sec -05210 05/20/09
4
DIVISION 5 SECTION 05400 COLD FORMED FRAMING
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Include all labor materials and appliances, and perform all operations in connection with the installation c
the cold formed metal framing and all related work, in strict accordance with the drawings and as specifie
herein.
B. For masonry bearing wall prototype stores the work includes
1 Cold- formed steel stud exterior framing, 6" 16 gauge, 0.0568 inch thick, at entrance canopy
2. Cold- formed steel stud interior framing, 3 5/8' 16 gauge, 0.0568 inch thick, at toilet room walls.
3. Cold- formed steel ceiling joist framing, 6' 16 gauge, 0 0568 inch thick, at toilet room ceiling.
C For all other projects, including the 38w prototype, consult drawings for sizes and gauge of all elements.
D All cold- formed steel shall be galvanized with a class G -90 coating.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI)
1 Specifications for the Design of Cold- Formed Steel Structural Members.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1 ASTM A -446 Specifications for Steel, Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process,
Structural Quality
2. ASTM A -525 Specifications for General Requirements for Sheet Steel, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by
the Hot -Dip Process.
C. ASTM C -954 Specifications for Steel Drill Screws
D ASTM C -955 Specifications for Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Runner (Track), and
Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Board and Metal Plaster Bases.
E. American Welding Society (AWS)
1 AWS (D1.3) Structural Welding Code Sheet Steel.
F Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC)
1 SSPC Paint 20 Type 1 Zinc Rich Primers Inorganic.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualify welding operators in accordance with AWS Standard Qualification Procedures. Provide
certification that welders employed in work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification test within
previous 12 months. If recertification of welders is required it shall be provided without additional cost to
AutoZone.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Metal framing must be stored off the ground with one end elevated to provide drainage and shall be
protected from the weather with a waterproof covering that is ventilated to avoid condensation.
B. Protect metal framing from corrosion, deformation and other damage during delivery storage and
handling.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Load bearing studs and ceiling joists: ASTM A -446, Grade D minimum yield 50,000 psi and ASTM C -95€
galvanized sheet steel, channel shaped, punched for utility access, sizes and spacing as indicated on
drawings.
B. Floor tracks and top and bottom caps: ASTM A -446, Grade D minimum yield 50,000 psi and ASTM C-
955; galvanized sheet steel, channel shaped, solid web, tight fit, depth and gauge to match studs and
joists.
C Fasteners:
1 Framing to framing and framing to attachment angles: ASTM C -954 5/8 inch, Type S -12 low profile
head, corrosion resistant, self drilling, self- tapping, steel screws.
2. Floor track anchor Low velocity powder actuated Dome Head Nail with 1 -inch embedment.
3. Furring to concrete or masonry walls: Hex head sleeve anchors, minimum 1/4 inch diameter and
minimum 1 1/8 inch embedment.
J•Wroduction Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -5 05/20/09
1
D Paint: SSPC 20, touch -up primer for galvanized surfaces.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine existing conditions and adjacent areas where products will be installed and verify that conditions
conform to product manufacturer's requirements. Verify that building framing components are ready to
receive work. Verify that rough -in utilities are in -place and located where required. Do not proceed until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Beginning of erection indicates acceptance of existing
conditions.
3.02 INSTALLATION WALL FRAMING
A. Install studs and fasteners in accordance with manufacturers published instructions.
B. Metal stud spacing shall be 16 inches on center maximum
C. Align stud web openings horizontally
D Construct corners using minimum three studs.
E. Place studs as indicated on drawings. Erect studs one piece, full length. Splicing of studs will not be
permitted.
F Install headers at partition openings using Toad- bearing cee- joists.
G. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to match wall stud spacing.
H Install double studs adjacent to both sides of door openings.
Wall stud bridging shall be installed in such a manner to prevent stud rotation.
J Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items. Install wood blocking for
support of plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, toilet accessories and hardware. Attach wood blocking
between studs with screws.
K. Fasten framing in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and schedule below unless
otherwise indicated on drawings.
Floor Track to Concrete One anchor 24 inches o.c.
Wall Stud to Floor Track One screw each side at each flange
Stud Web to Stud Web Two screws
Plates and Straps to Studs Two screws per stud
Runner to Header or Top Track One screw every 16 inches, max 6 inches from end
Welded Connections As indicated on drawings
L. Touch -up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with primer
3.03 INSTALLATION JOISTS
A. Install joists and fasteners in accordance with manufacturers published instructions.
B. Install joists in direction of shortest span, parallel and level, with lateral bracing and bridging. Joists shall
be one piece, full length. Splicing of joists will not be permitted.
C Joists shall align over wall studs wherever possible, but in no case will spacing exceed 16 inches on
center If joists do not align over vertical studs, install horizontal load distribution member utilizing cee
joists.
D Install perimeter joist runner track sized to match joists. Attach runner track to header or top track of wall
framing per above schedule.
E. Attach joist ends to joist runner track with minimum of one screw each side at each flange.
3.04 INSTALLATION CANOPY FRAMING
A. Install continuous steel angle by welding to joists and/or beams where indicated on the drawings. Welds
shall be a minimum of 3/8' by 2' in length and on 12 "centers.
B. Install 6" 16 ga. studs vertically 16" on center horizontally by welding to the continuous angles top and
bottom. Welds shall be placed on both sides of the stud full height of the angle.
C. Install diagonal bracing where shown on the drawings.
3.05 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate erection of all cold formed metal framing with other trades to avoid conflicts in the overall
construction schedule and interference with their work.
End of Section
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -5 05/20/09
2
DIVISION 5 SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Include all labor materials and appliances, and perform all operations in connection with the installation c
the metal fabrications and all related work, in strict accordance with the drawings and as specified herein
Work includes:
1 Shop fabricated ferrous metal items, prime painted.
2. See Schedule of Items at the end of this Section.
a. Provide as scheduled and as indicated on drawings.
b. Include anchorage and attachments necessary for installation.
c. Schedule lists basic items and systems, include related items necessary to complete work.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI)
1 Specifications for the Design of Cold- Formed Steel Structural Members.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1 ASTM A -36 Specifications for Structural Steel
2. ASTM A -53 Specifications for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot Dipped, Zinc Coated Welded and Seamless
3. ASTM A -307 Specifications for Structural Bolts and Studs 60,000 psi. Tensile
4 ASTM A -325 Specifications for Structural Bolts, Heat Treated, 120/105 psi Minimum Tensile.
5. ASTM A -446 Specifications for Steel, Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process,
Structural Quality
6. ASTM A -500 Specifications for Cold- Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Tubing.
C American Welding Society (AWS)
1 AWS (D1 1 and D1.3) Structural Welding Code Steel and Sheet Steel.
D Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC)
1 SSPC Paint 20 Type II Zinc Rich Primers Organic.
2. SSPC Paint 25 Red Iron Oxide, Zinc Oxide, Raw Linseed Oil and Alkyd Primer
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualify welding operators in accordance with AWS Standard Qualification Procedures. Provide
certification that welders employed in work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification test within
previous 12 months. If recertification of welders is required it shall be provided without additional cost to
AutoZone.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Steel plates and shapes: ASTM A -36
B. Steel pipe: ASTM A -53.
C. Bolts, nuts and washers: ASTM A -307 and A -325.
D Galvanized steel shapes (if required): ASTM A -446, Structural Quality and Class G -90.
E. Steel tube: ASTM A -500 Grade B.
F Welding materials: AWS 01 1 and AWS D1.3, type required for material being welded.
G Primers:
1 Shop application and field touch -up. SSPC 25
2. Galvanized surfaces, field touch -up: SSPC 20
3. Color Match color of joists or purlins.
H. Concrete inserts: Cast steel or malleable bolts, washers, and shims, galvanized.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Verify dimensions on site prior to shop fabrication.
B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secure.
C. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site.
D Grind exposed welds flush and smooth with adjacent surface. Ease exposed edges to small uniform
radius. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush and hairline.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -5 05/20/09
1
E. Locate exposed mechanical fastenings unobtrusively consistent with design of structure, flush
countersink screws or bolts, except where specifically noted otherwise.
F Supply components required for anchorage of metal fabrications. Fabricate anchorage and related
components of same material and finish as metal fabrication, except where noted otherwise.
G. Finishing:
1 Clean surface of rust, scale, grease and foreign matter prior to finishing.
2. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact bond with concrete or where field welding is required.
3. Prime paint items scheduled with one coat; touch -up with same primer
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Clean and strip site primed steel to bare metal where site welding is required.
B. Make provisions for erection Toads with temporary bracing, keep work aligned.
C. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.
D Use grout specified in Section 04200 for setting metal fabrications.
E. Field weld in accordance with AWS D1 1 or D1.3 as applicable. After installation, grind sight exposed field
welds smooth, touch -up welds, and scratched or damaged surfaces with primer
3.02 SCHEDULE OF ITEMS
A. Prototypical Items:
1 Lintels,
2. Steel pipe guards
3. Dumpster gate posts and dumpster gate support (cladding not included)
4 Roof hatch ladder
5. Steel pipe bollards
6. Bearing plates
7 HVAC and roof hatch frames
8. Structural tube columns, base and cap plates
9. Perimeter angles for roof deck attachment and support
10. X Strapping for steel framed buildings
11 All other angles required by the structural drawings and not specifically furnished under Section05210
of these specifications
B. Non Prototypical Items:
1 Loading dock angles and channels
2. Steel handrails, brackets and supports
3. Miscellaneous framing and support members
End of Section
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div 5 05/20/09
2
DIVISION 6 SECTION 06100 CARPENTRY
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Work may include any or all of the following, check drawings to determine scope of work required:
1 Wood framing
2. Blocking, backing, nailers, sleepers and wood grounds required for securing other work
3. Wood furring
4 Sheathing
5. Rough hardware and connectors
6. Installation of special connectors, seats, plates, anchors and hangars furnished by other trades
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Wood Product Quality Standards:
1 Lumber standards: Comply with the latest edition of Product Standards PS 20 -05, American Softwood
Lumber Standards and West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB).
2. Plywood standard: Comply with the latest edition of Product Standard PS 1 Construction and
Industrial Plywood.
3. Pressure treated material: American Wood Preservers Bureau Standards (AWPB)
4 Factory mark each piece of lumber and plywood with type, grade, mill and grading agency and for
treated material, retention values of treatment and end use for which product is suitable.
5. Conform to current edition of International Building Code (IBC), Chapter 23 along with California Code
of Regulations, Title 24 or any other specific code or ordinance that may be applicable to the specific
project.
B. Do not use power driven fasteners unless approved by the Structural Engineer
1.03 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Keep materials under cover and dry Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet
surfaces. Stack lumber as well as plywood or other panels; provide for air circulation within and around
stacks and under temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar materials.
1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring,
nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports to allow attachment of other work. Cooperate with other
trades to prevent the duplication of rough hardware furnished.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 LUMBER AND MATERIALS
A. Framing Lumber
1 Specified lumber dimensions are nominal, provide actual sizes as required by PS 20.
2. Surfacing Dressed lumber surface four sides (S4S), seasoned with 19 percent maximum moisture
content at time of dressing and shipment for sizes 2 inches or less in nominal thickness.
3. Species Stress grade and wood species as noted on Structural Drawings.
B. Nailer at Roof No. 2 or better
C. Blocking: Utility grade or better
D Fasteners: Provide size, type, material and finish as indicated and as recommended by applicable
standards, complying with applicable Federal Specifications for nails, staples, screws, bolts, nuts,
washers, and anchoring devices. Provide metal hangers and framing anchors of the size and type
recommended by the manufacturer for each use including recommended nails. Where rough carpentry is
exposed to weather in ground contact, or in areas of high relative humidity provide fasteners and
anchorages with a hot -dip zinc coating.
E. Roof Hatch Access Platform 3 ,4-inch C -D interior APA plywood with exterior glue
F Structural Sheathing: Structural 1 C -B exterior APA plywood, or oriented strand board (OSB), thickness
as indicated on drawings.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -6 05/20/09
1
G. Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting telephone equipment and on walls behind fixtures, fire retardant
plywood C -D plugged interior with exterior glue not Tess than 15/32 -inch thick.
H. Wall plywood used to back E.I.F.S. canopy exterior on cold rolled framing, or to support wall signage on
metal buildings, and for the back side of canopy parapet wall, C -D exterior APA plywood, minimum of
15/32 inch thick or as indicated on the drawings.
2.02 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT (PT)
A. Preservative treatment for lumber shall conform to AWPA Standards U1 and T1
1 Use water -borne salt preservatives for painted, stained or exposed natural wood products in both
above ground and ground contact applications.
2. Do not use creosote.
3. Whenever necessary to cut, notch, or drill treated lumber paint new surfaces thoroughly with two
saturating coats of the preservative material used in the treatment of the lumber
4 Do not treat Douglas Fir Coast Region with ACC or CCA.
5. Redry items after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent, and stamp 'dry"
B. Use preservative treatment lumber (PT) as follows:
1 Lumber in contact with concrete or masonry
2. Lumber in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing.
3. Fence posts.
4 Fence boards and lumber within 18 inches of finished grade.
5. All lumber exposed to the elements.
2.03 FIRE RETARDING TREATMENT
A. Fire retardant treatment for plywood shall conform to AWPA Standards C27 and as follows:
1 Flame spread rating of less than 25 in accordance with ASTM E -84 NFPA 255, or UL 723.
2. Redry items after treatment to maximum moisture content of 15 percent.
B. Use fire retardant treated plywood (FT) as follows:
1 All locations
2.04 PRE ENGINEERED WOOD TRUSSES
A. Pre engineered wood trusses shall be designed and produced by an authorized "Gang -Nail' truss
manufacturer or approved equal. Engineering drawings and design calculations shall bear the seal of a
professional engineer registered in the state in which the project is located and shall be submitted to the
original building design engineer for review prior to fabrication. The truss fabricator shall supply all
hardware and fasteners required for joining timber members.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Accurately locate members to line and dimension. Ensure full contact of timbers framed together Ensure
let -in members in full contact on two surfaces.
B. Securely attach work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as shown and as required by recognized
standards.
C. Provide all supports, guys and braces required to stabilize structure during construction.
D Refer to details and tables on drawings for specific nailing requirements. In the absence of specific
instructions, use 16d nails for two inch thick material and 8d for one inch thick material. Drill nail holes 75
percent of nail diameter where splitting occurs, and for 20d and larger nails. Replace split or otherwise
damaged structural members. Machine applied nailing shall be allowed provided satisfactory installation
is demonstrated on the job and the acceptance of the structural engineer obtained prior to the use of
machine applied nails.
E. Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of work, and units which are too small to
use in fabricating work with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement
F Provide and install all bolts extending through two or more wood members. Drill bolt holes 1/32 inch
larger than bolt diameter, with members held in place true to line. Ensure full engagement of nut, but
projection of bolt beyond shall not exceed one bolt diameter Tighten bolts when installed and again
immediately before concealing with further construction, or upon completion of work. Provide malleable
iron or steel plate washers under the head and nuts of bolts where bearing on wood.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -6 05/20/09
2
G Screws shall be of sizes and types as indicated on drawings. They shall be zinc plated and be of sufficient
strength to cause failure in the wood rather than the screw itself
H. Do not cut, notch or bore framing members for passage of pipes or conduits except as detailed on
drawings. Reinforce all framing members damaged by cutting.
3.02 SILLS AND PLATES
A. Wood plates, sills and sleepers which rest on concrete slabs or masonry foundations shall be made of
No.2 pressure treated wood. For all structural walls, anchor sill plates to slabs or foundations per the
requirements and details contained within the drawings. For all non structural walls, space anchors 4 foot
on center maximum and not less than 1 foot away from the end of the wall. All walls 2 foot and longer
shall have at least 2 anchors.
3.03 STUD WALLS AND PARTITIONS
A. Provide studs in continuous lengths without splices.
B. Provide single bottom plate and double top plate, stagger joints 4 feet in top plates.
C Frame corners and intersections with three studs or as detailed on drawings.
D Frame openings in non structural walls with double studs each side and double headers placed on edge
resting on cripple studs. Truss or block over headers. For openings in structural walls see drawings for
specific requirements and framing details.
E. Provide continuous horizontal blocking row at mid height of single story partitions over 8 feet high and at
midpoint of multi -story partitions, using 2 inch thick members of the same width as the wall or partition.
F Cut -in blocks wherever necessary for bracing or backing for applied finish or fixtures. Cut -in 2 inch solid
blocking between studs at all horizontal joints in non structural plywood wall sheathing.
G. Provide continuous perimeter backing at ceiling plane for longitudinal forces of wall secured suspended
ceiling or lighting systems.
3.04 WOOD TRUSSES
A. Trusses shall be engineered for all live, dead, and uplift loads listed in the drawings along with any other
specific requirements so noted.
B. All trusses must bear directly above a wall stud or studs.
C All trusses must be securely braced during erection and permanently as required by the truss
manufacturer
3.05 ROOF AND CEILING FRAMING
A. Lay joists and rafters with crowning edge up and with full end bearing.
B. Frame for openings, hatches, vents, etc. as required.
C Install 2x3 cross bridging at 10 feet maximum at joists over 8 inches in depth, and 2x3 cross bridging or 2
inch solid blocking between roof rafters and ceiling joists. Approved metal cross bridging nailed using all
nail holes may be used in lieu of the woos bridging. Do not nail bottom of cross bridging at roof rafters
until after the installation of roof sheathing.
D Install plywood roof sheathing or wood decking over roof rafters as indicated on drawings. Thickness and
nailing requirements shall be as indicated on structural drawings.
E. Provide special framing where shown for eaves, overhangs, dormers, towers and similar conditions, if any
are indicated on drawings.
End of Section
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -6 05/20/09
3
JAProduction Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -6 05/20/09
4
This Page Left Blank
DIVISION 6 SECTION 06200 PLASTIC SLEEVES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL INFORMATION
A. Contractor shall be furnish and install plastic sleeves for all pipe guards.
B. Vendor contact for this product will be:
Chris Parenti
Ideal Shield LLC
2555 Clark Street P O.Box 09210
Detroit, MI 48209 -1355
Tel. 313 -842 7290 Fax 313 -842 -7860
C. Sleeves shall be warranted against fading or color change for a period of five years from the date of
substantial completion. Sleeves not meeting this requirement shall be replaced at no cost to AutoZone.
D The minimum lead time on delivery of plastic sleeves will be two weeks and Contractor shall place order
in a timely fashion to ensure construction schedule is not adversely impacted.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PLASTIC SLEEVES
A. Sleeves shall have a dome top and be made from Lo- Density Thermoplastic Polyethylene with ultra
violet and anti static additives. Nominal wall thickness will be 0.250 inch. Color for all sleeves will be
red.
B. Each sleeve shall be shop cut to length prior to being shipped to the job site. Contractor shall be
responsible for giving accurate dimensions to Ideal Shield at the time of order placement. Sleeve height
will be from top of surrounding pavement to the top of the exposed pipe.
C Sleeves shall be sized to fit over a standard 6 inch diameter steel pipe.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Ensure the steel pipe cores are set true, correctly aligned and well anchored in below grade concrete
encasement.
B. Fill cores with concrete and strike level across the top of the pipe.
C Install foam tape at the top and bottom of each pipe in accordance with sleeve manufacturer's printed
instructions.
D Install sleeve over pipe following manufacturer's printed instructions
E. If sleeve is still loose on the pipe core install two self tapping screws through the sleeve into the pipe 1
inch above the surface of the surrounding pavement.
End of Section
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -6 05/20/09
1
This Page Lett Blank
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -6 05/20/09
2
DIVISION 7 SECTION 07100 BELOW GRADE WATERPROOFING
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Install waterproofing materials when finished grade will be above finished floor or when adjacent grades
or drainage may place water or run -off against the exterior wall, which could affect the overall integrity of
the store's environment.
B. Apply waterproofing materials when substrates are dry and air temperatures are above 40 degrees F for
applications below 40 degrees F consult material manufacturer
C. Do not apply waterproofing materials to wet or damp surfaces or surfaces treated with curing and parting
compounds unless they have been completely removed chemically or mechanically
D Waterproofing materials are not intended as an exposed or wearing surface and will require the
installation of a protector board prior to backfilling.
E. Prior to commencement of waterproofing insure all surface water is diverted away from wall and
foundation surfaces.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Waterproofing shall be HLM 5000T as manufactured by Sonneborn, which is a cold trowel applied,
membrane system consisting of a single component, moisture curing, bitumen modified polyurethane.
B. Protector Board shall be 1/2 inch thick, closed cell foam insulation board.
C Parge coat for concrete block walls shall be Sonoblock as manufactured by Sonneborn.
D Sealant for joints over 1/8 inch in width shall be Sonolastic as manufactured by Sonneborn.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Concrete walls to be waterproofed must be properly water cured at least 14 days, all curing compounds
must be removed prior to application of waterproofing.
B. Concrete block walls to be waterproofed shall first receive a cementitious parge coat of Sonobiock,
applied at the rate of 400 square feet per bag. Parge coat should dry at least 7 days before applying
waterproofing.
C. Before applying final membrane, all joints, cracks and openings around protrusions must be sealed by
caulking or pre- striping with a preliminary coating of the waterproofing and allowed to dry overnight.
D Seal all joints over 1/8 inch in width a Sonolastic sealant and prevent waterproofing membrane from
adhering to the joint sealant.
E. Trowel apply waterproofing membrane in accordance manufacturer's printed instructions and to achieve
minimum 55 wet mil thickness
F After membrane has cured, install protector board over membrane prior to backfilling against wall.
End of Section
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -7 05/20/09
1
This Page Left Blank
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -7 05/20/09
2
DIVISION 7 SECTION 07200 BUILDING INSULATION
07200 BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractor to furnish all wall insulation from one manufacturer
B. Protect insulation from contact with moisture.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Fiberglass batts, kraft paper faced, 3 -1/2" inches thick with an R -Value of 13.0 and 6 -1/4 inches thick
with an R -Value of 19.0.
B. Acceptable manufacturers.
1 Johns Manville
2. Owens Corning
3. CertainTeed
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install fiberglass batts where indicated on drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,
paying specific attention to the required location of vapor barrier Install batts between metal studs on
exterior walls, including area above the storefront. Insure complete and tight fit from floor to underside of
roof deck.
B. Position insulation so that it will remain securely in place until the gypsum wallboard is installed, and so
that the kraft paper face will be in contact with the backside of the gypsum wallboard, when the wallboard
is installed.
C. In projects with suspended ceilings install 6 -1/4" fiberglass batts above the ceiling grid with the vapor
barrier facing the back side of the ceiling tile. Insure full coverage over the entire area of the ceiling with
no gaps or spaces between pieces of insulation.
End of Section
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -7 05/20/09
1
This Page Left Blank
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -7 05/20/09
2
DIVISION 7 SECTION 07220 ROOF INSULATION
07220 ROOF INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The completed roof insulation installation shall conform to Factory Mutual 4450 4470, Class 1 fire rating
and Factory Mutual 1 -90 wind classification, as well as the requirements of Underwriters Laboratory
Construction Number 123.
B. Keep insulation completely dry before, during and after installation. Do not apply insulation to wet
substrate and do not leave insulation exposed to weather No more insulation should be applied than can
be completely covered with the finished roofing membrane on the same day
C Roof insulation must be compatible with the chosen roofing membrane manufacturer recommendations.
It shall be the roofing contractor's responsibility to verify the insulation installation specified herein will be
compatible and acceptable to the membrane manufacturer Notify Owner of any problems encountered.
D The insulation shall develop a minimum 'long term thermal resistance' (LTTR) value of 30 and be
installed in two layers of equal thickness, and mechanically fastened to the steel deck. Additional layers o
tapered insulation used to construct crickets and reverse slopes, shall be installed in such a manner as to
be compatible with both the membrane manufacturer's and Factory Mutual's recommendations. LTTR
values associated with tapered insulation shall be in addition to the minimum value of 30 which is requirec
over the entire roof area.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. The thermal roof insulation shall be rigid, closed cell, polyisocyanurate foam faced with a universal, black,
fiberglass reinforced mat on both sides. Thickness shall be uniform over the entire roof area and shall
produce a minimum long term thermal resistance value (R- Value) of 30 and have a minimum compressive
strength of 20 psi. Overall sheet sizes of the insulation shall be 48 inches in width by 96 inches in length.
B. Material utilized to create tapered layers required to form crickets and reverse slopes shall be either
manufactured of the same material as the base layer or perlite depending on the roof membrane.
Tapered layers shall have a minimum slope of 1 4 inch per foot.
C. Separator for built -up roofing membrane only shall be 1 /2 inch thick perlite board.
D Fasteners shall be galvanized screw type (not black) with metal cap plate as approved by Factory Mutual
for the above specified installation.
E. Polyisocyanurate insulation board:
1 Atlas Roofing Corporation
2. Firestone
3. GAF Materials
4 Johns Manville
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Apply bottom layer boards with long joints parallel to and with full bearing on metal deck flutes, stagger
short joints. Long joints shall center on deck flutes and minimum bearing shall be 2 inches.
B. Offset the second layer of insulation from the one below by a minimum of 6 inches in both directions, so
that no joint in the second layer is directly above a joint in the first layer
C. Secure each unit of insulation in both layers with at least one (1) fastener per 3 square feet (minimum of
11 fasteners per 4 foot by 8 foot board and 6 fasteners per 4 foot by 4 foot board) located as specifically
recommended by the manufacturer and in accordance with Factory Mutual Requirements for an 1 -90 wind
classification. On top of the two uniform layers of insulation mechanically fasten tapered insulation for
crickets and reverse flows as indicated on drawings in accordance with Factory Mutual and membrane
manufacturer's requirements.
D For built -up roof membranes, on top of the mechanically fastened insulation, mop in required uniform
thickness as well as tapered perlite boards with asphalt bitumen at a rate of 3 gallons per square. Offset
JAProduction Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -7 05/20/09
1
top layer joints at least 6 inches from bottom layer Walk in boards to obtain maximum adhesive contact.
Seal all penetrations and joints of insulation to prevent asphalt drips.
E. Provide 4' cant strips where built -up roofing will abut vertical surfaces such as parapet walls and roof
curbs. Secure cants with solid hot asphalt mopping. Do not use cant strips with PVC roofing.
F If fire separation is required, install with construction adhesive, either perlite or gypsum boards with long
joints parallel to and with full bearing on metal deck flutes, stagger short joints. Long joints shall center on
deck flutes and minimum bearing shall be 2 inches. Offset the insulation layer installed so that joints do
not align and anchor through the fire separation layer to the deck.
3.02 PROTECTION
A. Remove excess materials, trash debris, equipment and parts from the work.
B. Remove, repair or replace damaged or stained items caused by roofing work.
End of Section
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -7 05/20/09
2
DIVISION 7 SECTION 07240 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISF
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The exterior insulation and finish system (E.I.F.S.) consists of adhesive, insulation board, reinforcing
mesh, base coat and finish.
B. All materials shall be installed in accordance with system manufacturer's published instructions
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The system shall be one that is recognized and approved by the local governing agency The contractor
shall furnish manufacturer's test reports if requested by AutoZone.
B. The system shall have been tested for fire performance in accordance with ASTM E -119, and ULC -S101
The contractor shall furnish manufacturer's test reports if requested by AutoZone.
C The system manufacturer shall have been in business continuously for a minimum of ten years, and the
manufacturer's approved installers shall install the system.
1.03 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Store all materials protected from weather and direct sunlight at temperatures above 40 degrees F
B. The ambient air and wall temperature shall be 40 degrees F minimum and shall remain so for at least 24
hours after installation. Consult system manufacturer for requirements regarding installations where
temperatures are less than 40 degrees F
1.04 WARRANTY
A. The system manufacturer through its approved installer shall furnish Owner with a written five year
replacement repair guarantee against the following occurrences:
1 Delamination
2. Color fading of finish coat
3. System component material failure
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Adhesive: 100 percent, copolymer emulsion adhesive that is waterproof and vapor permeable.
B. Insulation Board: Aged, expanded polystyrene, 1 pound per cubic foot, 1 inch thick minimum, conforming
to ASTM C -578, type IV
C Reinforcing Fabric: A woven open weave glass fiber mesh, to be alkaline resistant coated, and have a
weight of at least 20 grams per square yard.
D Base -Coat: A 20 percent Portland cement and 80 percent acrylic polymer -based premixed grout.
E. Finish. Redi -mixed 100 percent acrylic -based wall coating having integral color and aggregate.
1 Color requirements shall be as follows:
a. Color for the sign band on the front wall shall be as indicated on the drawings.
b. Color for walls and other items shall be as indicated on the drawings.
c. Submit samples as and when required by Owner's representative.
2. Aggregate texture shall be Fine Sand.
F Water Clean and potable.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be performed by manufacturer's approved and trained applicators.
B. The finish system shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer published instructions.
C. The surface to receive the EIFS shall be structurally sound, clean, dry and uniform
D Exterior finish shall be applied to insulation board.
E. Ambient temperature shall be 40 degrees F or higher during installation and for at least 24 hours
thereafter Avoid application in direct sunlight.
F Adhesive to be applied in ribbons using a 3/16" trowel, and running horizontal with the building walls.
G Maintain surface flatness with maximum variation of 1/8' within 10 feet.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -7 05/20/09
1
H. No exposed or partially exposed fabric will be acceptable.
I. Finish shall be applied in a continuous application, always working to a smooth wet edge. Finish shall be
uniform, sand -type texture.
J Mixing of materials to be done with clean, rust free, high -speed mixer Small amounts of water may be
added to the finish, per specification to aid workability
K. Where indicated on the drawings install base coat and reinforced finish coats directly on the smooth face
concrete block.
L. Finished EIFS surfaces shall be painted see Section 09900 of the Specifications for requirements.
M. At completion of work clean up all areas and remove all material from surfaces not scheduled to receive
finish coat.
End of Section
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -7 05/20/09
2
DIVISION 7 SECTION 07500 ROOFING MEMBRANE
07500 ROOFING MEMBRANE
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. AutoZone's preferred membrane choice is Single Ply PVC, however Contractor shall have the option of
choosing either of the two specified roofing membranes:
1 Mechanically Fastened Single Ply PVC Roof Section 07510.
2. Smooth Surface Built -up Roof with Applied Reflective Coating Section 07520.
a. Selection of this membrane by Contractor shall require prior written approval of either the
AutoZone Regional Construction Manager or the Director of Construction
B. The completed roof installation shall conform to Factory Mutual 4450 4470, Class 1 fire rating and
Factory Mutual 1 -90 wind classification, as well as the requirements of Underwriters Laboratory
Construction Number 123.
C For roof insulation requirements, see Section 07220 of Specifications.
D Only membrane manufacturers and their approved, authorized representatives shall be allowed to install
the roofing membrane as well as the roof insulation.
1.02 GUARANTEE
A. At AutoZone's sole discretion, prior to making final payment, AutoZone may request Contractor to furnist
an extended written guarantee of products and workmanship provided in the roofing system If so
requested, Contractor shall prepare cost estimate for AutoZone's approval to furnish said guarantee.
B. Guarantee shall provide extended coverage of no Tess than 5 -year beginning after the initial one -year
warranty
C Guarantee shall be non prorated, manufacturer's warranty for workmanship and materials comprising
entire roofing system including insulation, membrane, base flashing and all related accessories. If
membrane manufacturer did not furnish insulation, then this guarantee shall apply to the installation of the
insulation only and a separate material guarantee shall be furnished.
D Guaranty shall state that all leaks occurring within this period shall be repaired at no additional cost to
AutoZone, and shall also state period of coverage, roof membrane provider's and AutoZone's
responsibilities, excluded items, and provisions for assignment shall be stated.
E. Limit of Liability No Dollar Limit.
End of Section
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -7 05/20/09
1
This Page Left Blank
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -7 05/20/09
2
DIVISION 7 SECTION 07510 PVC ROOFING (Option 1)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 ROOFING SYSTEM
A. One ply mechanically fastened Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) membrane.
1.02 REQUIREMENTS
A. Roofing applicator shall be approved by the manufacturer of roofing systems and shall provide letter
stating same.
B. Store all roll goods on a hard, smooth surface per manufacturer's instructions.
C Do not apply roofing when substrate is wet.
D All liquids shall be stored at 40 degrees F and above.
1.03 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS SYSTEM
A. Duro -Last Roofing, Inc. Duro -Last
B. GAF Materials: Everguard
C. Johns Manville: JM- PVC -50
D Sarnafil: S327
E. Seaman Corp. Fibertite
F Stevens Roofing Systems: Stevens EV
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Membrane: Minimum 0.050 -inch thick polyester reinforced PVC, surface color white, ASTM D4434
B. Solvent: As recommended by manufacturer to clean membrane.
C. Lap Sealant: As recommended by manufacturer
D Caulk: One part polyurethane.
E. Adhesive: As recommended by manufacturer used for bonding membrane to vertical surfaces.
F Flashing: Minimum 0.050 inch thick PVC membrane or pre- formed pipe boots.
D Fasteners, Plates, and Bars: As required by system for proper attachments.
H. Walkway Pads: Minimum 0.10 -inch thick PVC 24 inches x 24 inches.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Apply PVC roofing in strict accordance with manufacturers printed instructions.
B. Roofing materials shall be thoroughly dry when applied and shall be closed in at end of each day
3.02 MEMBRANE APPLICATION
A. Unroll roofing membrane and place without stretching. Allow 30 minutes minimum before fastening or
splicing for membrane to relax.
B. Install two (2) half -width sheets with long dimension perpendicular to roof slope.
C Adjoining sheets shall be lapped a minimum of 5 inches to allow for a proper field splice. Overlaps shall
be shingled with the flow of water
D Fasteners, plates and bars shall be installed per manufacturer's recommendations and Factory Mutual
requirements.
E. Membrane to be fully adhered to parapet walls unless prohibited by membrane manufacturer
F At inside corners of parapet walls provide for a minimum of 1 lh inch overlap and solid hot air weld the pig
ear flap.
G. At junction of parapet wall and roof plane, provide base tie in per membrane manufacturer's requirements
3.03 MEMBRANE SPLICE APPLICATION
A. Clean all seam surfaces as required by manufacturer
B. All seams shall be heat welded in strict accordance with the membrane manufacturers' requirements and
guidelines.
C Seams shall be inspected for continuous bonding.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -7 05/20/09
1
D Apply sealant in continuous bead along all exposed seam edges.
E. Apply caulk to membrane edges at parapets, roof edges, and as required by manufacturer
F Membrane flashing shall be fully adhered to roof membrane and to adjacent vertical surfaces.
3.04 WALKWAY PAD APPLICATION
A. Provide walkway pads around the perimeter of HVAC rooftop units. Provide 6 -inch space between pads
for proper drainage. Pads around the perimeter of the rooftop units are to be within 2 inches of the vertical
face of the units. See drawings for walkway layout.
B. Heat weld perimeter of pad and apply seam sealant at all welded edges.
End of Section
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -7 05/20/09
2
DIVISION 7 SECTION 07520 BUILT -UP ROOFING (Option 2)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 ROOFING SYSTEM
A. Four (4) ply fiberglass, smooth surface with top glaze coat and reflective coating.
B. The reflective coating shall be applied by the Roofing Contractor after the top glaze coat has had an
opportunity to cure.
1.02 REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractor must secure written approval from either the AutoZone Regional Construction Manager or the
Director of Construction before proceeding with this membrane option.
B. Roofing applicator shall be approved by the manufacturer of roofing systems and shall provide letter
stating same.
C Store rolled goods on edge on a hard, smooth surface.
D Do not apply roofing when substrate is wet.
E. Keep roll goods at 40 degrees F and above.
F For roofing applications when ambient temperature is below 45 degrees F follow material manufacturer's
specific printed instructions.
1.03 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS SYSTEM
A. Firestone Building Products: I -4F -C
B. GAF Corporation: I -0 -4 -C
C. Johns Manville: 4 GIS
D Tamko Corporation: 605
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Bitumen. ASTM D312 Types II and hl asphalt.
B. Felts: ASTM D2178 Type VI
C Roofing Cement: ASTM D4586, Asphalt based flashing cement, asbestos -free.
D Top Glaze Coat: Bitumen asphalt type II
E. Reflective Surface Coating: Acu -Flex elastomeric coating as manufactured by Advanced Coating System:
Inc. 2295 Towne Lake Parkway STE 116, #288, Woodstock, GA. 30189. Toll Free: 800 -587 3758, Fax:
678 -445 -0399, Phone: 678- 445 -0040. Alternative products will be considered provided they carry an
Energy Star solar reflectance rating after 3 years of 0.85 or better Submit appropriate documentation to
AutoZone Project Manager with request for approval
F Walkway Pads: 24 -inch square asphalt impregnated mineral boards with slate granular surface.
D Tapered Edge Strips: Perlite board taper strips ASTM C728.
H. Base Flashing: ASTM D5147 Polyester reinforced SBS modified bitumen.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Apply built -up roofing in strict accordance with manufacturers printed instructions.
B. Roofing materials shall be thoroughly dry when applied and shall be closed in at end of each day
3.02 PROTECTION OF OTHER WORK
A. Protect metal, glass, plastic and unpainted surfaces within wind -borne range of bitumen application.
Protect neighboring work, properties, cars and person from spills and wind -borne bitumen surfacing.
3.03 ROOF MEMBRANE SYSTEM
A. Description: Four hot mopped plies plus smooth surfacing over perlite thermal barrier and accepted roof
insulation.
B. Plies: Four shingled plies, lapped 24 -2/3 inches, using starter sheets.
C Type of Felt: Fiberglass.
D Interply bitumen: Type II or III asphalt.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -7 05/20/09
E. Smooth Surfacing: Glaze coat of bitumen over top felt layer then after proper curing, apply the reflective
coating, to a minimum dry film thickness of 20 mils.
3.04 APPLICATION TEMPERATURES OF ASPHALT
A. Type II asphalt: 350 to 415 degrees F
B. Type III asphalt: 365 to 435 degrees F
3.05 ROOFING PLY APPLICATION
A. Apply uniform, solid bitumen mopping at the rate of 23 to 27 pounds per 100 square feet. Apply bitumen
the full width of the sheet, and sufficiently hot to obtain complete embedment of ply to ply
B. Roll felt into hot bitumen. Extend each ply of roofing felts to the top of the parapet wall.
C. Broom in promptly to eliminate voids and obtain total embedment.
D Apply layer of roofing cement to top layer of wall felts and cover with 90 pound roll roofing. Lap joints in
direction of water flow
3.06 SMOOTH SURFACING
A. Squeegee glaze coat of bitumen over last felt uniformly at the rate of 15 pounds per 100 square feet.
B. Contractor shall allow the glaze coat to properly cure before applying the reflective coating. Cure time will
vary depending on the time of year the roof was installed but in no case shall the cure period be less than
90 days after the glaze coat installation.
C Pressure wash the roof surface prior to the application of the reflective coating, roof surface must be clean
and dry
D Apply roof coating at the rate of 100 square feet per gallon this should produce a dry film thickness of 10
mils. Allow the first coat to cure for 24 to 48 hours depending on humidity and temperature before
applying the second coat at the same rate. Finished coating should have an average thickness of 20 mils
and utilize 2 gallons per 100 square feet.
E. Follow the coating manufacturer's printed instructions for all aspects of the installation including the
following restrictions and limitations:
1 Do not apply materials during inclement weather or when precipitation is imminent.
2. Do not apply materials to wet, dirty or frozen surfaces.
3. Do not apply materials when temperatures are below 40 degrees F or above 100 degrees F
4 Do not apply materials when the relative humidity levels are above 88 percent.
3.07 WALKWAY PAD APPLICATION
A. Provide walkway pads around the perimeter of HVAC rooftop units. Set walkway pads in hot, Type III
asphalt at the rate of 23 TO 27 pounds per 100 square feet. Provide 6 -inch space between pads for
proper drainage. Pads around the perimeter of the rooftop units are to be within 2 inches of the vertical
face of the units. See drawings for walkway layout.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div 7 05/20/09
End of Section
DIVISION 7 SECTION 07600 SHEET METAL FLASHING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Roof edging
B. Vent and Pipe flashing
C Gutters and Downspouts
D Scuppers, Overflow Openings and Conductor Heads
E. Coping
F Related Work:
1 Parapet flashing
1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Coping System Shall consist of metal coping cap with galvanized steel anchor cleats and gutter suppor
chairs for capping any straight top parapet wall. The system shall be watertight, maintenance free, and
not require exposed fasteners or sealant. Joints shall be butt type with concealed splice plates.
B. Performance Characteristics:
1 Coping sections shall expand and contract freely while mechanically locked in place on anchor
cleats.
2. Coping sections shall lock to anchor cleats by mechanical pressure from support chairs.
3. All coping cover joints shall be underlayed with gutter support chairs capable of draining water
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Metal Flashing: 22 gauge, G90 coating phosphotized, ASTM A525, unless otherwise indicated on
drawings.
B. Solder 50 -50 Composition for galvanized metals.
C. Flux: Raw muriatic acid or a type specifically suited to the conditions used.
D Nails, Rivets, and Fasteners: Shall have rust resistive coating compatible to, and designed for the
material being anchored.
E. Plumbing Vent or Pipe Penetration Flashing: Pipe boot of appropriate size for the vent or pipe penetration
and manufactured from either Neoprene for built -up roofs, or the same material as the chosen single ply
membrane.
F Gutters: Aluminum minimum thickness 0.032 inch material, formed in to a 5 inch wide seamless box
gutter Downspouts when utilized with gutter shall be aluminum of the same thickness material, with a
minimum size of 6 inches wide by 4 inches deep.
G. Scuppers, Overflow Openings and Conductor Heads: Shall be fabricated from 22 gauge galvanized steel.
Downspouts when utilized with conductor heads shall be fabricated of the same material, with a minimum
size of 6 inches wide by 4 inches deep.
H. Wall Coping:
1 For straight top parapet walls, minimum 0.050 inch aluminum, pre- fabricated, with Fluropon -Kynar
500 finish, color to be black unless noted otherwise on the drawings. Coping system to be
complete with all necessary cleats, splice plates, corners, end caps, pier caps, etc.
2. For walls with cornice, coping to be fabricated from 22 gauge galvanized steel to dimensions
indicated on drawings and be complete with all necessary cleats and splice plates.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install metal flashing as detailed on drawings and in a manner that will ensure watertight conditions.
B. Fabricate metal flashing with lines, risers and angles sharp, true and plain surfaces free of waves and
buckles and install with no exposed fasteners.
3.02 PLUMBING VENT OR PIPE PENETRATION FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Install prefabricated boots in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for the
type of roofing system being applied.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -7 05/20/09
1
3.03 GUTTER INSTALLATION
A. Fabricate and install gutters in a manner to insure positive drainage to downspouts. Make connections
between gutter and downspout watertight. Install splash block at base of downspout, or connect to
underground drainage system
3.04 SCUPPER, OVERFLOW OPENINGS AND CONDUCTOR HEAD INSTALLATION
A. Fabricate items to the dimensions indicated on the drawings. If none are shown then fabricate to the
following minimum sizes: scuppers 6 inches wide and 4 inches high; overflow openings shall be the same
size as the scupper• conductor heads 10 inches wide by 10 inches high by 8 inches deep.
B. Make the connection between conductor head and downspout watertight. Install splash block at the base
of each downspout or connect downspout to underground drainage system
3.05 COPING SYSTEM
A. Verify the parapet wall and substrates are ready to start coping installation, correct all deficiencies before
starting. Install coping system in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and
recommendations using mechanical fasteners where required. Fasteners shall have a minimum pull -out
resistance of 240 pounds and be suitable for parapet substrates.
B. Where coping cover is field fabricated coping cleats shall be run continuous, straight and true over face of
masonry and or cornice and be attached to top of nailer Cleats shall'be fabricated of 20 gauge
galvanized steel and joints of cleats shall be staggered in relation to coping cover joints.
C In all cases, splice plates shall be fabricated from the same material as the coping cover and be a
minimum of 6 inches wide.
D Finish color of coping cover shall be as noted on drawings and shall either be achieved by field painting or
having the coping factory finished. Painting of coping must have prior approval of AutoZone Construction
Project Manager
End of Section
J•1Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div 7 05/20/09
2
DIVISION 7 SECTION 07700 ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Verify that other trades with related work are complete before installing roof hatch rail system
B. Mounting surfaces shall be straight and secure; substrates shall be of proper width.
C Refer to the construction documents, shop drawings, and manufacturer's installation instructions
D Observe all appropriate OSHA safety guidelines for this work.
1.02 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's standard warranty Materials shall be free of defects in material and workmanship for a
period of twenty -five years from the date of purchase. Should a part fail to function in normal use within
this period, manufacturer shall furnish a new part at no charge.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. The BILCO Company P 0 Box 1203, New Haven, CT 06505
Tel: 203 934 -6363, Fax: 203 933 -8478
Internet address: http: //www.bilco.com
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Roof hatch shall be 2 foot 6 inches by 3 foot, factory assembled, 14 gauge cover and curb, 22 gauge
cover liner galvanized with red oxide primer Type "S" roof scuttle.
B. Hatch rail system shall be Model RL -S to match the roof hatch.
C. Performance characteristics:
1 High visibility safety yellow color shall be molded in.
2. Hatch rail system shall attach to the cap flashing of the roof hatch and shall not penetrate any
roofing material.
3. Hatch rail system shall satisfy the requirements of OSHA 29 CFR 1910.23 and shall meet OSHA
strength requirements with a factor of safety of two.
4 All components shall be of UV and corrosion resistant construction with a twenty -five year warranty
5. Gate shall be self closing.
D Posts and Rails: Shall be round pultruded reinforced fire retardant yellow fiberglass treated with a UV
inhibitor
E. Hardware: Mounting brackets shall be 1/4 thick hot dip galvanized steel. Hinges and post guides shall b
6063T5 aluminum. Fasteners shall be Type 316 stainless steel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install roof hatch where indicated on drawings and in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions
and recommendations.
B. The hatch rail system shall be field assembled and installed per the manufacturer's instructions.
End of Section
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -7 05/20/09
1
This Page Left Blank
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -7 05/20/09
2
DIVISION 7 SECTION 07900 SEALANTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Install sealant between all dissimilar materials as well as all expansion, construction and saw cut joints.
B. Joint width and depth shall be 1/4 inch minimum and 1/2 inch maximum
C Joints which are deeper than 1/2 inch shall have their overall depth reduced by the use of closed cell
backer rod.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Exterior
1 Masonry Control Joints: Paintable, polyurethane base, multi- component, chemical curing, type II non•
sagging, conforming to FS TT S227E with 25 percent joint movement capability
2. Aluminum Framing System Silicone base, one component, chemical curing, conforming to FS TT
S1543A with 25 percent joint movement capability, color to match adjacent surface.
3. Control Joints in Paving: Polyurethane based, one component, self leveling, moisture curing,
conforming to FS TT- S- 00230C Class A, Type 1 Color gray, to closely match pavement color
4 Expansion Joints in Paving: For joints not indicated to receive a pre molded cap strip, polyurethane
based, one component, self leveling, moisture curing, conforming to FS TT S- 00230C, Class A, Type
1 Color gray to closely match pavement color
5. Hollow Metal Frames and Other Openings: Silicone base, one component, chemical curing,
conforming to FS TT- S1543A with 25 percent joint movement capability color to match adjacent
surface.
B. Interior
1 Control Joints in Slab: Semi rigid, two components, 100% solids compound, with a minimum Shore A
hardness of 80.
2. General Purpose: Paintable, acrylic base, one component, solvent curing, non- staining, non bleeding,
non sagging conforming to FS TT -S- 230, Type II with 7.5 percent joint movement capability
C Primer Non staining type recommended by caulking manufacturer to suit application.
D Joint Cleaner Non corrosive type recommended by caulking manufacturer to suit application.
E. Joint Filler Round backer rods of either open or closed cell polyethylene foam dependant on the sealant
manufacturer's recommendation, oversized 25 to 50 percent larger than the width of the joint to allow for
compression.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Clean and prepare joints in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. Remove loose material
and other foreign matter that might impair adhesions of caulking.
B. Install backer rod where required.
C. Ensure that joint forming material is compatible with caulking.
D Comply strictly with manufacturers printed instructions.
E. Remove excess caulking material from surfaces adjacent to caulked joints.
F For interior building slab control joints do not install semi -rigid joint filler prior to thirty (30) days after slab
placement.
End of Section
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -7 05/20/09
1
This Page Left Blank
J•'Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -7 05/20/09
2
DIVISION 8 SECTION 08100 H M DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Deliver and handle doors and frames in a manner to prevent rust and damage, store doors upright,
under cover in a dry area. Provide packaging, separators, banding, spreaders and paper wrappings as
required to completely protect doors during transportation and storage.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.01 FRAMES
A. Steel Door Frames: 16 Gauge cold rolled steel in sizes and profiles as shown on drawings. Frames
shall be knock down type with mitered corners. Prepare frames to receive three silencers. Apply a
shop coat of baked on rust inhibiting primer Provide anchors as required by all conditions and as
indicated on the drawings. Provide foam blocking in both sides of jamb to receive exit device deadbolts.
B. Frame Reinforcement:
1 Hinge: 7 gauge
2. Lock: 12 gauge
3. Closer 12 gauge
4 Hold Open Devices: 12 gauge
5. Panic Devices: 12 gauge
2.02 DOORS
A. Steel Doors: 18 Gauge bonderized steel permanently bonded to rigid polystyrene foam core. Flush
design with seamless faces and edges. 16 gauge hinge and lock channel along with 16 gauge closer
channel top and bottom Apply shop coat of baked -on rust inhibiting primer Install reinforcing plates so
that hardware selected may be installed without thru bolting to door
B. Door Reinforcement:
1 Hinge: 7 gauge
2. Lock: 12 gauge
3. Closer 12 gauge
4 Hold Open Devices: 12 gauge
5. Panic Devices: 14 gauge
C. Wood Doors: Flush, solid core, AWI PC5, five -ply construction, minimum 30 pound density bonded
particleboard core which complies with ANSI A208.1 1 -LD -1 stiles and rails minimum 1 1/2 inch
hardwood bonded to core, crossband nominal 1/16 inch thick, face wood veneers, Luann paint grade,
adhesives Type 1, waterproof Doors shall be pre- machined for hardware specified.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install frames plumb and square in strict accordance with frame manufacturer's instructions.
B. Frames set in masonry walls shall be grouted full as wall is constructed.
C. Hang doors plumb, square and level to provide for easy operation.
End of Section
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -8 05/20/09
1
This Page Left Blank
J•Wroduction Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -8 05/20/09
2
DIVISION 8 SECTION 08250 OVERHEAD ROLLING DOOR
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Contractor shall purchase the overhead rolling door from Advanced Door Technologies as they have
entered into an agreement to fumish an install the rolling overhead door called for in the drawings and
specifications at a fixed price for the door and the installation. Vendor is being given advance notice of
upcoming projects and Contractor shall call Vendor and finalize all arrangements for the delivery and
installation of the door
B. Upon completion of the installation Contractor shall pay Vendor for the cost of the door and installation
along with the cost of freight and any taxes due and owing.
C. If door is being shipped to the job site prior to the time of installation, protect the door and components
from weather and any damage that may occur from the construction processes.
D Contact: Advanced Door Technologies
34 North Crystal Street
East Stroudsburg, PA 18301
Attn: Brian Santore
Tel. 570 421 5929
Fax 570 -421 1795
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.01 OVERHEAD ROLLING DOOR
A. Door shall be 6' -0' wide by 8' -0' high Series 400 Insulated Rolling Door as manufactured by Advanced
Door Technologies. Slats are to be 20 gauge front and 22 gauge back and filled with 1 foam insulation
to produce an R value of 7.2. Each end of alternate slats are to be assembled with polycast nylon end
locks to maintain slat alignment and to act as a wearing surface inside the door guides.
B. Guides shall consist of a minimum of 3" structural steel angles a minimum of 3/16' thick. The guide
depth shall be of a length adequate to provide proper slat penetration and specified wind loading.
Provide windlocks as required.
C Spring counter balance shall be housed in a steep pipe of appropriate diameter and thickness to support
curtain. Deflection shall not exceed 0.03" per foot of door width. Spring to be helical torsion type and
designed to meet a 25 percent safety load factor Spring tension shall be fully adjustable from outside
of end bracket plate.
D End bracket plates shall be steel with a minimum thickness of 3/16" Bracket plates are to house pipe
shaft and counterbalance assembly Shaft shall be attached to end plate by sealed ball bearings
attached to plate.
E. Hood shall be made of 24 gauge steel and supported by intermediate supports as required to prevent
hood sag.
F Weather stripping shall include a neoprene hood baffle, vinyl guide seals and a rubber astragal on the
bottom bar
G Operation shall be by chain and door shall have slide bolts mounted on bottom bar with provisions for
padlocks.
H. Finish for all non galvanized surfaces shall be factory applied gray rust inhibiting primer
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Contractor shall notify Vendor of the details of the project within 7 days from the date of Notice to
Proceed (NTP) so that Vendor can make the necessary arrangements for manufacturing, shipping and
installation crews. Contractor shall also coordinate the timing for the installation.
B. Contractor shall furnish and install the steel channel frame around the masonry opening as indicated on
the drawings. Contractor shall also furnish and install the chain guard once the door is in place.
C Contractor to insure that door vendor installs door plumb, square and level to provide for easy operation.
D At the completion of the installation, Contractor shall notify the above listed vendor within seven (7) days
of any defects or installation problems encountered or existing. Vendor will then have seven (7) days to
get any issues found corrected. Failure to notify the vendor will be taken as the installation and goods
are acceptable.
End of Section
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -8 05/20/09
1
This Page Left Blank
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -8 05/20/09
2
DIVISION 8 SECTION 08400 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SYSTEM DESIGN
A. Framing system manufacturer to design the storefront including entrance doors for the same wind load
requirements as the structure, but in no case less than a wind pressure loading of 25 pounds per square
foot on the gross area of glass and frames, acting both inward and outward. Mullion deflection shall be
limited to L/175.
B. Install reinforcement concealed in framing members as required to comply with both wind and dead
loads imposed on the system
C. Framing systems including entrance doors and all glazing to be used in Florida or other areas that have
specific codes or requirements more stringent than those listed above shall be designed to me those
specific standards and be certified as compliant with those requirements.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. The material supplying vendor if he feels the project is warranted, shall provide complete shop or
installation drawings.
B. Contractor shall be responsible for verifying dimensions and anchorage to adjacent building
components.
1.03 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Protect both glass and aluminum framing from damage before, during, and after installation.
B. Remove all glass with chipped edges from the site immediately
C. Do not deliver glass until framing system has been completed, inspected and is ready to be glazed.
D Remove manufacturer's labels from glass immediately prior to final inspection.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.01 APPROVED VENDORS MANUFACTURERS
A. Framing Systems and Entrance Doors:
1 Vistawall Architectural Products
2. U.S. Aluminum Products
B. High Performance Tinted Glass:
1 Pilkington Glass Co. Evergreen
2. Pittsburgh Plate Glass Atlantica
3. Zeledyne Glass Co. Versalux Green
C. Impact Resistant Glass:
1 Viracon
2. Secur Glass
3. Dupont Glass
4 Oldcastle Glass
2.02 STOREFRONT
A. System. Standard flush glazed, 4-1/2 inches deep by 2" wide, sized for either single glazing or insulated
glazing as noted on the drawings. Hurricane systems, flush glazed, 5 inches deep by 2 1/2" wide, sized
for impact resistant glazing.
B. Frames: Extruded aluminum 6063 -T5 alloy
C. Finish. See drawings for color required. If storefront is required to red then finish shall be PPG Duranar
(70% Kynar) Red Exotic #UC45282XL with #UC51132 clear top coat. If other color is required it shall
be either a hard coat anodic or a special paint with a clear top coat. Aluminum framing fabricator shall
guarantee and warrant finish to Owner for a period of ten (10) years from the date of installation, against
peeling, cracking, fading, flaking, blistering, or chalking.
D Sealant: See Section 07900.
2.03 ENTRANCE DOORS
A. Medium stile, with welded joints, 31/2 inch top rail and stiles and 10 inch bottom rail. Clear finish
anodized aluminum conforming to AA- M12- C22 -A31 Hinges shall be 1 Y2 pair of ball bearing offset
pivot sets for single acting doors, or 1 1 /2 pair ball bearing center pivot sets for double acting doors.
B. Hardware: See section 08700 no substitutions allowed.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -8 05/20/09
1
2.04 GLAZING
A. Door Sidelights and Storefront: 1/4" thick high performance tinted glass. Glass shall be float glass,
tempered or laminated as required by national or local code or ordinance.
B. Insulated Glass: 1 thick overall with 1/4 inch inboard and outboard lights. Use high performance tinted
glass for the outboard light, and clear glass for the inboard Tight. Units shall be tempered as required by
national or local code or ordinance.
C Impact Resistant Glass: 9/16" thick made up of a 1/4 thick high performance tinted glass outboard
layer a 1/4" thick clear glass inboard layer and a 0.090" thick clear interlayer in between.
D Glazing Sealant: General Electric 1200 Series silicone sealant or Silglaze II
E. See drawings for specific requirements and the overall sizes of individual pieces of glass.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install framing system per manufacturer's written installation instructions using sub -sill, end dams, water
diverters, etc. Installation contractor shall furnish and install all system components to provide for a
complete project whether the items are specifically shown in contract documents or not.
B. Set all frames true, level and plumb.
C. Install sealant between frames and surrounding surfaces.
D Install reinforcing within the framing system as necessary to meet the required design wind load.
E. Accurately join corners, only hairline joints are acceptable. Exposed fasteners shall be countersunk and
finished to match framing.
F Any breakmetal required to complete the installation shall be furnished by the storefront framing
manufacturer and be factory finished to match the main framing members.
G. Install all glazing in strict accordance with each glass manufacturers' instructions.
H. Deliver glass with manufacturer's labels attached to each pane. Remove labels immediately prior to
final inspection.
I. Remove glass with chipped edges from the site immediately
J Hang doors and adjust for easy operation.
End of Section
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -8 05/20/09
2
DIVISION 8 SECTION 08700 HARDWARE
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. AutoZone shall furnish the Best Locks for the glass and aluminum doors and the door at the telephone
closet, as well as the touch bar exit device. Contractor shall furnish the remaining required hardware
and install all other hardware and accessories necessary to provide for a complete project whether the
items are specifically scheduled or not.
B. All hardware shall be installed so that no fasteners are exposed or visible on the exterior of the door
C Contractor shall not substitute for the specified Closers.
PART 2 MATERIALS (schedule)
2.01 GLASS AND ALUMINUM ENTRANCE DOORS
A. Closers for Single Acting Doors:
1 All closers shall be mounted on the inside of the building, no closers are to be left exposed on the
exterior to the weather and shall be set for a maximum opening of 110 degrees.
2. Exit doors, LCN 4041 with 4040 -18TJ mounting plate, plated finish US 26D closer mounts on push
side of door at head frame.
B. Closers for Double Acting Doors: Concealed in frame with 90- degree stop, Jackson JED -101 LCN
6031 or Dorma RTS -88.
C Locks: Cylinder lock, Best Co. IE -6A4 (key operation exterior and thumb turn interior unless prohibited
by code). AutoZone furnished Contractor installed.
D Threshold: Aluminum 5 inches wide x 1/2 inch high sized to fit opening.
E. Push Bars: Manufacturer's standard, finish to match door
1 Single Acting Doors: Push side only
2. Double Acting Doors: Both sides of door
F Pulls: Manufacturer's standard, finish to match door
1 Add to all doors that are required to swing out.
G. Flush Bolts: One pair on inactive leaf of pair of double acting doors.
H. Signs: Provide a sign over each glass and aluminum exit door to read as follows "THIS DOOR TO
REMAIN UNLOCKED WHEN BUILDING IS OCCUPIED' Letters to be 1 high, color to be black or
white as dictated by local Building Official.
2.02 Pair 2' -6" x 6' -8" Solid Core Wood Doors At Telephone Cabinet Hollow Metal Frame
A. Hinges: Full mortise, 3 pair 4 -1/2 inch x 4 -1/2 inch, NRP Hager #1279 (1 1/2 pair each leaf).
B. Lock Set: Active leaf -Best 83T Deadlock with Deadbolt, AutoZone furnished and Contractor installed.
C. Surface Bolts: Ives SB360 -T top and bottom 8 inch surface bolts, US 26D (inactive leaf).
2.03 3' -0" x 6' -8" x 1 -3/4 Solid Core Wood Doors At Toilets Hollow Metal Frame
A. Hinges: Full mortise, 1 1/2 pair, 4 -1/2 inch x 4 -1/2 inch, Hager #1279.
B. Lockset: ADA compliant. Lever handle, 2 -3/8 inch backset, Schlage, Levon A4OS, finish #626.
C. Door Stop: Dome floor stop Hager #241 F
D Signs: ADA tactile signage, 6 inches by 8 inches, blue with white symbol and lettering, Hager #368W
women and #368M men.
E. Silencers: Glynn Johnson #64 (3 per strike side of frame).
2.04 3' -0" x 7' -0" x 1 -3/4" Hollow Metal Doors at Exits Hollow Metal Frame
A. Hinges: Full mortise, 1 1/2 pair 4 -1/2 inch x 4 -1/2 inch, NRP Hager #1279 BB.
B. Push Bar Exit Device: Precision 51 x 689 x S300 furnished by AutoZone, installed by contractor
C. Closer LCN #P4041, plated finish US 26D closer is parallel arm and mounts on push side of door
D Viewer 200 degree, solid brass, US 26D finish, Hager #1756, centered in door 5' -0" above floor
E. Silencers: Glynn Johnson #64 (3 per strike side of frame).
F Rigid Jamb Weather -strip Aluminum with vinyl insert, Pemko 303DV
G Threshold: Aluminum 5 inches wide x 1/2 inch high sized to fit opening, Pemko #171A.
H. Door Top Weather -strip Aluminum, full width of frame, Pemko 346D
I. Door Bottom Sweep: Aluminum with nylon brush insert, Pemko 3452DNB.
J. Latch Protector Latch plate, US 32D stainless steel, LP 1 Glynn Johnson.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -8 05/20/09
1
2.05 MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. Corner Guards: Aluminum 3" x 3" x length required x 0.080" thickness with mitered corners.
1 Provide along top edge of toilet rooms.
2. Provide at outside corner of toilet room
3. Provide at both jambs and head of all hollow metal exit doors and jambs of overhead door
4 Vertical member shall be one piece in length.
B. Vinyl Numbers: Install vinyl street numbers of the height required by local authority Numbers are to be
located in the glass panel either above or adjacent to the entrance door Color to be white.
C Chain Guards at Overhead Door Aluminum 6" wide by 8' -0" high by 0.080" thick
1 Provide on chain side of overhead door
2. Cut slot at top of guard if required to allow sprocket wheel to turn freely Maximum 1" clearance on
all sides.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install all hardware and specialty items in strict accordance with manufacturers printed instructions,
utilizing an appropriate anchoring device or adhesive.
B. Installation of door hardware shall be accomplished so that no anchoring devices are visible on the
exterior of the door
C Corner guards and chain guard shall be installed using adhesive so that no fasteners are visible.
Contractor shall exercise care during the installation process and ensure that all edges are firmly
attached with no excess adhesive visible on either the guards or the adjacent wall surface.
End of Section
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -8 05/20/09
2
DIVISION 9 SECTION 09220 CEMENT PLASTER (stucco)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Specifications for
1 Installation of Lathing and Furring for Portland Cement Plaster ASTM C -1063
2. Application of Portland Cement Plaster ASTM C -926
B. Stucco Manufacturers Association (SMA) Finished Plaster Standards
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of installers: For installation of lath and plaster use only skilled journeyman plasterers who
are completely familiar with the referenced standards and with the requirements for this Work.
B. Codes and Standards: In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations, comply with the
materials handling and workmanship provisions of "Referenced Specifications' including current
amendments of the California Lathing and Plastering Contractors' Association, Inc.
1.03 FINISHED COLOR
A. Finished color of the plaster shall be achieved by painting the plaster once it has cured.
B. Refer to Section 09900 of these specifications for products and information regarding installation of the
paint.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. All materials except water and sand shall be delivered in their original unopened packages and stored in
an enclosed shelter providing protection from damage and exposure to the elements. Damaged or
deteriorated materials shall be removed from the site.
1.05 PROTECTION
A. Provide proper protection during plastering operations for finished door and window frames along with
other designated areas that do not receive a plaster finish.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply cement plaster unless minimum ambient temperature of 40 degrees F has been and
continues to be maintained for a minimum of 48 hours prior to application and until plaster cures.
B. Do not apply plaster on exterior of building when hot, dry windy conditions exist.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Building Paper Comply with Federal Specification UU- B -790a, Type 1 Grade D and weigh not Tess than
nine (9) pounds per 100 square feet.
B. Metal Lath:
1 Self- furring, expanded copper bearing steel sheet, diamond mesh weighing 3.4 pounds per square
yard, coated with rush inhibitive paint after fabrication.
2. Approved manufacturers:
a. Alabama Metal Industries Corp. (AMIGO) 800 366 -2642
b. K -LATH Building Products 800 669 -5284
C. Stucco Netting: 16 gage, 1 1/2' mesh, galvanized or 18 gage 1" mesh, galvanized, or combine with the
building paper as self- furring paper- backed netting.
D Screeds and Other Material Accessories: Fabricate from 24 gage, hot dipped, zinc galvanized steel, prime
coated and coated with a protective material to permit removal of overspray at completion of plastering.
E. Cement: Portland cement, Type 1 conforming to the requirements of ASTM C -150.
F Plastic Cement: ASTM C -150, Type 1, manufactured with added plasticizer not exceeding 12% of total
volume. Do not add plasticizer during mixing.
G. Lime for Portland cement Plaster Hydrated Lime ASTM C -206, Type S.
H. Lime Substitute: Concrete Additives, California, Kel -Crete Plasticizer Do not use Lime or other additives
if Kel -Crete Admixture is used.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -9\Sec -09220
1
05/20/09
I Sand for Plaster Clean well graded from coarse to fine conforming with ASTM C -144
J. Additive for Crack Control: inch chopped fiberglass strands, alkaline resistant (AR).
K. Finish Coat of Plaster Factory prepared LaHabra Products, Expo Stucco Products, Merlex Stucco, or
Omega Products in a standard neutral color and finish.
L. Water Clean, potable, fresh and free from injurious amounts of acid, alkali, organic matter or other
deleterious substances.
2.02 MIXES
A. Mixing:
1 General requirements:
a. Accurately proportion materials for each plaster batch with measuring devices of known volume.
b. Mix material dry to uniform color and consistency before adding any water
c. Mix only as much plaster as can be used in one (1) hour
d. Protect mixes from frost, dust and evaporation.
e. Do not retemper the mix after initial set.
2. Cement plaster mixing Portland cement:
a. Scratch Coat (3/8 inch thick): 1 part cement, �/2 part lime, 3 parts aggregate and 2 pounds of 1 /2
inch chopped fiberglass strands per this volume of cement.
b. Brown Coat (3/8 inch thick): 1 part cement, 3 4 part lime, 4 parts aggregate and 2 pounds of 1/2
inch chopped fiberglass strands per this volume of cement
3. Cement plaster mixing Plastic Cement:
a. Scratch Coat (3/8 inch thick): 1 part plastic cement, 3 parts aggregate
b. Brown Coat (3/8 inch thick): 1 part cement, 4 parts aggregate
4 Finish plaster mixing:
a. Mix finish coat plaster per manufacturer's recommendations and specifications.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Prior to commencing work, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify t.iat all such
work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence.
B. Verify that surfaces to be plastered are free of dirt, oil and other foreign matter which would affect bond of
plaster coats.
3.02 LATHING INSTALLATION
A. Building Paper Over all elements of construction which are to receive plaster apply the specified building
paper with the long dimension horizontal, lapping all upper courses over lower courses at least two (2)
inches, and lapping vertical joints at least six (6) inches.
B. Metal Lath: Install self- furring metal lath against sheathing and with end joints staggered in adjacent rows.
Screw lath to studs through dimples only spacing screws 6 inches o.c. Lap ends of lath at least 1 inch
between supports. Lap side (horizontal) joints at least 1 /2 inch. Wire tie all side laps and end joints
between supports together at intervals not exceeding 6 inches
C. Stucco Netting: Install stucco netting over building paper with the long dimension horizontal, lapping all
joints at least one mesh but not less than one inch, lapping all upper courses over lower courses, and
lapping all ends. At exterior corners wrap the netting around the corner and reinforce with exterior corner
reinforcement. At interior corners fold the netting through the corner and reinforce with interior corner
reinforcement. Attach the stucco netting to supports at a maximum six (6) inches each way furring the
netting away from the building paper at least 1 /a inch by use of standard furring attachments. As alternate,
paper- backed stucco netting may be used.
D Accessories: Attach control joints to the stucco netting and attach all other grounds and accessories to
supports, so as to provide true grounds for the plaster Wire, tie, nail, screw or staple all accessories to
supporting surface sufficiently to hold accessories in place during plastering. Provide casing beads at all
terminations of plaster and intersections with dissimilar materials and control joints where indicated on
drawings, or if not shown then 10 -foot o.c. each way
J Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -9\Sec -09220 05/20/09
2
3.03 PLASTERING
A. Mixing of plaster Accurately and separately measure materials, mix in a modern clean batch mixer as
follows:
1 Measure materials either by weight or by volume.
2. Mix plaster for not less than two (2) but not more than three (3) minutes, rotating the mixer at a
speed recommended by the manufacturer of the mixer
3. Discharge batch completely before mixer is recharged. Mixer is to be thoroughly cleaned of all
plaster whenever a different kind of plaster is to be mixed.
B. Scratch Coat: Apply scratch coat with sufficient material and force to form good keys, embedding and
filling all spaces of the netting. Score horizontally
C. Brown Coat: Do not apply brown coat sooner than 48 hours after the installation of the scratch coat. Apply
the brown coat to the scratch coat. Bring out to grounds, straighten to a true surface, float, compact, and
leave sufficiently rough to ensure adequate bond of the finish coat.
D Finish Coat: Do not apply finish coat sooner than seven (7) days after installation of the brown coat.
Finish all plaster true and even with 1/8 -inch tolerance in five (5) feet and leave the finish surface free from
tool marks and all other blemishes. Wipe all metal accessories clean after application of each coat.
3.04 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Patching: Upon completion, point up plaster around trim and other locations where plaster meets
dissimilar materials. Cut out and patch defective plaster Match patch of defective or damaged plaster to
existing or surrounding work in form texture and color
B. Cleaning: Remove plaster and protective materials from expansion beads, perimeter beads and adjacent
surfaces. Remove stains from plaster surfaces that would adversely affect subsequent finishes.
End of Section
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -9\Sec -09220 05/20/09
3
This Page Left Blank
J Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -9\Sec -09220 05/20/09
4
DIVISION 9 SECTION 09250 GYPSUM WALL BOARD
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original packaging, containers or bundles bearing manufacturer's brand name and
product identification.
B. Store materials inside under cover keep dry protect from weather other elements and damage from
construction operations or other causes.
C Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends or surfaces. Protect metal accessories and
trims from being bent or damaged.
1.02 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Comply with requirements of gypsum board manufacturer's application standards and requirements for
environmental conditions before, during and after application of gypsum board.
B. When outdoor temperature is below 55 degrees F maintain building working temperature of not less than
50 degrees F for a period of 48 hours prior to, during and following application of gypsum board and joint
treatment materials or bonding of adhesives.
C. Ventilate building spaces as required, removing excess moisture that would prevent drying of joint
treatment material immediately after its application.
D If drawings call for gypsum sheathing to be installed on the exterior side of structural steel studs and
gypsum wallboard to be installed on the interior side of the same stud, then additional framing required for
furred out spaces will be accomplished with 25 gage steel studs and accessories.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 EXTERIOR MATERIALS
A. Gypsum Sheathing: A gypsum core sheathing panel with additives to enhance the water resistance of the
core; surfaced with water repellant paper on front, back and long edges; and complying with ASTM C -79.
Panel size shall be minimum 1 /2 inch thick by 2 foot wide by 8 foot long with tongue and groove edges.
B. Fasteners: Type S -12, bugle head corrosion resistant screws, minimum length 1 inch.
2.02 INTERIOR MATERIALS
A. Metal Studs: 3 -5/8 inch, 25 gauge galvanized steel, conforming to ASTM C645
B. Gypsum Wall Board:
1 Standard: ASTM C 36. 1/2 inch thick, TYPE C, square cut ends, tapered edges, 4 foot wide by 8
foot long (minimum) unless otherwise noted on drawing.
C Tape: Conform to ASTM C475.
D Joint Compound: Ready mixed conforming to ASTM C475.
E. Fasteners
1 Wood Supports: Type W bugle head screws
2. Metal Supports: Type S, bugle head screws
3. Metal Liner Panel: Adhesive as recommended by the wallboard manufacturer
F Accessories:
1 Corner Beads: 1 1/4 inch x 1 1/4 inch galvanized steel
2. Metal Edge Trim Square nose and L type, galvanized steel as appropriate
3. Closure Strips: Flexible closure strip for metal deck, vulcanized, 1 inch, color black, closed cell EDPM
synthetic rubber as manufactured by Houston Foam telephone 713 224 -3484
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXTERIOR SHEATHING INSTALLATION
A. Install 2 foot wide sheathing horizontally with the long dimension at right angles to the framing or ribs of
the metal panels and with grooved edges down. Interlock the groove over the tongue of previously
installed panels and with all edges butted but not forced into place. Stagger all vertical joints and abut
them over the centers of framing members or metal panel ribs. Fit sheathing snugly around all openings.
Secure sheathing to substrate with screws not spaced over 4 inches on center along edges and not over 8
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -9\Sec -09250 05/20/09
1
inches on center every where else. Fasteners shall be no Tess than 3/8 inch from the edges and ends of
the panel.
3.02 INTERIOR WALLBOARD INSTALLATION
A. Install metal stud framing vertically at a maximum spacing of 16 inches on center horizontally
B. Apply the wallboard either horizontally or vertically center all vertical edges over studs or liner panel ribs.
Wallboard shall terminate at the top of the liner panel. Adhesive may be used to attach wallboard to the
liner panel. Provide lines of adhesive the full length of the wallboard starting at the edge of the panel and
then spaced approximately 12 inches apart.
C Install wallboard on the interior walls of both toilet rooms. Boards shall be installed vertically on walls and
across the framing members on the ceilings. All joints shall center or bear on framing members.
D Attach wallboards to framing members with 1 -inch self drilling drywall screws. Do not use adhesives to
attach wallboard to studs. Screws shall be spaced no more than 12 inches on center and shall be located
not less than 3/8 inch or more than 1/2 inch from edges.
E. Wallboard shall be held in firm contact with the framing member while fasteners are being driven.
Fastening shall proceed from center portion of the wallboard toward the edges and ends. Fasteners shall
be set with the heads slightly below the surface of the wallboard in a dimple formed by the power screw
driver Care shall be taken to avoid breaking the face paper of the wallboard. Improperly driven fasteners
shall be removed prior to finishing.
F Install appropriate metal trim at all exposed wallboard edges, where gypsum panels abut a different
material, and where indicated on drawings. Install accessories with screws, nails or crimping as
appropriate. Do not use staples.
3.03 FINISHING
A. Apply joint compound in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations at all
gypsum board joints, flanges of trim accessories, penetrations, fastener heads, and surface defects. Pre-
f ill all open joints and rounded or beveled edges with joint compound recommended by wallboard
manufacturer
B. All joints and interior angles shall be taped embedded in joint compound and three separate coats of joint
compound applied over all joints, angles, fastener heads and accessories. All joint compound shall be
smooth and free of tool marks and ridges.
End of Section
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div 9\Sec 09250 05/20/09
2
DIVISION 9 SECTION 09660 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL INFORMATION
A. AutoZone has entered into an agreement to purchase resilient floor tile and other related flooring products
on a direct basis from Armstrong World Industries. The Contractor shall contact the local Armstrong
Sales Service Center and request national pricing for all material required for the project. For questions
regarding the nearest Armstrong Sales Service Center pricing, or availability of material, call Armstrong at
Tel. (800) 442 -4212.
1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Before commencing work check floor for conformance with specification tolerances for flatness and
levelness as well as moisture levels.
B. Level floor to this minimum specification prior to installing resilient tile.
C If leveling is required use specified underlayment in strict accordance with manufacturer's specification
and requirements.
D Lay resilient tile flooring at 65 degrees F or above.
E. All unused tiles to remain in store along with one unopened box of tile of same shade.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SELF LEVELING UNDERLAYMENT
A. Primer Armstrong S -185.
B. Leveler Armstrong S -183 or S -184
C. NO SUBSTITUTIONS OR ALTERNATES.
2.02 FINISH FLOORING
A. Floor tile shall be Armstrong Imperial #51899, (Cool White) size to be 12 inch x 12 inch x 1/8 inch. NO
SUBSTITUTIONS OR ALTERNATES.
B Reducer strip shall be vinyl 1 inch wide by 1/8 inch thick with one edge beveled, color to be black.
2.03 BASE
A. Base shall be standard top set cove type, 4 inch high x 0.08 inch gauge vinyl as manufactured by
Armstrong or Flexco, (Color Black).
2.04 ADHESIVE
A. Adhesive for floor tile Armstrong S.515 clear mastic.
B. Adhesive for vinyl reducer strip 3 M Company contact adhesive.
2.05 WAX
A. Wax for floor finishing shall be "Vectra" from Johnson Diversey Inc.
B. See Division 1 for information on vendor contacts.
C. Wax is available in 5 gallon containers and should be purchased in the following quantities based on the
prototype size:
1 5w2 three 5- gallon containers
2. 57n2 three 5- gallon containers
3. 65w2 three 5- gallon containers
4 7n2 four 5 gallon containers
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SELF LEVELING UNDERLAYMENT
A. All self leveling products shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturers printed instructions,
which the Contractor shall obtain and have on site prior to commencement of any work.
B. Printed information for Armstrong is available from
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -9\Sec -09660 05/20/09
1
Armstrong World Industries
P O.Box 3001
Lancaster PA. 17604
Tel. (800) 292 -6308 Fax (717) 396 -5251
3.02 INSPECTION
A. Examine sub floors prior to installation to determine that surfaces are smooth and free from cracks, holes,
ridges and other defects that might prevent adhesive bond or impair durability or appearance of the
flooring material.
B. Inspect sub floors prior to installation to determine that surfaces are free from curing, sealing and
hardening compounds or other foreign materials that might prevent adhesive bond. Visually inspect for
evidence of moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, dusting, mold or mildew
C Report conditions contrary to Contract requirements that would prevent a proper installation. Do not
proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
D Failure to call attention to defects or imperfections will be construed by Contractor as acceptance and
approval of the sub -floor Installation indicates acceptance of substrates with regard to conditions existing
at time of installation.
3.03 PREPARATION
A. Smooth concrete surfaces, removing rough areas, projections, ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, joints
and other defects with Armstrong's S -183 or S -184 latex underlayment as recommended by the tile
manufacturer
B. Remove paint, varnish, oils, release agents, sealers and waxes from floor surfaces. Smooth out residual
adhesives as recommended by flooring manufacturer Remove curing and hardening compounds not
compatible with flooring adhesives. Avoid organic solvents.
C. Perform a sub -floor Bond and Moisture Test or a Calcium Chloride Test as described in publication
number F- 5061 "Armstrong Engineered Installation System" to determine if surfaces are dry free of
curing and hardening compounds and any other coatings and are ready to receive resilient flooring.
D Vacuum or broom clean surfaces making sub -floor free from dust, dirt, grease and all foreign materials
immediately before the application of flooring.
3.04 FINISH FLOORING
A. Install flooring with adhesives, tools and procedures in strict accordance with the latest edition of
Armstrong Engineered Installation System'
B. Open enough tile cartons and mix tile to ensure shade variations do not occur within any one space.
C Lay tiles from start point as indicated on Drawings.
D Scribe, cut and fit tile to permanent fixtures, columns, walls, pipes, outlets and any other items.
E. Observe the recommended adhesive trowel notching, open times and working times. Use a 1/32 inch
deep x 1/16 inch wide Fine Notch trowel. Installers shall not use re- notched trowels.
F Immediately remove excessive adhesive from visible surfaces.
3.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Apply base to walls, columns and other permanent fixtures in areas where base is required. Install base in
lengths as long as practical, with inside corners fabricated from base materials that are mitered or coped.
Outside corners shall be pre- fabricated by the base manufacturer Ensure base is tightly bonded to
vertical substrate.
B. Fill voids with Armstrong S -295 plastic filler along the top edge of the resilient wall base on masonry
surfaces or other similar irregular substrates.
C. Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to flooring and secure with 3 M Company contact adhesive. Install
edge strips at edges of flooring, which would otherwise be exposed.
3.06 FINAL CLEANING AND WAXING
A. Clean floor with a 175 -rpm electric low speed side to side floor scrubber however an automatic floor
scrubber that will also pickup solution may be used. Use Johnson Diversey General Purpose Forward at
recommended dilution per label instructions. Use a trot mop (floor vacuum with squeegee) to pick up
cleaning solution.
J-\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -9\Sec -09660 05/20/09
2
B. Damp mop with clear water to remove any remaining residue.
C. Floor must be thoroughly clean and dry prior to applying wax. Use an untreated dust mop to sweep floor
prior to laying wax.
D Waxing Floor
1 Contractor must use wax specified, no substitutions will be accepted unless AutoZone provides a
written change order prior to application.
2. Contractor shall apply a minimum of four (4) coats of wax and will apply additional coats until all
containers purchased are utilized completely
3. Allow each coat of wax to dry a minimum of forty -five (45) minutes before applying the next coat.
E. Allow wax to dry overnight prior to buffing.
F Buff the store prior to final inspection. Use a high -speed buffer minimum 1500 -rpm
G Provide empty floor finish containers at final punch.
H. Contact the wax vendor if more detailed instructions for application are needed.
End of Section
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -9\Sec -09660 05/20/09
3
This Page Left Blank
FProduction Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -9\Sec -09660 05/20/09
4
DIVISION 9 SECTION 09900 PAINTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. All paint used on the project shall be from Sherwin- Williams Paints and as specified herein.
B. Contractor will notify vendor of the expected schedule for shipping and delivery of the painting material.
No other material other than that furnished by Sherwin- Williams Paints will be acceptable for use on the
project.
C. Based on Contractor's schedule for painting, paint material vendor will visit the project prior to the
commencement of any painting to determine if the surfaces are ready to receive the paint. Paint material
vendor will have the authority to issue a `do not" or not ready for paint" order If such order is given, it
shall be done both verbally and followed by an email communication to the General Contractor as well as
the AutoZone Project Administrator Upon receipt of such order Contractor will immediately take all steps
to remedy what ever defects were in place to cause such order to be given.
D If such order was given as a result of weather either temperature or moisture, then AutoZone Project
Manager will determine the next course of action to be taken, which may include postponing paint the
store until a later date. In all cases the surface must by dry prior to beginning ant coating application.
E. Paint material vendor will visit the project at the completion of the painting to ensure the materials have
been applied in accordance with the requirements of the specification Additionally he may visit during the
application process to determine if the work is progressing appropriately If paint material vendor
determines that corrective work or other actions are required he shall so notify the AutoZone field project
manager who in turn will notify the Contractor
F AutoZone at its own expense reserves the right to hire an independent third party to conduct tests on the
paint application.
1.02 CONTACTS
A. Sherwin- Williams Paints:
Dwight LeClair National Account Manager
2191 Northlake Parkway Building 11 Suite 107 Tucker Georgia 30084
Phone: 678 261 -6865 Fax: 678 261 -6769
Cell: 678 361 -6108 Email: dcleclair @sherwin.com
1.03 PAINT MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Store all products at 40 degrees F and above.
B. Do not apply to frozen substrate.
C. Apply when surface temperature is 35 degrees F or warmer and all frozen water in or on the surface is
thawed.
D Avoid applying material in snow fog, mist, or when such conditions are expected.
E. Follow all other printed instructions regarding the application of each type of paint material.
1.04 ATTACHMENTS TO EXTERIOR WALLS
A. Contractor before attaching anything to the exterior wall shall ensure the underlying wall surface has been
painted with two coats of SuperPaint Exterior Latex in the color appropriate and called for on the drawings.
Items falling into this category would include but not necessarily be limited to Electric Swithchgear, Electric
Meters and Conduit, Light Fixtures, Wall Signs, Coping, Gutters and Downspouts, Architectural Items, etc.
Items which have been installed without the underlying paint will void the warranty and therefore will be
required to be removed, the wall surface painted, and then reinstalled all at no additional cost to
AutoZone.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Paint material vendor will be issuing to AutoZone, based on the Contractor's application of material, a 5
year manufacturer's warranty for labor and materials against the paint becoming unserviceable or
objectionable in appearance with respect to chipping, cracking, peeling and alligatoring.
B. Warranty for loss of gloss or color retention shall be made against preset and predefined standards.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -9\Sec -09900 05/20/09
1
C Contractor shall work and cooperate with paint material vendor to ensure everything is done so that
warranty can be issued.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. The following manufacturers are approved for use on an AutoZone project:
1 The Sherwin- Williams Company
B. Paint materials from no other manufacturer shall be used unless pre- authorized in writing by AutoZone.
2.02 EXTERIOR MATERIALS
A. Exterior Concrete Masonry Units (smooth or split face):
1 Primer Loxon Block Surfacer A24W200
a. Smooth faced CMU 60 80 square feet per gallon
b. Split faced CMU 40 60 square feet per gallon
c. WFT 16.0 mils DFT 8.0 mils
2. Finish: 2 coats SuperPaint Exterior Latex Satin, A89 Series:
a. WFT 4 0 mils DFT 1 44 mils per coat
3. Colors as required and noted on drawings.
NOTE. For painting under conditions where the temperature will be below 35 but above 20 degrees F the
following will be applicable:
4 Finish: 2 coats Ultra Crete Solvent Borne Smooth Coating, B46 Series (tinted medium gray):
a. DFT 10 0 mils minimum 16.0 mils maximum per coat (100 -160 S.F per gallon)
Apply this product in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. Spray applications
shall be done in a crosshatch pattern, to be followed by backrolling. Rolling is always to be finished in a
downward motion. Finish coats are to be applied to achieve a pinhole free surface.
B. Exterior Insulation Finish System (E.I F.S.) or Stucco:
1 Primer Loxon Acrylic Conditioner, A24 100
a. Maximum coverage 200 to 300 square feet per gallon
2. Finish: 2 coats SuperPaint Exterior Latex Satin, A89 Series
a. WFT 4.0 mils DFT 1 44 mils per coat
C. Exterior Graphics: Red, Orange and White Bands (if permitted)
1 Finish Coat Red: 2 Coats SherCryl HPA Gloss, B66 Series
a. WFT 6.0 mils min. 10.0 mils max. DFT 2.5 mils min. 4 0 mils max. per coat
2. Finish Coat White: 2 coats SherCryl HPA Gloss, B66 Series
a. WFT 6.0 mils min. 10.0 mils max. DFT 2.5 mils min. 4.0 mils max. per coat
3. Finish Coat Orange: 2 Coats SherCryl HPA Gloss, B66 Series
a. WFT 6.0 mils min. 10.0 mils max. DFT 2.5 mils min. 4.0 mils max. per coat
4 Applied over SuperPaint Exterior Latex Satin coating
D Pipe Guards Guard Rails:
1 Primer 1 coat ProCryl Universal Primer B66 -310
a. WFT 5.0 mils min. 10.0 mils max. DFT 2.0 mils min. 4 0 mils max.
2. Finish: 2 coats SherCryl HPA Gloss, B66 Series
a. WFT 6.0 mils min. 10.0 mils max. DFT 2.5 mils min. 4.0 mils max. per coat
E. Parking Lines:
1 2 coats Set Fast Acrylic Traffic Marking Paint
a. WFT 15.0 mils DFT 7.5 mils per coat
2. Color to be either White #TM2160, or Yellow #TM2161
F Gutters/Downspouts:
1 Primer 1 coat ProCryl Universal Primer B66 -310
a. WFT 5.0 mils min. 10.0 mils max. DFT 2.0 mils min. 4 0 mils max.
2. Finish. 2 coats SuperPaint Exterior Latex Satin, A89 Series
a. WFT 4 0 mils DFT 1 44 mils per coat (color to match adjacent wall color)
G. Galvanized metal fabrications:
1 Primer 1 coat ProCryl Universal Primer B66 -310
a. WFT 5.0 mils min. 10.0 mils max., DFT 2.0 mils min. 4.0 mils max.
2. Finish: 2 coats SuperPaint Exterior Latex Satin, A89 Series
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -9\Sec -09900 05/20/09
2
a. WFT 4.0 mils DFT 1 44 mils per coat (color to match adjacent wall color)
H. Metal Man Doors:
1 Primer 1 coat ProCryl Universal Primer B66 -310
a. WFT 5.0 mils min. 10.0 mils max. DFT 2.0 mils min. 4.0 mils max.
2. Finish: Coats: 2 coats Red SherCryl HPA Gloss, B66 Series
a. WFT 6.0 mils min. 10.0 mils max. DFT 2.5 mils min /4.0 mils max. per coat
I Hollow Metal Door Frames:
1 Primer 1 coat ProCryl Universal Primer B66 -310
a. WFT 5.0 mils min. 10.0 mils max. DFT 2.0 mils min. 4 0 mils max.
2. Finish: Coats. 2 coats Black SherCryl HPA Gloss, B66 Series
a. WFT 6.0 mils min. 10.0 mils max. DFT 2.5 mils min. 4.0 mils max. per coat
J Gas Piping:
1 Primer 1 coat ProCryl Universal Primer B66 -310
a. WFT 5.0 mils min. 10.0 mils max. DFT 2.0 mils min. /4.0 mils max.
2. Finish 2 coats Black SherCryl HPA Gloss, B66 Series
a. WFT 6.0 mils min. 10.0 mils max. DFT 2.5 mils min. 4.0 mils max. per coat
K. Roof Hatch Cover.
1 Primer 1 coat ProCryl Universal Primer B66 -310
a. WFT 5.0 mils min. 10.0 mils max., DFT 2.0 mils min. 4.0 mils max.
2. Finish: 2 coats White SherCryl HPA Gloss, B66 Series
a. WFT 6.0 mils min. 10.0 mils max. DFT 2.5 mils min. 4.0 mils max. per coat
2.03 INTERIOR MATERIALS
A. Walls: (Block Drywall)
1 Drywall Primer 1 coat PrepRite 200 Wall Primer B28W200
a. WFT 40 mils DFT 11
2. Block Primer 1 coat PrepRite Block Filler B25W25
a. WFT 16.0 mils DFT 8.0
3. Finish Coat Red: 2 Coats Matalatex Semi Gloss Enamel, B42 Series
a. DFT 1.5 mils min. 4 0 mils max. per coat
4 Finish Coat White: 2 coats Matalatex Semi Gloss Enamel, B42 Series
a. DFT 1.5 mils min. 4 0 mils max. per coat
5. Finish Coat Orange: 2 Coats Matalatex Semi Gloss Enamel, B42 Series
a. DFT 1.5 mils min. 4.0 mils max. per coat
B. Restroom Ceiling: (Walls are FRP).
1 Primer 1 coat PrepRite 200 Wall Primer B28W200
a. WFT 40 mils DFT 11
2. Finish: 2 coats White ProMar 200 Semi Gloss Latex
a. WFT 4.0 mils DFT 1.5 per coat
C. Doors Frames:
1 Primer 1 coat ProCryl Universal Primer B66 -310
a. WFT 5.0 mils min. 10.0 mils max. DFT 2.0 mils min. 4.0 mils max.
2. Finish: 2 coats Black Matalatex Semi Gloss Enamel, B42 Series
a. DFT 1.5 mils min. 4 0 mils max. per coat
D Doors: (Wood)
1 Primer 1 coat PrepRite Wall Wood Primer B49W1
a. WFT 4.O mils DFT 1.9
2. Finish: 2 coats Red Matalatex Semi Gloss Enamel, B42 Series
a. DFT 1.5 mils min. 4.0 mils max. per coat
E. Exposed Joist Girders and Bar Joists:
1 Orange paint for touch up (supplied by Owner).
F Exposed Roof Deck:
1 Deck is galvanized no painting required
G. Roof Ladder and Hatch:
1 Primer 1 coat ProCryl Universal Primer, B66 -310
a. WFT 5.0 mils min. 10.0 mils max. DFT 2.0 mils min. 4.0 mils max.
J Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -9\Sec -09900 05/20/09
3
2. Finish. 2 coats Red Matalatex Semi Gloss Enamel, B42 Series
a. DFT 1.5 mils min. 4.0 mils max. per coat
2.04 FORMULATIONS
A. Formulas listed below are for one gallon sized containers and are shown in full ounces and 1/32 of an
ounce. Also not that all SherCryl colors are to be created using only the EnviroToner System while all other
colors are to be created using the Blend -A -Color System
B. Exterior Red:
1 SherCryl Gloss Ultradeep Base, B66T304
2. 4 oz. Red -101
3. 8 oz. Yellow -100
C Exterior Orange:
1 SherCryl Gloss Ultradeep Base, B66T304
2. 48/32 oz Yellow -101
3. 2 oz. 56/32 oz. Orange
4 6 oz. Yellow -100
D Exterior Medium Gray
1 SuperPaint Exterior Satin Deep Base, A89W53
2. 2 oz. 24/32 oz. Black
3. 24/32 oz. Raw Umber
4 15/32 oz. Deep Gold
5. 4/32 oz. New Red
6. 2/32 oz. Magenta
E. Exterior Dark Gray
1 SuperPaint Exterior Satin Deep Base, A89W53
2. 4 oz. 63/32 oz. Black
3. 62/32 oz. Raw Umber
4 36/32 oz. Deep Gold
5. 4/32 oz. Magenta
F Interior Red:
1 Matalatex Semi Gloss
2. Safety Orange B42E39 and Safety Red B42E38 in a 1 1 intermix
G. Interior Orange
1 Matalatex Semi Gloss Safety Orange, B42E39
2. 2 oz. 37/32 oz. Magenta
3. 2 oz. 13/32 oz. White
4 1/32 oz. Yellow
H. Any non standard color used to paint the exterior of any store shall have the paint color name, formula and
store number on which the color was applied logged into the Sherwin- Williams Custodian System for future
reference.
PART 3 EXECUTION
REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR REQUIRED PAINT COLORS AND THEIR LOCATIONS.
3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Remove all dirt, oil, grease, efflorescence, laitance, curing compounds, existing paint, and other surface
contam inants.
B. For masonry or concrete surfaces, point and or fill holes 3/8 inch or larger Surface shall be free from
honeycombs, holes or voids.
C Surfaces shall be thoroughly dry Application of finishes over rust, dirt, and foreign substances will be
cause for rejection.
D Completely mask, remove, or otherwise adequately protect hardware, accessories, or other adjacent
surfaces.
E. Contractor shall insure that all items that would normally be attached to the exterior wall are not in place or
removed prior to painting be commenced; or that the wall has been painted with all required coats prior to
the item being installed. Items falling in the category would include gutters, downspouts, leader boxes,
J•\Production MastersDDocs\Project Specs\Div -9\Sec -09900 05/20/09
4
electrical switchgear, electric meters and conduit, light fixtures, wall signs, coping and any architectural
embellishment.
F Contractor shall verify that surface preparation is complete to the point that finishes may be properly
applied and contact the appropriate vendor to schedule an inspection to determine if the project is ready to
receive paint and or coatings.
G. Upon completion of the paint vendor's inspection, if a 'not ready" or 'do not paint" order is issued,
Contractor shall pursue any remedial work required to its completion and then have paint vendor re- inspect
the project to determine acceptability of surfaces.
H. If the above issued orders are a result of weather conditions, Contractor shall immediately contact
AutoZone's project manager for further instructions.
3.02 APPLICATION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Start all applications of paint or coating materials at the top of the wall and work your way down to the
bottom of the wall.
B. Cover entire wall surface with primer and wall color finish coats before applying any of the red, orange or
white graphic bands.
C Apply all materials in strict accordance with these specifications and the manufacturer's technical data
sheets paying particular attention to the temperature requirements of the coating material, substrate
surface and the ambient air as well as recoating or over coating times. Apply additional coats as required
to achieve coverage and appearance if the specified number of coats does not achieve full coverage.
D Produce all coats so that the dry film thickness "DFT" is within the range specified for each product.
E. Pin Hole Free shall mean the following; for blockfiller no breaks in the surface coat where the underlying
surface of the block shows through, and for the finish coat, no breaks in the surface where either the
underlying white blockfiller coat or the actual surface of the masonry shows through.
3.03 APPLICATION OF BLOCKFILLER
A. Surfaces must be dry with a moisture content of 15 percent or less and with a ph range of 6 -12.
B. Apply block filler by brush, roller or heavy -duty airless or air assisted texture spray equipment.
C. Using a clean, damp 3/4 -inch to 1 1/4 inch nap roller, work the spry coat in a horizontal direction to fill all
pores, cross -roll uniformly on the wall, maintaining a wet edge. Keep rollers fully loaded with materials
and apply sufficient amounts to fill all pores.
D Finish application in one directional pass from breakpoint to breakpoint. Do not stop applications in the
middle of the wall and avoid overlap.
E. Blockfiller must cure for a minimum 4 hours prior to top coat application.
F Do not apply block filler over elastomeric sealant materials. Maintain substrate expansion joints as
recommended by coating manufacturer
G Air and surface temperatures must not drop below 35 degrees F for 48 hours after application.
1 Recoat 55 degrees F+ Latex 8 hours; Alkyd and HP Coatings 48 hours
2. Recoat 35 to 55 degrees F Latex 24 hours; Alkyd and HP Coatings 48 hours
3.04 TOP COAT APPLICATION over BLOCKFILLER
A. Apply topcoat smooth by brush, roller or spray and back roll methods as per the manufacturer's coverage
instructions. Finish coating materials so that brush and roller strokes are in one uniform direction. Two
coats are required, allow first coat to dry thoroughly before recoating. Follow manufacturer's printed
instructions with regard to drying time between coats.
B. Tolerances: Finish system to be pinhole free.
3.05 PREPARATION OF METAL SURFACES
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly with solvent and allow surface to dry thoroughly before applying paint.
B. Treat new galvanized metal surfaces with a chemical etching compound as recommended by the paint
manufacturer Remove excess etching solution and allow surface to dry completely before applying first
coat of paint.
3.06 PAINT APPLICATION
A. Apply finishes in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed directions.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -9\Sec -09900 05/20/09
5
3.07 INTERIOR WALL GRAPHICS (If Required)
A. Transfer graphics to wall surface by either using AutoZone furnished pounce pattern or by dimensionally
locating and masking off
B. Install correct primer under all finish coats. See drawings for final finish color requirements.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -9\Sec -09900 05/20/09
6
B Access doors or panels, exposed pipes, and raceways shall be painted to match adjacent surface except
where color- coding is specified.
C. Primer where indicated on painting schedule, may be omitted where shop coat primer has been applied.
Touch up metal surfaces with the specified primer as required. Do not apply subsequent coats of paint to
bare metal.
D Pre finished painted roof structure such as bar joists, joist girders and bridging shall be touched up under
this contract. AutoZone's steel bar joist vendor shall supply touch -up paint.
3.08 INSPECTION and TESTING
A. Upon completion of the exterior painting, but prior to the interior being completed and the painting sub
contractor leaving the job site, Contractor shall contact the paint manufacturer's representative to come
and perform their specific tasks with regard to inspections.
B. At the completion of the inspections written reports and or comments will be given -to both AutoZone and
the Contractor for review All work not meeting the specified requirements shall be immediately corrected
at no additional cost to AutoZone.
C. Corrected work shall be re- inspected and all costs associated with that process shall be borne by
Contractor
D The intent at the completion of this process is to have the paint manufacturer issue the warranty to
AutoZone.
3.09 WARRANTY
A. Warranty for all new painting shall be issued by the paint manufacturer for five (5) years and shall cover
both labor and material. Without limiting the warranty, the work shall be warranted not to:
1 Noticeably discolor yellow streak, bloom, bleach, or darken.
2. Peel, crack, blister or alligator
3. Release from the substrate or intermediate coats.
4 Chalk or dust excessively
5. Stay tacky or become tacky
B. After the first year fading and changes in gloss shall be measured against predetermined standards
supplied to and accepted by AutoZone.
C Any area or surface requiring re painting under the warranty shall be done corner to corner
D Contractor shall warrant that the exterior walls, copings, parapet flashings will be watertight for the same
period as the paint warranty Contractor shall immediately repair any failure not cause by the direct action
of AutoZone. Paint failures that are the result of water or moisture getting into the wall shall be the
responsibility of Contractor to repair and re- paint.
E. Contractor shall review at the first job site meeting all requirements of this section of the specifications to
insure that everyone understands the importance maintaining high level of quality and workmanship.
F Paint manufacturer shall issue warranty to Contractor in AutoZone's name and warranty shall commence
at the date of Project Completion.
End of Section
7
DIVISION 9 SECTION 09986 SANITARY WALL PANELS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS
A. All materials shall be inspected upon delivery and defects reported. Remove panels from shipping skid
and restack on a solid, flat, dry surface Do not stack on fresh concrete floors or other surfaces that may
emit moisture. Lay panels flat, do not store on edge. Damaged or deteriorated materials shall be
removed from premises.
B. Panels shall be acclimated at least 24 hours in temperature and humidity conditions approximating the
operating environment of the finished room before being installed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PANELS
A. Panels shall be equal to Structoglas, smooth surface, white, Fire Retardant (Class A), fiberglass
reinforced wall panels, 0.09 inch thick, 48 inches wide and 96 inches long.
2.02 MOLDINGS AND TRIM
A. Moldings and trim shall be panel manufacture's standard one -piece or two- piece, non staining, extruded
vinyl moldings.
2.03 FASTENERS AND SEALANT
A. Fasteners shall be panel manufacturer's standard non corroding mechanical type, truss head nylon drive
rivets, or stainless steel screws. Fastener holes must be pre drilled slightly over sized.
B. Sealant shall be clear silicone per panel manufacturer's recommendations.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Verify that gypsum board subsurface is flat, clean, dry and free from all dirt, dust or grease prior to
commencing installation of panels. Panel installation shall be per manufacturer's printed instructions.
B. Lay -out and cut panels to fit from floor to ceiling leaving not less than 1/4 inch gap at ceiling and floor and
1/8 inch gap between panels.
C. All exposed panel edges shall receive and be finished with an appropriate molding or trim
D Allow not less than 1/8 -inch gap around all pipes fittings and projections.
E. Install fasteners no farther than 8 inches apart around the outside edges and 12 inches apart on
intermediate 16 inch centers. Stagger fasteners on opposing panel edges. Fasteners on outside edges
shall be located 1 inch from panel edge.
F Alternative installation, panels maybe glued to the backer board per manufacturer's instructions.
G. Seal all corner seams, ceiling and base junctures, and fastener holes with clear silicone sealant.
End of Section
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -9\Sec -09986 05/20/09
1
This Page Left Blank
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -9\Sec -09986 05/20/09
2
r
t
DIVISION 10 SECTION 10426 SIGNAGE
(AutoZone Furnished and Installed Contractor Coordinated)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. This specifications contained in this section covers both wall mounted and freestanding signs. This
signage will be AutoZone furnished and installed; however General Contractor will be responsible for
coordination and directing the installer performing the installation.
B. AutoZone's sign vendor will be responsible for the following:
1 Manufacturing all signage for the project unless noted otherwise in the drawings.
2. Identifying and contracting with the installer to be used for the project and communicating that
information to the General Contractor
3. Securing all required sign permits by the time the project commences construction.
4 Shipping all signage, drawings and instructions to the installer within two (2) weeks after
commencement of construction.
5. Installation and final cleaning of all signage vendors has manufactured for the project.
C. General Contractor will be responsible for the following:
1 Ensuring that the foundation for the freestanding sign as well as the building walls are ready to
commence the sign installation no later than two (2) weeks before the "Set -up In Date' Failure
to meet this criterion may result in penalty being assessed against the General Contractor
2. Provide an electrical sub contractor who will make all final electrical connections and run all
primary wiring for sign circuits so that sign installer can confirm that all signage is working
properly prior to his leaving the job site.
3. Provide general coordination that will allow the installing contractor access to the areas of the
project where signs are to be installed.
4 Use of the project's dumpster to discard any waste material generated by the sign installation.
D AutoZone will pay for the manufacturing, shipping and installation of project signage.
1.02 SIGN TYPES
A. Wall Signs:
1 Cloud Signs: Internally illuminated and consisting of a polycarbonate face and a separate ABS'
back that is attached to the face of the wall. The sign is made up of multiple sections that fit
together with the overall size and location to be indicated on drawings.
2. Channel Letter Signs: Internally illuminated and consisting of metal channel letters with
polycarbonate faces either pre- mounted on a metal raceway which is then attached to the face
of the wall, or each letter is individually attached to the face of the wall. The sign is made up of
multiple sections that fit together with the overall size and location to be indicated on drawings.
B. Freestanding Signs:
1 Pylon Signs: Internally illuminated and consisting of a metal cabinet with "flex- face" faces
supported by a single pole. The sign will be attached to its required foundation per engineered
drawings, with the overall size and height of sign to be indicated on drawings.
2. Monument Signs: Internally illuminated and consisting of a metal cabinet with either "flex- face"
pan- formed, push- through letters, or vinyl on Lexan faces supported by a single pole which is
then covered with other material to form a monument base. The sign will be attached to its
required foundation per engineered drawings with the overall size and height of this sign to be
indicated on drawings.
1.03 ELECTRIC REQUIREMENTS
A. Unless otherwise specified, all cloud signs and freestanding signs are to have T12 daylight high
output, low temperature, fluorescent lamps. Lamp spacing shall be per the drawings and provide an
overall even level of illumination.
B. All signs must be built to Underwriters Laboratories (UL) specifications, using UL approved
component parts. Each new electric sign shall bear the UL label which shall be installed in plain view
according to local code requirements.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div- 10\Sec 10426 05/20/09
1
C. Each new cabinet shall be provided with a waterproof external disconnect safety switch, located as
required by codes.
D Sign vendor shall provide all wiring within the sign along with a pigtail of sufficient length is required
by the drawings so that the General Contractor's electrical subcontractor can make the final electrical
connection.
1.04 CODE REQUIREMENTS
A. If a conflict arises between any code requirement and what is shown or called for in the drawings and
or specifications the more stringent shall govern.
1.05 SIGN WARRANTIES
A. All warranties shall commence from the date of sign installation and run for the period attributable to
each item
B. Cloud sign faces and backs shall be warranted for a period of ten (10) years against fading,
discoloration and cracking.
C Arlon Signtech heat transfer flex faces with F/X clearcoat protective coating shall be warranted for a
period of eight (8) years against fading, discoloration and delamination.
D LED lighting, power supplies and other components shall be warranted for a period of five (5) years
against all defects.
E. Electronic lighting ballasts shall be warranted for a period of three (3) years against all defects.
F Fluorescent lamps shall be warranted for a period of one (1) year against all defects.
G All other aspects of the sign including but not necessarily limited to metal cabinets, channel letters,
plexiglass lexan faces and steel supporting structures shall be warranted for a period of one (1) year
against all defects including fit, finish and merchantability
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Cloud Signs
1 Sign Back: White formed ABS SP -910 plastic 177 inches thick, Korad- capped.
2. Sign Face: White pan formed polycarbonate plastic 150 inches thick with processed graphics.
Colors shall be processed to match PMS 485 Red and PMS 165 Orange and applied in
locations shown on drawings.
3. Vertical Brace: Aluminum 2 inches wide by 3/16 inches thick, lengths and number per specific
sign drawings.
4 Fluorescent Lamps: General Electric T 12 cold weather rated; lengths and wattage per specific
sign drawings.
5. Tombstones: Kulka 583GDF two required per lamp.
6. Lighting Ballast: Advance electronic sized per load requirement.
7 Gasket Tape: Polyflex 136.
8. Wall Anchors: Non corrosive, 3/8 inch diameter, toggle bolts for EIFS locations and lag bolts and
shields for masonry locations. Lengths shall be appropriate for the thickness of the substrate
material with the minimum length being 2 1 /2 inches.
B. Channel Letters:
1 Letter Stripe Sides and Back: Aluminum .063 inches thick and painted gloss black on the
exterior of the letter stripe and white on the interior Dry film thickness shall be 2.2 mils
minimum and 2.5 mils maximum
2. Letter Stripe Face: Pigmented plexiglass 3/16 inch thick, colors red #2662 and orange #2119.
3. Trim Black 1 inch jewelite trim with #8 sheet metal screws for attachment
4 Raceway Where required shall be aluminum .080 inches thick four sided with a removable face
for access to power supplies. Raceways shall be primed white with a minimum dry film
thickness of 2.2 mils.
5. LED Lighting: General Electric Tetra LED System as manufactured by GELcore. LED strips
shall have 5 LEDs per foot and shall utilize the appropriate GELcore power strip for the total
number of LEDs required. LEDs within the letters shall red /red color and for the stripes
red /orange color
J•1Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div- 10 \Sec -10426 05/20/09
2
6. Paint: Acrylic enamel polyurethane as manufactured by Matthews Paint Company Pleasant
Prairie, WI Colors shall be series 42 -204 Gloss Black and 42 -202 White.
7 Wall Anchors: Non corrosive, 3/8 inch diameter toggle bolts for EIFS locations and lag bolts and
shields for masonry locations. Lengths shall be appropriate for the thickness of the substrate
material with the minimum length being 2 1 /2 inches.
C. Pylon and Monument Signs:
1 Cabinets: Constructed of extruded aluminum angles and components having a minimum
thickness of 125 inches and sheet aluminum fillers having a minimum thickness of .063 inches.
2. Cabinet Supporting Structure: Constructed of steel of size and thickness required for wind Toads
all as called for on drawings.
3. Paint: Acrylic enamel polyurethane as manufactured by Matthews Paint Company Pleasant
Prairie, WI. Colors shall be series 42 -204 Gloss Black and 42 202 White.
4 Vents: Two inch round aluminum located per drawings.
5. Faces: For standard prototypical signs Arlon Signtech Flexface heat transfer with clear coat
glasscoat protective coating having a minimum thickness of 0225 millimeters. For multi- tenant
panel replacements, Lexan panels decorated with Arlon Signtech pressure sensitive vinyl
which has the FX protective coating applied. Colors to be:
AutoZone Red Arlon Signtech Colortac Vinyl #2662
AutoZone Orange Arlon Signtech Colortac Vinyl #2119
Black Arlon Signtech Colortac Vinyl #2025
6. Fluorescent Lamps: General Electric T 12 cold weather rated; lengths and wattage per specific
sign drawings.
7 Tombstones: Kulka 582CDF two required per Tamp.
8. Lighting Ballast: Advance electronic sized per load requirement.
9. Anchor Bolts: Steel complete with fastening and leveling nuts and washers and of sizes and
shapes as shown on drawings.
10. Grout: Non shrink with 2500 psi compressive strength.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1 Installation procedures and requirements itemized below are the same for all sizes and lengths
and types of signs.
2. The sign installer shall inspect all components for shipping damage as called for in paragraph
1.01 all visible damage must be noted on the bill of lading at the time of receipt of the signs;
hidden damage must be reported within 72 hours of receipt of signage otherwise shipping
company shall have no responsibility for replacements. Exercise caution in removing the crating
material used to protect the sign during shipping.
3. The use of ladders, scaffolding or a sign crane in the process of installing signs must be in
compliance with the requirements of the Code of Safe Practice for Contractors Suppliers.
4 Make sure that all power to sign junction boxes as well as power to any overhead line in the area
of installation is turned off prior to commencing installation.
5. All work must comply with either local electrical code or the latest version of the National Electric
Code which ever is the more stringent.
6. All work associated with the installation of signage must comply with local zoning, building and
safety requirements; and all required permits must be issued and in hand rior to beginning any
work on the site.
7 Inspection requests and compliance with local codes and inspections shall be the responsibility
of the installing sub contractor Final inspection documents issued by the approving agency
shall be provided to AutoZone upon completion of the work.
8. All preparatory work required for the installation of all signs shall be accomplished so that the
signs can be installed a minimum of 30 days prior to the scheduled store opening date.
B. Cloud Signs:
1 Measure and layout cloud sign location to match the approved elevation drawings. Fasten the
installation layout pattern furnished by the sign manufacturer in the proper location on the
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div- 10\Sec 10426 05/20/09
3
building wall face. Ensure pattern is centered on painted orange graphic band and or is located
per all dimensions on the elevation drawings.
2. Locate, mark and drill all electrical and attachment penetrations per the pattern.
3. Remove faces from the section to be installed, locate and remove lifting point plug bolts, there
are typically two per sign section. Attach eye bolts or appropriate lifting angles with existing plug
bolts.
4 Lift section to mounting location and align with the fastener hole pattern; install aluminum pass
thru sleeve with sealant. Install 20 foot whip thru sleeve, visually review sign alignment with
adjacent painted graphic color bands and or other sign sections. If no further alignment is
required, tighten and secure all fasteners for that section.
5. Repeat the above steps for each section of the sign until all sections are in place and the sign is
complete.
6. General Contractor's electrical sub contractor can now make the final electrical connections
which will energize the sign.
7 Test light the sign and inspect all components to ensure all lamps are illuminating properly
repair and or replace all components that are not working with like specified material. Confirm
that all cut off toggle switches are in the on position, drain holes are free and clear and there is
no debris left inside the cabinet, then reinstall faces and plug bolts. Install sealant at all required
locations to ensure a watertight sign.
8. Clean sign faces per the requirements of paragraph 3.02 below
C. Channel Letter Signs:
1 Measure and layout sign location to match the approved elevation drawings. Fasten the
installation layout pattern furnished by the sign manufacturer in the proper location on the
building wall face. Ensure pattern is centered on painted orange graphic band and or is located
per all dimensions on the elevation drawings.
2. Locate, mark and drill all electrical and attachment penetrations per the pattern.
3. After mounting location has been finalized and the penetrations have been completed, remove
the pattern and begin mounting individual letters to either the building or to the raceway
depending on the type of installation called for Secure all fasteners and inspect workmanship
for proper mounting. Repeat for each letter and stripe.
4 Attach the power supply using #8 or #10 screws to the back of the channel letter inside the
raceway or inside the building depending on the type of installation called for on the drawings.
Maintain a 0.5 inch clearance from any side of the power supply to the walls of the channel
letter, raceway or any other obstruction. If more than one letter is to be attached to a single
power supply ensure that each of the supply wires is the same length. Each letter will come
with 20 feet of supply wire attached to the letter
5. Locate power supplies and set dip switches relative to each letter or stripe in accordance with
manufacturer's printed instructions and the requirements of installation drawings from the sign
manufacturer
6. General Contractor's electrical sub contractor can now make the final electrical connections
which will energize the sign.
7 Test light the sign and inspect all components to ensure all LED's are illuminating properly
repair and or replace all components that are not working with like specified material. Confirm
that all cut off toggle switches are in the on position, drain holes are free and clear and there is
no debris left inside the cabinet, then reinstall faces. Install sealant at all required locations to
ensure a watertight sign.
8. Clean sign faces per the requirements of paragraph 3.02 below
D Pylon and Monument Signs:
1 General Contractor shall construct foundation and locate anchor bolts furnished by the sign
manufacturer or construct the foundation with a direct bury support pipe all as called for per the
signed and sealed engineering drawings for the project. Do not set sign until concrete has
properly cured and reached specified design strength.
2. Ensure conduit for primary electrical feed is in place prior to pouring foundation and is projecting
above the top of the foundation to a height equal to the hand hole for a pylon sign, or the top of
the supporting pipe structure in the case of a monument sign.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div- 10\Sec 10426 05/20/09
4
3. For pylon signs, the installing contractor is to install freestanding sign by placing sign straps
around steel support pipe and lift onto anchor bolt leveling nuts washers, level sign base plate
and install top locking nuts washers. Sign installer is to energize the is no debris left inside the
cabinet, correct all deficiencies before placing sign straps thru eye bolts on top of the cabinet
and lifting sign from crate allowing secondary wiring to hang out of stub pipe of cabinet. Installer
to drop secondary wiring down pole to the hand hole in the support pipe and then drop end of
stub pipe down into steel pipe. Installer to adjust the sign cabinet to its proper position as called
for on the drawings then, weld steel cap ring to top of steel pipe. Welds are to be uniform
around the circumference of the pipe. Installer to touch -up steel pipe with gloss black where
strap marks show and paint welded areas at the top of the structure as well as all exposed steel
at the bottom of the structure gloss black.
4 For monument signs, installing contractor to energize sign cabinet to check for proper lighting,
confirm that all drain holes are free and clear and there is no debris left inside the cabinet,
correct all deficiencies before placing sign strap thru eye bolts on top of cabinet and lifting sign
from crate. Open hinged face of cabinet and while lifting sign cabinet over pipe support, feed
electrical wires into column. Continue to lower sign cabinet on to pipe support which should be
positioned between the aluminum pole guides within the cabinet. With hinged face open bolt the
3' x 3' x 'A" weld angles in place at the top bottom of cabinet with hex head bolts, then adjust
the sign to its proper position as called for on the drawings, weld the angles to the column at the
top bottom of the cabinet. Paint all exposed steel within the cabinet area white to match white
column and close hinged face and re- secure.
5. Clean sign faces per the requirements of paragraph 3.02 below
3.02 CLEANING
A. General
1 Do not use any solvent based or abrasive cleaners.
2. Do not use steam cleaners, pressure washers, or hot water
3. Do not use compressed air to clean any part of any sign.
4 Do not attempt to clean sign while the sign is energized.
B Supplies Required
1 Mild detergent cleaner like Meguiare's soft car wash gel.
2. Clean car wash mitt or soft cloth.
3. Bucket filled with cool water
4 Standard lawn and garden hose.
5. Low pressure cold water source (less than 100 psi).
6. Terry cloth towels or chamois.
7 Shop vac with brush attachment.
8. 2' or 4' paint brush or soft parts brush.
C. Sign Exteriors
1 Rinse the loose dirt off the outside of the sign using the hose and a low pressure cold water
supply Always point the hose down at a 45 degree angle. Start at the top of the sign and work
your way down. Do not direct any water into any vents or louvers.
2. Thoroughly mix a small amount of the detergent with the cool water in the bucket.
3. Using the wash mitt or soft cloth, gently wipe the sign and faces with soapy water in a circular
motion. Start at the top of the sign and work down to the bottom.
4 Rinse off the outside of the sign as well as the faces using the hose and a low pressure cold
water supply Always point the hose down at a 45 degree angle. Start at the top of the sign and
work your way down. Do not direct any water into any vents or louvers
5. Dry sign faces with soft terry cloth towel or chamois.
6. For pylon signs, wash poles and cabinets with the same solution. Rinse poles, cabinets and
faces off using hose, always pointing hose down at a 45 degree angle. Start at the top of the
pole and work your way down. Rinse the faces last and be sure to remove all soapy residue.
End of Section
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div- 10\Sec 10426 05/20/09
5
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div- 10\Sec 10426 05/20/09
6
DIVISION 10 SECTION 10800 TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractor shall furnish and install all toilet accessories, as well as provide any other items necessary
to provide for a complete project meeting all local or governing requirements whether items are
specifically scheduled or not.
B. All accessories are surface mounted provide all concealed blocking required to anchor each item
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Provide only as scheduled below)
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Men's Toilet
1 Toilet Paper Holder InterDesign White.
2. Paper Towel (roll) Holder InterDesigns White.
3. Grab Bar 36 inches long Bobrick #B- 5806.99x36.
4 Grab Bar 42 inches long Bobrick #B 5806.99x42.
5. Framed Glass Mirror Bobrick #B -165, 18x36, 18 inches wide by 36 inches high.
6. Mop Holder Bobrick #B223 x 24 inches long (mounted above mop sink)
B. Women's Toilet
1 Toilet Paper Holder InterDesign White.
2. Paper Towel (roll) Holder InterDesigns White.
3. Grab Bar 36 inches long Bobrick #B- 5806.99x36.
4 Grab Bar 42 inches long Bobrick #B- 5806.99x42.
5. Framed Glass Mirror Bobrick #B -165, 18x36, 18 inches wide by 36 inches high.
C InterDesign toilet paper and towel holders are available through:
Resource Maintenance Inc.
P O.Box 5144
7129 Weddington Road
Concord, NC 28027
Attn. Thomas N. Booe or Michelle Booe
Tel. 704- 792 -1255 Tel. 704-782-1526
Fax 704 -794 -9719
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install all accessories plumb, level and securely anchored into position.
B. Install all toilet accessories in strict accordance with manufacturers printed instructions.
C All anchoring devices shall be placed into concealed blocking.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div 10\Sec 10800
1
End of Section
05/20/09
This Page Left Blank
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div- 10\Sec 10800 05/20/09
2
DIVISION 15 SECTION 15400 PLUMBING
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Include all labor and material (unless noted otherwise) required to complete all plumbing work called for
in the Contract Documents or required by approving authorities. Work shall include, but not necessarily
be limited to the following:
1 Storm water and or roof drainage piping system
2. Gas piping
3. Sanitary drainage and vent system piping
4 Hot and cold domestic water system piping and condensate piping
5. Pipe supports and insulation.
6. Valves and cocks
7 Plumbing fixtures
8. All existing drain and sewer lines are to be cleaned from tie -in back to tap at main
1.02 UTILITIES and SERVICE
A. See Section 01010 for specific requirements
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Materials first listed below have been done so in order to meet all general code and ordinance
requirements. Alternative materials may be used if approved by the local governing authority and
AutoZone.
2.02 PIPE
SERVICE
A. Soil, Waste Vent (inside bldg.)
B. Soil Waste (outside bldg.)
C Domestic Water (below grade)
D Domestic Water (above grade)
E. Domestic Water Main (to within 5' of bldg.)
F Condensate (inside bldg.)
G. Natural Gas (above grade)
H. Natural Gas (below grade)
2.03 JOINTS AND COUPLINGS
SERVICE
A. Soil, Waste Vent (inside bldg.)
B. Soil Waste (outside bldg.)
C Domestic Water (below grade)
D
E.
F
Domestic Water (inside above grade)
Condensate (inside bldg.)
Natural Gas
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div- 15 \Sec 15400
1
MATERIALS
A. Cast Iron, or PVC -DWV with NSF Seal)
B. Cast Iron, or PVC -SDR
C Type "K" copper or CPVC
D Type "L" copper, hard drawn
E. Type "K" copper or CPVC
F PVC
G Schedule 40, Black Steel
H. Schedule 40, Black Steel with factory
applied protective coating.
MATERIALS
A. Cast Iron bell spigot, mechanical, or PVC
DWV
B. Cast Iron bell spigot, mechanical, or PVC
SDR, bell and flexible elastomeric rings.
C. Wrought copper CPVC No joints shall be
allowed under building pad.
D Wrought copper 95/5 tin antimony solder
E. PVC -DWV
F Steel, under 2 inch threaded, over 2 inch
welded
05/20/09
2.04 PIPE INSULATION
SERVICE
A. Domestic Cold Water Piping
B. Domestic Hot Water Piping
C. Condensate
A.
B.
C
MATERIALS
Imcolock and Imcolshield Polyolefin 1 inch
thick
Above grade Same as cold water piping.
Below grade Closed cell pipe insulation 3/8
inch thick suitable for underground use.
Same as cold water piping when located
indoors.
2.05 VALVES AND COCKS
A. Valves and cocks shall be selected to suit the function intended and sized to connect to adjoining piping.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1 Crane
2. Jenkins
3. Lunkenheimer
4 Nibco -Scott
5. Nordstrom
2.06 DRAINS, CLEANOUTS and HYDRANTS
A. Floor Cleanout: Cast iron body with tapered bronze plug, threaded adjustable nickel bronze top and
round satin nickel secured scoriated access cover Wade 8130AF, Zurn Z 1400, or Smith 4890.
B. Wall Cleanout: Cast iron ferrule with spigot outlet and threaded brass countersunk plug drilled and
tapped for 1/4 20 screw Provide round stainless steel access cover with 1/4 20 x 3 -1/2 center screw
Wade 8550 and 8480R, Zurn Z 1441 or Smith 4436.
C. Grade Cleanout (Paving): Cast iron body with tapered bronze plug, threaded adjustable nickel bronze top
and round satin nickel secured scoriated access cover Wade 8130AF Zurn Z 1400, or Smith 4890
D Grade Cleanout (Landscape): PVC hub with raised head plug.
E. Wall Hydrant: 3/4 inch non freeze, with straight inlet connections, anti siphon backflow preventer bronze
casings, and chrome plated bronze box with locking cover size to suit wall construction, Wade series
8600 -175, Zurn Z 1305, or Smith 5509QT
F Yard Hydrant: 3/4 inch non freeze, with straight inlet connections, as manufactured by Woodford
Manufacturing Co. See drawings for specific model required.
G. Floor Drain (if required): One piece cast iron body for installation in an unfinished structural floor slab;
with nickel- bronze strainer secured slotted grate, and trap primer if required, Wade 1100STD Zurn Z
315, or Smith 2005.
H. Roof Drain (if required): One piece cast iron roof drain with flashing ring and polypropylene mushroom
dome, Wade 3220, Zurn Z 121 or Smith 1010.
2.07 WATER HEATER (AutoZone Furnished Contractor Installed)
A. Electric Water Heater Instant, tankless with electrical connections by Electrical Contractor
2.08 BACKFLOW PREVENTER (if required by code)
A. Watts No. 909 series reduced pressure backflow preventer Provide with air gap and drain line to the
mop sink. If unit is installed, Contractor shall test the entire system make repairs or adjustments as
required, and tag all valves.
2.09 PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE
American Kohler Eljer
Standard
P -1 Toilet (elongated)
1 6 gpf 'Cadet' #2998.800 "Highline' #K -3427 'Patriot" #091 2125
Flush controls shall be handed so that the control will be on the side adjacent to the lavatory
J \Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div- 15 \Sec 15400 05/20/09
2
American Kohler Eljer
Standard
P -2 Lavatory 'Lucerne' #0355.012 'Greenwich' #2032 'Delwyn' #051 1634
Faucet Moen #8800, 4 inch centers, 4 inch wrist blade with 1/4 turn handles, washerless
cartridges, and Moen #116711 1.5 gallon per minute aerator
Drain Moen offset chrome plated tailpiece.
P -3 Service Sink Fiat #MSB -2424 or Mustee #63M
Faucet Moen #8124
P -4 Water Fountain Handicap accessible dual height: Elkay EZTL -8C or Halsey Taylor HTV8BL -Q
P -5 Urinal (if Req'd.) 'Trimbrook' #6561.017 "Bardon" #K- 4960 -T 'Savon" #161 1090
Flush Valve Sloan #186 -1 or Zurn #Z6003AV -EWS
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PIPE and JOINT INSTALLATION
A. Install piping concealed unless otherwise specifically approved by Owner
B. Provide uniform pitch of 1/4 per foot for horizontal waste and soil piping within building unless noted
otherwise on drawings. Pitch bends for proper drainage
C Install vent piping with each bend 45 degrees minimum from horizontal.
D Do not allow copper piping to make direct contact with concrete or dissimilar metals.
E. Where water piping penetrates floor or walls, accurately place non metallic sleeves of proper sizes to
accommodate pipe and insulation. After installation, completely seal all penetrations.
F Provide clearance for installation of insulation and for access to valves, drains and unions.
D Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or connected equipment.
H. Apply insulation to clean, dry surfaces only in accordance with manufacturer's printed instruction. Do not
use staples.
I. Insulation shall be continuous through hangers, sleeves, openings and around fittings, valves and unions.
J. Insulate all water piping.
3.02 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
B. Install ball valve for shutoff and to isolate equipment.
C. Provide plugs cocks for gas service at entry to building and at equipment.
D Pipe sizes 2 inches and smaller will be threaded.
E. Pipe sizes larger than 2 inches will be flanged.
F Adapters for copper tubing shall be solder or screw to solder
3.03 BURIED PIPE INSTALLATION
A. Install all below grade so that it will be continuously supported for its entire length.
B. Provide a minimum of 18 -inch earth cover for exterior water piping. Where frost depth exceeds 18
inches provide earth cover as required by local code.
C. Install waste lines outside the building lines at a minimum slope of 2 percent unless indicated otherwise
in drawings.
D Install same type piping material specified for inside building to 5 feet outside of building.
E. Coat below grade gas piping with asphaltum paint. Protect from damage during back filling.
3.04 FIXTURE INSTALLATION
A. Set fixtures square, plumb, and rigidly secured in place in accordance with all printed instructions.
B. Install toilets so the flush control will be on the open side of the toilet adjacent to the lavatory in order to
meet the handicapped requirements.
C Install wall mounted fixtures with wall carriers to suit conditions and occupancy use.
D Provide chrome plated traps and tailpieces and escutcheons where exposed to view
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div- 15 \Sec -15400 05/20/09
3
E. Provide insulating and protective devices for all exposed plumbing under lavatories as required by
handicapped codes.
F Install piping to instant tankless hot water heater in accordance with the water heater manufacturer's
instructions.
G. Run piping for exterior wall mounted hose bibs, if required or shown on the drawings, overhead and down
inside face of masonry wall on the warm side of insulation. Water line concealed in drywall shall be
insulated. Provide cut -off and winterization vent valve in water line at under side of roof deck before line
turns down wall.
H. Install yard hydrant in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
Lubricate cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. After grade pads have been poured
and prior to final inspection remove cleanout plugs, relubricate and reinstall using enough force to
ensure a permanent, leak -proof joint.
End of Section
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div- 15 \Sec 15400 05/20/09
4
DIVISION 15 SECTION 15500 HEATING AIR CONDITIONING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS INFORMATION
A. Contractor shall be responsible for all permits; coordinate roof openings and framing for equipment; and
the first year labor and parts warranty on all equipment.
B. The Venstar control system consists of sensors, thermostats, equipment control pacs and a data
concentrator communicator One equipment control pac will be located inside each roof top unit and
the data concentrator is to be located in the telephone closet.
C The following roof top units will come to the job site with factory installed and wired sensors and control
pac: Carrier model numbers 48HJD007 48HJD008, 48HJD012, 50HJ007 50HJ008, 50HJ012,
5OHJ0007 5OHJQ008, and 5OHJQ012. For all other size Carrier units, as well as all units at 460 volts,
the Venstar sensors and control pac will have to be field installed by the Contractor Additionally for all
existing roof top units that are scheduled to be reused, the Venstar sensors and control pac will need to
be field installed by the Contractor All other devices which make up the Venstar system are to be
installed by the Contractor in accordance with the location and wiring diagrams in the drawings.
PART 2PRODUCTS
2.01 PACKAGE ROOF TOP UNITS (AutoZone Furnished Contractor Installed)
A. Individual package roof mounted heating and cooling units, roof curbs, pre- fabricated ductwork, and
grilles, Venstar communicating HVAC controls, sensors, thermostats, along with accessories
(economizers, firestats, and or smoke detectors) as required by local code. See drawings for specific
schedule of quantity and capacity of units.
2.02 TOILET EXHAUST FANS (Fans Only AutoZone Furnished Contractor Installed)
A. Broan #503 side discharge, 5.0 Sones, 160 CFM.
B. Contractor shall furnish and install Broan 401 duct and #639 wall cap for each toilet exhaust fan.
2.03 VENSTAR COMPONENTS (AutoZone Furnished Contractor Installed)
A. Communicating Thermostats: One per unit.
B. Data Concentrator Communicator One per store
C Outside Air Temperature Sensor One per store
PART 3EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. For all buildings, position roof curb on top of deck directly over steel angle frame between bar joists.
Attach the curb to the angle frame with screws through the thickness of the deck.
B. Set rooftop equipment level and square on curb and provide watertight seal for ductwork and utility
connections. Do not cut holes in the bottom of the unit. Install all accessories (economizers, firestats,
and or smoke detectors) as required by local codes. Install pre- fabricated duck work and adjust supply
grilles for optimum air distribution.
C. Install Venstar HVAC equipment and components in locations shown on the drawings. All low voltage
wiring shall be installed per the manufacturer's specifications and printed instructions.
D Install toilet exhaust fans with housing anchored to ceiling structure and grille with full perimeter contact
to ceiling. Install ductwork per SMACNA requirements for low- pressure systems. Wall cap shall fit tightly
with full perimeter caulked watertight.
3.02 TEST AND STARTUP
A. Test system for refrigerant Teaks after installation; repair all Teaks to place system in operation. If start up
occurs in winter shut down refrigerant system and repeat startup and testing at start of first cooling
season. Replace filters prior to final inspection.
B. Thermostat settings: Summer 78 degrees F Winter 68 degrees F
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div -15 05/20/09
1
3.03 WARRANTY
A. Contractor shall warranty covering workmanship and installation of equipment for 1 year
B. Supplier shall warranty parts and labor for 1 year on any component replacement.
End of Section
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div 15 05/20/09
2
DIVISION 16 SECTION 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Include all labor and material (unless noted otherwise) required to complete all electrical work called for
in the Contract Documents or required by approving authorities. Work shall include, but not necessarily
be limited to the following:
1 Conduit, Power Poles, Wire, and Cable
2. Boxes, Wiring Devices and Safety Switches.
3. Primary wiring, conduit and final connections for all sign circuits
4 Conduit and pull wire for data and telephone cable runs from phone board to roof deck
5. Conduit and pull wires for Satellite System Cable
6. Conduit and wire for Venstar Lighting Control System
7 Conduit for Venstar HVAC Control System (Wiring by Mechanical Contractor)
8. Conduit and pull wires for Security System (Wiring N. I. C.).
9. Electric Instant Water Heater (Plumbing under Division 15)
10. Devices and wiring which must be completed after store fixtures have been set.
11 Field- testing.
12. Electric Service Entrance and Utility Coordination: Including complete connection to utility service
point. Provide conduit, wire and equipment necessary per local utility company requirements.
13. Telephone Service Entrance and Utility Coordination: Including complete conduit connection to utility
service point.
1.02 UTILITIES and SERVICE
A. See Section 01010 for specific requirements
1.03 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide UL approved materials and devices.
B. Comply with the most current version applicable of the NFPA 70: National Electrical Code as a minimum
standard. Comply with more stringent local requirements if applicable.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUIT
A. Rigid: Galvanized steel with threaded couplings. Intermediate grade may be used instead of rigid where
permitted by NEC.
B. Thin Wall (EMT): Galvanized steel with liquid tight compression type couplings in concrete slabs, and set
screw couplings in dry locations.
C Nonmetallic: Rigid PVC, Schedule 40, with factory made bends, joints solvent welded.
D Flexible Conduit (Greenfield) Spirally wound interlocked steel armored raceway conforming to NEC 350
and UL.
E. Metal Clad Cable (MC): Factory assembled 12/2 with ground conforming to NEC 334 and UL1569.
F Power Poles: Hubbell, two compartment, painted white, furnished by AutoZone, installed by Contractor
2.02 OUTLET, SWITCH, JUNCTION, and PULL BOXES
A. Boxes: Galvanized steel, sized for application, and conforming to NEC and UL Requirements.
B. Exterior Boxes: Weatherproof type with threaded hubs and gasket covers.
1 Exterior outlet boxes at the front of the store shall have weatherproofed "while in use" covers.
2. Exterior outlets installed on the roof top units shall have weatherproof "while in use' covers in the
following states: Maine, New Hampshire, Vermont, Massachusetts, Rhode Island, Connecticut, New
York, Pennsylvania, Michigan, Wisconsin, Minnesota, North Dakota, South Dakota, Washington,
Montana, Idaho, Wyoming, Colorado, Nebraska, Iowa, Kansas, Ohio, Northern half Indiana, Northern
half Illinois, and the District of Columbia.
C. Floor Boxes: Rigid PVC with protective cap.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div- 16\Sec. 16050 05/20/09
1
2.03 CONDUCTORS
A. Soft drawn copper of not Tess than 98% conductivity
B. Size No. 8 AWG and larger shall be stranded, and sizes smaller than 8 AWG shall be solid.
C Minimum wire size shall be No. 12 AWG unless noted otherwise. Increase wire one size if length of
branch circuit is 100 feet or more.
D All conductors shall be insulated and rated 600 volts at 75 degrees Centigrade. Use THWN insulation on
building and branch circuit wiring unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
2.04 WIRING DEVICES
A. Wall Switches: Specification grade, quiet make break design, toggle handle, rated 20 AMP 120 V
B. Receptacles: Specification grade, full gang size, polarized duplex, parallel blade, U- Grounding Slot, rated
20 AMP 125 Volt, color to be ivory except as noted below
1 Receptacles located in kick plate or wall areas to be painted black shall be Black.
C. Cover Plates: General use bakelite with smooth finish and rolled outer edges. Color to match device.
D Safety Switches: General duty, fusible types, with NEMA Type 1 enclosure for interior locations, and Type
3R enclosure for exterior locations.
E. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1 Arrow Hart
2. Bryant
3. Crouse -Hinds
4 General Electric
5. Hubbell
6. Pass Seymour
F Quick Connect Relock: Lithonia factory wired, with 11 foot of cable attached, both one and two circuit
models, furnished by AutoZone, installed by Contractor
2.05 WATER HEATER (AutoZone Furnished Contractor Installed)
A. Electric Water Heater Tankless, Powerstream Model RP 1P dual voltage, 208 volt, 71 kw rated at 35
amps or 240 volt, 9.1 kw rated at 40 amps.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CONDUIT INSTALLATION
A. Use rigid conduit or PVC conduit in earth and where exposed to weather Make joints with standard
thread couplings or unions. Protect newly cut conduit threads with graphite, grease, or other rust
resistive, non insulating compound. Use double lock nuts at terminations.
B. PVC conduit may be used for underground feeders from service entrance to panels, to site lighting, and
to pylon billboard signs only Use rigid steel, long radius elbows on risers from underground conduit.
Provide "THW' copper grounding conductors for entire length of nonmetallic conduit and connect to rigid
steel. Size per NEC.
C. Use EMT only in dry protected areas where not subject to mechanical damage and in accordance with
the latest issue of the NEC. Install EMT a minimum of 1 1/2" below the roof deck; do not install either
EMT or junction boxes tight to the underside of the roof deck.
D Install moisture seal where conduits penetrate outside walls or slabs -on- grade.
E. Secure conduits to building structure at intervals of not more than 5 feet for sizes up to and including, 2
inch; and at intervals not to exceed 8 feet for larger sizes.
F Run conduits concealed wherever possible. Exposed runs shall be installed in neat, symmetrical lines
parallel to, or at right angles to building lines.
G Install conduit a minimum of 6 inches from any water lines.
H. Terminate conduit at equipment subject to vibration with flexible connections. In wet locations, use
Neoprene or Polychloroprene covered flex with watertight fittings. Provide for continuity of ground.
I Install conduit system with pull wire for Venstar HVAC control wiring. See drawings for all required
locations.
J. Install conduit system for Venstar Lighting Control system See drawings for all required locations.
K. Install conduit with pull wire for alarm system where indicated on drawings.
J \Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div- 16\Sec. 16050 05/20/09
2
L. Install conduit for telephone service entrance. Service entrance shall be underground from telephone
equipment board in building to point of connection at either telephone company ground mounted pedesta
or utility pole.
M. Metal Clad (MC) cable may only be used for feed to branch lighting circuits from home run junction box at
roof deck. Application and installation of MC Cable must comply with NEC Article 334
N. Install power poles where shown on the drawings and in a manner recommended by pole manufacturer
Provide all necessary accessories to complete the required installation of circuitry and devices.
3.02 OUTLET, SWITCH, JUNCTION, and PULL BOX INSTALLATION
A. Install outlet, switch and junction boxes slightly recessed to allow for full perimeter contact of device
cover plates.
B. Install boxes for convenience outlets 12 inches above floor unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
C Install switch boxes 4 -0' above floor and on the strike side of doors unless otherwise indicated on the
drawings.
D In masonry construction, height of boxes may be adjusted slightly to fit coursing. Install sealant between
the edge of the box and the adjacent wall surface prior to installing the cover
E. Set boxes for floor outlets flush to floor, unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
F Install junction or pull boxes at each conductor splice connection point, junction point, or pull point for the
connection of conduit.
3.03 CONDUCTOR INSTALLATION
A. Maintain color- coding throughout electric system
B. Minimum conductor size shall be 12 AWG unless shown otherwise.
C. Increase conductor one size if length of branch circuit is 100 feet or more.
D Make conductor lengths identical for parallel feeders.
E. Provide solder less connections only
3.04 DATA, TELEPHONE CABLE POWER POLE INSTALLATION
A. Install conduit and pull wires from the top of the telephone equipment board to the roof deck in stores
with exposed structure, or to above the suspended ceiling in stores with ceilings. Conduit sizing shall be
as shown on the drawings.
B. AutoZone's representative will install all Cat. 5 data and telephone cable.
C. Power poles for the check -out pod, parts pods and the test center will come with those fixtures and will
be pre -wired with outlets and a mating quick relock device. The pod fixtures will have provisions to
receive the power poles and once in place they should be self supporting. AutoZone's fixture installers
will make the quick connect between the two pre -wired devices. Contractor shall install the power pole
for the test center as called for in the drawings after the fixtures supporting the test center have been
installed.
D Power poles for the Manager's office and the closed circuit TV system shall be furnished by AutoZone
and will be delivered to the job site with all the other electrical gear Install these poles after office area
fixtures are in place and as called for in the manufacturer's instructions.
E. See drawings for additional information and requirements.
3.05 WIRING DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. Install wall switches with the off position of the toggle pointed down.
B. Install receptacle outlet devices so that the grounding prong will be below the power prongs.
C. Do not install any devices rated at less than 20 amps.
D Install device cover plates with perimeter edges in full contact with finish surfaces.
E. Install wall switch in bathrooms connect both light and exhaust fan to switch.
F Hard wire quick connect relock devices to home run circuitry in junction boxes where indicated on
drawings. Coil excess cable and wire tie to bar joist closest to junction box. Owner will make final
connection to the mating device furnished with the store fixture.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div- 16\Sec. 16050 05/20/09
3
3.06 FIELD TESTING
A. Test all circuits with a "Multi" Tester to determine that system is free of short circuits and that phase
conductors are not grounded.
B. Check motor controllers and all electrical equipment for proper operations.
C Immediately replace defective or damaged materials and equipment.
End of Section
J Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div- 16\Sec. 16050 05/20/09
4
DIVISION 16 SECTION 16400 ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 FOR ELECTRIC SERVICE
A. Submit to local utility all required drawings, loads and any other information to obtain service.
B. Provide all materials and installation required by the serving utility for the connection of service.
C. Work should include, but not necessarily be limited to, primary conduits, cable (if required), pads for
ground mounted transformer grounding, metering provisions, secondary conductors and conduit, all as
required by the local utility
1.02 FOR REMODEL PROJECTS
A. Contractor shall confirm that the existing electric service configuration and equipment matches that which
has been shown on the drawing. Report all discrepancies to the AutoZone project manager prior to
finalizing bid or commencing any work.
B. Contractor to confirm with the serving utility that the ultimate configuration will be acceptable for the
connection of service.
C The intent of these documents is to insure that there will be a complete installation connected to the local
utility company providing service. See paragraph 1 01 above for work required.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ELECTRIC SERVICE COMPONENTS
A. Conduit: Rigid or PVC conduit complete with watertight connectors and couplings.
B. Concrete Pads for Ground Mounted Transformers: Furnish sizes as required by local utility company
C Weatherproof Meter Socket: Conform to local utility requirements.
D Wire way Three or four wire racks, as determined by local utility for specified service.
E. Conductors: As required by local utility
F Fused Disconnects: Furnished by AutoZone, installed by Contractor
G. External Swithchboards: If required by local utility furnished by AutoZone, installed by Contractor
H. If service will be overhead in lieu of underground add the following:
1 Service Entrance Weatherhead: Cast metal conforming to local utility requirements
2. Service Entrance Mast: Rigid tubular metal fabrication with provisions for attachment of service rack
and weatherhead.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install conduits, pull boxes, transformer pads, etc. as required by local utility company
B. Install service rack and weatherhead at proper height. Provide mast kit, if required.
C. Extend masthead to provide a minimum ground clearance of 20 feet for overhead service.
D Install rigid conduit to weatherproof meter socket.
E. Make all secondary terminations and provide coordination with local utility company
End of Section
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div- 16\Sec 16400 05/20/09
1
This Page Left Blank
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div- 16\Sec -16400 05/20/09
2
DIVISION 16 SECTION 16480 PANELBOARDS
(AutoZone Furnished Contractor Installed)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 FOR PROTOTYPICAL PROJECTS
A. All panelboards shall be AutoZone Furnished and Contractor Installed and will include:
1 Panelboard Cabinet
2. Ground Bus bars
3. Circuit Breakers
1.02 FOR REMODEL PROJECTS
A. Contractor shall confirm that any existing panelboard indicated to remain and be reused is complete with
ground buss bars and all circuit breakers and that all is in good working and serviceable order
B. Report all defects and deficiencies to AutoZone project manager so that replacement parts and or
equipment can be ordered and delivered to the job site within the required timelines for the project.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PANELBOARDS -120 208 (120 240)
A. Metal cabinets with gray enamel finish complete with panel trim having concealed hinges and flush lock
with two keys, concealed trip clamps and screw cover front, and galvanized steel back box with
knockouts.
B. Panelboards will be factory assembled, full capacity solid neutral, with sequence style bussing, three
phase four wire, or single phase three wire.
2.02 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Molded case, automatic air circuit breakers as supplied with thermal and magnet trip and trip -free
position separate from either "ON" or "OFF" positions; interrupting rating of 10,000 AIC.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards in accordance with the "one -line' diagram contained in the drawings for the project.
B. Anchor all panelboards securely into position within the wall framing.
C. Connect the circuits exactly as shown on the panel schedule in the drawings.
3.02 IDENTIFICATION OF PANELS
A. Provide a laminated plastic plate at top of panel engraved with designation identical on panelboard
schedule or riser diagram
B. Provide typewritten directory attached to inside cover indicating loads controlled by each circuit, directory
should be identical to panel schedule in drawings.
C. Circuits identified on the panel schedules but not utilized shall be labeled as spare on the directory
End of Section
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div- 16\Sec 16480 05/20/09
1
This Page Left Blank
JAProduction Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div- 161Sec 16480 05/20/09
2
DIVISION 16 SECTION 16500 LIGHTING
(AutoZone Furnished Contractor Installed)
PART 1 GENERAL
A. AutoZone shall furnish the following items for installation by Contractor
1 All interior Tight fixtures, lamps, and ballast.
2. All exterior light fixtures, lamps, and ballast.
3. Site light poles, brackets, and base plates.
4 Automatic Lighting Control Panel
5. Low voltage relay
6. Photocell sensor, motion detectors and other accessories for the Lighting Control system
B. Contractor shall furnish all conduits, conductors, connectors, wall switches and other items necessary for
the complete installation and control of the lighting system
C. Attachments to building structure shall be furnished by Contractor
D Provide necessary trim brackets and accessories for complete installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Site Light Poles: Square straight steel, 5" shaft, 25' height unless shown otherwise on drawings, completE
with base plate and pre drilled for luminaire attachment.
B. Site Light: Shoebox type fixture, 400 watt metal halide unless shown otherwise on drawings.
C Wall Light: Stonco wall mounted 175 watt metal halide unless shown otherwise on drawings.
D Soffit Light: Recessed open reflector downlight, 175 watt metal halide.
E. Fluorescent Light Sales Floor 8' long, 2 Tamp strip with F096/835/XP lamps and matched electronic
ballast.
F Fluorescent Light Parts Areas: Tandem 8' long, single tube reflector strip, with F096/835/XP lamp and
matched electronic ballast.
G Exit Light: Polycarbonate housing, LED lamps and nickel cadmium battery
H. Emergency Light: Polycarbonate housing, with dual heads and lead calcium battery
I Bathroom Light: 4' long, 32 watt one lamp strip with matched electronic ballast and glass cover
J. Automatic Lighting Control Panel: Venstar #LCP -400.
K. Accessories: Multi -level outside light sensor motion detector manual push button as manufactured by
Venstar
L. Control Relay 12 volt to 120 volt alarm panel interface as manufactured by Venstar
PART 3 EXECUTION
A. Interior Building Fluorescent: Attach each light fixture directly to either the bottoms of a bar joist or to
unistrut that has been attached to the roof structure with allthread rod. Insure each run of fixtures is
straight and where hung on unistrut, level. Equip each fixture with owner furnished lamps, as scheduled.
B. Interior Building Other Light Fixture: Attach fixtures either to unistrut or wall surface as required. Insure
fixtures are plumb and level. Equip each fixture with owner furnished lamps, as scheduled.
C. Exterior Building Wall Lighting: Attach mounting box and back plate to wall so that it is plumb and level at
the correct elevation above finished floor Provide the correct trim where necessary to achieve tight fit.
Attach fixture to back plate and provide gaskets or necessary accessories to prevent light leaks around
trim Provide sealant around all edges.
D Exterior Building Soffit Lighting (If Required): Attach mounting frame to soffit framing so that it is plumb
and level at the correct elevation above finished floor Attach fixture and trim and provide gaskets or
necessary accessories to prevent light leaks around trim Provide sealant around all edges.
E. Exterior Site Lights: Set light poles plumb, rigidly in place in accordance with light pole manufacturer's
recommendations. Provide necessary brackets, caps and accessories to facilitate the installation of the
light fixture. Number of fixtures per pole and orientation of fixtures shall be as shown on the drawings.
F Automatic Lighting Control Panel: Panel installation will be semi recessed to allow for smooth operation
of the hinged door and the connection of conduits between the power and lighting panelboards and this
panel. Install ALC Panel where indicated on drawings relative to the other panelboards. Connect circuits
to contactor poles in the sequence indicated on drawings.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div- 16\Sec 16500 05/20/09
1
G. Control Relay Install alarm panel interface (12 120 volt relay) on the alarm telephone board where
indicated on drawings. Connect 120 -volt side of relay to the ALC Panel as indicated on the drawings.
The alarm contractor will make final connection on the 12 -volt side of the relay module.
H. Motion Detectors: Install motion detectors on junction boxes mounted on unistrut and hung from roof
structure where indicated on drawings. Install 18 gauge color coordinated wiring in conduit between
motion detector and the ALC Panel.
I. Manual Push Button. Install manual push button on junction box located in the Manager's Office Area
where indicated on drawings. Install 18 gauge color coordinated wiring in conduit between push button
and the ALC Panel.
J. Photocell: Install photocell in a weather -proof junction box to be located on the galvanized pipe conduit
for the satellite coax cable above the roof of the building. Photocell must face north and be placed a
minimum of 12 inches above finish roof Do not mount on the backside of the parapet wall. Install 18
gauge color coordinated wiring in conduit between photocell and the ALC Panel.
J•\Production Masters\Docs\Project Specs\Div- 16\Sec 16500
2
End of Section
05/20/09
Tel 909 869 -0989
ATTN:
LINDA PANGRLE
CITY OF PORT ANGELES
321 EAST 5TH STREET
PORT ANGELES
Telephone
ENCLOSED ARE
Description
SEISMIC CALCULATIONS
DETAIL DRAWINGS
LAYOUT DRAWINGS
161 Atlantic Street
MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING
EST 1985
LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL
360 417 -4815
Memo
PLEASE ACCEPT THE ENCLOSED AS OUR SUBMITTAL FOR PAN REVIEW AND PERMIT
APPROVAL TO INSTALL INTERIOR RACKS IN AN AUTOZONE BUILDING WITH A
VALUATION OF $51 000 00 WE INCLUDE. 2 SETS OF CALCULATIONS AND 3 SETS OF
DETAIL DRAWINGS PLEASE ADVISE UPON APPROVAL.
CALCULATIONS FOR PERMIT SUBMITTAL
DRAWINGS FOR YOUR RECORDS
LETTER FOR CLIENTS RECORDS
Copies
WA 98362
No. of Copies
I21
13 1
13 1
SEIZMIC
INC.
Pomona CA 91768
JobNo: 09 -0650
Fax
RECEIVED
JUN 2 9 2009
CITY OF PORT ANGELES
BUILDING DIVISION
SUBJECT AUTOZONE 4110
1936 EAST FIRST STREET
PORT ANGELES, WA 98362
Copies To
Fax. 909 869 -0981
Byl AMY EDWARDS
Contractors License No 665374
STORAGE RACK;
DRIVE -IN RACKS
CANTILEVER RA(
MF77ANINES
CONVEYORS
CAROUSELS
PUSHBACK RACY
RACK BUILDINGS
STEEL SHELVING
MOVABLE SHELVII
STORAGE TANKS
MODULAR OFFICE
GONDOLAS
BOOKSTACKS
FLOW RACKS
FOOTINGS
161 ATLANTIC STREET
SEIZMIC
MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING
EST 1985
SEISMIC ANALYSIS
STRUCTURAL DESIGN
CITY APPROVALS
STATE APPROVALS
PRODUCT TESTING
FIELD INSPECTION
SPECIAL FABRICATION
PERMITTING SERVICES
EISMIC ANALYSIS OF
LIGHT DUTY FIXTURES
FOR
AUTOZONE 4110
1936 East First Street
Port Angeles, WA 98362
JOB #•09 -0650
EXP
ALASKA INDIANA OHIO
ARIZONA KANSAS OKLAHOMA
CALIFORNIA MICHIGAN OREGON
COLORADO MINNESOTA PENNSYLVANIA
CONNECTICUT MISSOURI TEXAS
GEORGIA MONTANA UTAH
IDAHO NEVADA VIRGINIA
ILLINOIS NEW MEXICO WASHINGTON
WISCONSIN
11l
POMONA CA 91768 TEL (909)869 -0989 FAX (909)869 -0981
MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING
TEL. (909) 869 -0989 FAX. (909) 869 -0981
161 ATLANTIC AVENUE POMONA, CA 91768
PROJECT
FOR
SHEET NO.
CALCULATED BY
DATE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DESCRIPTION
COVER SHEET
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCOPE, PARAMETERS SPECIFICATIONS CONFIGURATIONS
GRAVITY FEED FIXTURE ANALYSIS
GONDOLA FIXTURE ANALYSIS
LIGHT DUTY STORAGE FIXTURE ANALYSIS
AUTOZONE #4110
AUTOZONE
1
S Tarik
6/24/2009
PAGE#
1
2
3 TO 5
6 TO 11
12 TO 22
MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING
TEL. (909) 869 -0989 FAX. (909) 869 -0981
16 ATLANTIC AVENUE POMONA, CA 91768
PROJECT
FOR
SHEET NO.
CALCULATED BY
DATE
AUTOZONE #4110
AUTOZONE
2
S Tarik
6/24/2009
SCOPE.
THE PURPOSE OF THIS ANALYSIS IS TO SHOW THAT THE FOLLOWING LIGHT DUTY STORAGE FIXTURE (GONDOLA)
IS IN COMPLIANCE WITH SECTION 1613 OF THE 2006 IBC AND CHAPTER 15 OF ASCE 7 -05.
PARAMETERS.
LATERAL FORCE.
SPECIFICATIONS.
V Cs W WHERE Cs S /(R/I)
[(2/3) Fa Ss I /R] *W
MAIN STEEL
BOLTS
ANCHORS
SLAB
SOIL
CONFIGURATIONS.
GRAVITY FEED FIXTURE
TYPE D/E
GONDOLA FIXTURE
TYPE B1
TYPE N
TYPE L
TYPE L -SGL
TYPE G1
TYPE C1
Fy 36000 PSI MIN. YIELD STEEL
A307 (WHEN USED)
3/8 "0 x 2' MIN. EMBED HILTI KB -TZ (ICC ESR 1917)
4 IN (minimum required) x 2500 PSI (minimum required)
1000 PSF
84 H x 60 "W x 38 "D
90' H x 48 "W x 16 "D
120 "H x 48 "W x 16 "D 144'H x 48 "W x 24'D
120 "H x 48 "W x 13 "D
120 "H x 48 "W x 13 "D
120 "H x 48 "W x 16 "D
120 "H x 48 "W x 13 "D
LIGHT DUTY STORAGE FIXTURE
TYPE 1 2 @120 "H x 48 "W x 12 "D
TYPE H 120 "H x 48 "W x 12 "D
TYPE H -SGL 120 "H x 48 "W x 12 "D
TYPE K 120 "H x 48 "W x 24'D
TYPE M (2) 120 "H x 48 "W x 24'D (WALL BRACED)
ONLY CRITICAL CONFIGURATIONS BEING ANALYZED
FREE STANDING
FREE STANDING
FREE STANDING
WALL BRACED
FREE STANDING
FREE STANDING
WALL BRACED
FREE STANDING
WALL BRACED
FREE STANDING
WALL BRACED
WALL BRACED
1
MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING
TEL. (909) 869 -0989 FAX. (909) 869 -0981
16 ATLANTIC AVENUE POMONA, CA 91768
PROJECT
FOR
SHEET NO.
CALCULATED BY
DATE
GRAVITY FEED FIXTURE ANALYSIS
AUTOZONE #4110
AUTOZONE
3
S Tarik
6/24/2009
LOADS DISTRIBUTION. GRAVITY FEED FIXTURE (TYPE D /E)
SEISMIC SHEAR BASED ON SECTION 1613 OF THE 2006 IBC AND SECTION 15 5 OF THE ASCE 7 -05.
SITE CLASS D
70 0 IN
MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING
TEL. (909) 869 -0989 FAX. (909) 869 -0981
16 ATLANTIC AVENUE POMONA, CA 91768
Sms 1 176
SDS 0 784
I 1.50
R =4
REDUCTION 1 4 WORKING STRESS
LIVE LOAD 1,000 LB /LEVEL
DEAD LOAD 100 LB /LEVEL
OF LVLS= 5
LATERAL FORCE
FULL LOADED
V [2/3 *1 05 *1 12 *1.5 *(0.667 *5000 LB +500 LB) /4]/1 4
805.0 LB
LATERAL FORCE DISTRIBUTION
h LEVEL WEIGHT HEIGHT W X H
6.0 IN 1 1100 LB 6.0 IN 6 600 IN -LB
16.0 IN 2 1100 LB 22.0 IN 24,200 IN -LB
16.0 IN 3 1100 LB 38 0 IN 41 800 IN -LB
16 0 IN 4 1100 LB 54.0 IN 59 400 IN -LB
16.0 IN 5 1100 LB 70 0 IN 77 000 IN -LB
70.0 IN 1 5500 LB
TOP SHELF LOADED
V [2/3 *1 05 *1 12 *1 5 *(1500 LB)/4]/1 4
315.0 LB
PROJECT
FOR
SHEET NO.
CALCULATED BY
DATE
WHERE Sms Fa *Ss AND Ss 1 12, Fa 1 05
TABLE 15 4 -1 OF ASCE 7 -05
WH =1 209,000 IN -LB 1 805.0 LB
LATERAL FORCE DISTRIBUTION
h LEVEL WEIGHT HEIGHT W X H I
6.0 IN 1 100 LB 6.0 IN 600 IN -LB
16 0 IN 2 100 LB 22.0 IN 2,200 IN -LB
16.0 IN 3 100 LB 38.0 IN 3,800 IN -LB
16 0 IN 4 100 LB 54.01N 5 400 IN -LB
16.0 IN 5 1100 LB 70.0 IN 77 000 IN -LB
1500 LB WH =1 89,000 IN -LB 315 0 LB
AUTOZONE #4110
AUTOZONE
4
S Tarik
6/24/2009
a a' 37 1/2"
li
11 /8„ I f-
ll �I
121 n6°
SIDE VIEW
I Fi (trans) Mot= F(Fi *Hi)
25.4 LB 153 IN -LB
93.2 LB 2,051 IN -LB
161 0 LB 6,1181N-LB
228.8 LB 12,355 IN -LB
296.6 LB 20 761 IN -LB
41,436 IN -LB
Fi (trans) Mot= T(Fi *Hi)
2.1 LB 13 IN -LB
7.8 LB 171 IN -LB
13 4 LB 511 IN -LB
191 LB 1,032 IN -LB
272.5 LB 19 077 IN -LB
20,804 IN LB
MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING
TEL. (909) 869 -0989 FAX. (909) 869 -0981
161 ATLANTIC AVENUE POMONA, CA 91768
OVERTURNING ANALYSIS. GRAVITY FEED FIXTURE (TYPE D /E1
DEPTH OF UNIT 38 IN
TOP SHELF HEIGHT 70 IN
(A) FULLY LOADED:
V 805 LB
Mot Z(Fi Hi)
41 436 3 IN -LB
(B) TOP SHELF LOADED
Vtop 315. LB
ANCHOR
Ps /Pt Vs/Vt 1.2
Mst (Ws) *(Depth /2)
(0.667 *5000 LB 500 LB) *38 IN 2
72,865 0 IN -LB
Puplift [0.7pMot (0.6 -0 14S *Mst] Depth
52 LB UPLIFT
Mot Z(Fi Hi)
20,804.2 IN -LB
Mst (Ws) *(Depth /2)
1500 LB 38 IN 2
28 500.0 IN -LB
Puplift [0.7pMot (0 6 -0 14S *Mst] Depth
131 LB UPLIFT
QUANTITY= 1
USE (1) 3/8 "0 x 2' MIN EMBED HILTI KB -TZ (ICC ESR 1917)
PER BASE PLATE.
PULLOUT 1050 LB
SHEAR 1200 LB
PROJECT
FOR
SHEET NO.
CALCULATED BY
DATE
P= 1.3
COMBINED STRESS(A) (0 LB /(1 *1050 LB)) (403 LB /(1 *1200 LB))
0.34 1.2 OK
COMBINED STRESS(B) (0 LB /(1 *1050 LB)) (158 LB /(1 *1200 LB))
0.13 1.2 OK
AUTOZONE #4110
AUTOZONE
5
S Tarik
6/24/2009
MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING
TEL. (909) 869 -0989 FAX. (909) 869 -0981
16 ATLANTIC AVENUE POMONA, CA 91768
PROJECT
FOR
SHEET NO.
CALCULATED BY
DATE
GONDOLA FIXTURE ANALYSIS
AUTOZONE #4110
AUTOZONE
6
S Tarik
6/24/2009
MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING
TEL. (909) 869 -0989 FAX. (909) 869 -0981
16' ATLANTIC AVENUE POMONA, CA 91768
LOADS DISTRIBUTION. GONDOLA FIXTURE ITYPE L SGL 120 "Hx48 "Wx131D1
SEISMIC SHEAR BASED ON SECTION 1613 OF THE 2006 IBC AND CHAPTER 15 OF ASCE 7 -05.
SITE CLASS D
Sms =1176
S 0 784
1= 1.00
R =3
REDUCTION 1 4 WORKING STRESS
LIVE LOAD 150 LB /LEVEL
DEAD LOAD 5 LB /LEVEL
LATERAL FORCE
WHERE Sms Fa *Ss AND Ss 1 12, Fa 1.05
V [(2/3)`1 176 *1 *(0.667 *1200 LB +40 LB) /3]/1 4
157 LB
LATERAL FORCE DISTRIBUTION. SINGLE SIDE LOADED I
h LEVEL WEIGHT HEIGHT I
16 1 155 16
14 2 155
14 3 155
14 4 155
14 5 155
14 6 155
14 7 155
14 8 155
PROJECT
FOR
SHEET NO.
CALCULATED BY
DATE
TABLE 15 4 -2 (STEEL DISTRIBUTED MASS CANTILEVER STRUCTURE)
Pco1= (Wp x NO OF LEVELS)
(150 LB 5 LB) x 8 LEVELS
1,240 LB
W X H 1 Fi (trans)
2,480 5
30 4 650 9
44 6,820 13
58 8,990 17
72 11 160 22
86 13,330 26
100 15 500 30
114 17,670 34
114 IN! =1 80,600 IN -LB 1 157 LB
Mcol(total) 20,740 IN -LB
AUTOZONE #4110
AUTOZONE
7
S.Tarik
6/24/2009
HEIGHT 120 IN
DEPTH 13. IN
NO OF LEVELS 8
Mot >(Fi H)
77
272
584
1 015
1 564
2,231
3,017
3,921
1 12,6801N -LB
Mcol(static) (LL +DL) x Depth x of levels /2
155LBx13INx8/2
8,060 IN -LB
Mcol(seismic) H)
12,680 IN -LB
MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING
TEL. (909) 869 -0989 FAX. (909) 869 -0981
16 ATLANTIC AVENUE POMONA, CA 91768
ARM SPAN 24.0 IN
LOAD 155 LB /LEVEL
M LOAD x (ARM SPAN /2)
155 LB /LEVEL x 241N/2
1,8601N -LB
ASSUME ONLY THE TOP CLIP IN TENSION
TENSION CAPACITY T= 0.6Fy x A
0.6 x 36000 PSI x 0 09 INA2
1 944 LB
MOMENT CAPACITY T x d
1944 LB x 1 125 IN
2,187 IN LB 1860 IN LB OK
CHECK FOR SHEAR CAPACITY
Varm LOAD /2
(150 LB 5 LB)/ 2
78 LB /LEVEL
SHEAR CAPACITY 0.4Fy `A
04x36000 PSI x0.09INA2
1,296 LB 77.5 LB OK
fb Mcol(total) /Sx
20740 IN -LB 1 18 IN ^3
17,577PS1
Fb 0.6 x 36000 PSI
21,600PSI
fb /Fb 17577 PSI 21600 PSI
0.81 <1.33 OK
PROJECT
FOR
SHEET NO.
CALCULATED BY
DATE
ARM ANALYSIS. GONDOLA FIXTURE (TYPE L -SGL 120' Hx48 "Wx13' DI
CHECK TENSION CAPACITY
BASE BRACKET ANALYSIS. GONDOLA FIXTURE /TYPE L -SGL 120"Hx48"Wx13"D\
Mcol(MAX) 20 740 IN -LB (DOUBLE SIDED SINGLE SIDED LOADED)
AUTOZONE #4110
AUTOZONE
8
S Tarik
6/24/2009
A 0.090 INA2
Fy 36,000.0 PSI
d 1 125 IN
Fb 36,000PSI
Sx 1 18 INA3
MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING
TEL. (909) 869 -0989 FAX. (909) 869 -0981
161 ATLANTIC AVENUE POMONA, CA 91768
COLUMN ANALYSIS. GONDOLA FIXTURE (TYPE L -SGL 120 "Hx48 "Wx13' D1
Pmax (1 +0 105S 0 525pQ 0 75L
1609 LB
Mmax 20 740 IN -LB
Kxlx/rx 2.1 *116 IN/1.604 IN
151.9
Kyly /ry 2 *16 IN/0.884 IN 151.9
36.2 (GOVERNS)
Cc (2Tr ^2E /Fy) ^.5
126.1
SINCE KI /r Cc USE Fa [12T02E] /[23(KI /r) ^2]
Fa [12Tr /r) ^2]
6,474 PSI
fa Pcol Area
2,117 PSI
fb M /Sx
20740 IN- LB/1.526 INA3
13,591 PSI
Fb 6 *Fy
21,600 PSI
Pe 12Tr ^2E /23(KI /r) ^2
6 474 PSI
Cm *fb /Fb[1- fa /F'e] 0.93
COMBINED STRESS 1.26 1.33 O.K.
6'
TYP
fa/Fa 0.33 0 15 USE fa /Fa Cm *fb /Fb[1- fa /F'e]
LEVELER
ASSEMBLY
PROJECT
FOR
SHEET NO.
CALCULATED BY
DATE
I
3/8" x 3/4"
SLOTS TYP
AUTOZONE #4110
AUTOZONE
9
S Tarik
6/24/2009
3/8"0 LEVELER BOLT
2'
*1 3/81-
2 5/8' 2 9/16'
I I
SECTION PROPERTIES
Fy= 36 000 PSI
Area 76 IN ^2
Ix 1.956 INA4
Sx 1.526 IN ^3
rx 1.604 IN
ly .594 IN ^4
Sy .639 IN ^3
ry .884 IN
Lx 1161N
Ly= 16 IN
p 1.3
MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING
TEL. (909) 869 -0989 FAX. (909) 869 -0981
16 ATLANTIC AVENUE POMONA, CA 91768
OVERTURNING ANALYSIS. GONDOLA FIXTURE (TYPE L -SGL 120 "Hx48 "Wx13 "D1
(A) FULLY LOADED
Vtotal 156.9 LB
Mot E(V H)
12,680 IN -LB
Mst 8,060 0 IN -LB
Puplift [Mot +Mst] Depth Pcol
355 LB UPLIFT
ANCHOR
QUANTITY= 2
PULLOUT 1050 LB
SHEAR 1200 LB
PROJECT
FOR
SHEET NO
CALCULATED BY
DATE
Ps /Pt VsNt 1.2
COMBINED STRESS(A) (355 LB /(2 *1050 LB)) (78 4 LB /(2 *1200 LB))
0.20 <1.2 OK
AUTOZONE #4110
AUTOZONE
10
S Tarik
6/24/2009
Apunct (B +D) *2 1
64 INA2
A) PUNCTURE
Pmax Pcol (Mtot/D)
1 4* (1240 LB) 1 7 (12680 IN -LB /13 IN)
3394 LB
Fpunct 2.66 *sgrt(fc) *0
86 PSI
fv /Fv Pmaxl(Apunct Fpunct)
0.61
B) SLAB TENSION
Asoii Pmax* 144/(1.33 *fsoil)
367.5 INA2
L (Asoi1) ".5
19.2 IN
B sqrt(B*D) t
7 46 IN
I= (L -B)/2
5.85 IN
Mconc w1^2/8 (1.33 *fsoil *1 "2) (144 *2)
158.2 IN -LB
Sconc 1 in *t^2 6
2.67 INA3
fconc 5 *0* sqrt(fc)
163 PSI
fb /Fb Mconc/(Sconc *fconc)
0.37
PROJECT
FOR
SHEET NO.
CALCULATED BY
DATE
I 1 B
AUTOZONE #4110
AUTOZONE
11
S Tarik
6/24/2009
MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING
TEL. (909) 869 -0989 FAX. (909) 869 -0981
161 ATLANTIC AVENUE POMONA, CA 91768
J SLAB SOIL ANALYSIS. GONDOLA FIXTURE (TYPE L -SGL 120' Hx48 "Wx13 "D1
THE SLAB IS CHECKED FOR PUNCTURE STRESS IF NO PUNCTURE OCCURS THE SLAB IS ASSUMED
TO DISTRIBUTE THE LOAD OVER A LARGER AREA OF SOIL HENCE, ACTING AS A FOOTING
L
ANCHOR PLATE.
WIDTH 6. IN
DEPTH 2. IN
SLAB.
t =4.0IN
(minimum required)
fc' 2,500 PSI
(minimum required)
SOIL.
fs 1,000 PSF
MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING
TEL. (909) 869 -0989 FAX. (909) 869 -0981
16 ATLANTIC AVENUE POMONA, CA 91768
LIGHT DUTY STORAGE FIXTURE ANALYSIS
PROJECT
FOR
SHEET NO
CALCULATED BY
DATE
AUTOZONE #4110
AUTOZONE
12
5 Tarik
6/24/2009
MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING
TEL. (909) 869 -0989 FAX. (909) 869 -0981
161 ATLANTIC AVENUE POMONA, CA 91768
LOADS DISTRIBUTION. LIGHT DUTY STORAGE FIXTURE (TYPE 1 20120' Hx48 "Wx12 "D)
SEISMIC SHEAR BASED ON SECTION 1613 OF THE 2006 IBC AND SECTION 15.5 OF THE ASCE 7 -05.
SITE CLASS D
LIVE LOAD= 150 LB /LVL
DEAD LOAD= 5 LB /LVL
LATERAL FORCE
Sms 1 176
Sos 0 784
1= 1.00
R 4
REDUCTION 1 4 WORKING STRESS
Vtransv= [2/3 *1 12 *1 05 *(0 667 *1350 LB +45 LB) /4]/1 4
132.3 LB
PROJECT
FOR
SHEET NO.
CALCULATED BY
DATE
WHERE Sms Fa *Ss AND Ss 1 12, Fa 1 05
TABLE 15 4 -1 OF ASCE 7 -05
OF LVLS= 9 NOTE. NO LOAD ON TOP LEVEL
LATERAL FORCE DISTRIBUTION I
LEVEL wx(DL +LL) hx wxhx I Fi
1 155 LB /LVL 12 0 IN 1860 2 92 LB
2 155 LB /LVL 24 0 IN 3720 5.84 LB
3 155 LB /LVL 36 0 IN 5580 8 76 LB
4 155 LB /LVL 48.0 IN 7440 11 68 LB
5 155 LB /LVL 60 0 IN 9300 14 60 LB
6 155 LB /LVL 72.0 IN 11160 17.51 LB
7 155 LB /LVL 84 0 IN 13020 20 43 LB
8 155 LB /LVL 96 0 IN 14880 23.35 LB
9 155 LBJLVL 108.0 1N 16740 26.27 LB
10 5 LB /LVL 120 0 IN 600 0.94 LB
I =I 84300 IN -LB y= 132.30 1
AUTOZONE #4110
AUTOZONE
13
S.Tarik
6/24/2009
Fi *hx
35.0 IN LB
140 1 IN LB
315 3 IN LB
560.5 IN LB
875.7 IN LB
1261 0 IN LB
1716.4 IN LB
2241.8 IN LB
2837.3 IN LB
129.9 IN LB
10113.2 IN LB Movt
MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING
TEL. (909) 869 -0989 FAX. (909) 869 -0981
161 ATLANTIC AVENUE POMONA, CA 91768
TRANSVERSE SEISMIC LOADS. LIGHT DUTY STORAGE FIXTURE (TYPE 1 20120' Hx48 "Wx12 "D)
THE FRAME SHALL BE ANALYZED AS A BRACED FRAME IN THE LONGITUDINAL
DIRECTION AND A MOMENT RESISTING FRAME IN THE TRANSVERSE DIRECTION
UTILIZING MOMENT RESISTANT SPREADER TO COLUMN CONNECTIONS
Vtransv= 132.3 LB
Vcol= 66.2 LB
TRANSVERSE SEISMIC
M1 1= Vcol h1
66.2 LB 5.25 IN
347 IN -LB
F3
M2 2= [Vco1 -(F1 +F2)/21 h2/2
66.2 LB (2.92 LB 5.84 LB)/2] *30 IN /2
927 IN -LB F
M3 -3= [Vcol- (F1 +F2 +F3 +F4)/21 h3/2
773 IN-LB
CONNECTION MOMENT
Mconnl 1= [(M1 +1) +(M2 -2)112
637 IN -LB
Mconn2 2= [(M2 +2) +(M3 -3)]/2
850 IN -LB
Mconn.max.= 850 IN -LB
VERIFY ADEQUACY OF COLUMN
Mcol.max.= 927 IN -LB
F
PROJECT AUTOZONE #4110
FOR AUTOZONE
SHEET NO. 14
CALCULATED BY S.Tarik
DATE 6/24/2009
DEPTH
TRANSVERSE ELEVATION
h5
h4
h3
v_
h2
h1
hl= 5.3 IN
h2= 30.0 IN
h3= 30.0 IN
h4= 39.0 IN
h5= 37.3 IN
depth= 12.0 IN
141.5 IN
104.25 IN
65.25 IN
35.25 IN
5.25 IN
Pstatic= OF LEVELS *(WDL WLL)
9 (150 LB 5 LB) /2
698 LB
Pseismic (Fi *hn) /depth (Movt/d)
843 LB
Pmax= Pstatic +Pseismic
1,540 LB
Mmax 927 IN -LB
KxLxlrx 37.2
37.2
KyLy /ry 30 1 (GOVERNS)
Cc (2Tr ^2E /Fy) ^0.5
126.1
SINCE KI /r Cc USE Fa .522Fy- [(KI/r *Fy)/1494] ^2
Fa .522Fy- [(KI/r *Fy)/1494]^2
17,991 PSI
fa Pmax/A
7,098 PSI
fb Mmax/Sy
15,975 PSI
F'e (12Tr 2E) /((23(KUr) ^2)
108,191 PSI
Fb 0.6 *Fy
21,600 PSI
fa/Fa 0.39 0 15
(1- fa /F'e)= 0.934
fa /Fa Cm *fb /(Fb *(1- fa /F'e))= 1 19 1.33 OK
PROJECT
FOR
SHEET NO.
CALCULATED BY
DATE
MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING
TEL. (909) 869 -0989 FAX. (909) 869 -0981
16" ATLANTIC AVENUE POMONA, CA 91768
COLUMN ANALYSIS. LIGHT DUTY STORAGE FIXTURE (TYPE 12 u( 120 "Hx48 "Wx12 "D1
TRANSVERSE DIRECTION
LOADS
SIDE VIEW
AUTOZONE #4110
AUTOZONE
15
S Tarik
6/24/2009
H A
X
1
r
B
PROPERTIES
A 3/4 IN
B= 1 1/2 IN
t= 006 IN
AREA 0.217 IN ^2
Sx 0.06 1N ^3
rx 0.323 IN
Sy 0 058 IN ^3
ry 0 479 IN
Fy 36,000 PSI
Kx= 1 0
Ky 1.2
Cm 1.00
Ly
FRONT VIEW
Lx 12.0 IN
Ly 12.0 IN
MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING
TEL. (909) 869 -0989 FAX. (909) 869 -0981
16' ATLANTIC AVENUE POMONA, CA 91768
TRANSVERSE MOMENT CONNECTION ANALYSIS.
LIGHT DUTY STORAGE FIXTURE (TYPE 1 20120' Hx48 "Wx12 "D1
Mconn= 1850 -LB
(Al SHEAR CAPACITY OF CONNECTOR TABS.,
Fy(MIN)= 36,000 PSI
Area TAB HEIGHT TAB THK
=0.3IN 0.06 IN
018 in ^2
Pmax= A (0.4Fy)
259.2 LB
P1= Pmax
259.2 LB
P2= (1.5/3.5)P1
111 1 LB
(B' MOMENT CAPACITY OF METAL STRINGER:,
SxHOR BRACE .22 INA3
fb Mmax/Sx
850 IN- LB/0.22 INA3
3,863 PSI
Fb 0.6 *Fy
0.6 36000 PSI
21 600 PSI
fb /Fb 3863 PSI /21600 PSI
0.18 1.33 Q.K.
(C) MOMENT CAPACITY OF CONNECTOR TABS.,
Mconn. cap.= P1 2.75 IN P2 0 75 IN
(259.2 LB) *(2.75 IN) (111 1 LB) *(0 75 IN)
796 1 IN -LB
Mconn.capseis.= Mconn. Cap 1 33
796 1 IN -LB 1.33
1,058.8 IN -LB 850 IN -LB O.K.
PROJECT
FOR
SHEET NO.
CALCULATED BY
DATE
BRACE FITS TIGHTLY IN THE INTERIOR OF THE COLUMN.
ATTACH W,% 4 #8 SCREWS
(2 PER END)
END VIEW ,y
2'
1.5'
AUTOZONE #4110
AUTOZONE
16
S Tarik
6/24/2009
SIDE VIEW
TAB PROPERTIES
H 0.3 IN
t 006 IN
BAY 1
3/4' x 16 GA. STRAP
MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING
TEL. (909) 869 -0989 FAX. (909) 869 -0981
16 ATLANTIC AVENUE POMONA, CA 91768
BRACING ANALYSIS. LIGHT DUTY STORAGE FIXTURE (TYPE 1 2( 120 "Hx48 "Wx12 "D)
BRACING CAPACITY IS GOVERNED BY TENSION CAPACITY OF CROSS BRACING AND SHEAR CAPACITY
OF CONNECTION SCREW
64
Vtot
BAY 2 BAY 3 BAY 4
width
PLAN VIEW
f 48' :1
AN I\ AN
I I I
7 1 1 1
.1 L .1 7
\i/I \l I\,/ I\I
I/\ /\,I/\ I/\ \I
40' 7\ 1 7 1 I
N
I/ \I/
GENERAL CONFIGURATION. LONGITUDINAL BRACE
Vdiag= Vtot(Ldiag Lhoriz)
132.3 LB (80 IN/48 IN)
220.5 LB SEISMIC LOAD IN TENSION
SHEAR CAPACITY OF #8x3/4' SHEET METAL SCREW
PER PART V SECTION E4 OF THE 1996 AISI COLD FORMED MANUAL.
0= 3
SHEAR IS TAKEN AS LEAST OF Pns:
Pns= 4.2 *(t2 3 *d) ^0.5 *Fu2
4.2 [(0.06 IN) ^3 *0 164 IN] ^0.5 58000 PSI
1 450 LB
Pns= 2.7 *t1 *d *Fu1
2.7* 0 06 IN 0 164 IN 58000 PSI
1,541LB
Pns= 2.7 *t2 *d *Fu2
2.7 0 06 IN 0.164 IN 58000 PSI
1,541 LB
Pns- eff /i]= (1450 LB /3) *1.33
642 LB Vdiag OK IN SHEAR
PROJECT
FOR
SHEET NO.
CALCULATED BY
DATE
BAY5
ti
1d
fi
DENOTES X -BRACE
LOCATION
AUTOZONE #4110
AUTOZONE
17
S.Tarik
6/24/2009
144
I: 3/4' 1
'X' BRACE (3/4 x 16 as STRAP'
t (GAUGE) 16 GA.
AREA(gross)= 0 0450 INA2
AREA(net)= 0 0362 IN ^2
Lhoriz= 48.0 IN
Lvert= 64.0 IN
Ldiag= 80.0 IN
Fy= 36,000 PSI
Fu= 58,000 PSI
Fv= 10,000 PSI
SCREW DIAM.= 0 164 IN
SCREW TYPE #8x3/4' SHEET METAL SCREW
MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING
TEL. (909) 869 -0989 FAX. (909) 869 -0981
16 ATLANTIC AVENUE POMONA, CA 91768
OVERTURNING ANALYSIS. LIGHT DUTY STORAGE FIXTURE (TYPE 120120 "Hx48 "Wx12 "D)
TOTAL DEPTH 24 IN (UNITS ARE TIED BACK TO BACK)
(A) FULLY LOADED:
Vtotal 132.3 LB Vcol= 66.2 LB
Movt E(Fi Hi)
10 113.2 IN -LB
Mst E[(LIVE LOAD DEAD LOAD) *(D /2)]
9 LEVELS (150 LB 5 LB) 24 IN /2
16,740.0 IN -LB
p= 1 3
Puplift [0.7pMot (0.6- 0.14Sps) *Mst] Depth
42 LB UPLIFT
PROJECT
FOR
SHEET NO
CALCULATED BY
DATE
F,,
Ps /Pt VsNt 1.2
COMBINED STRESS(A) (42 LB /(1 *1050 LB)) (66.2 LB /(1 *1200 LB))
0.10 1.2 OK
FOR TYPE! UNITS:
(1) 3/8 123 x 2' MIN. EMBED HILTI KB -TZ (ICC ESR 1917)
PER BASE PLATE, ANCHOR PERIMETER COLUMNS STAGGERED AND AT ENDS
F„_
AUTOZONE #4110
AUTOZONE
18
S.Tarik
6/24/2009
depth *2
NO LOAD ON
TQP LEVEL
TRANSVERSE ELEVATION
DEPTH OF UNIT (d) 12 IN
TOP SHELF HT 120 IN
LEVELS= 9
ANCHOR
QUANTITY 1
PULLOUT 1050 LB
SHEAR 1200 LB
MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING
TEL. (909) 869 -0989 FAX. (909) 869 -0981
16 ATLANTIC AVENUE POMONA, CA 91768
BASE PLATE ANALYSIS. LIGHT DUTY STORAGE FIXTURE (TYPE 1 20120' Hx48 "Wx12 "D)
Pcol Pstatic= 698 LB
Pseismic (Movt/D)= 843 LB
Pcol.max. Pcol (Movt/D)
1,540 LB
BASE PLATE WIDTH (D)= 2.25 IN
EFF.BASE PLATE DEPTH (B)= 1 75 IN
b= 1.501N
b1 3 IN
THICKNESS (t) 0 0600 IN
Fy 36,000 PSI
fa =P /A Pcol /((D)(B))= 391 18 PSI
Mbase= (W/in)(LA2)/2
(fa *1 'STRIP)(b1 ^2)/2
12.2 IN -LB
Sbase= (1)(t ^2)/6
0 0006 INA3
Fbase (0.75)(Fy) *1.33
35 910 PSI
fb /Fb Mbase /((Sbase)(Fbase))
0.57 OK
PROJECT
FOR
SHEET NO.
CALCULATED BY
DATE
Fa
B
ACTUAL BASE PLATE SIZE IS 2.25 INx2 INxO 0598 IN ONLY AN EFFECTIVE BASE PLATE
SIZE OF 2.25 INx1 75 INx0.0598 IN IS USED IN THE ANALYSIS
AUTOZONE #4110
AUTOZONE
19
S.Tarik
6/24/2009
Pcol
r
b
MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING
TEL. (909) 869 -0989 FAX. (909) 869 -0981
16' ATLANTIC AVENUE POMONA, CA 91768
Fpunct 2.66 *sgrt(fc) *0
120 PSI
Apunct (B +D) *2 *t
32. IN ^2
fv /Fv Pmax/(Apunct Fpunct)
0.63
SINCE NO PUNCTURE OCCURS, THE SLAB WILL
DISTRIBUTE THE LOAD OVER A LARGER AREA OF
SOIL ACT AS A FOOTING.
B) SLAB TENSION
Asoil Pmax 144/(1.33 *fsoil)
260.8 IN "2
L (Asoil)A.5
16.2 IN
B sgrt(B *D) t
6.0 IN
1= (L -B)12
5.1 IN
Mconc wI ^2/8 (1.33 *fsoil *1 ^2) (144 *2)
119.3 IN -LB
Sconc 1 in *t^2 6
2.67 INA3
fconc 50* sqrt(fc)
163 PSI
fb /Fb Mconc/(Sconc *fconc)
0.28
PROJECT
FOR
SHEET NO.
CALCULATED BY
DATE
1
AUTOZONE #4110
AUTOZONE
20
S Tank
6/24/2009
SLAB SOIL ANALYSIS. LIGHT DUTY STORAGE FIXTURE (TYPE 120120 "Hx48 "Wx12' Dl
A) PUNCTURE
Pmax Pcol (Mtot/D)
1 4 *(698 LB) 1 7 *(10113.2 IN -LB /12 IN)
2409 LB
B
L
BASE PLATE.
BASE PLATE DEPTH (B)= 1 75 IN
BASE PLATE WIDTH (D)= 2.25 IN
SLAB:
t 40 IN
(minimum required)
fc' 2,500 PSI
(minimum required)
SOIL.
fs 1,000 PSF
1
PROJECT AUTOZONE #4110
FOR AUTOZONE
SHEET NO. 21
MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING CALCULATED BY S Tarik
TEL. (909) 869 -0989 FAX. (909) 869 -0981 DATE 6/24/2009
16 ATLANTIC AVENUE POMONA, CA 91768
LOADS DISTRIBUTION. LIGHT DUTY STORAGE FIXTURE ITYPE H 120 "H x 48 "W x 12 "D)
ANALYSIS BASED ON SECTION 1613 OF THE 2006 IBC AND SECTION 13.3 OF THE ASCE 7 -05
SITE CLASS D
Sms 1 176 WHERE Sms Fa *Ss AND Ss 1 12, Fa 1 05
1p 1.00 Sps 0.823
Rp 2.5
ap 1.0
WORKING STRESS REDUCTION 1 4
Fp 0 4 ap (2 /3 *Fa *Ss) *lp /(Rp *1 4) Wp 0.090 Wp
EXCEPT WHERE.
Fp shall not be taken as less than 0.3 *(2 /3 *Fa *Ss) *Ip *Wp /1 4 0 168 Wp depth
AND
not required to be taken as greater than 1 6 *(2 /3 *Fa *Ss) *Ip *Wp /1 4 0.896 Wp I
NO LOAD 0 T.0 LEVEL
NO OF LEVELS 9 LVL
LIVE LOAD 150 LB
DEAD LOAD 5 LB
NOTE. NO LOAD ON TOP LEVEL
LONGITUDINAL DIRECTION TRANSVERSE DIRECTION,
Fp 0.3 *SDS *Ip *Wp /1 4
[0.3 *((2/3) *1.05 *1 12) *1/1 4] (150 LB 5 LB)
26.0 LB
Vtotal Fp *NO OF LEVELS
26 LB /LEVEL *9 LEVELS
234 4 LB
Fp (GOVERNS) 0 168 Wp
Fp
V
rp
Fp
Fp
Fp
Fp
Fp
LATERAL FORCE DISTRIBUTION I TRANSVERSE
1 ,NATION
h LEVEL WEIGHT HEIGHT Fp I Mot
12.0 IN 1 155 LB 12.0 IN 26.0 LB 312.5 IN -LB
12.0 IN 2 155 LB 24 0 IN 26 0 LB 625.0 IN -LB
12.0 IN 3 155 LB 36 0 IN 26 0 LB 937 4 IN -LB
12.0 IN 4 155 LB 48 0 IN 26.0 LB 1249.9 IN -LB
12.0 IN 5 155 LB 60 0 IN 26 0 LB 1562.4 IN -LB
12.0 IN 6 155 LB 72.0 IN 26 0 LB 1874.9 IN -LB
12.0 IN 7 155 LB 84 0 IN 26.0 LB 2187 4 IN -LB
12.0 IN 8 155 LB 96 0 IN 26 0 LB 2499.8 IN -LB
12.0 IN 9 155 LB 108.0 IN 26 0 LB 2812.3 IN -LB
12.0 IN 10 5 LB 120 0 IN 26.0 LB 3124.8 IN -LB
Z WH =I y= 260 4 LB 17186.4 IN -LB
12.0.0 IN
MATERIAL HANDLING ENGINEERING
TEL. (909) 869 -0989 FAX. (909) 869 -0981
16 ATLANTIC AVENUE POMONA, CA 91768
WALL ADEQUACY ANLAYSIS. LIGHT DUTY STORAGE FIXTURE (TYPE H 120 "H x 48 "W x 12 "D)
WALL LATERAL LOAD 5 PSF
WALL AREA/UNIT (120 IN) (481N)
5760 INA2
40. FTA2
NOTE. IT IS UNDERSTOOD THAT THE DESIGN OF THE WALL IS UNDER THE BUILDING PERMIT
CALCULATIONS WILL SHOW THAT PER SECTION 1607 13 INTERIOR /PARTITION WALLS >THAN 6 FT IN HEIGHT
MUST BE DESIGNED FOR A MINIMUM OF 5 PSF LATERAL LOADING AND SINCE THE UNITS ARE SUPPORTED AT
THE TOP AND BOTTOM, HALF OF THE SEISMIC SHEAR IS TRANSMITTED TO THE TOP AND THE
BALANCE TO THE BOTTOM.
Vwall 234 4/40/2
2.9 PSF 5 PSF OK, THUS WALL IS ADEQUATE TO RESIST SEISMIC LOADS
CONNECTION TO WALL ANLAYSIS.
WITHDRAWAL FORCE ON WALL CONNECTION T
CONNECTION HEIGHT 90 IN
Mot y(Fi Hi)
17186.4 IN -LB
Mst ZULIVE LOAD DEAD LOAD) *(D /2)]
9 LEVELS (150 LB /LVL 5 LB /LVL) 12 IN /2
8370.0 IN -LB
T (Mot Mst) *2 /(HEIGHT OF CONNECTION)
[0 7pMot (0.6 -0 14S *Mst] Height
128 7 LB WITHDRAWAL
Q =3
SCREWS /CONN 2
SCREW TYPE #12 TEK SCREW
P(allow) 190 LB
Pallow CONN 380 LB
PROJECT
FOR
SHEET NO
CALCULATED BY
DATE
(PER SECTION 1607 13 OF THE 2006 IBC)
P= 1.3
AUTOZONE #4110
AUTOZONE
22
S Tarik
6/24/2009
SINCE 128.7 LB 380 LB THEN WALL ATTACHMENT IS SUFFICIENT TO RESIST SEISMIC FORCES.
CHECK TENSION CAPACITY OF #12 TEK SCREW PER CHAPTER E4 OF THE 1996 AISI COLD FORMED MANUAL..
Tpullout= 0 85 *tc *d *Fu2/0 sec E4 4 1 1
(0.85 0 036 IN 0.216 IN 65000 PSI /3) 1.33
190 LB
vass
WE Enos
MEINESEREENEEN
BININEVEI
ENGINEE
CONS RUCTORS INC
CUSTOMER
LOCATION
P 0 Box 717 Windsor CA 95492 (707) 838-1505 FAX (707) 838-1970 email: dlfeng@msn.com
ENGINEERING CALCULATION SHEET
11 EXPIRES
1.41,
Ai
SHEET NO
JOB NO (6'PiZ-4,1 61
DATE 5
BY PUV CHK'D
O -4 1 cat
GALLA,›
v
CONS RUCTORS INC
CUSTOMER
LOCATION
ENGINEERING CALCULATION SHEET
P0 Box 717 Windsor CA 95492 (707) 838-1505 FAX (707) 838-1970 email. dlfeng@msn.com
1131..% et-
OtL
2 ,50 z 1,6-co
1
1..rD yno 15 Nc. 1. 4=t
2 0r 0 F.-
-S C1403i.P 1 .6
V oc-ir 1:3c_
L sec. 1 1 2
2.1D-or
i 2m 9 k-- 0 c RYcp -per GT =1
S ws v
cf .4
2 0%1- ko) cx )4, Vloo'
L'1 34) 2.400 1
ITO pLir /c0.v 3crr,
L-k Too /1
SHEET NO
JOB NO
DATE
BY
CHK'D
C-4.4- 4 5 4 .64
4 Ka .At.-14,63rN.Y
,6;(C "p'4,11:
ENGINEER: S.
C O N S T R U C T O R S INC.
Autozone
1936 East First Street
Port Angeles, Washington
Fn May 08 10.45.20 PDT 2009
Conterminous 48 States
2005 ASCE 7 Standard
Latitude 48.107085
Longitude 123 403039
Spectral Response Accelerations Ss and S1
Ss and S1 Mapped Spectral Acceleration Values
Site Class B Fa 1 0 ,Fv 1 0
Data are based on a 0 01 deg grid spacing
Period Sa
(sec) (g)
0.2 1 121 (Ss, Site Class B)
1 0 0 465 (S1 Site Class B)
Conterminous 48 States
2005 ASCE 7 Standard
Latitude 48 107085
Longitude -123 403039
Spectral Response Accelerations SMs and SM1
SMs =Fax Ss and SM1 =FvxS1
Site Class D Fa 1 051 ,Fv 1.535
Penod Sa
(sec) (g)
0.2 1 178 (SMs, Site Class D)
1 0 0 715 (SM1 Site Class D)
Conterminous 48 States
2005 ASCE 7 Standard
Latitude 48 107085
Longitude 123 403039
Design Spectral Response Accelerations SDs and SD1
SDs 2/3 x SMs and SD1 2/3 x SM1
Site Class D Fa 1 051 ,Fv 1.535
Penod Sa
(sec) (g)
0.2 0 786 (SDs, Site Class D)
1 0 0 476 (SD1 Site Class D)
Page 1 of 1
\Cadl\D\x\DLFSTRUC\DLF 2007 CBC Default Seismic\2080 7 1.09EQ Template.doc
6.5 METHOD 2- ANALYTICAL PROCEDURE
6.5.12. Design Wind Loads on Enclosed and Partially Enclosed Buildings. (all Heights)
MWFRS Velocity pressure .00256 I< K. Ka V I (6 -15)
Exposure D Roof Height h 15.8 feet
Exposure coefficient K Section 6.5.6.6, is obtained from Table 6 -3, Case 2 for MWFRS
Topography factor K 1.00 6.5.7.2, Figure 6 -2
Directionality factor K. 0.85 Table 6-4
Wind Speed V 100 mph
Importance factor I. 1.00 Table 6 -1
q 21 76 K psf
Internal Pressure Coefficient (GC t 0 18 Figure 6 -5 for Endosed Building V 1
Gust effect factor G 0.85 6.5.8.1
Pressures for MWFRS p gGC q, (GC (6 -17)
Wall and Roof External pressure Coefficients C from Fig. 6-6 or 6-8
Wind Normal to Ridge to 21) UB 2.86 h/L 15.8/60 0.26 B= 0.0
Windward wall C 0.8 Windward roof C
Leeward wall C -0.257 for UB 2.86 Leeward roof C
Side wall C -0 7 or Roof C -0.90 -0.90 -0.50 -0.30
Wind Parallel to Ridge to 60) UB 0.35
Windward wall C 0.8 h/L 15.8/21 0 75
Leeward wall C -0.500 for UB 0.35 Roof C 1 1 1.0
Side wall C -0.7 for dist 7.9 15.8
17.3, 17.3
GC =±0.18
q,(GC 22.62(0.18)
20.32 1 .75 ft 4.07
All forces shown in psf
20.19 01 to15
1111111Clions
1 24.99 15.75 ft
24.86 O to 15 ft
q,± 4.07
All forces shown in psf
y I
bU 1' 1 21
p gGC q (GC Eq. 6 -15 For Exp D
where q q for windward z 700
q q for leeward wall, side wall and roof @15.8 ft K 2.01(z/z
q q for enclosed building @15.8 ft K (min) 2.01(15/z
1 Roof H1, h 15.8 ft (Normal to Ridge 1 to 21 1 Parallel to ridge 1 to 60
'Height 1 Kh 1 g 1 Co 1 ghGCp 1 C g
1Leeward wall lall 1 1.0401 22.621 0.257141 -4.94 1 -0.50 1 -9.61
l Side wall loll 1 1.0401 22.621 0.7 1 13.46 I -0.70 1 13.46
Roof ww Or -0.90 17.3 fro 7.9 1 10 -21 19 fr 0 7.9
Lw -0.90 17.3 fr >7.9 1.00 19.25 fr >7.9
0.50 9.61 fr 15.8- fr 15.8-
-0.30 5.77 fr fr
Wind Normal to tidge Wind 'arallel to Ridge
z, Ht. (8) K q C p =g W W +LW C p =g W W +LW
Windward wall 0 to 15 1.030 22.42 0.8 15.24 20.19 0.80 15.24 24.86
8.0 1.030 22.42 0.8 15.24 20.19 0.80 15.24 24.86
15.8 1.039 22.61 0,8 15.37 20.32 0.80 15.37 24.99
11.5
2ot7P °y'
tc .C.3
L- A-5 s 3)C
Zer p-0
IBC2006 (1613), ASCE 7 -05 CHAPTER 11,12,13 SEISMIC DESIGN CRITERIA
Response Spectral Acc. (0.2 sec) S, 112.10 %g
Response Spectral Acc.( 1.0 sec) S, 46.50 %g
Soil Site Class I D I
Site Coefficient F 1.052
Site Coefficient F 1.536
Max Considered Earthquake Acc. SMS F,.S,
Max Considered Earthquake Acc. S F .S,
5% Damped Design Sos 213(SMS)
S01 2 3 (SM1)
Building Occupancy Categories n, Standard
Design Category Consideration: I Flexible Diaphragm
Seismic Design Category for 0.1 sec D
Seismic Design Category for 1.0sec D
St .75g NA
Since Ta .8Ts (see below), SDC D
Comply with Seismic Design Category D
12.8 Equivalent lateral force procedure
Seismic Force Resisting Systems
Response Modification Coef. R
Over Strength Factor a 2.5
Importance factor I 1
Seismic Base Shear V C W
Sos
R/I
Sal
(R/I).T
SDITL
T`(R/I)
0.01
Min C, 0.5S
Use C,= 0.121
Design base shear V 0.121 W
C.=
or need not to exceed, C,
or C,
C, shall not be less than
Where 0.
0.2S
Deflection Amplification factor C
Nonbuilding structures, Section 15
Response Modification Coef. R
Importance factor I
For flexible nonbuilding, C,
Min C,
or C,=
V=
For rigid nonbuilding, C,
6.5
2.5
0.158(D)
4
0.236 W
1.121g
0.465g
Table 20 -3 -1 Default D
1 179
0.714
0.786
0.476
.1 Table 1 -1
«I
C 0.02
Building ht. H„ 16
C„= 1.400
Approx Fundamental period, T C,(h
Calculated T shall not exceed Cu.Ta
0.8Ts 0.8(S /Sp
Is structure Regular 55 stories 1 Yes v
Response Spectral Acc.( 0.2 sec) S,= 1.121g
F 1.05
5% Damped Design Sea %(F .S,) 0.786g
3
1
Sp 0.262
0.03
0.8 S,1/R 0.124
0.262 W
0.3Sp
Figure 22 -1 through 22 -14
Figure 22 -1 through 22 -14
with dist between seismic resisting system >40ft
Table 11.6 -1
Table 11.6 -2
Section 11.6
Control (exception of Section 11.6 does not apply)
IRC, Seismic Design Category 01 T R3012.2.1.1
A. BEARING WALL SYSTEMS
113. light framed walls sheathed with wood structural panels rated for shear resistance or steel sheets I v
x 0.75 T 12.8-2
ft Limited Building Height (ft) 65
for S of 0.4769 Table 12.8 -1
0.160 12.8 -7 T 12.000 Sec
0.224 Use T 1 0 224 I v II Sec.
0.485 Control (exception of Section 11.6 does not apply)
12.8.1.3
Max Ss 51.5g
x.121
0.327
N/A
N/A
Control
h= 10ft
1.258W p
0.236Wp
For TST
For T T,
For S, z0.6g
Table 11 4 -1
Table 11.4 -2
(11 4 -1)
(11 4 -2)
(11 4 -3)
(11 4-4)
(11 4 -3)
Table- 12.2 -1
foot note g
Table 11.5 -1
12.14 Simplified Seismic base shear 113. Light framed walk sheathed with wood structural panels rated for shear resistance or steel sheets
5% Damped Design Sos 0.786 SDC D Limitations: P
F 1 1 For two-story building R 6.5
V= FSp =0133W
R
13.3 Seismic Demands on Nonstructural Components
F 0.4a +2z/h) (13.3 -1)
(VIP)
a p 1 R 3
I 1.0
z= 10ft
Max F 1.6Sp
Min F 0.3S
Fp= 0.314 Wp
12.11 1 Structural Walls and Their Anchorage
F 0.40S 12.11 1
0.314(W)
12.11.2 Anchorage of Concrete or Masonry structural Walls (flexible diaphragm)
or F 400Sp 314 shall be 2280 #Nft
F,,= 0.8Sp (12.11 1)
0.629 Wp
Max Seismic Load E S2Q t 0.2SosD (12.4.4), (12.4.5), (12.4,6), (12.4.7)
T 15.4 -1 or T 15.4 -2
15.4.1 1
(15.4 -1)
(15.4 -2)
(15.4 -5)
eiltuy S10,Su►4,%L. tt(ao)(2)= LUo
St( v) 'Lilo
(12.8 -2) GDS
(12.8 -3)
(12.8-4)
(12.8 -5)
(12.8-6)
Sos= 0.786
T -12.2.
t„Up4y�i
T -12.14
I
T 13.5 -1 or 13.6 -1
13.1.3
Fp =0.314Wp
(13.3 -2)
(13.3 -3)
k
c toeuf
l� aYD tcJ-OL
11 1,0be0c_flek..D
ta4Latt
t Eamon
ein1111111111
INISEIRMININSIMS
RI MINN
ENGtNEE
CONS RUCTORS INC
CUSTOMER
LOCATION
ENGINEERING -CALCULATION SHEET
P0 Box 717 Windsor CA 95492 (707) 838-1505 FAX (707) 838-1970 email. dlfeng@msn.com
6 4-11CCi4 4 fAM 1.• CP 400
-4-
3c-
2 3( z--Coci fu
515..
SHEET NO
JOB NO
DATE
BY
co
k--\� -v
t-Itexo
Si-, iliC1-!2,---(.‘01- t -A. I Il
...71 1 1 7'
'2 11:191,..
t.4*- p-
t4)
6
CHK'D
i
.i•
ax.e.: br t 1
T j t
1
ENGINEE
CONS RUCTORS INC
CUSTOMER
LOCATION
ENGINEERING CALCULATION SHEET
P0 Box 717 Windsor CA 95492 (707) 838-1505 FAX (707) 838-1970 email: dlfeng@msn.com
t
1,1-3
Law'r u-A-)r-
SHEET NO
JOB NO
DATF
BY
C1.1Ce.,•4 C"-- 9- MuL
7*.? F•1, Po
L
r tiNAIStic tt e Zt t 0..90
4 Z.
et-
?-0
-otc,
_f-Prc2-1.2
a I GLA.4.) Co.
CHK'D
Lk.3s coft_e
3
"Tt- ti>0.1
L 10 x:S3
N*Vir„ V2 R■ersi-"Nr? G
'l'1 Qz,a-
L.
t o-k. 7 -s
'13
et(-1,2-''r T ‘1.S
16(.0
1-(4,
Steel Design Report
Checking 11Cad11D1x1DLFSTRUC1Multi job files\Year 200912080.7 1.091Storefront Beam Long Span.mfd to ASD
code
Tuesday May 12, 2009 9:50 AM
Checking design member 2
Members: 2
Group. W
Section: W10x33
Load Case Dead +O 75Live +O 75Wind +O 75Snow
Fy 50000.0 psi
On gross area F=0 6 *FY 0 6 *50000.0= 30000.0 psi
On net area Ft 0.5 *F =0.5 *70000 0 =35000 0 psi
h/t 8.9/0.3 =30.6 s 380 /4(F 380/' (50000 0) =53 7
F 0 4 *Fy 0 4 *50000.0 =20000 0 psi
C 4(2 *7C *E /F =4(2 *71 *29000995.3/50000.0) =107.0
KI/ r =max(K *I /r *I /r max(1.0* 135.6/4.2,1.0 *24.0/1.9) =32.4
FS= 5/ 3 +3 *(KUr) /(8 *Cc)- (KUr) /(8 *Cc =513 +3 *32.4/(8 *107.0) 32.4 *107 0 =1.8
F (1- (KUr) /(2 *Cc *F =(1 32.4 *107.0 *50000.0/1.8= 26855.9 psi
b/t =4.0/0 4 =9 1 65/'(F 65/I(50000.0) =9.2 Section is Compact
Major Axis:
L min(76 *b 20000 /(d /A *F min(76 *8.0/4(50000 0),20000/(9 7/3.5 *50000.0)) =min(7 1 11.9) =7 1
L L F =O 66 *FY 0.66 *50000.0= 33000.0 psi
Minor Axis.
F =0 75 *Fy 0 75 *50000 0= 37500.0 psi
Design Member 2, Dead +0.75Live +0.75Wind +0.75Snow Major Bending
Tensile Bending Stress:
f F 701.9 s 33000 0 OK 98% under
Compressive Bending Stress:
f F 701.9 33000.0 OK 98% under
Design Member 2, Dead +0.75Live +0.75Wind +0.75Snow Major Shear
f F 344.5 20000 0 OK 98% under
Design Member 2, Dead +0.75Live +0.75Wind +0.75Snow Major Deflection
8 L/240 0 0 5. 0.6 in OK 100% under
Design Member 2, Dead +0.75Live +0.75Wind +0.75Snow Minor Bending
Tensile Bending Stress.
f F 16800.9 37500 0 OK 55% under
Compressive Bending Stress:
f 5 F 16800.9 37500 0 OK 55% under
Design Member 2, Dead +0.75Live +0.75Wind +0.75Snow Minor Shear
f F 108.3 s 20000 0 OK 99% under
Design Member 2, Dead +0.75Live +0.75Wind +0.75Snow Minor Deflection
g L/240 1302558762487.9 0.6 in OK 2147483548% under
Design Member 2, Dead +0.75Live +0.75Wind +0 75Snow Slenderness
K, *L 1 0 *135 6/4.2 =32.4 200 0 OK 84% under
K *LVry 1.0 *24.0/1.9= 12.4 200 0 OK 94% under
Design Member 2, Dead +0 75Live +0.75Wind +0 75Snow Compression
f s F 0.0 26855.9 OK 100% under
Design Member 2, Dead +O 75Live +0.75Wind +0 75Snow Bending Tension
fa /Ft +fbx/Fbx +fby /Fby 0 0/ 35000.0 +701.9/33000.0 +16800.9/37500.0 =0.5 1 OK 53% under
Design Member 2, Dead +0.75Live +0 75Wind +0 75Snow Bending Compression
f /F 0.0/26855.9 =0.0 0 15
fa /Fa +fbx/Fbx +fby/Fby 0 0/26855.9 +701.9/33000 0 +16800.9/37500.0 =0.5 s 1 OK 53% under
Load Case 0 6Dead +Wind
Fy 50000.0 psi
On gross area Ft 0.6 *FY 0.6 *50000 0 =30000 0 psi
On net area Fi 0.5 *F =0.5 *70000 0 =35000 0 psi
h/t 8.9/0.3 =30.6 s 380/ 'J(F 380/'1(50000.0) =53 7
F 0 4 *Fy 0 4 *50000.0= 20000.0 psi
C X1(2 *n *E /F 1(2 *7E *29000995.3/50000.0) =107.0
KI /r =max(K *I /r *I /r max(1.0 *135.6/4.2,1.0 *24 0/1.9) =32.4
FS =5/3 +3* (KUr) /(8* Cc)- (KUr) *Cc =5/3 +3 *32.4/(8* 107.0)- 32.4 107.0 =1.8
F (1- (KUr) /(2 *Cc *F =(1 32.4 *107.0 *50000.0/1.8= 26855.9 psi
b/t =4.0/0 4 =9 1 65 /'I(F 65/4(50000 0) =9.2 Section is Compact
Major Axis:
L min( 76* b 4(F /(d /A min(76 *8 0/'1(50000.0),20000 /(9 7/3.5 *50000.0)) =min(7 1 11.9) =7 1
L L F 0.66 *Fy 0.66 *50000.0= 33000.0 psi
Minor Axis:
F =O 75 *Fy 0 75 *50000 0 =37500 0 psi
Design Member 2, 0.6Dead +Wind, Major Bending
Tensile Bending Stress:
f 5 F 161.5 33000.0 OK 100% under
Compressive Bending Stress:
f s F 161.5 33000.0 OK 100% under
Design Member 2, 0.6Dead +Wind, Major Shear
f s F 79.3 s 20000.0 OK 100% under
Design Member 2, 0.6Dead +Wind, Major Deflection
8 <_U240,0.0 <_0.6inOK100 %under
Design Member 2, 0.6Dead +Wind, Minor Bending
Tensile Bending Stress:
f S F 22395.5 s 37500.0 OK 40% under
Compressive Bending Stress:
f s F 22395.5 _s. 37500 0 OK 40% under
Design Member 2, 0.6Dead +Wind, Minor Shear
f S F 144 6 20000.0 OK 99% under
Design Member 2, 0.6Dead +Wind, Minor Deflection
8 s L/240 1736745016650.6 0 6 in OK 2147483548% under
Design Member 2, 0.6Dead +Wind, Slenderness
K *L 1.0 *135.6/4.2 =32.4 s 200 0 OK 84% under
K *L,/ry 1.0 *24 0/1.9= 12.4 200 0 OK 94% under
Design Member 2, 0.6Dead +Wind, Compression
f _s F 0 0 26855.9 OK 100% under
Design Member 2, 0.6Dead +Wind, Bending Tension
f /F +f +f /F 0.0/35000 0 +161.5/33000 0 +22395.5/37500.0 =0.6 1 OK 40% under
Design Member 2, 0.6Dead +Wind, Bending Compression
f 0.0/26855.9 =0.0 s 0 15
fa /Fa fbx/Fbx fbVF
b y 0 0/ 26855.9+ 161.5/33000.0 +22395.5/37500.0 =0.6 S. 1 OK 40% under
8
Steel Design Report
Checking 1 \Cad11D1x1DLFSTRUCIMuIti job flles\Year 200912080.7 1.091Storefront Beam Short Span.mfd to ASD
code
Tuesday May 12, 2009 10:02 AM
Checking design member 1
Members: 1
Group: W
Section: W10x33
Load Case Dead +O 75Live +O 75Wind +O 75Snow
FY 50000.0 psi
On gross area Ft 0.6 *Fy 0.6 *50000.0= 30000.0 psi
On net area Ft 0.5 *F =0.5 *70000.0= 35000.0 psi
h/t 8.9/0.3= 30.6 5 380 /4(F 380/'(50000.0) =53 7
F 0 4 *Fy 0 4 *50000 0= 20000.0 psi
C 4(2 *7r *E /F 4(2 *7r *29000995.3/50000.0) =107.0
KI/ r =max(K *I /r *I /r max(1.0* 108.0/4.2,1.0 *24.0/1.9) =25.8
FS= 5/3 +3 *(KUr) /(8* Cc)- (KUr) /(8* Cc 513 +3 *25.81(8* 107.0)- 25.8 107.0 =1.8
F (1- (KUr) /(2 *Cc *F =(1 25.8 *107 0 *50000 0/1.8= 27659.4 psi
blt =4.0/0 4 =9 1 65 /'1(F 65/'1(50000.0) =9.2 Section is Compact
Major Axis.
L min(76 *b 20000 /(d /A *F min(76 *8.0/1(50000.0),20000 /(9 7/3.5 *50000.0)) =min(7 1 11.9) =7 1
L 5 L F 0.66 *Fy 0.66 *50000.0= 33000.0 psi
Minor Axis.
F =O 75 *Fy 0 75 *50000.0 =37500 0 psi
Design Member 1 Dead +0.75Live +0 75Wind +0.75Snow
Tensile Bending Stress:
f F 2392.2 33000.0 OK 93% under
Compressive Bending Stress:
f F 2392.2 33000.0 OK 93% under
Design Member 1 Dead +0.75Live +0.75Wind +0.75Snow
f F 1099 1 5 20000.0 OK 95% under
Design Member 1 Dead +0.75Live +0.75Wind +0.75Snow
8 U240 0.0 5 0.5 in OK 95% under
Design Member 1 Dead +0.75Live +0.75Wind +0.75Snow
Tensile Bending Stress:
f 5 F 1485.5 .5 37500.0 OK 96% under
Compressive Bending Stress:
f F 1485.5 5 37500.0 OK 96% under
Design Member 1 Dead +0.75Live +0 75Wind +0 75Snow
f 5. F 73.1 5 20000.0 OK 100% under
Design Member 1 Dead +0.75Live +0 75Wind +0.75Snow
8 L/240 0050.5 in OK 97% under
Design Member 1 Dead +0.75Live +0 75Wind +0.75Snow
K *L 1 0 *108.0/4.2 =25.8 s 200 0 OK 87% under
K *L 1 0 *24.0/1.9= 12.4 200 0 OK 94% under
Design Member 1 Dead +0.75Live +0.75Wind +0.75Snow
Major Bending
Major Shear
Major Deflection
Minor Bending
Minor Shear
Minor Deflection
Slenderness
Compression
f F 0.0 27659 4 OK 100% under
Design Member 1 Dead +0.75Live +0.75Wind +0.75Snow Bending Tension
fa /Ft +fbx/Fbx +fby /Fby 0.0/30000 0 +2392.2/33000.0 +1485.5/37500.0 =0 1 1 OK 89% under
Design Member 1 Dead +0.75Live +0.75Wind +0.75Snow Bending Compression
f /F 0.0/27659 4 =0.0 0 15
fa /Fa +fbx/Fbx +fbyFby 0.0/27659 4 +2392.2/33000.0 +1485.5/37500 0 =0 1 s 1 OK 89% under
Load Case 0 6Dead +Wind
FY 50000 0 psi
On gross area Ft 0.6 *FY 0.6 *50000.0 =30000 0 psi
On net area F 0.5 *F =0.5 *70000 0 =35000 0 psi
h/t 8.9/0.3= 30.6 380 /4(F =3801 ((50000.0) =53 7
F 0 4 *FY 0 4 *50000 0= 20000.0 psi
C 4(2 *7t *E /F I(2 *7t *29000995.3/50000.0) =107.0
KI /r =max(K *I /r *I/r =max(1 0 *108.0/4.2,1.0 *24 0/1.9) =25.8
FS= 5/3 +3* (KUr) /(8* Cc)- (KUr) *Cc =5/3 +3 *25.8/(8* 107.0)- 25.8 107.0 =1.8
F (1- (KUr) /(2 *Cc *F,/FS =(1 25.8 *107 0 *50000 0/1.8 =27659 4 psi
b/t =4.0/0 4 =9 1 65/4(F 65/'1(50000.0) =9.2 Section is Compact
Major Axis:
L min(76 *b ,20000 /(d /A *F min(76 *8.0/4( 50000 0), 20000 /(9 7/3.5 *50000.0)) =min(7 1 11.9) =7 1
L L F =O 66 *FY 0.66 *50000.0= 33000.0. psi
Minor Axis.
F =O 75 *FY 0 75 *50000 0= 37500.0 psi
Design Member 1 0.6Dead +Wind, Major Bending
Tensile Bending Stress:
f F 381 1 33000.0 OK 99% under
Compressive Bending Stress:
f 5 F 381 1 33000 0 OK 99% under
Design Member 1 0.6Dead +Wind, Major Shear
f F 175.1 20000 0 OK 99% under
Design Member 1 0.6Dead +Wind, Major Deflection
8 5_ L/240 0.0 <_0.5 in OK 99% under
Design Member 1 0.6Dead +Wind, Minor Bending
Tensile Bending Stress.
f F 1980.6 37500.0 OK 95% under
Compressive Bending Stress:
f F 1980.6 37500.0 OK 95% under
Design Member 1 0.6Dead +Wind, Minor Shear
f F 97.5 20000.0 OK 100% under
Design Member 1 0.6Dead +Wind, Minor Deflection
5 :5. U240 0.0 <_0.5 in OK 95% under
Design Member 1 0.6Dead +Wind, Slenderness
K *L,,/rX 1.0 *108 0/4.2= 25.8 200 0 OK 87% under
K *L 1.0 *24 0/1.9 =12.4 5 200 0 OK 94% under
Design Member 1 0.6Dead +Wind, Compression
f F 0.0 27659 4 OK 100% under
Design Member 1 0.6Dead +Wind, Bending Tension
f /F +f +f /F =O 0/30000.0 +381 1/33000 0 +1980.6/37500.0 =0 1 5 1 OK 94% under
Design Member 1 0.6Dead +Wind, Bending Compression
f 0.0/27659 4 =0.0 0 15
fa /Fa +fbx/Fbx +fby/Fby 0 0/27659 4 +381 1/33000.0 +1980.6/37500.0 =0 1 1 OK 94% under
o
ENGINEE
CONSITRUCTORS INC
CUSTOMER
LOCATION
Lpkirceept,
SW, ick.se
"17-v:as V-qx-i-
L�Ac
P 0 Box 717 Windsor CA 95492 (707) 838-1505 FAX (707) 838-1970
ENGINEERING CALCULATION SHEET
ecst, o
6•19
k
t 2- 4 (.1)00) u■cmo
N 54a0/ Lloo
vi
Leti put-
4 c>4 —1")
cohle--,4
SHEET NO
JOB NO
DATE.
BY
CHK'D
H2.50
email. dlfeng@msn.com
rzA2-1'\ tsr-
Goo ortt
8.0‘‘
cip
ALM
III billiENSINE
EffINEINGEMBILI
IMEN411111
31.31
ENGINES
CONS RUCTORS INC
CUSTOMER
LOCATION
-abo(0.0)t,
4 ("An_ (.19,4
1 kovtuk
O'rerit.
ENGINEERING CALCULATION SHEET
P 0 Box 717 Windsor CA 95492 (707) 838-1505 FAX (707) 838-1970 email. dlfeng@msn.com
UCAdr ClAr
tod
.t
N o t-100
7—
-z.. $1. 4 -ff
SHEET NO
JOB NO
DATE
BY
(Pcil>",45(I'Vrt.) (-91P
IvseArlt
_L.
.4-
lv
CHK'D
vane
pf Zwanumm
11111161111MIUMINI
miuuii
111111111111111111
ENGINES
CONS RUCTORS INC
CUSTOMER
LOCATION
.4
Cer
I■veutt1 couch Ocs3- Ot.o.
P 0 Box 717 Windsor, CA 95492 (707) 838-1505 FAX (707) 838-1970 email. dlfeng@msn.com
itps
2245
c 2rTestvsaa zrv..-
'7
ENGINEERING CALCULATION SHEET
SHEET NO
JOB NO
DATE
BY
1.12
CHK'D
es15
6-4 r •C iA7 44'
SM
vp.a)-sle \r&A'S
CONS RUCTORS INC
CUSTOMER
LOCATION
rA
I a
liuiIUIIIII
pi imaimmens
IMEMBINISMILINE
MENIMINIE
ENGINEE
ENGINEERING CALCULATION SHEET
P 0 Box 717 Windsor CA 95492 (707) 838-1505 FAX (707) 838-1970 email: dlfeng@msn.com
SHEET NO
JOB NO
DATE
BY
CHK'D
1 -t"oi 1-64 fir,fe
ad
4
I■Je? Ue(A Pr
I
1
4) g L4
1.
r
C.,,,, ,,,,/(1. u.se,s
f _w
Os VANCED
Energy Solutions
Commercial Energy Compliance Report
2006 Washington Nonresidential
Energy Code
Autozone Store #4110
Port Angeles. WA
Advanced Energy Solutions
VANCED
0 Energy Solutions
Compliance Summary
Project:
Autozone Retail Store #4110
Port Angeles, WA
Envelope Compliance
Compliance; YES
Lighting Compliance
Comp liance; `YES
If you have any questions please call 479 631 -1712
s
This project includes the addition onto an existing envelope Lighting fixtures
have been replaced throughout. Also 2 unitsar new replacement
rooftops with 1 additional new over the addition. Envelope was provided for
the addition, as the other envelope is existing to remain No compliance
necessary Lighting has been calculated throughout due to complete
replacement.
Envelope Summary (back)
limate Zone 1 ENV -SUM
2004 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms
Decision Flowchart
for Prescriptive Option
1302 Space Heat Type: For the purpose of determi ing building envelope
requirements. the following two categories comprise all space healing types:
Other All other space heating systems including gas. solid fuel. oil. and
propane space heating systems and those systems listed in the exception to
electric resistance. (continued at right)
Mass Wall
Criteria OK?
(below)
All Insulation Installed?
Below Grd Wall (ext) R -10
Below Grd Wall (oth) R 19
Roof Over Attic R -30
All Other Roof R -21
Raised Floor R 19
Slab -On -Grade R -10
Radiant Floor R -10
Opaque Door U -0.60
2004 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form
No Lye:
Yes
Mass Wall Insulation Req.
Mass Wall U0.15/R5.7ci
CMU Block Ins. Cores _Yes
Wood Frame R19
Metal Framed R19
No
Concrete/Masonry Option*
Assembly Description
Use this flowchart to determine if project qualifies for the optional Prescriptive Option.
If not, either the Component Performance or Systems Analysis Options must be used.
Glazing
Area
0 -30%
30-45%
>45%
Nc
Assy Tag
Yes
Glazing Criteria Met?
Vert 01-1
UVaI UVaI
0.55 0.70
0.45 0.60
Not Allowed
START
Electric
Resistance
SHGC
0.45
0 40
I I
No Yes
Prescriptive
Path Allowed
HC*
i
Totals
Electric Resistance: Space heating systems which use electric resistance
elements as the primary heating system ncluding baseboard. radiant. and
forced air units where the total electric resistance heat capacity exceeds 1.0
Wift of the gross conditioned floor area. Exception: Heat pumps and
terminal electric resistance healing in variable at volume distribution systems.
Yes
Yes
Glazing Criteria Met?
Glazing Vert OH
Area UVaI UVaI SHGC
0 -30% 0.40 0.60 0.40
>30 Not Allowed
Yes
Component Performance
or
Systems Analysis Required
No
Wall Heat Capacity (HC)
Area (sf)
Area weighted HC divide total of (HC x area) by Total Area
All Insulation Installed?
Below Grd Wall (ext)
Below Grd Wall (oth)
Roof Over Attic
All Other Roof
Raised Floor
Slab -On -Grade
Radiant Floor
ODaaue Door
Yesi
Mass Wall
Criteria OK?
(below)
Yes
Mass Wall Insulation Req.
Mass Wall U0.15/R5.7ci
Yes— CMU Block Ins. Cores
Wood Frame R19
Metal Framed U0.062
HC x Area
Wood Metal
R -10 R -10
R 19 U -0.062
R -38 U -0.031
R 30 U -0.034
R -30 U -0 029
R -10 R -10
R 10 R -10
U -0.60 U -0 60
Revised May 2005
if the area
weighted heat
capacity (HC) of
the total above
grade wall is a
minimum of 9 0
the Concrete
Masonry Option
may be used.
*For framed
walls, assume
HC =1 0 unless
calculations are
provided; for all
other walls use
Section 1009.
Envelope Summary
Climate Zone 1 ENV -SUM
2004 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms
Project Info
Applicant Name Autozone Design and Construction
Applicant Address 123 S Front Street Memphis TN 38103
Applicant Phone 800 285 2223
1 Project Description I New Building El Addition Alteration Change of Use
Compliance Option
Prescriptive El Component Performance Systems Analysis
Space Heat Type
Glazing Area Calculation
Note: Below grade walls may be included in the
Gross Exterior Wall Area if they are insulated to
the level required for opaque walls.
0 yes
Concrete/Masonry Option
no
Envelope Requirements (enter values as applicable)
Fully heated/cooled space
Roofs Over Attic
All Other Roofs
Opaque Walls'
Below Grade Walls
Floors Over Unconditioned Space
Slabs -on -Grade
Radiant Floors
Opaque Doors
Vertical Glazing
Overhead Glazing
Vertical /Overhead Glazing
Semi heated space 2
Roofs Over Semi Heated Spaces
Notes
Project Address
2004 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form
Autozone Store No 4110
First Street
Port Angeles WA
(See Decision Flowchart (over) for qualifications)
Q Electric resistance
Total Glazing Area
(rough opening)
(vertical overhd)
Minimum Insulation R values
30 0
30 0
10 0
Maximum U- factors
Maximum SHGC (or SC)
0 390
Minimum Insulation R values
1 Assemblies with metal framing must comply with overall U- factors
2. Refer to Section 1310 for qualifications and requirements
All other
Revised May 2005
I Date 5/4/2009
For Building Department Use
(see over for definitions)
Electronic version: these values are automatically taken from ENV -UA -1
Gross Exterior
divided by Wall Area times 100 equals Glazing
1548 0 X 100
Check here if using this option and if project meets all requirements for the Concrete/Masonry
Option. See Decision Flowchart (over) for qualifications. Enter requirements for each qualifying
assembly below
0 240
0 480
Opaque Concrete /Masonry Wall Requirements
Wall Maximum U- factor is 0.15 (R5.7 continuous ins)
CMU block walls with insulated cores comply
If project qualifies for Concrete /Masonry Option, list walls
with HC 9.0 Btu /ft below (other walls must meet
Opaque Wall requirements). Use descriptions and values
from Table 10 -9 in the Code.
Wall Description U- factor
(including insulation R -value position)
2004 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms
Project Address Autozone Store No
Space Heat Type
Glazing Area as gross exterior wall area
Concrete/Masonry Option
4 o
j E.°.
05
n Z
a
2 O
R= Plan ID
R= Plan ID
R= Plan ID
R= Plan ID
R= Plan ID
*For CMU walls, indicate core insulation material.
2004 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form
Envclope'UA.Calculations Climate Zonel ENV -UA
4110
Q Electric resistance All other
Prop I 45 0% Max.Target
1 0 Yes Q No
Notes. If glazing area exceeds maximum allowed in Table then calculate adjusted areas on back (over).
To comply 1) Proposed Total UA shall not exceed Target Total UA.
2) Proposed Total Area shall equal Target Total Area.
Date 5/4/2009
For Building Department Use
Revised May 2005
Building Component Proposed UA Target UA
List components by assembly ID page U- factor x Area (A) UA (U x A) U- factor x Area (A) UA (U x A)
U= Plan ID 0 550
U= Plan ID Glazing Electric Resist. Other Heating
ai cn U= Plan ID 0 -30% 0 40 0 55
r U= Plan ID >30 -45% see note above 0 45
0 U= Plan ID•
U= Plan ID
U= Plan ID•
8 U= Plan ID' 0 700
Q U= Plan ID Glazing Electric Resist. Other Heating
U= Plan ID 0 -30% 0 6 0 7
O U= Plan ID >30 -45% see note above 0.6
in U= Plan ID
o U= Plan ID
U= Plan 111 U= Plan ID 0 700
0 U= Plan ID 0 600 42 0 25 2
m o U= 0 240 Plan ID A 1 0 240 42 0 10 1 Electric Resist. Other Heating
O U= Plan ID 0 60 0 60
n R= Plan ID 0 036
R= Plan ID Electric Resist. Other Heating
O f, R= Plan ID 0.031 0.036
R= 30 0 Plan ID A 2 0 032 1160 0 37 1 0 046 1160 0 53 4
O R= Plan ID Electric Resist. Other Heating
R= Plan ID 0.034 0.046
R= 13 0 Plan ID A 2 0 109 1506 0 164 2 0 190 1506 0 286 1
R= Plan ID'
R= Plan ID
R= Plan ID Electric Resist. Other Heating
R= Plan ID Frame -Wd 0 062 0.062
R= Plan ID Frame -MtI 0.062 0.109
R= Plan ID Mass Wall` 0 15 0 15
*Note: sum of Target Areas here should equal Target Opaque Wall Area (see back) see mass wall Criteria
R= Plan ID
R= Plan ID' Electric Resist. Other Heating
R= Plan ID Int Ins 0 062 0.062
Note: if insulated to levels required for opaque walls, list above with opaque walls Ext Ins 0.07 0.07
R= Plan ID 0 056
R= Plan ID' Electric Resist. Other Heating
R= Plan ID' 0 029 0.056
0 730 100 4 73 3 0 540 100 4 54 2
Electric Resist. Other Heating
F =0 54 F =0 54
(see Table 13 -1 for radiant floor values)
Totals 2808 4 284 6 Totals 2808 4 418 9
Climate Zone 1 ENV -SHGC
2004 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms
Glazing
List components by assembly ID page SHGC' x Area (A) SHGC x A SHGC x Area (A) SHGC x A
ID'Storefront Windows sheet AS 0 450
rn
ID Storefront Doors sheet AS Glazing Electric Resist. Other Heating
ID' 0 -30% 0 4 0 45
CD
ID' >30 -45% not allowed 0 4
ID'
ID
'Note. Manufacturer's SC may be used in lieu of SHGC
For compliance. Proposed total SHGC x A shall not exceed Target total SHGC x A
NOTE. Since 1997 SHGC compliance for vertical and overhead glazing is allowed to be calculated together
Target Area Adjustment Calculations
If the total amount of glazing area as a of gross exterior wall area (calculated on ENV -SUM1) exceeds the maximum allowed in Table 13-1
then this calculation must be submitted Use the resulting areas in the Target UA and SHGC calculations above.
Glazing Area OG=
Opaque Area
Gross Exterior Wall Max Glazing Area
Area (Table 13 -1)
1548 0
696 6
2004 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form
Proposed Areas: Numbered values are used in calculations below
Roofs over Attics Other Roofs
IOG=
1
X 45 0% 1 100
I
0 lesser
696 6
Proposed Opaque Area Proposed OG Area
Roofs over Attics
Other Roofs 1160 0
-t-
Totals
1160 0
Proposed SHGC
VG=
Walls
1506 0
Maximum Target
Glazing Area
696 6
Target OG Area in Roofs over Attics Target OG Area in Other Roofs
Max OG Remaining
696 6 1 0lesser
s' 696 6
Totals
Target VG Area
71 Target OG Areal Target Opaque Area
1160 0
Target values in shaded boxes are used in the applicable Target UA calculations on the front.
Target VG Area and Total Target OG Area are also used in the applicable Target SHGC calculations above.
Target SHGC
Revised May 2005
Note:
OG overhead glazing
VG vertical glazing
For Target OG's, the
lesser values are
used both here and
below
Proposed Opaque Area Proposed VG Area Target VG Area Target Opaque Area
1 Walls' I 1506 0 I 1 I 1506 0 Target Areas OK
Note: If there is more than one type of wall, the Target VG Area may be distributed among them, and separate Target Opaque Areas found.
If the Target Areas for Opaque Walls listed on the front must equal the total calculated here.
ing PerrpitPIans Checklist ENV=CHK
2004 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms
!Date
The following information is necessary to check a building'perrnit application for compliance with the building envelope requirements in
the Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code.
Project Address
Applicability Code
(yes, no n.a.) Section Component
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (Sections 1301 1314)
1 1301 IScooe 'Unconditioned spaces identified on olans if allowed
yes 1302 Space heat type.
n a
n a
yee
yes
n a
yes
n a
yes
yes
n a
yes
n a
yes
n a
yes
yes
n a
2004 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form
Autozone Store No 4110
Information Required
If "Other" N -1
indicate on olans that electric resistance heat is not allowed
1310.2 (Semi- heated spaces ISemi- heated spaces identified on plans if allowed I I
1311 'Insulation
1311 1 Ilnsul. installation 'Indicate densities and clearances
1311.2 Roof /ceiling insul. Indicate R -value on roof sections for attics and other roofs; A 3
Indicate clearances for attic insulation;
Indicate baffles if eave vents installed;
Indicate face stapling of faced batts
1311.3 Wall insulation Indicate R -value on wall sections; A 3
Indicate face stapling of faced bans:
Indicate above grade exterior insulation is protected;
Indicate loose -fill core insulation for masonry walls as necess;
Indicate heat capacity of masonry walls
if masonry option is used F73;
1311 4 Floor insulation !Indicate R -value on floor sections;
Indicate substantial contact with surface
Indicate supports not more than 24" o.c.
Indicate that insulation does not block
airflow throuoh foundation vents
1311.5 Slab -on -grade floor Indicate R -value on wall section or foundation detail; A3 Si
Indicate slab insulation extends down vertically 24" from top;
Indicate above arade exterior insulation is protected
1311.6 Radiant floor Indicate R -value on wall section or foundation detail;
Indicate slab insulation extends down vertically 36" from the top;
Indicate above grade exterior insulation is protected;
Indicate insulation also under entire slab where rea'd. by Official
1312 'Glazing and doors !Provide calculation of glazing area (including both vertical IA 5
vertical and overhead) as percent of cross wall area
1312.1 U- factors Indicate glazing and door U- factors on glazing and door Specs
schedule (provide area weighted calculations as necessary);
Indicate if values are NFRC or default, if values are default
then specify frame type, glazing layers, gapwidth, low-e
coatings, as filtinas
1312.2 SHGC SC Indicate glazing solar heat gain coefficient or shading
coefficient on glazing schedule (provide area weighted
calculations as necessary)
1313 (Moisture control
1313.1 'Vapor retarders 'Indicate vapor retarders on warm side
1313.2 (Roof /ceiling vap.ret. 'Indicate vapor retarder on roof section;
Indicate vao. retard. with sealed seams for non -wood struc.
1313.3 'Wall vapor retarder 'Indicate vapor retarder on wall section
1313.4 'Floor vapor retarder 'Indicate vapor retarder on floor section
1313.5 'Crawl space vap. ret. 'Indicate six mil black polyethylene overlapped 12" on ground
1314 'Airleakaoe
1314.1 'Bldg. envel. sealing 'Indicate sealing, caulking, gasketing, and weatherstripping
1314.2 'Glazing/door sealing
'Indicate weatherstripping
1314.3 IAssemb. as ducts 'Indicate sealing, caulking and gasketing
PRESCRIPTIVE /COMPONENT PERFORMANCE (Sections 1320 -23 or 1330 -34)
Envelope Sum. Form Completed and attached.
Provide component performance worksheet if necessary
If "no is shown for any question, provide explanation:
5/4/2009
Revosed May 2005
Location Building Department
on Plans Notes
'Specs I
'Specs I
'Specs I
'Specs I
2004 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form
Building Permit Plans Checklist
2004 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms
ENV -CHK
Revised May 2005
Envelope General Requirements
1311 Insulation
1311 1 Installation Requirements All insulation materials
shall be installed according to the manufacturer's instructions
to achieve proper densities maintain clearances and maintain
uniform R- values. To the maximum extent possible insulation
shall extend over the full component area to the intended R
value
1311 2 Roof /Ceiling Insulation: Open -blown or poured loose
fill insulation may be used in attic spaces where the slope of
the ceiling is not more than 3/12 and there is at least thirty
inches of clear distance from the top of the bottom chord of the
truss or ceiling joist to the underside of the sheathing at the
roof ridge. When eave vents are installed, baffling of the vent
openings shall be provided so as to deflect the incoming air
above the surface of the insulation.
Where lighting fixtures are recessed into a suspended or
exposed grid ceiling the roof /ceiling assembly shall be
insulated in a location other than directly on the suspended
ceiling.
Exception: Type IC rated recessed lighting fixtures.
Where installed in wood framing faced batt insulation
shall be face stapled.
1311.3 Wall Insulation: Exterior wall cavities isolated during
framing shall be fully insulated to the levels of the surrounding
walls. When installed in wood framing faced batt insulation
shall be face stapled.
Above grade exterior insulation shall be protected.
1311.4 Floor Insulation Floor insulation shall be installed in
a permanent manner in substantial contact with the surface
being insulated. Insulation supports shall be installed so
spacing is not more than twenty -four inches on center
Installed insulation shall not block the airflow through
foundation vents.
1311.5 Slab-On-Grade Floor Slab -on -grade insulation
installed inside the foundation wall shall extend downward from
the top of the slab a minimum distance of twenty -four inches or
to the top of the footing, whichever is less. Insulation installed
outside the foundation shall extend downward a minimum of
twenty -four inches or to the frontline whichever is greater
Above grade insulation shall be protected.
Exception For monolithic slabs, the insulation shall
extend downward from the top of the slab to the
bottom of the footing.
1311 6 Radiant Floors (on or below grade): Slab -on -grade
insulation shall extend downward from the top of the slab a
minimum distance of thirty -six inches or downward to the top of
the footing and horizontal for an aggregate of not less than
thirty -six inches.
If required by the building official where soil conditions
warrant such insulation the entire area of a radiant floor shall
be thermally isolated from the soil. Where a soil gas control
system is provided below the radiant floor which results in
increased convective flow below the radiant floor the radiant
floor shall be thermally isolated from the sub -floor gravel layer
1312 Glazing and Doors
1312.1 Standard Procedure for Determination of Glazing
and Door U- Factors: U- factors for glazing and doors shall be
determined, certified and labeled in accordance with Standard
RS -31 by a certified independent agency licensed by the
National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC). Compliance
shall be based on the Residential or the Nonresidential Model
Size.
Produd samples used for U- factor determinations shall be
production line units or representative of units as purchased by
the consumer or contractor Unlabeled glazing and doors shall
be assigned the default U -factor in Section 2006.
1312.2 Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and Shading
Coefficient: Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC) shall be
determined, certified and labeled in accordance with the
National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC) Standard by a
certified, independent agency licensed by the NFRC
Exception: Shading coefficients (SC) shall be an
acceptable alternate for compliance with solar heat
gain coefficient requirements Shading coefficients
for glazing shall be taken from Chapter 27 of
Standard RS-27 or from the manufacturers test data.
1313 Moisture Control
1313.1 Vapor Retarders. Vapor retarders shall be installed on
the warm side (in winter) of insulation as required by this
section.
Exception: Vapor retarder installed with not more
than 1/3 of the nominal R -value between it and the
conditioned space.
1313.2 Roof /Ceiling Assemblies Roof /ceiling assemblies
where the ventilation space above the insulation is less than
an average of twelve inches shall be provided with a vapor
retarder Roof /ceiling assemblies without a vented airspace
where neither the roof deck nor the roof structure are made of
wood shall provide a continuous vapor retarder with taped
seams.
Exception: Vapor retarders need not be provided
where all of the insulation is installed between the
roof membrane and the structural roof deck
1313.3 Walls. Walls separating conditioned space from
unconditioned space shall be provided with a vapor retarder
1313.4 Floors. Floors separating conditioned space from
unconditioned space shall be provided with- a•vapor retarder
1313.5 Crawl Spaces: A ground cover of six mil (0.006 inch
thick) black polyethylene or approved equal shall be laid over
the ground within crawl spaces. The ground cover be
overlapped twelve inches minimum at the joints and shall
extend to the foundation wall.
Exception: The ground cover may be omitted in
crawl spaces if the crawl space has a concrete slab
floor with a minimum thickness of three and one -half
inches.
1314 Air Leakage
1314 1 Building Envelope. The requirements of this section
shall apply to building elements separating conditioned from
unconditioned spaces Exterior joints around windows and
door frames, openings between walls and foundation, between
walls and roof and wall panels; openings at penetrations of
utility services through walls, floors, and roofs; and all other
openings in the building envelope shall be sealed, caulked
gasketed, or weatherstripped to limit air leakage.
1314.2 Glazing and Doors Doors and operable glazing
separating conditioned from unconditioned space shall be
weatherstripped. Fixed windows shall be tight fitting with glass
retained by stops with sealant or caulking all around.
Exception: Openings that are required to be fire
resistant.
1314.3 Building Assemblies Used as Ducts or Plenums
Building assemblies used as duds or plenums shall be sealed
caulked and gasketed to limit air leakage.
2004 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms
Project Info Project Address
Project Description
Compliance Option
Alteration Exceptions
(check appropriate box sec. 1132.3)
Location
(floor /room no.)
Total Building
Proposed Lighting Wattage (Interior)
Location
Covered Parking
(standard paint)
Covered Parking
(reflective paint)
Open Parking
Outdoor Areas
Bldg. (by facade)'
Bldg. (by perim)
Applicant Name
Applicant Address
Applicant Phone.
Exterior Building Lights
2004 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form
Autozone Store No 4110
First Street
Port Angeles
Autozone Store Design and Construction
123 S Front Street Memphis TN 38103
1 800 285 2223
El
O Prescriptive Lighting Power Allowance
Maximum Allowed Lighting Wattage (Interior)
New Building Addition Alteration ['Plans Included
Refer to WSEC Section 1513 for controls and commissioning requirements.
(See Qualification Checklist (over). Indicate Prescriptive LPA spaces clearly on plans.)
No changes are being made to the lighting
Less than 60% of the fixtures new installed wattage not increased, space use not changed
Occupancy Description
'Retail Sales
From Table 15-1 (over) document all exceptions on form LTG -LPA
Location Number of Watts/ Watts
(floor /room no.) Fixture Description Fixtures Fixture Proposed
Total Building 'Suspended T8 651 95 01 6175 0
Restrooms 'Wall Mounted Fluorescent 1 21 32 O' 64 0
'Suspended T8 16 ft Tandem I 241 95 01 2280 0
Total Proposed Watts may not exceed Total Allowed Watts for Interior Total Proposed Watts' 8519 0
Maximum Allowed Lighting Wattage (Exterior)
Description
Date
For Building Department Use
0 Systems Analysis
Allowed
Watts per ft Area in ft
1 501 7252 01
1
Notes:
1 Use manufacturer's listed maximum input wattage. For hard -wired ballasts only
the default table in the NREC Technical Reference Manual may also be used
2. Include exit lights unless less than 5 watts per fixture.
3. List all fixtures. For exempt lighting, not exception and leave Watts /Fixture blank.
Allowed Watts
perft
0.2 W /ft
0.3 W /ft
0.2 W /ft
0.2 W /ft
0.25 W /ft
7.5 W /If
Total Allowed Watts' 10878 0
Area in ft
(or If for perimeter)
Revised May 2005
5/4/2009
Allowed x Area
10878 0
Allowed Watts
x ft (or x If)
1
362 81 2721 0
1 Choose either the facade area or the perimeter method but not both) Total Allowed Watts' 2721 0
Use mtgr listed maximum input wattage For fixtures vial hard -wires oaiiasts only
Proposed Lighting Wattage (Exterior) the default table in the NREC Technical Reference Manual may also be used
Number of Watts/ Watts
Location Fixture Description Fixtures Fixture Proposed
'x D Fixtures
1 121 175 0' 2100 0
1 1
Total Proposed Watts may not exceed Total Allowed Watts for Exterior Total Proposed Watts' 2100 0
Lighting Summary (back)
LTG -SUM
2004 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms
Prescriptive Spaces
Barber shops, beauty shops
Hotel banquet/conference /exhibition hall''
Laboratories
Aircraft repair hangars
Cafeterias, fast food establishments'
Factories, workshops, handling areas
Gas stations, auto repair shops
Institutions
Libraries'
Nursing homes and hotel /motel quest rooms
Wholesale stores (pallet rack shelving)
Mall concourses
Schools buildings (Group E occupancy only),
school classrooms, day care centers
Laundries
Medical Offices, Clinics"
Footnotes for Table 15 1
2004 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form
Occupancy
Qualification Checklist Lighting
Note: If occupancy type is 'Other" and fixture Fixtures
answer is checked, the number of fixtures in (Section
the space is not limited by Code. Clearly 1521)
indicate these spaces on plans. If not
qualified. do LPA Calculations.
TABLE 15 -1 Unit Lighting Power Allowance (LPA)
I Use LPA` (W/sf) I Use
Painting, welding, carpentry machine shops 2.3
0 Warehouses, storage areas or aircraft storage hangers
Check if all fixtures are ballasted and at least 95% of fixtures are either
1 Fluorescent fixtures which a) are non lensed. b) have 1 or 2 two lamps c) have
5 -60 watt T 1 T 2, T -4 T 5 T -6 T -8 lamps d) have hard -wired electronic
dimming ballasts Screw -in compact fluorescent fixtures do not qualify
2. Metal Halide with a) reflector b) ceramic MH lamps 150w c) electronic ballasts
Exit and LED lights can be excluded from count if 5 watts /fixture.
2.0
2.0
1.8
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
14
1.35
Office buildings, office /administrative areas in
facilities of other use types (including but not limited
to schools, hospitals, o s pitals, institutions, museums banks
churches) 5,7
Police and fire stations 1 0
Atria (atriums) 1.0
Assembly spaces', auditoriums, gymnasia', heaters 1.0
Group R -1 common areas 1.0
Process plants 1 0
Restaurants /bars' 1 0
Locker and /or shower facilities 0.8
Warehouses storage areas 0.5
Aircraft storage hangars 0 4
Retail' retail banking 1.5
Parking garages (see exterior lighting) Section 1532
Plans Submitted for Common Areas Only'
1.2 Main floor building lobbies' (except mall concourses)
1.2 Common areas, corridors, toilet facilities and
washrooms, elevator lobbies
OOther
1) In cases in which a general use and a specific use are listed, the specific use shall apply In cases in which'a use is not
mentioned specifically the Unit Power Allowance shall be determined by the building official. This determination shall be
based upon the most comparable use specified in the table. See Section 1512 for exempt areas.
2) The watts per square foot may be increased, by two percent per foot of ceiling height above twenty feet, unless specifically
directed otherwise by subsequent footnotes.
3) Watts per square foot of room may be increased by two percent per foot of ceiling height above twelve feet.
4) For all other spaces, such as seating and common areas, use the Unit Light Power Allowance for assembly
5) Watts per square foot of room may be increased by two percent per foot of ceiling height above nine feet.
6) See Section 1532 for exterior lighting.
7) For conference rooms and offices less than 150ft with full height partitions, a Unit Lighting Power Allowance of 1.20 w /ft
may be used.
8) For the fire engine room, the Unit Lighting Power Allowance is 1.0 watts per square foot.
9) For indoor sport toumament courts with adjacent spectator seating, the Unit Lighting Power Allowance for the court area is
2.6 watts per square foot.
10) Display window illumination installed within 2 feet of the window provided that the display window is separated from the
retail space by walls or at least three quarter- height partitions (transparent or opaque). and lighting for free standing display
where the lighting moves with the display are exempt.
An additional 1.5 w /ft of merchandise display luminaires are exempt provided that they comply with all three of the
following:
a) located on ceiling- mounted track or directly on or recessed into the ceiling itself (not on the wall).
b) adjustable in both the horizontal and vertical axes (vertical axis only is acceptable for fluorescent and other fixtures
with two points of track attachment).
c) fitted with LED tungsten halogen, fluorescent, or high intensity discharge lamps.
This additional lighting power is allowed only if the lighting is actually installed.
11) Provided that a floor plan, indicating rack location and height, is submitted the square footage for a warehouse may be
defined, for computing the interior Unit Lighting Power Allowance as the floor area not covered by racks plus the vertical
face area (access side only) of the racks. The height allowance defined in footnote 2 applies only to the floor area not
covered by racks.
12) Medical and clinical offices include those facilities which although not providing overnight patient care, do provide medical,
dental, or psychological examination and treatment. These spaces include but are not limited to laboratories and
treatment centers
Revised May 2005
LPA'(W/sf)
10
1.2
0.8
2004 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form
Lighting Permit Plans ,Checklist LTG -CHK
2004 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Revised May 2005
Project Address 'Date 5/4/2009
The following information is necessary to check a lighting''per application for conipliance with the lighting requirements in the
2004 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code.
Applicability Code
(yes, no, n.a.) Section Component Information Required
LIGHTING CONTROLS (Section 1513)
yes
yes
no
yes
r i a
a
yes
yes
yes
yes
yea
yes
Autozone Store No 4110
1513.1 'Local control /access 'Schedule with type, indicate locations
1513.2 'Area controls 'Maximum limit per switch
1513.3 'Daylight zone control 'Schedule with type and features, indicate locations
vertical glazing 'Indicate vertical glazing on plans
overhead glazing 'Indicate overhead glazing on plans
1513.4 'Display /exhib /special 'Indicate separate controls
1513.5 'Exterior shut -off 'Schedule with type and features, indicate location
'(a) timer w /backup
'(b) photocell.
1513.6 'Inter auto shut -off
1513.6.1 1(a) occup. sensors
1513.6.2 (b) auto. switches
1513.7 'Commissioning
'Indicate location
IIndicate location
(Indicate location
'Schedule with type and locations
Schedule with type and features (back -up override capability) E 5
Indicate size of zone on plans
'Indicate requirements for lighting controls commissioning
Lighting Sum. Form Completed and attached.
Schedule with fixture types,
lamps, ballasts, watts per fixture
1437 'Elec motor efficiency'MECH -MOT or Equipment Schedule with hp rpm, efficiency
If no is circled for any question, provide explanation
Location Building Department
on Plans Notes
1 E1
'E 5
1 E 3
1 E5 1
'E 5 1
'E 3 1
'E 3
E3
E5
2004 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form
Lighting Permit 'Plans Checklist LTG -CHK
2004 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms
Revnsed May 2005
Lighting General Requirements
1513 Lighting Controls. Lighting including exempt lighting
in Section 1512, shall comply with this section. Where
occupancy sensors are cited they shall have the features
listed in Section 1 513 6 1 Where automatic time switches are
cited they shall have the features listed in Section 1513 6.2
1513 1 Local Control and Accessibility Each space
enclosed by walls or ceiling- height partitions shall be provided
with lighting controls located within that space The lighting
controls, whether one or more shall be capable of turning off
all lights within the space The controls shall be readily
accessible at the point of entry/exit, to personnel occupying or
using the space
EXCEPTIONS The following lighting controls may be
centralized in remote locations
1 Lighting controls for spaces which must be used
as a whole.
2. Automatic controls.
3 Controls requiring trained operators
4 Controls for safety hazards and security
1513.2 Area Controls The maximum lighting power that may
be controlled from a single switch or automatic control shall not
exceed that which is provided by a twenty ampere circuit
loaded to not more than eighty percent. A master control may
be installed provided the individual switches retain their
capability to function independently Circuit breakers may not
be used as the sole means of switching
EXCEPTIONS
1 Industrial or manufacturing process areas, as
may be required for production.
2. Areas less than five percent of footprint for
footprints over 100 000 square feet.
1513.3 Daylight Zone Control All daylighted zones, as
defined in Chapter 2 both under overhead glazing and
adjacent to vertical glazing, shall be provided with individual
controls, or daylight -or occupant- sensing automatic controls,
which control the lights independent of general area lighting.
Contiguous daylight zones adjacent to vertical glazing are
allowed to be controlled by a single controlling device provided
that they do not include zones facing more than two adjacent
cardinal orientations (i e north east, south, west) Daylight
zones under overhead glazing more than 15 feet from the
perimeter shall be controlled separately from daylight zones
adjacent to vertical glazing.
EXCEPTION
Daylight spaces enclosed by walls or ceiling
height partitions and containing 2 or fewer light
fixtures are not required to have a separate switch for
general area lighting
1513.4 Display Exhibition, and Specialty Lighting
Controls All display exhibition, or specialty lighting shall be
controlled independently of general area lighting
1513.5 Automatic Shut Off Controls, Exterior Exterior
lighting not intended for 24 -hour continuous use shall be
automatically switched by timer photocell or a combination of
timer and photocell Automatic time switches must also have
program back -up capabilities which prevent the loss of
program and time settings for at least 10 hours, if power is
interrupted.
1513 6 Automatic Shut -Off Controls Interior Buildings
greater than 5 000 sq ft. and all school classrooms shall be
equipped with separate automatic controls to shut off the
lighting during unoccupied hours Within these buildings all
office areas less than 300 ft enclosed by walls or ceiling
height partitions and all meeting and conference rooms and
all school classrooms shall be equipped with occupancy
sensors that comply Section 1 513 6 1 For other spaces
automatic controls may be an occupancy sensor time switch
or other device capable of automatically shutting off lighting.
EXCEPTIONS
1 Areas that must be continuously illuminated (e g.
24 -hour convenience stores) or illuminated in a
manner requiring manual operation of the
lighting.
2 Emergency lighting systems
3 Switching for industrial or manufacturing process
facilities as may be required for production.
4 Hospitals and laboratory spaces.
5 Areas in which medical or dental tasks are
performed are exempt from the occupancy
sensor requirement.
1513.6.1 Occupancy Sensors. Occupancy sensors shall be
capable of automatically turning off all the lights in an area no
more than 30 minutes after the area has been vacated. Light
fixtures controlled by occupancy sensors shall have a wall
mounted manual switch capable of turning off lights when the
space is occupied.
1513.6.2 Automatic Time Switches. Automatic time switches
shall have a minimum 7 day dock and be capable of being set
for 7 different day types per week and incorporate an
automatic holiday shut -off' feature which turns off all loads for
at least 24 hours and then resumes normally scheduled
operations. Automatic time switches shall also have program
back -up capabilities which prevent the loss of program and
time settings for at least 10 hours, if power is interrupted.
Automatic time switches shall incorporate an over -ride
switching device which:
a) is readily accessible
b) is located so that a person using the device can see the
lights or the areas controlled by the switch, or so that the
area being illuminated is annunciated' and
c) is manually operated
d) allows the lighting to remain on for no more than two hours
when an over -ride is initiated and
e) controls an area not exceeding 5 000 square feet or 5
percent of footprint for footprints over 100 000 square feet,
whichever is greater
1513.7 Commissioning Requirements: For lighting controls
which include daylight or occupant sensing automatic controls,
automatic shut -off controls, occupancy sensors, or automatic
time switches the lighting controls shall be tested to ensure
that control devices components, equipment and systems are
calibrated, adjusted and operate in accordance with approved
plans and specifications Sequences of operation shall be
functionally tested to ensure they operate in accordance with
approved plans and specifications A complete report of test
procedures and results shall be prepared and filed with the
owner Drawing notes shall require commissioning in
accordance with this paragraph.
Me t h niCa1 umnmary ME H -SUM
2004 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms
Project Info
Project Description
Briefly describe mechanical
system type and features.
RTU -1
RTU 2
RTU 3
Carrier
Carrier
Carrier
Fan Equipment Schedule
Equip
ID Brand Name'
EF 1 2 Broan
2004 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form
Project Address
Applicant Name
Applicant Address.
'Applicant Phone.
Includes Plans Include documentation requiring compliance with commissioning requirements, Section 1416.
The HVAC systems for this project consists of gas fired rooftop units
each having a simple duct plenum with two discharge registers The
ductwork is located in the conditioned space
Simple System 0 Cornplex System Q Systems Analysis
Compliance Option (See Decision Flowchart (over) for qualifications. Use separate MECH -SUM for simple complex systems.)
Equipment Schedules The following information is required to be incorporated with the mechanical equipment schedules on the
plans. For projects without plans, fill in the required information below
Cooling Equipment Schedule
Equip.
ID Brand Name' Model No.
50 HJQ 007
50 HJQ 007
50 HJQ 007
Model No.
503
Autozone Store No 4110
Fi st Street
Port Angeles WA
Autozone Store Design and Construction
123 S Front Street Memphis TN 38103
1 800 285 2223
Capacity
Btu/h
78900
78900
78900
Heating Equipment Schedule
Equip. Capacity2
ID Brand Name' Model No. Btu/h
RTU 1 (carrier 150 HJQ 007 78900
RTU 2 'Carrier '50 HJQ 007 78900
RTU -3 'Carrier '50 HJQ 007 78900
CFM
160
Total CFM
2400
2400
2400
Total CFM
2400
2400
2400
SP'
N/A
OSA CFM
or Econo?
Econo
Econo
Econo
SEER
or EER
11 00
11 00
11 00
Revised May 2005
IDate 5/21/2009
I For Building Dept. Use
IPLV
Location
M -1
M -1
M 1
OSA cfm
or Econo? Input Btuh Output Btuh Efficiency
Econo 48200 43900 2 2 COP
Econo 48200 43900 2 2 COP
Econo 48200 43900 2 2 COP
HP /BHP Flow Control Location of Service
<1/16 'Switch with
Restrooms
'If available. 2 As tested according to Table 14 -1A through 14-1G 3 1f required. 4 COP HSPF Combustion Efficiency or AFUE, as
applicable 5 Flow control types. variable air volume(VAV), constant volume (CV), or variable speed (VS).
Mechanical Summary (back) _MECH -SUM
System Description
See Section 1421 for full description
of Simple System qualifications.
Decision Flowchart Use this flowchart to determine if project qualifies for Simple System Option. If not, either the
Complex System or Systems Analysis Options must be used.
START
Heating Only
No
Complex Systems
2004 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form
Yes
If Heating /Cooling
or Cooling Only
If Heating Only
Reference
Section 1421
Heating /Cooling
or Cooling Only
Simple System
Allowed
(section 1420)
Split system?
El <5000 cfm?
Yes
Reference
Section 1423
Constant vol? El Air cooled?
Ye:
Ye:
El
Air Cooled,
Constant Vol?
otal Ca•.
wo economize
<240,000 Btuh
or 10
Yes
Economizer included?
0 <70% outside air?
El
No
N.,
Packaged sys? Q <20 000 Btuh?
Use Complex
Systems
(section 1430)
Refer to MECH -COMP Mechanical Complex Systems for assistance in determining which
Complex Systems requirements are applicable to this project.
r
r
Mechanical Permit Plans Checklist MECH -CHK
2004 Washington State No residential Energy Code Compliance Forms
(Project Address Autorone Stor No 4110 (Dat 5/21/2009
The following information is necessary to check a mechanical permit application for compliance with the mechanical requirements in the
Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code.
Applicability Code
(yes, no n.a.) I Section 'Component (Information Required
IHVAC REQUIREMENTS (Sections 1401 1424)
'n a
yes
lyes
Iyes
in a
yes
yes
yes
r a
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
•n a
yes
a
a
a
a
1411 Equipment performance
1411 4 'Pkg. elec. htg.& clg.
1411 1 'Minimum efficiency
1411 1 'Combustion htg.
1412
1412.1
1412.2
1412.3
1412.4
1412.4 1
1412.4.2
1412.5
1412.6
1412.7
1422
1423
1413 IAIr economizers
1413.1 'Air Econo Operation
1413.1 Wtr Econo Operation
1413.2 'Water Econo Doc
1413.3 'Integrated operation
1413.4 I Humidification
1414
1414 1
1414.2
1415.1
1440
1441
IHVAC controls
Temperature zones
Deadband control
Humidity control
Automatic setback
Dampers
Optimum Start
Heat pump control
Combustion htg.
Balancing
Thermostat interlock
Economizers
!Ducting systems
'Dud sealing
'Duct insulation
'Piping insulation
Service water htg.
Elec. water heater
1442 Shut -off controls
1443 Pipe Insulation
1452 Heat Pump COP
1452 Heater Efficiency
1453 Pool heater controls
1454 Pool covers
1454 'Pools 90+ degrees
2004 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form
It "no" is circled for any question, provide explanation
List heat pumps on schedule
Equipment schedule with type, capacity efficiency
Indicate intermittent ignition, flue /draft damper jacket loss
Indicate locations on plans
Indicate 5 degree deadband minimum
Indicate humidistat
Indicate thermostat with night setback and 7 diff. day types
Indicate damper location and auto. controls max. leakage
Indicate optimum start controls
Indicate microprocessor on thermostat schedule
Indicate modulating or staged control
Indicate balancing features on plans
Indicate thermostat interlock on plans
Equipment schedule
Indicate 100% capability on schedule
Indicate 100% capacity at 45 degF db 40 deg F wb
Indicate clg load water econoe dg tower performance
Indicate capability for partial cooling
Indicate direct evap or fog atomization w/ air economizer
'Indicate sealing necessary
'Indicate R -value of insulation on duct
'Indicate R -value of insulation on piping
1416 'Completion Requirements
yes 1416.1&2 'Drawings Manuals 'Indicate requirement for record drawings and operation docs.
In yes 1416.3.2 'Air Balancing 'Indicate air system balance requirements
a 1416.3.3' Hydronic Balancing 'Indicate hydronic system balance requirements
yes 1416.4 'Commissioning 'Indicate requirements for commissioning and prelim. Report
yes 1424 'Separate air sys. 'Indicate separate systems on plans
yes Mechanical Completed and attached. Equipment schedule with types,
Summary Form l input/output, efficiency cfm, hp, economizer
SERVICE WATER HEATING AND HEATED POOLS (Sections 1440 1454)
Indicate R -10 insulation under tank
Indicate automatic shut -off
Indicate R -value of insulation on piping
Indicate minimum COP of 4.0
Indicate pool heater efficiency
Indicate switch and 65 degree control
Indicate vapor retardant cover
Indicate R -12 pool cover
Location I Building Department
on Plans Notes
M 1
M 1
Specs
Specs
M 1
M -1
Revised May 200`
2004 Washington State Nonresidential.Erlergy Code Compliance Form
Mechanical Permit Plans Checklist MECH -CHK
2004 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms
Revised May 200'
Mechanical General Requirements
1411 1 Ge eral Equipment shall have a minimum performance at the
specified rating conditions not less than the values sho% Table 14 -1A
through 14 1G If a nationally recognized certification program exists for a
prods ct covered in Tables 14 -1A through 14 -1G and it ncludes provisions
for verification and challenge of equipment efficiency ratings then the
product shall be listed in the certification program
Gas -fired and oil -fired forced at furnaces with nput ratings 225 000
Btu /h (65 kW) shall also have an intermittent ignition or nter upted device
(110). and have either mechanical draft (including power venting) or a flue
damper A vent damper is an acceptable alternative to a flue damper for
furnaces where combustion air is drawn from the conditioned space All
furnaces with input ratings 225 000 Btu /h (65 kW). including electric
furnaces that are not located within the conditioned space shall have
jacket losses not exceeding 0 75% of the input rating
1411.2 Rating Conditions Cooling equipment shall be rated at ARI test
conditions and procedures when available Where no applicable
procedures exist, data shall be furnished by the equipment manufacturer
1411.3 Combination Space and Service Water Heating For
combination space and service water heaters with a principal Junction of
providing space heat, the Combined Annual Efficiency (CAE) may be
calculated by using ASHRAE Standard 124 1991 Storage water heaters
used in combination space heat and water heat applications shall have
either an Energy FActor (EF) or a CAE of not less than the following:
1 I EF 1 CAE 1
1 50 gal storage 1 0.58 1 0 71 1
50 to 70 gal storage 1 0.57 1 0 71 1
70 g al storage 1 0 55 1 0 70 1
1411 4 Packaged Electric Heating and Cooling Equipment: Packaged
electric equipment providing both heating and cooling with a total cooling
capacity greater than 20 000 Btu /h shall be a heat pump
Exception Unstaffed equipment shaelters or cabinets used
solely for personal wireless service facilities.
1412 Controls
1412.1 Temperature Controls. Each system shall be provided with at
least one temperature control device Each zone shall be controlled by
indi :dual thermostatic controls responding to temperature within the zone
At a minimum each floor of a building shall be considered as a separate
zone
1412.2 Deadband Controls. When used to control both comfort heating
and cooling. zone thermostatic controls shalt be capable of a deadband of
at least 5 degrees F within which the supply of heating and cooling energy
to the zone is shut off or reduced to a minimum
Exceptions.
1 Special occupancy special usage or code requirements
where deadband controls are not appropriate
2. Buildings compiying with Section 1141 4 if in the proposed
building energy analysis, heating and cooling thermostat
setpoints are set to the same temperature between 70
degrees F and 75 degrees F inclusive, and assumed to be
constant throughout the year
3 Thermostats that require manual changeover between
heating and cooling modes.
1412.3 Humidity Controls:•If a system is equipped with a means for
adding moisture a humidistat shall be provided.
1412.4 Setback and Shut HVAC systems shall be equipped with
automatic controls capable of accomplishing a reduction of energy use
through control setback or equipment shutdown during periods of non -use
or alternate use of the spaces served by the system The automatic
controls shall have a minimum seven -day clock and be capable of being
set for seven different day types per week.
Exceptions.
1 Systems serving areas which require continuous operation at
the same temperature setpoint.
2. Equipment with full load demands of 2 kW (6 826 Btu /h) or
less may be controlled by readily accessible manual off -hour
controls.
1412.4.1 Dampe Outside air intakes exhaust outlets and relief outlets
serving conditioned spaces shall be equipped with dampers which close
automatically when the system is of/ or upon power failure.
Exceptions
1 Systems sery ng areas which requ re continuous operation.
2. Combustion air intakes
3 Gravity (nonmotorized) dampers are acceptable in buildings
less than 3 stories in height.
4 Gravity (nonmotorized) dampers are acceptable in exhaust
and relief outlets in the first story and levels below the first
story of buildings three or more stories in height.
1412.4.2 Optimum Start Controls Heating and tooting systems with
design supply air capacities exceeding 10 000 cfm shall have optimum
start controls. Optimum start controls shall be designed to automatically
adjust the start time Of an HVAC system each day to bring the space to
desired occupied temperature levels immediately before scheduled
occupancy The control algorithm shall, as a minimum be a function of the
difference between space temperature and occupied setpoint and the
amount of time prior to scheduled occupancy
1412.5 Heat Pump Controls Unitary air cooled heat pumps shall include
microprocessor controls that minimize supplemental heat usage du tog
start -up set -up and defrost conditions. These controls shall anticipate
need for heat and use compression heating as the first stage of heat.
Controls shall indicate when supplemental heating is being used through
[suet means (e g. LED indicators).
1412.6 Combustion Heating Equlpm nt Controls Combustion heating
equipment with a capacity over 225 000 Btu /h shall have modulating
staged combustion control.
Exceptions
1 Boilers
2 Radiant Heaters.
1412.1 ualanung• Each air supply outlet or air or water term nal device
shall have a means for balancing. Including but not limited to dampers
temperature and pressure test connections and balancing valves
1413 Air Economizers
1413 1 Operation Air economizers shall be of automatically modulating
outside and return air dampers to provide 100 percent of the design supply
al as outside ai to reduce or eliminate the need for mechanical cooling
Water economizers shall be capable of providing the total concurrent
cooling load served by the c0nneted terminal equipment lacking airside
economizer at outside air temperatures of 45 F dry bulb /40 F wet -bulb
and below For this calculation all factors Including solar and Internal load
shall be the same as those used for peak load calculations except for the
outside temperatures
Exception Water economizers using air- cooled heat rejection
equipment may use a 35 F dry -bulb outside air temperature for
this calculation. This exception is limited to a maximum o120 tons
per building
1413.2 Documentation Water economizer plans submitted for approval
shall include the following information.
1 Maximum outside air conditions for which economizer is sized to
provide full cooling
2. Design cooling load to be provided by economizer at this outside
air condition.
3 Heat rejection and terminal equipment performance data
including model number flow rate capacity entering and leaving
temperature in full economizer cooling mode
1413.3 Integrated Operation Air economizers shall be capable of
providing partial cooling even when additional mechanical cooling Is
required to meet the remainder of the cooling load.
Exceptions
1 Individual, direct expansion units that have a rated capacity
less than 65 000 Btu /h and use nonintegrated economizer
controls that preclude simultaneous operation of the
economizer and mechanical cooling.
2 Water cooled water chillers with waterside economizer
1413.4 Humidification If an air economizer is required on a cooling
system for which humidification equipment is to be provided to maintain
minimum indoor humidity levels then the humidifier shall be of the
adiabatic type (direct evaporative media or fog atomization type).
Exceptions.
1 Health care facilities where WAC 246- 320 -525 allows only
steam injection humidifiers in ductwork downstream of final
filters 1412.6 Combustion Heating Equipment Controls:
Combustion heating equipment with a capacity over 225 000
Btu/h shall have modulating or staged combustion control.
2. Systems with water economizer
3 100% outside air systems with no provisions for air
recirculation to the central supply fan.
4 Nonadiabatic humidifiers cumulatively serving no more than
10% of a building s air economizer capacity as measured in
cfm This refers to the system cfm serving rooms with stand
alone or duct mounted humidifiers
1414 Ducting Systems
1414.1 Sealing Duct work which is designed to operate at pressures
above 1/2 inch water column static pressure shall be sealed in accordance
with Standard RS -18 Extent of sealing required is as follows:
1 Static pressure: 1/2 inch to 2 inches' seal transverse joints.
2. Static pressure: 2 inches to 3 inches. seal all transverse joints
and longitudinal seams.
3. Static pressure: above 3 inches seal all transverse joints
longitudinal seams and duct wall penetrations.
Duct tape and other pressure sensitive tape shall not be used as the
primary sealant where ducts are designed to operate at static pressures of
1 inch W C. or greater
1414.2 Insulation Ducts and plenums that are constructed and function
as part of the building envelope, by separating interior space from exterior
space shall meet all applicable requirements of Chapter 13. These
requ rements Include nsulation Installation, moisture control. air leakage
and building envelope nsulation levels Unheated equipment rooms with
combustion air louvers must be isolated from the conditioned space by
Insulating interior surfaces to a minimum of R 11 and any exterior
envelope surfaces per Chapter 13 Outside air ducts serving Indi (dual
supply air units with less than 2 800 cfm of total supply air capacity shall be
insulated to a minimum of R -7 and are not considered building envelope
Other outside air duct runs are considered building envelope until they
1 connect to the heating or cooling equipment, or
2 are Isolated from the exterior with an automatic shut -oft damper
complying with Section 1412.4 1
Once outside air ducts meet the above listed requirements any runs
within conditioned space shall comply with Table 14 -5 requirements.
Other ducts and plenums shall be thermally insulated per Table 14 5
Exceptions
1 Within the HVAC equipment.
2 Exhaust air ducts not subject to condensation
3 Exposed ductwork within a zone that serves that zone.
1415 Piping Systems
1415.1 Insulation Piping shall be thermally Insulated in accordance with
Table 14-6.
Exception Piping Installed within unitary HVAC equipment
Water pipes outside the conditioned space shall be insulated in
accordance with Washington State Plumbing Code (WAC 51 26)
1416 Completion Requirements (Refer to NREC Section 1416 and the
Building Commissioning Guidelines. published by the Building
Commissioning Association for complete text and guidelines for building
completion and commissioning requirements.)
To City of Port Angeles. City Engineer
321 E, Fifth Street
P.O Box 1150
Port Angeles, Washington 98362
NOTE.
1 Generator Information.
Company Name'
Matting Address.
Contact:
Phone
Project Name.
Project Location.
2. Other Contacts (!f applicable)
Consulting Firm:
Contact:
Phone:
Contractor Name
Contact
Phone
Laboratory
Contact:
Phone
PORT ANGELES LANDFILL
WASTE DISPOSAL APPLICATION
Phone (360) 417 -4803
FAX. (360) 4174709
All questions must be answered for waste to be approved.
Sr l LIZ.( fi t Ch o
l tia.g ?lc/ A
titet atiech
-43 3?( R
r7`-d o Z0 nc
I' 1 36 Fvf 51->,x41--
T&4// G
A rta ..Ja +'aiN
LS- S .5-5 J
p,,c.s, 7
5 ti Q,,1s+
16-- '3/.;
5e /4., /4_517€04)S T 51; 44C
6625 ~cat
2 City of Port Angeles Landfill Waste Disposal Application
sided to Builders Eshange of WA, Inc. For use Co dons Aareemerrt see wow bewa orwn nn..mw V iry
)E C E I1 V IE
JUL 2 4 2009
O It' Angeles and Wildids,Cdpt
k
tarn Sumo Ur
Page 1 of 5
3_ Source of waste:
Check the eppropriate box below and briefly describe the pry pnaceas, and/or cleanup that
will or has produced the waste requiring disposal. Include the gasoline service station number
(ff applicable).
CERCLAMTCA Remediatlon Agency Contact
independent Remedial Action UST Removal
Unused Chum Product spat Other Sousa:
oti'r v* t V
1
4 Waste Material Composition: (check all that apply and Include percent of total)
Soil Foundry Slag
---X- Concrete/Asphalt 5 Dredge Sediments
Preserved Wood 'ebris I
Coal Ash Other (list)
Wood Ash
NO'T'E. Total must equal 100%.
5 Waste Material Contaminants: (check ail that apply)
Gasoline Metals Diesel
Solvents Heating Off PCBs
Unused Motor Oil Used Motor OIVWaste Olt
Other Other Petroleum Product,
Unknown
NOTE. Supply hny MSDS information with application, if arailabie
96
Cy ri Port Angsi s landfill Waste Disposal Application Pege 2 of 5
Y.ide4 to Builders E barge or WA, Inc. Far uosege Carters A®nement Quo •rwr.wo++s.wm Ale of VenTy scale
Other
NOTE t
NOTE 2:
0 25
25 -100
101 -500
501 1000
1001 2000
>2000
7 Frequency of Disposal:
One time Monthly
cubic yards
cubic yards
cubic yards
cubic yetrds
cubic yards
cubic yards
6_ Estimated Quantity of Waste for Disposal:
Cubic yards 5 Tons (estimate both)
Drums Tors (estimate bath)
NOTE Estimated quantity for disposal. must be within 20% of the quarrttty actually
disposed. (10% for projects over 7,500 tons or 5.000 cubic yards)
Annual Other
,t 1 toll<
8 Waste Sampiing:
Proper characterization of the waste for disposal requfras the coflectlan of representative
samples. The methods and equipment necessary for obtaining representative samples of a
waste, and the frequency of sampling, will vary with the type and farm of the waste, Check•the
appropriate box and briefly describe how and where the waste was sampled. Include site mVs
with sampling locations if possible.
Number of COMPOSITE samples t 0 number of discrete samples per composite 41 a
Nurpber of DISCRETE samples 210
Unless prior approval has been granted by Port Angeles, the following sampling
frequency will be used:
1 composite sample
3 composite samples
5 composite samples
7 composite samples
10 composite samples
10 plus one sample for each additional 500
cubic yards
One composite sample shall contain a minimum of threelmaximum of five discrete
samples_
Cay of Port Angeles Landiili Waste Disposal Application Page 3 of 5
Olt 4
syreed to ie.s lu or WA., Inc. Fos usage Ccarelltions Agreement sea venewb twoLcom Meows vetrly Sr--4i.
fr
i tk. 9 Wastes Analysis:
The 'Dangerous Waster Regulations' (WAC 173303) shall be utilized to determine the
appropriate enayt[tel requirements for waste characterization, Ecology Publication #81 ;30
(Revised April 1994) "Guidance far RemedialIon of Petroleum Contaminated Soils` shall also
be used to characters petroleum contaminated soils from UST releases_ Submit all Laboratory.
analytical results, QNOC data, and Chain of Custody sheets along with this application,
(NOTE The laboratory must: be accredited by the Wttatilegton Stets Department of
Ecology
a) List ail analytical test methods used:
p L✓M r(1-P tai.
b) Provide la rtarlatfve as to why the above a►telydlcal methods were selected:
M �x�c bu t ,P� r a ORC.A
NOTE. Additional sheets attached YES X NO
10 soil Classification; ("fOR PE TROLEUM CONTANUNATED 8OlL3 ONLYY")
posed on the analytloal data and Ecology Publica 0 the soil cJassJflcatlon is,
tchack one)
Class 1 Class 2
Calculated Hazard index
11 Dangerous Waste Affidavit:
Based on a review of the analytical test results, site histol�► ndr pplicable regulallons,
This waste is classified as: (check one)
Neither Dangerous Waste (DW) nor Extra to ardous Waste (EHW)
Dangerous Waste (DW) and W
Extremely Hazardous Waste (EHW) and Waste Code:
City of Port Angeles l.shdfrU wetter plepoumi Application
le 5
vid ed to Bit Iders E ottonoo d WA, Inc. For tcssge Caneationa Agrownnent ace
a
3 Class 4
Page 4 of 5'
tonvaLaarn Ahmays Verify Scale
12, Special Notes ter Asbestos Disposal
1 Cert i'catlert:
We. THE UNPERSIGNEA certify that thle application Is true to the best of•our•knowiedge.
M information provided is correct and the enclosed ens/Ale-al results represent the
proposed waste mated to the of our abilities.
Waste a aerator Signsatu
vj y kT4C1
(printed Name
✓(tcakc
CcnIon
Date
All asbestos containing materials (With the exception of rooting
materiel, in good fnndltton Mat I$ not peeling, cracking. or crumbling
with petroleum based binder that ehl exhibits plasticity to prevent
the release of asbestos fibers) must=
Aeprbvet ,Expiration Date
be tightly wrapped or bagged in 6 mil plate with no excess air in tie packaging-
not exceed SO pciunds per bundle
be labeled as asbestos with squired information regarding its origin
be transported with a rnanifest.ln ttw vehicle
arrive at the transfer station only by appointment with Brian Tate of Waste
Connections so that the material can be deposited in a lock box (his cell number
is 360- 912- 7080).
77a a 05
s�..
CJty of Port Angeles vat:
/f J
City Engine
14 -741
mot. ism
)0.1PWKstEmcriEBRertgraa rtnomol nave „ns*bartir awed •vvao.orr.+ ass tanier.wpd
Cfty of Port fo
r Angeles lendfit Wentz post Applic9t➢ah
Page -6af&
geB
molded Lt Buald..rx, Everlainge of WA, Inc_ For ausog r Conditions Agreement epee wreAw is esi.carn Alee.rs verpy Scale
The Riley Grown Inc.
PRE DEMOLITION ASBESTOS CONTAINING
MATERIALS SURVEY
PREPARED BY
THE RILEY GROUP, INC.
17522 BOTRELL WAY NE
BOTHELL, WA 98011
PREPARED FOR:
MR. TREY SMALLWOOD
AU OZONE, brc
123 SOUTH FRONT STREET
MEMPIiIS, TN 38103
PROJECT No. 2009 -040A
PRE DEMOLITION ASBESTOS CONTAINING
MATERIALS SURVEY
PROPOSED AUTOZONE RETAIL STORE #4110
1936 EAST HIGHWAY 101
PORT ANGELES, WASHINGTON
MARCH 4, 2009
SERVING THE PAcJFIC NORTHWEST
Main ice. 17522 Bothell Way NE. Bothell, WA 98011
Tel (425) 4 -0551 Fax (425) 415 -0311 WW14%rile»gmup.cnnr
1 Pre Demolition Asbestos Containing Materials Survey
ided m Builders Exchange of WA Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www bxvra .cam Always Verify Scale
Pry- bcmmulitiaan ACM Survey
1936 E Highway 101, Port Angeles, WA
2.0 INTRODUCTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 SURVEY SUMMARY RESULTS._....
1 1 SURVEY SUMMARY SHEET 1
BIALDINQ ,1NFORKSTI N 1
RESULTS SU•NLARY 2
1 1 1 ACM Survey Results w 1936 R.tf1glr y 101 (AZ,) 2
1 1.2 Assumed ACM 3
11,3 Demolition Waste Stream Characteristics 3
1 1 4 Lead Paint Survey 3
1 1.5 PCB- Contwning Materials Survey Results 3
1 1 6 Mercury Fluorescent Lamps and Thermostats Survey Results. 3
1 1 7 Mold Rassrlto 3
Page 1
2.1 PURPOSE. 3
.2.2 SrrR ACCESS. 3
2.3 AvrrloamArioN 4
2,4 BUUDENcOBSERVATIONS. 4
3 .0 METHODS._,_._...._._.__._._.OWN •_._...._•__•_•w•_._._,_._._•
3 1 AsaEsTos. 4
3.2 Assu>M[ED ACM, 5
3.3 DEmor.r ioN WAsTE STEAM CnARAc ERIsTncs 5
3.4 VISUAL INSPECTION OF SUSPBcT LEAD-CONTAINING PAm r 5
3 5 VIsUALINSPECrioN OF SUSPLCrPCB- Cox1AXNING MATERIALS 5
3 6 VISUAL INSPECTION OF SUSPECT MERCU!(Y -O NTAINING EQUIPMENT 5
3 7 MOLD 5
4.0 FINDINGS CONCLUSIONS ...w.._._. ._......._._•......_6
41 AsE s OS- CONi'AINING MATERIALS 6
4.2 DEAdouTioN WASTE ST CUARACTERTZATION RESULTS 6
4.3 1FAiCONTAI$$NG PAINT 6
4.4 PCBs SW VEYREsULrs. 6
4.5 ME cIAY PwoRrtscENT LAMPS AND TRERMOSrATS SURVEY RESULTS 6
4 6 Moth 7
5.0 UNIQUE REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
5 1 LOCAL Ara QUALITY BOARD (OLYMPIC Maori CLEAN AIR AQENCY) 7
5.2 WAsi NcrroN DEPARTMENT OF LABOR AND INDUSTRIES ik1) 7
5.3 WASHINGTON STATE DEPARTMENT OF EcoLoor/ U.S. EPA 8
5 4 PEStMIT3
5.5 LICENSES 8
6.0 WARRANTY
._•r. .r.. ..w._.!n. ....w...r •_._.r._._..•. w••
The Riley Group, Inc
OMNI
..w._
•_.._._.w. .w• _•_...._3
,2
ded to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.b:wa.com Always Verify Scale
Maxch 4, 2009
Project #2009 -040A
w.w•w'7
SOS IMO ._.w.w...
Pm- Demolition ACM Survey
Page it March 4 2009
1936 E Highway 101, part Angeles, WA Project #2009-040A
LIST OF APPENDICES
Pgure 1 Site Minify Map
Figure 2 Maim Floor Layout Showing Sample !m atlon
Appendis A Copy of Certification
Appendix B Laboratory Reports and Chains of Custody
Appendix C _Methods and Procedures
Appendix D Codes and Regulations
Appendix E ACM Abatement Cosr Estimates
THE Rn.EY GROUP, INC
3
act to faultders Exchange al WA, Inc. For trsaga Conditions Ague went see ww.r.tsxwo.Wn1 Always Veri3y Sete
Pre- Demolition ACM Survey
1936 E Highway 101 Port Angeles, WA
Building Size' Approx. 6,288 sq. ft.
Survey Date: 2/20/09
By Whom, The Riley Grouo. Inc_ f
Anna Jordan
#1029229
Inspector
Certification
Rveults. (Additional detail provided in Section 1 2.1)
Number of material types sampled: 11
Number of samples collected: 26
Number of materials testing positive 2
Number of material assumed positive 0
Were roofing materials sampled? Yes
Are there unique state or local requirements Yes
1f Yes, See Section 5.0)
ora u$Jttzed:
Name Seattle Asbestos Test. LLC
Address: 19711 Scriber Lake Road. Suits D. Lynnwood. WA
Building Acegss Limitations itf any
Exterior building walls were inaccessible See report.
Comments.
See report.
THE RILEY GROUP, INC
Page 1 March 4 2009
Project #2009-040A
1 0 Survey Summary Results
1 1 SURVEY SUMMARY SHEET
BUILDING INFORMATION,
Date of Construction. Approx. 1972 Address. 1936 Highway 101 E
City /State /Zip Port Angeles, WA
Asbestos- Containlr, Materials
d to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www brwa.com Always Verify Scale
Pre Demolition ACM Survey
1936 E Highway 101 Pon Angeles, WA
RESULTS SUMMARY
1 1 1 ACM SURVEY RESULTS —1936 E Highway 101 (AZ)
The following homogeneous building material types were sampled as part of this survey and
their results are summarized in the table below.
EAMPLE
ID
01 02, 03, 04,
05, 06, 07 08,
09, 14
MATERIAL
DESCRIPTION
Paint mastic Joint Throughout
i x»pound gypsum
wall board
10 Yellow Mastic
11 Tan mastic wood
12 White caulking
13 Acoustic C9iling tite
mastic
15 Pipe insulation
16 White and Gold
Formica red mastic
17 White splashttoard
tan mastic yellow
mastic 1 fiberboard
VACATION FiNF'
Under carpet in
dining room
Wainscoting in
dining room
Wainscoting in
dining room
Throughout
Bathrooms
Bathrooms
Bathrooms
18 Red sheet vinyl/ Dining room
gray backing with
mantic brick red
sheet vinyl gray
backing with meeac
19 Gray sneer vinyl Kitchen and salad
gray backing with bar area
mastic
20, 21 22, 23, Gray sand Roof
24. 25, 26 composite roofing
tar tar paper/
roofing felt 1 wand
Page 2
N/A
WA
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
NIA
F Friable; NF Non friable; Friability is further defined in Appendix C.
2 Any identified AGM& era chrysotle asbestos, unless attrerwise doted
Joint compound layers found to be asbestos containing were composlted with their associated core sample and
reanalyzed (per Lai and AMERA regulations),
Certain work pretske standards exist for renovation and demolition of watiboard systems wAth <1% asbestos content.
See Section 5.0-Washington Department of Labor and Industries (LAt) below
ND None; N/A Not Applicable
TEE RILEY GROUP, INC.
ACM
Formica:
Mastic:
Sptashboard:
Tan Mastic:
Yellow mastic:
Fiberonerd:
NIA Vinyl:
salting with mastic:
Vinyl:
Backing with mastic:
N/A unyi:
Backing with mastic:
March 4 2009
Project #2009-040A
Paint: ND, ND, ND ND, WA
ND, ND, ND, ND, ND
Mastic: N/A. NIA, N/A, WA,
N/A, N /A, N /A. N/A, WA, ND
Joint Compound: 2%, 2 2%, 2
2 2%, 2%, 2%, N/A. 2%
wallboard: ND ND. ND ND,
ND, ND, ND, ND. ND
Ctxnpoeite' <1 <1%, <1
<1 <1 <1 <1 <1%, <1%
Mastic: ND N/A
Mastic: ND N/A
Wood: ND
Caulking; NO N/A
Tjl ND N/A
Mastic: ND
Insulation. NO N/A
N/A
NIA
ND
NO
ND
ND
ND
ND
ND
ND
ND
ND
ND
ND
NF Gray roofing: N/A, ND, WA, N/A, 7,000 94, R.
N/A, NIA, N/A
1f t
Roofing Pet ND, ND, ND, ND
ND, ND, NO
Wood; NO, ND, ND, ND,
N/A, ND, WA
Et.d fo Builders E:ctu?~nge of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see vwwv bxwa.corn Always Verify Scale
ESTIMATED
QUANTITY
WA
N/A
Pre-Demolition ACM Survey
1936 E Highway 101, Port Angeles, WA
THE RILEY GROUP, INC.
Page 3 March 4 2009
Project #2009 -040A
1.1-2 ASSUMED ACM
No materials were assumed to contain asbestos as part of this survey However, the interior of
the exterior masonry walls was inaccessible, so the potential presence of vermiculite insulation
could not be determined without significant building damage.
1.1.3 DEMOLITION WASTE STREAM CHARACTERISTICS
One composite building matenals sample was collected from the Site building nd analyzed for
lead content using the TCLP extraction method. Based on the analytical results, the anticipated
demolition debris can be disposed of at a non- hazardous waste landfill permitted to accept
construction debris.
1.1.4 LEAD PAINT SURVEY
The lead -containing paint (LCP) survey consisted of a visual inspection of painted surfaces.
Paint chip sampling was not included in this scope of work. The Site structure contained painted
surfaces, which were found to be in generally good condition. Given the date of construction
(1 972), lead containing paint is suspected in the site structure Recommendations regarding lead
in building materials and lead dust hazards are included in Section 5 0
1.1.5 PCB-CONTAINING MATERIALS SURVEY RESULTS
RGI conducted a visual survey for suspected PCB containing fight ballasts and electrical
transformers on site Sampling was not included in this scope of work. Based on our findings,
PCB- contaming light ballasts are suspected in the site building,
1.1.6 MERCURY FLUORESCENT LAMPS AND THERMOSTATS SURVEY RESULTS
RGI conducted a visual survey for fluorescent light fixtures and mercury- contanxng thermostat
switched at the site. Sampling was not included in this scope of work Based on our findings,
mercury containing fluorescent light bulbs are suspected in the site building.
1.1 7 MOLD RESULTS
The mold survey consisted of a visual inspection of interior building surfaces for mold.
Sampling was not included in this scope of work. No indications of visible mold were noted in
the site building.
2.0 Introduction
2.1 PURPOSE
The Riley Group, Inc. (RGI) conducted a pre demolition asbestos containing materials (ACM)
building survey at the AutoZone property located at 1936 Highway 101 E, Port Angeles, WA
(see Figure 1). The purpose of this study was to identify those building materials that may
contain asbestos, Additional sampling and observation was also made regarding lead in paint and
building materials. RGI understands that AutoZone intends to demolish the existing building and
construct a new stand -alone AutoZone Retail Store.
2,2 SrrE ACCESS
Site access was provided by Mr Ezra Genauer, the property manager RG1 was unaccompanied
during the inspection of the Site. RGI had access to all interior and exterior areas of the subject
site buildings. We were unable to access the interior of the exterior buildm walls, as doing so
would have caused unnecessary building damage.
KS to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc For usage Conditions Agreement sec www taws corn Always Verify Scale
Pm- Demolition ACM Survey
1936E Highway 101, Port Angeles, WA
Page 4 March 4 2009
Project #2009-040A
2.3 AUTHORIZATION
Authorization to perform m thus study was given by Mr Trey Smallwood, of AutoZone (Client) on
February 10, 2009 This report has been prepared for the exclusive use of AutoZone and
affiliates thereof
2.4 BUILDING OBSERVATIONS
The Site contains a former Salad Station restaurant. The Site layout is shown in Figure 2. The
restaurant building is a single- -story structure built in 1972. The building is an approximate 6,288
square -foot, masonry structure with a flat torch -down roof_
3.0 Methods
3.1 Assisros
Inspection and sampling procedures were performed in accordance with the guidelines published
by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) m 40 CFR Part 763 Subpart E, October 30,
1987 Sampling procedures include collection of one or more samples of all suspect friable and
non friable materials,
The survey consisted of three major activities; visual inspection, sampling, and quantification of
building materials. Although these activities are listed separately, they are integrated tasks.
RGI's Survey protocols are listed in Appendix C
A total of 11 suspect ACMs (homogeneous materials) were observed within the building. RGI
collected a total of 26 samples of suspect ACM from homogeneous materials identified at the
Site building. The laboratory reported analytical results for separate materials present in one
sample as separate results (such as floor tile and mastic) Suspect ACM samples were submitted
to Seattle Asbestos Test, LLC (SAT) of Lynnwood, Washington for analysis. Samples were
analyzed by PLM/DS SAT is AIl-IA and NVLAP accredited.
The following suspect materials were sampled during this survey (please refer to Figures 2 and 3
for bulk sample locations)
Vinyl flooring products,
A Mastics,
A Sheetrock;
A Backsplash,
A Joint compound,
A Caulking;
A Pipe insulation,
A Roofing materials, and
Acoustic ceiling tile.
THE RILEY GROUP, INC.
7
deed to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc For usage Conditions Agreement see www bxwa,com Always Verify Scale
Pre Demolition ACM Survey Page 5
1936 1' Higbway 101 Pori nngclee WA
THE RILEY CROUP IN(
March 4 7009
Project it2009 040A
2 ASSUMED ACM
No materials were assumed to contain asbestos as part of this urvey However the interior of
the extennr masonry walls were inaccessible, so the potential presence of vermiculite insuiation
-could not be determined,
ii 3 DEMOLITION WASTE S'I'RE m CHARACTERISTICS
RGI collected a composite sample of building materials from the building including but nor
necessarily limited to, the following
Structural materials (wood concrete etc
Roofing,
Paint and
Cnterior finishes (discussed in Section 3 l above)
Composite samples are collected in manner „onsidered to be representative -if the o'..erali
demolition waste stream
Aln.alysis was (performed at ()n -Site Laboratories. Inc (On -Site) of Redmond Washington
Samples are analyzed by EPA Test Methods 700013 and 1 i 1 rasing the ToxicitY C'haractert.stwr
Leaching Procedure iTCLP'J On -Site is accredited by the Washington State Department cat
Ecology A chain -of- custody documenting, the possession of the sample from the tine it waF
collected until it had been a.nalvzed and stored accompanied the samples at all tunes
3 4 VISUAL INSPECTION OF SUSPECT Li 1D- CONTAIiVING PAiNT
l"be LCP Survey included a visual inspection or painted surfaces and date of construction
review I. C'P sampling was not included as part of this scope of work This investigation is not
intended to serve as an EPA /HUD/WA lead( -based paint inspection or nsk assessment
3 5 VISUAL INS.PI OF' SUSPECT PCB CONTAIN IN( MATFRIAI S
RCi.I performed a visual inspection for common P( 13- containing building matenals including -hint
not limited to, light ballasts and electrical traimforrriers I3} Federal law light ballasts
manufactured after 1 9/9 are labeled with a `No PC;13s label Similarly, electrical transformers
manufactured. before 4 980 frequently contained PC based on the date of cons;tnu:tion
i 972) tight fixtures in the site structure were assumed to contain PCB
3 6 VISUAL 1.NSFli,C ION OF SUSPECT M.ERC.-I1.R‘ CONT,1,NN'INC EQi,WMENiT
RGI performed a visual inspection for common itiereury- Containing fluorescent lamps and
thermostats Thermostats were inspected for mercury containing switches In a.dctition u
representative number of light fixtures were inspected for labeling indicating mercury content
A,ny unmarked lamps, with no previous rn;trnten :mct' or inspection records indicating merciir}
content, were assumed to contain mercury
3 7 MOLD
The mold survey- consisted of a visual inspection of interi or building surfaces for mold
Sampling was not included as part of this scope of work,
led td 531.11lder 4= xChancle of WA inr r -Or usage •onciition: /tgie' niert ,er° vuww bxA/i AIwaVS Verit c4-ales
Pre Demolition ACM Survey Page 6 Marth 4 2009
1936 E Highway 101, Port Angeles, WA Project #2009 040A
4.0 Findings Conclusions
4.1 ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERLtLS
Based upon RGI's ACM building survey and bulk sample analysis, the following ACM(s) were
identified at the site building:
A Tar (Roof).
A Tar Paper (Roof)
In addition, the extenor building walls were inaccessible. Therefore, the exterior walls should be
inspected during abatement activities to determine if vermiculite insulation is present
Estimated costs for abatement, if any, are provided in Appendix E,
Any untested suspect .materials encountered during site renovation or demolition work should be
analyzed before proceeding with such work. If additional ACM is confirmed during site
renovation or demolition activities, a qualified contractor according to the recommendations in
Section S 0 should perform work.
4 Z a oLmoN WASTE STREAM CHARACTERIZATION RESULTS
Lead was not detected in the composite building materials sample collected at the subject site.
Based on the analytical results, the anticipated demolition debris can be disposed of at a non-
hazardous waste landfill permitted to accept construction debris.
4.3 UAW-CONTAINING PAINT
Lead was typically used as an additive m paint to improve durability and coverage prior to being
banned for residential applications in 1976 by the Consumer Product Safety Commission, In
general, the EPA. considers any stricture built prior to 197$ suspect to contain significant
quantities of lead.
The Site structure contained painted surfaces that were found to be in generally good condition.
Given the date of construction (1972), lead- containing paint is suspected to be present in the site
structure. Recommendations regarding lead in building materials and lead dust hazards are
included in Section 5 0
4.4 PCBs SURVEY RESULTS
RGI conducted a visual survey for electrical transformers and fluorescent light fixtures at the
site, No electrical transformers were observed on site. Based on the date of construction. (1972),
PCB containing light ballasts are suspected in the site building
4.5 MERCURY FLUORESCENT LAMPS AND THERMOSTATS SURVEY RESULTS
RGI conducted a visual survey for fluorescent light fixtures and mercury thermostat switches at
the site. Sampling was not included in this scope of work. Mercury thermostat switches were
not observed in the site structure. Suspect mercury -courting fluorescent light bulbs were
observed in the site structure.
TES RILEY GROUP, INC.
9
feed to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc For usage Conditions Agreement see www_brwa.com Always Verity Scale
1'rc- t)ernolrt.ion. ACM Survey
Page, 7 March 4 20
1.936 F Highway 101 Port Angeles, WA Project tt20{)9 -040,\
4 6 M.OLD
R.(31 performed a walk through inspection of the building for v srble mold No visible evidence
of mold was noted in the site building.
5 0- Urque Regulatory Requirements
If the hazardous building materials identified in this report will be disturbed through future
maintenance renovation or demolition activities, they will be subject to the requirements set
forth in all applicable local, state and federal regulations
Materials that were not sampled are presumed to I.Yonrain asbestos and wr11 be subiect to these
same requirements until tests arc pertornied to confirm the i'absence of asbestos,
'The following notices, permit, and licenser <ire necessary for renovation and/or demolition work
as of the date of this report. The contractor is ca.utroned to verify these requirements. as
applicable to the final project scope and confirm that no new or additional regu.trerre.nts exist
5 1 LOCAL An Q1 „rALTTV BOARD (OL,VMPrc' ,Rr,c;,os 1.,,RAN AIR AGF,NC\
Written notification is required to the local Air Quality Management 1Dtstrict at least 1() da.vs
prior to beginning any work on fria.hle asbestos contarning materrrfls The EPA also enforces this
requirement In addition, notification is required for all demolitions involv-rrtg strictures even f
no ,asbestos containing material is present. Asbestos removal and disposal requirements are
outlined in ORCAA s Regulations (Rules 6 3 and 6 4)
5,2 WASFTTI CTON DEPARTMENT OF LABOR AND [\Dt15TR.IES (L&I)
Asbesros
or any activity involving greater than 48 square feet or 10 linear feel of AC M that may release
isbestos fiber' into the air (j e demolition, renovation) \written not.lticatco.n must be given to the
L &1 regional office h) the qualified contractor no later than i() days prior to the start of the
project ('WAC "96-65-020)
or activities impacting composite wallboard systems with. less than l% asbestos content the
contractor, will need to follow work practit.c requirements as given in WA( 206 -62 1
particularly use of wet non aggressive methods and prnmpr clean -up Vacuums u.5c:d must by
HEPA. filtered Worker training must ine,lude 2 hour asbestos awareness training R.espirator‘r
protection must be based on overall dust levels (A competent person on the lob site rnu t he
assigned and trained under the requirement; of W Ai -67 077
Lead
Appropriate precautions should be takers to address airborne paint dust during renovation or
demolition. Abatement of lead containing paint is not required prior to cornmenc.in.g renovation
or demolition work If any detectable amount of lead is present in building. materials during rr
renovation or demolition project workers inip,icting these materials should have approved lead
;awareness training, En addition_ personal protective equipment should he worn 1■) workers
empacting lead-containing building materials until an evaluation is made as to whether cir not
\N oricers are exposed to concentrations in _iir in excess of the action level of ()'3 m,rrrril If the
,ar,t:ron level is exceeded, requirement; for training_, medical monitoring and air sampling are
triggered If the permissible exposure unlit (l'FLl oft) 05 rnon is exceeded more requirements
Tnnv RILFY GROUP, 1N('
10
(Jed to PuiidPrs Exchange or WA; Inc For use (_,ondition. ■grePrn°nt sP p vwuw bxwcr corgi Always Verify St,-;we
Pre- Demolition ACM Survey
1936 E Highway 101, Port Angeles, WA
must be met, including the use of respiratory protection equipment. Additional information
pertaining to worker safety and health is available in WAC 296 -155 -176 Lead Exposure in
Construction, WAC 296-62, Part E Respiratory protection, and WAC 296-62, Part H Air
Contaminants OSHA guidelines are presented in 29 CFR 1926.62.
5.3 WASHINGTON STATE DEPARTMENT OF ECOLOGY/ U.S. EPA
Lead
A Ted pain whether painted materials must be banded �s haz ous
W
1 solid Wasteeas c" s c a O 4 :n. ie l i 1 t h
concern relaxed to m t is
wastes for disposal, cnusidered�� ,b aaldousc to metenal�:lf� they. mater
n grams =liter (mgt, of leachable lead as measured by the Toxicity
c Leachate Procedure (1.'CLP) and approved EPA Test Methods. Regulations
regarding the identification and listing of hazardous waste are contained m 40 CFR 261 and
Washington State Department of Ecology Dangerous Waste Regulations (WAC 173 -303) A
composite sample of the building debris, as collected and discussed herein, may be required by
area landfills prior to acceptance_ Materials identified as a hazardous waste should be disposed of
by the contractor at a RCRA Treatment, Storage, and Disposal facility "Appropriate
precautions" should also be taken to address airborne paint dust during renovation or demolition.
5.4 PER.MIis
Contractor must obtain all building and special permits required for the asbestos abatement work.
Of note, prior to abatement activities within the building(s), a permit is required by the Unil
Fire Code (UFC). (e.g. work plans and drawings of containment's with entrances and exits
clearly marked).
5.5 Lici s s
Contractor must maintain current licenses as required by applicable state or local jurisdictions for
the removal, transportation, disposal, or other regulated activity
THE RILEY GROUP, INC
Page 8 March 4 2009
Project #2009-040A
e11
'ided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Condibons Agreement see wu w trzwa.com Ahnays Verify Scale
Pre-Demolition ACM Survey
1936 E Highway 101 Port Angeles, WA
6 0 Warranty
RGT warrants that the findings contained herein have been prepared with the level of care and
skill exercised by experienced and knowledgeable envimnreutal consultants who are
appropriately licensed or otherwise trained to perform asbestos and lead in paint assessments
pursuant to federal, state and local requirements as applicable, This inspection is not intended to
serve as an EPA /HUD /WA lead -based paint inspection or risk assessment nor does it address the
potential for exposure to any other hazards or hazardous materials during renovation or
demolition.
The survey included inspection of accessible materials such as above or behind suspended
ceilings or other non permanent structures. RGI did not inspect or sample inaccessible areas
such as behind walls or within ductwork and did not dismantle any part of the structure to survey
inaccessible areas. Inaccessible is defined as areas of thc building that could not be tested
(sampled) without destruction of thc structure or a portion of the structure. In the event that
access to a portion of the building was not obtained (which otherwise would have been tested)
such limitations are specifically identified in thc Survey Summary Sheet of this report.
No sampling protocol is 100% "fail- safe," according to the U S EPA Samples collected are
indicative of the material sampled. RGI has indicated which samples are considered
representative of adjacent or similar appearing matenals. These conclusions are not meant to be,
and may not be, relied on by client as representations or warranties by RG1 Any g ven material
other than the exact sample, is or is not, asbestos containing.
This report is not intended to identify all hazards or unsafe conditions, nor imply that others do
not exist. This report does not provide an evaluation, assessment or analysis of health risks,
environmental impact, usage limitations or mitigation options.
This repot/ has been prepared for the exclusive use of AutoZone, Inc. and affiliates thereof
Results are based solely on the methodology stated in this report and the report should be relied
upon in its entirety Any reliance a third party makes of this report is the responsibility of such
third party
Should you have any questions regarding this report or if we may be of additional service, please
do not hesitate to contact us at (425) 415 0551 at your convenience.
Sincerely,
HE RILEY GROUP, INC.
Anna Jordan
AHLRA Building inspector
#11029229
Attachments
Report Distribution Mr Trey S,)iallwood, AutoZone
I1 electronic copy 2 bound copies)
Page 9 March 4 2009
Project #2009 -040A
THE RILEY GROUP, INC.
Frederick Becker, L.G L.H.G CHMM
Senior Project Geologist
e 12
r., et, ddi',rc Frehanoe of WA, Inc For usage Conditions Agreement see w*w.bxwa.cvm Always Verify Scale
USGS, 1985, Port Angeles, Washington
7.5- Minute Quadrangle
The Riley Group, Inc.
17522 BOTHELL WAY NE
BOTHELL, WASHINGTON 98011
le 13
ovided 130 Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com Always Verify Scale
Approximate Scale: riw1000'
0 500 1000 2000
N
Proposed AutoZone Retail Store #4110 I Figure 1
Project Number Date Drawn:
2009-0440A Site Vicinity Map 02/27/09
Address: 1936 East Highway 101, Port Angeles, Washington
■AZZ24*
Kitchen Restroom Restroorn
AZ-16h 41`42 ib
AZ•17 Ili 1
■AZ 26* Office IIPEZZ1 AM
g AZ24 II F 1-- Salad Bar
1
Storage
SA LM AZ -01
T
J-
Sample Location
Roof Sample Location
Denotes Asbestos i%
T 1A2-03
r
•AZ -20'
AZ-1911
AZ-10•
Dining Room 1AZ 22*
Z
■AZ -25*
11AZ -21*
The Riley Group, Inc.
17522 BOTHELL WAY N8
BOTHELL, WASHINGTON 98011
AZ 18
ATI
AZ -07a
AZ-23*
1
--I
Appradmste Scale: l' -3r0' A
0 10 20 N
Proposed AutoZone.Retai Store #4110 Figure 2
Project Number Building Layout Date Drawn:
2009-040A Showing Sample Locations 02 /27/09
Address. 1936 Fast Highway 101, Pori Angeles, Washington
Instructor
F I'A Provider C'crI Number 1085
certificate of (Comptctton
tirbtO to to certtfp tljot
Anna j. Jordan
baO oat tg actortlp c.onpleteb
24 Ijour. of trattting aO an
Asbestos Building Inspector
to cutnpty WO the training regtttretnent5 of
EfiqES It ttte 40 Cif 763 .W3 ,a)
AF{!US 1'.lil)k )11t;. i 9CX3
Certificate Number- 1029229
ARGUS
Nickerson Suit! 31i S1/4. attic Washirlgtu r
98119 (206) 265 3373 1'a {206) 28i 1927
May t 2009
SEATTLE ASBESTOS TEST, LLC
19711 Scriber Lake Road, Suitt 11, Lynnwood, WA 98036
'1'01 4 25.673.91150, Froc^ 421673 -9810
www.switicesbesloswegx.com. admin%vaetrleasixst cmc team
Mr Fred Becker
The Riley Group, Inc.
17522 Bothell Way NE, B
Bothell, WA 98011
Enclosed please find the test results for the bulk samples submitted to our laboratory for
asbestos analysis. Analysis was performed using polarized light microscopy (PLM) in
accordance with Test Method US EPA/6001R- 93/116
Sine variation in data men :ages as the quantity of asbestos decreases toward the limit of
detection, the EPA recommends point counting for samples containing between <l and
10% asbestos (NESHAP, 40 CFR Part 61). Statistically point counting is a more accurate
method. If you feel a point count might be beneficial, please feel free to call and request
one.
The test results refer only to the samples or items submitted and tested. The accuracy with
which these samples represent the actual materials is totally dependent on the acuity of the
person who took the samples. This report must not be used by the client to claim product
certificaiion, approval, or endorsement by Seattle Asbestos Test, LLC, NVLAP, MST, or
any agency of the Federal government.
This report is highly confidential and will not be released without your consent Samples
are archived for two weeks after the analysis, and disposed of as hazardous waste
thereafter
Thank you for using our service and let us know if we can further assist you.
Sincerely
Steve (Fanyao
President
Rtt,E1VED MAR 14 NB
NAM Accreditation
Lab Cade: 200768-0
Date Analyzed: 21242009
Client Job #•200940408
Laboratory Batch 200959135
Samples Received: 26
e 16 Appendix B laboratory Repdrts and Chains of Custody
'tried to Builders Exchange or WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see +.bzwa.mm Always Verify Scale
SEATTLE ASBESTOS TEST, LLC
Lynnwood Laboratory' 19711 Scriber Lida ltd, Suite)), Lynnwood, WA 98036;, Tel. 425.673,96,50, Fax:425.673.9810
Bcilcvue Labotrataory 12727 Norrlrup Way, Suite 24, DJ:ti e, WA 98005; Tel: 425.861 1111, Fax: 425 861.1118
Webslte: lepplfwww.s cram/, Eisre4 iiingn@sealalentbosanstatncom
Attn. Mr Fred Becker
ClienkThe Riley Group, Inc_
Addrees: 17522 Bothell Way NE, B
Bothell, WA 98011
Project: Port Angeles
Client Semple
Lab ID
ID
Layer
1
2
3
4
5
AZ -01 1
2
3
AZ -02 1
2
3
AZ-03 1
2
3
AZ-04 1
2
3
AZ-05 1
2
3
ANALYTICAL LABORATORY REPORT
PLM by Method EPA/6001R43/116
Description
I Blue paint
Off- white powdery
material
hite chancy
aterlal with paper
Blue paint
Off-white cyrodery
materiel
White chalky
material with paper
1 13Iue paint
P'ff-vrtitte po dery
aterial
'white chalky
material with paper
Blue paint
gff-whtte
aterda t
White chalky
material with paper
i tilue paint
Off-white powdery
material
White chalky
material with paper
Asbestos
Fibers
one
I ChrysotIle 2
None
detected
on witie t ted
2 Ihryeotile
on ieta e ctod
None
detected
2 IChrysotile
ir i ete e cted
1 P ci d e one
teed
2 Inrysotite
s:Ucted
None
detected
2 iChrysotile
detected
NVLAP Atxredtialial
Lab Code: 200768.0
Client Job
laboratory Battfi t 200959135
Date Received: 2/24/2009
Samples Received. 26
Date Analyzed: 2/24/2009
Samples Analyzed: 26
Noe-Fibrous
Components
Paint
I BInderfillier Paint
ir+dertfllier
ypsumibinder
'Paint
4 nderffiflier Paint
Binder/er
>;ypsum/bind r
'Paint
Banderffiifer, Paint
Binder/Mier
Gypsum/binder
Paint
Bindert�ler Paint
1 Binder/fiiller
Gypsum/binder
Paint
r indermuer Paint
Binder(hller
Gypsum/binder
Page 1 of 5
Nan,asbesbvs
!Cellulose Fibers
4
5 [Cellulose
25 C.eIulase
iCelluiose
3
6 ICe[ ulose
1 251CeNulose
2 iCellulose
5 Cenu lose
24 Cellulose
2 ICeBulose
4 close
1 23 Cellulose
3 Cellulose
5 Cellulose
1 21 ICellulose
natyzed by Wellong Tai/Usha Muligala Repoff by Steve (Faslyao) Zttang, Prt?st(lenl
17
led to Builders Mange or WA, Inc_ For usage ConaRionS Agreement see www bxwa.cwn Always Verify Scale
SEATTLE ASBESTOS TESL, LLC
Lynnwood ley 19711 Son ler Lake Rd, Suite D, l youwood, WA 98036; Tel: 425.673.9850, F 425.673,9810
13e1tevue Laboratory 12727 )k tlnrp Way, Suite 24, Bellevue, WA 98005- Tel: 425.861 1111, Paz 425.861.1118
Wab6hs' hap Pwww.somlostibmagIcst.corn, •mail:
Attn. Mr Fred Becker
Client The Riley Group, Inc.
,Address:17522 Bothell Way NE, B
Bothell, WA 98011
Project Port Angeles
Lab ID Client Sample �y� Description
ID
6 AZ-06 bellow paint
White powdery
material with paint
White chalky
I m wth paper
7 AZ -07 paint
gf t Witte powdery
W hite chalky
material with paper
6 Az-08 113lue pain
�r60 powdery
9
10
11
,AZ-09
AZ 10
AZ-11
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
1
1
2
ANALYTICAL LABORATORY REPORT
PLM by Method EPAf60O/R- 93'116
bite ch,aMcy
I with paper
White powdery
in iterial with paint
White chalky
matenal with paper
'Yellow mastic
I ran mastic
Brow wood block
12 AZ-12 1 White sat material
with font
Asbestos
Fibers
�h
2 icttrysothe
None
detected
Nona
detected
2 'Chfysottle
on lote e cteci
None
detected
2 J
Olrl iete e cted
one
None
ri rts z tod
ne
fRected
None
detected
None
detected
int
Client Job 2009 -040B
Laboratory Batch* 200959135
Date Received: 2/24/2009
Samples Received 28
Date Analyzed: 2/242009
Samples Analyzed. 26
Non-Fibrous
Components
Binder/filler Paint
Iler
ypsurn/binder
fr airA
Binder/filter Paint
ypsu r
m/bintier
�irYt
Binder/filler Paint
Binderffrller
Gypsum/binder
!Binder/filler Paint
tinder/filler
Gypsun bk der
'Mastic/binder Filler
iI astidbinder Filler
Wood Aggregates
ender Filler Paint
Page 2 of 5
NVLAP Acctrxenifon
Lab Co: df' 2007613-0
Non asbestos
Fibers
3'Cellulose
2 J
19 !Cellulose
5 'Cellulose
6 'Cellulose
125 ICel !Loose
3 ICeilub
5 Cellulose
21 II Ceelul se
4
12 3
6 'Cellulose
4llulose
3 Cellulose
4 lose
Cellulose
krivtyzed by Weilong Tel/List's Munigaia vie*ed by Steve (Fanyao) Zhang Presiden'
Ided to Builders Excrenge of WA, Inc, For usage Condigons Ag wow.brxwa,carn Always Verify Scale
SEATTLE ASBESTOS TEST LLC
Lynwood Laboratory' 19711 Scriber Lake Rd, Suite 17, 13 )4 WA 98036: Tel. 425.673 9850, Fax:425.6T3 9810
Bellevue iB[ 12727 Northop Way Suite 24, Bellevue, WA 98005 Tel. 425 861.1111, Fax: 425.861 1118
Webelte: btipliwwur.scatticaabttLvs4eat.aotn. P n+eil- admirt� gl ..lees6cst -.mm
Attn_ Mr Fred Becker
ClientThe Riley Group Inc.
Address:17522 Bothell Way NE, B
Bothell, WA 98011
Project Port Angeles
1 Client Sample' L.ayerj
ID
Lab ID
13 AZ -13
14 AZ 14
15
16
17
18
AZ 15
AZ -16
AZ 17
AZ-18
Brown mastic on®
tscted
k an mastic ono
etacted
White powdery
2 material with paper 2 hrysotile
land paint
Gray foamy material' l ion@
fI°°etectQd
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
3
ANALYTICAL LABORATORY REPORT
PLM by Method EPA1600/R- 93/118
Description
r rown/white
tittie/rigid material
'Red mastic
'White brittle fibrous
material
I ran Mastic
1%1 Fibers
Gray fibrous material one
with paint ted
None
detected
d etected
1 1 1a t n e e c
led
one'
lad
Yellow brittle martens!' r d ic e r s e cted
rvwn fibrous one
Irnaterial d etected
sheet vinyl Nona
1lRed elected
ray fibrous material l {N
w ith mastic d etected
Brick rod shoot vinyl ne
No led
igkrtillyzed by Weilong Tai/Usha MunlQala
ovided'to Builders Exchange of WA. Inc For usage Conditions Agreement-see
2 lack a sphaltic
Brous material
03rou material asphaltic
lbrous material
None
clod
None
acted
Analyzed by Weliong Tai/Usha Munigata •Fiep
ige 20
oVlded to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conclitlons Agrent sec viva./ bxwa com
Cornoonenba Non Fibrous a� on- eaatos�
Fibers
1 85 Cellulose
3 Cellulose
Filler 4 Cellulose
35 Z ellu lose
3 Cellulose
Binder/filfer Paint,
Filler/binder
Client Job 2009
Laboratory Batch llr 200959135
Date Received; 2/24/2009
Samples Received: 26
Date Analyzed: 2/24/2009
mpki* AniaIy i_ 26
Paint, Filler Pertite
!Mastic/binder
l synthetic foam
F iller Binder Fine
ebris
hflastic/binder
'Filler Binder
!Mastic/binder
'Binder/filler
I Binder/fitter
Vinyl /binder
lnder/filler
as lc/binder
Ylnyl /binder
laved by Stevie (Fanyeo) Zheng. Preside
orn Always verify Scale
sphalt/binder
inder/filier
!Asphalt/binder Sand
23 Cellulose
4 Cellulose
85 Glass fibers
7 Cellulose
3 Cellulose
87 /Cellulose
None detected
70 Cellulose
I ona detected
Always Vertfy Scale
27 `Glass fibers
1 70 !Cellulose
Page 3 of 5
NVLAP Accreditation
Lab Code; 2i)O768 -0
by Steve (Fanyao) Zhang President
pr tpartyao) Ztreng, President
kr„otIvzed by W T8 WA, For u e verffy Scare
ridedfio Builders Exchange of wA, Inc In For usage Conditions A9fe..r. s.... see www,bXHa m Afire,
SEATTLE ASBESTOS TEST, LLC $VIAP Accreditation
Lynnwood L a i w i n s u r 14711 Satibor L kc Rd, Sale D, Lymrwuod, WA 98036; Tel: 425.673.9850, F :425.673.9810 Lab Code; 21pph -0
Bdevue Laontary 1272 Naidarp Wey, Suits 2 4 Bd1cvUc, W A 98005; T d 425.861 t 111, Fsc 425,86I.1118
Webs# h p /Iwww. com, E.rm& adramOseadkasbcoosszcoom
Attn. Mr Fred Becker
ClientThe Riley Group. inc.
Address:17522 BotheI Way NE, B
Botloll,WA 98011
Project Port Angeles
Lab ID Client Semple Layer DerlacriptIon
ID
19
20
21
22
4
AZ-19 1
2
AZ -20 1
2
3
4
A2.21 1
2
3
4
5
AZ.22 1
2
3
ANALYTICAL, LABORATORY REPORT
PL IA by Method EPA1800/R- 93/116
k ray fibrous magi
mastic
Light green sheet
vinyl
Gray fibrous material
ware mastic
f asphaltic
asphaltic
brows material
lack asphaltic
brows material
wood block
Stack asphaltic
material with sand
Prom asphaltic
rb ous material
Bieck asphaltic
material
In°rous
materiel
!Brown wood block
pl ena asphaltic
p k asphaltic
bcwus material
s material
Asbestos Non Fibrous
Fibers Components
None inder/filter
detected astic/binder
opcted %/WO/binder
None }8inder/80er
detected Mastic/binder
3 IChrysotlie fAsphetittblricler
Asphaitibinder
4 Binder/filler
itneected 1A8phait/binder
r focted Wood Aggregates
detected
Asphalt/binder Sand
Asphaltibinder
4 I CrIr Y sc4B° Binderfliiller
7 IChrysotfie
None
J
detected
None Wood Aggregates
detected
4 Chrysolite
Asphalt/bi
Alone alt/binder
detected (ter
z !Asphalt/binder Sand
Client Job /P
L4soratoty Batch ft 200959135
Date Received: 2/2412009
Samples Received: 26
Date Analyzed: 2/24/2009
Samples Analyzect: 28
rider
70
1
70 fCellutose
75
Cellulose
Cellulose
4 [Cellulose
[23 &Uss
169 Iceuuo
}ceiuiose
75Iulose
8
21 I ieeltUbse
27 (Glass fibers
70 ICellulose
Page 4 oaf 5
Non-esbeetos
Fibers
1 67 ICeilulose
Z one debected
Analyzed by Wellong TailUatta Maniple by Steve (Fanyao) Zhang President
age 23
m Builders Exchange of WA, Inc_ For usage Conditions Agre!< ent sere ■ww laXwa.cont Always Verify Scale
SEATTLE ASBESTOS TEST, LLC
N Ataedita 1ion
yn nwcx d taboreroty 19711 Scriber Labe Rd> Suite D, Lymnwrnr d, WA 99036;1 t: 425.673.983X, F=474.6739810 lab Cada: 2007138.0
s eurvue Labanary 12721 NallAap Way, Saba 24. Rdlevaa. WA 92005' Till 415,861 1111, Far 425.861.1112
wabsite: hitp://www.szegiasbamelatcom, Sinsoi1 idathitgostelaasbassualawrom
Alin, Mr Fred Becker
Client The Riley Group, Inc.
Address:17522 Bothell Way NE, B
Bothell, WA 98011
Profect Port Angeles
Lab ID Client Sample
1D
23 AZ-23 1
2
3
4
24 AZ-24 1
2
3
25 Az 25 1
2
3
4
26 Az-26 1
2
3
ANALYTICAL LABORATORY REPORT
PI.M by Method EPA/GOO/R-93/11B
Layaar Description
4
wood block
r ri la ste ck rial be
asphaltic
s material asphaltic
L L 1::,. ial
'Brown wood block
Lar
M ack a sphaltic
brous materiel
aw wood biotic
rna lack asphaltic
feria!
4 ck asphaltic
rrous material
g asphaltic
eaterial with sand
wood block
'Brown
Black asphaltic
material
Black asphaltic
fibrous material
ak
atonal sand
Asbestos
Fibers
4 hlyysordie
6 ICtlrysoltls
3 1hrysot'ile
c
None
detected
4 IChryeatile
None
detected
litrattvoad by Woking E Tai�lUU$F1a Mu rrf a A
prided of WA Inc. For ge Coraiiboss �e efien see wow
Client Job #2009 -4408
Labondory Batch 200959135
Date Received: 21x412009
Samples Received: 26
Eats Analyzed: 2!24/2009
Samples Analyzed: 26
Non -Fl roue
Components
!Wood AIHIrelgabas
1 Asphaltibincier
a I*/bhuier
kwi&/ft ier
'Asphalt/tinder Sand
'Wood Aggrega
lAsphait/binder
O f11 aft/binder,
ctfifilier
lAsphalbbinder
pI at114inder
inder/6Her
Asphalt/binder Sand
1=tod l
Asptratlirbinder
Asphalbbinder,
BindedfHer
17 ftted E‘Phalubindef Sdnd
Cellulose
Page 5of5
14 Fibers
Fibers
7'Cellulose
1 /Cellulose
4 ViitgOre,
ces fibers
1 45 !Cellulose
7 'Cellulose
19 'Cellulose
1 (33 CCellubse
6 Cellulose
23 !Cellulose
H
68 ICellulosaa
5
I Celailose
1 64 1 ceu°66
by Steve (Fanyaa) Zhang, Prosttient
Vedry Scale
SEATTLE ASBESTOS TEST LLC
J 971 1 Scribe Take Road Saito 13, Lyrrtrar,gd, WA 98036
Td- (425) 613 -9$S1 Pair (125) 673-91110
im,rcr matt) rr tco ni
ACCreditcd, Exper.1egped, Insured, and Well Maiaagcdt
CHAIN OF CUSTODY
MAWSSi BMX ASBESTt7S TEST j, PONT Go4NT °L Poen wiser Maul Pow Coltlff gkaafnrrotcL Other
The Riley croup, Inc.
1722 Bothell Way NE, Bothell, WA 98011
Phone_ 425 -4415 -(1551 I Pax:(425) 41,5 0311 'Email: ;NY
Project Locatio Proj. Mn arr r:{V4td E*.„f yGgY
Turn Around Time tuber of Samples 210 Client Job #2iX
Sample Condition, Good Damaged Severe Damage(Spillage)
SEO#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
CLIENT SAMPLE 1f
c\
o2-
-Q'3
—05
l�1
_QE
og
10
—1�
-w
Pilot Name
SAMPLE DESCRIPTION
kk
I l\
I
r
f
i
X
IV
(V% e.
Xi I itILE iwlboci
W ke t<t4
+Vf,�4( (etkInicv e
14 brovIA rr 'rc-1 1bvy.1,,
IS t4 isl to
‘t L U
tar i 40. ,s
►14: c.c■-• 1. '1 *el
1. L_ r. q4, 1 s a. .•t
i ,.a 14.
f �Ptlrarsaa I Co oponv /tam
I R r iy‘%11- 4,2 4 611 V-4)1
e 22
node toiruitdere Exchange of WA, Inc. For use Conditions Agreement see vwwn.bswa.corn Always Vta ify Scale
Q009a9 I35
*VI,AP Ayer d. 31076&0
LAB ID
I A/R
I
1
I
1
Data l Time
2o (e), 0 00
6
Resort forting edlod. Phone Fax Email Pick-up more
Seattle Asbestos Test warrants the results to be of a precision normal for tthe rXpc and metrology employed for each .ample
subantted and disclaim soy other iihrarranis, expressed or implied including warranty of @ems for a particular purpose and warranty
ofiner eh ratability Seattle Asbesms Tme accepts no kgat reeponsibihty tier ncc purpose for wtdth the chars i the owls moats_
By signing oe thJa f th eli agree to relieve Seattla A beanie Test of any liability that may ariso from the rest results_
invoices paid late may be cloned o f interact, and invoices go to collection may be ch /god 17% 10 25% of colleclism fee.
Check] with NSF will be charged $50,
olY
EATTLE ASBESTOS TEST LLC
X711 Sariber Lake Road Sum I), Lynnwoodd, WA 914036
0! (425) 673-9850Fax: (425) 673-9810
rww.sealll aaixotastesicom
.•excdited, Experienced. Insured, erred Well Managed!
CHAIN OF CUSTODY
ANALYSIS: BULK AMPS0S TEST POINT cowrr (4M1 POINT C11UNT it %IO)__ POINT COUNT goat c1 Other
The Riley Group, be-
17522 Bothell Way NE, Bothell, WA 98011
Phone: 425 415 -0551 Fax_(425) 415-0311
Project Location. NOVA ?C
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
19
20
Print Milne
Proj Manager
Turn around Time Number of Samples o Client Job kaglitCP -OLIO$
Damaged Severe Datnage(Spillage)
Sample Condition: Good IX
SEO# 1 CLIENT SAMPLE
1 AZ. 2.1
2 �22
3
4
5 �yr�
6 Z.W
7
Result repo;
1
SAMPLE DESCRIPTION 1
ktit
f/
iti��'_ �ll1l 1
g method. Phalle Fox
114'V1AF' /4ccredi4d, 280758.4
Email. vt n 1 1((1 C co-
LAB 1I3 1 A/R
&trtntLre Corapairi Name I Data I Time
OsisVNIL t i�1�� 1 lc&
eTki
Vf5
Email__ Pi report
Scatrle Asbestos Test warren ts4bt teat results to be of ape:einion normal for the type sod methodology =played for each sample
p>txnirred and clisclaixal any otbar warstints, expressed or implied, cbc@iding warranty of fitz ess en. a particular purer and warranty
of Hicrchantsbitay Seasie Asbeli x1%'P az accepeq >ao legal responaibi)ity for the purpose for which the client uses the test results.
13y signing on this inn the dies agree to relieve Seattle Asbestos Teat of any liability that may arise from the test Milts.
invoices paid late maybe charged of interest. end invoices go to collection may be charged 17%to 25% recollection. rec.
ge 23 Checks with NSF' will he ehmgpd S50.
ovide i to Byiiders Exchange of WA. Inc, For usage conducts Agreenaert see wwer_trcwa_cam Arrays Verity Stele
Milts
Environmental 1n.
14648 NE 95 Street, Redmond, WA 98052 (425) 883 -3881
February 27, 2009
Anna Jordan
The Riley Group, Inc.
17522 Bothell Way NE. Suite A
Bothell, WA 98011
Re Analytical Data for Project 2009 -0408
Laboratory Reference No. 0902 -154
Dear Anna.
Enclosed are the analytical results and associated quality control data for samples submitted on
February 24 2009.
The standard policy of OnSite Environmental Inc is to store your samples for 30 days from the date of
receipt. If you require longer storage, please contact the laboratory
We appreciate the opportunity to be of service to you on this project. If you have any questions
concerning the data, or need additional information, please feel free to call me.
Sincerely
David Baumeister
Project Manager
Enclosures
OnSite Environmental, Inc. 14.648 NE 95 Street, Redmond, WA 98052 (425) 883 -3881
This report pertains to the samples analyzed in accotdartce with the chain of custody
end is ►mended only for the use of the individual or company to whom it Is addressed.
:le 24
vided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc For usage Conditions Agreement see wwwr bxwa.com Always Verify Scale
Date of Report: February 27 2009
Samples Submitted; February 24, 2009
Laboratory Reference: 0902-154
Project: 2009-040B
Cane Narrative
2
Samples were collected on February 20. 2009, and received by the laboratory on February 24.2009.
They were maintained at the Laboratory at a terriperal ure of 2 to 6 exert as noted below
General QA/QC issues associated with the anaJylicil data enclosed in this laboratory report will be
Irrdkated with a reference to a comment or explanation on the Data Qualifier page. More complex and
Involved QA/QC issues will be dismissed in detail below.
Or51te Environments.. inc.. 14649 NE 9e Street, Redmond. WA 98052 (425) 8839881
This repot pertain to the samples analyzed in accordance with fns drain of cizit dy,
and to Intended ordy fortis use at Iris inaf,olduel et company m r h om ft is addressed
le 25
tided to Builders Brchange or WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see Ixewra.own Always Verify Scate
Date of Report: February 27 2009
Samples Submitted: February 24 2009
Laboratory Reference: 0902-154
Project: 2009 -0408
Date Prepared: 2.25 -09
Date Extracted: 2- 26-09
Date Analyzed: 2 -27-09
Matrix: TCLP Extract
Units. m9A (pPm)
TCLP LEAD
by tPI& 1311N5010B
3
Client if) Lab ID Result PQL
TCLP sample 02- 154-01 t+® 0
OnSke Environmental, Inc. 14643 NE 95' Street, Redmond, WA 98052 (4.25) 883 -3881
This report pertains to the samples err lyzed 4n era dente s4th the chain of custody
and Is Intended only for the use of the individual or company to tellorn if ks etldresead.
i,1e 26
•vcded to Builders Exchange of WA, inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see %brirea.com AM.ays Verify Scale
Data of Report: February 27 2009
Sample's Submitted: February 24, 2009
Laboratory ratory Reference: 0902 -154
Project: 2009-0408
Data Prcpar 1. 2-25-09
Date Extracted: 2 -26-09
Date Analyzed: 2-26-09
Matrix: TCLP Extract
Units: mg/L (ppm)
Lab ID: MB0226T1
Analyte Method
Lead 60108
TCLP LEAD
by EPA 1311/50108
METHOD BLANK QUALITY CONTROL
Result PQL
ND 0,20
OnSite Environmental, Inc. 14648 NE 95 Street, Rechnord, WA 98052 (425) 883-3881
This report pertains to the samples s analyzed in IsoCoKktooe with the Choin of custody
and Is Intended only for re use of the b ayiel rerl or company to lateen it is adfresead.
ae 27
:vvided to Builders &change of WA, Inc For usage Conditions Agreement see w w pzwa.eom Always Verify Scale
4
Date of Report: February 27 2009
Samples Submitted: February 24, 2009
Laboratory Reference: 09062 -154
Project: 2009 -0408
Date Pre Forme 2- 25--:9
Date Extracted: 2 -2-09
Date Analyzed: 2 -26-0'8
Matrix:
Lab ID
Arudyte
Lead
TCLP Extract
mg/L (PPrn)
02- 108.06
TCLP LEAD
by EPA 1311/15010A
DUPLICATE DUALITY CONTROL
Sara de Duplicate
Result Result
RPD PQL Flags
020 21 020 C
OnSlte Environment's, Inc. 14648 NE 85" Street, Redmond, WA 98052 (425) 883 3881
Thle report pertains to to samples errelyzed in eaooaience loth the chin of M atady
and is mended orgy for tse use of ale t+A' or avn to ahem It b ad lees ed.
2x 28
wided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see *veer bzwa_eom Always Verify Scale
5
Date of Report: February 27 2009
Samples Submitted: February 24, 2009
Laboratory Refensnc e: 0902 -154
Project: 200-0408
Date Prepared: 2 -25-09
Date ExIi dad: 2 -26-09
Date Analyzed: 2-26-09
Ma l ix: TCLP Extract
Units: mg1L (Ppm)
Lab ID: 02 -109-06
Analyte
Lead
TCLP LEAD
by EPA 1311/60108
MSIMSD QUALITY CONTROL
6
Spike Percent percent
Level MS Recovery MSD Recovery RPD Flags
10 9.47 92 10.1 98 B
Site Erroltonnnerdat, Inc. 14648 NE 85 Street, Redmond, WA 98052 (425) 893 -3881
Tril9 report penaine id the aanpba analyzed In accordance MtQ1 Ine dash of as ody
end is intended oily 4Q liss use of the isdhiit1e1 or company ID ~barn It is sEt eeeed.
le 29
ultra to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see! bxwa.com Always deftly Scale
Z
Mite
Environinantal
Dattl Quaftttes and Abbreviations
A Due to a high sample concentration, the amount spiked is insufficient for meaningful MS/141$D recovery data.
B The analyte indicated was also found in the blank sample,
C The duplicate RPD is outside control limits due to high result variability when analyte concentrations are
within five times the quantitation limit
E The value reported exceeds the quantitation range and is an estimate_
F Surrogate recovery data is not available due to the high concentration of coelutlrlg target compounds.
H The analyte indicated Is a common laboratory solvent and may have been introduced during sample
preparation, and be impacting the sample result.
I Compound recovery is outside of the control limits.
J The value reported was below the practical quantitation limit. The value is an estimate
K Sample duplicate RPD Is outside control limits due to sample Inhomogeneiry The sample was
re- extracted and re- analyzed with similar results,
L The RPD Is outside of the control timitss.
M Hydrocarbons in the gasoline range are impacting the diesel range result.
Ml Hydrocarbons In the gasoline range (toluene- napthalene) are present In the sample.
N Hydrocarbons in the tube oil range are impacting the diesel range result.
O Hydrocarbons indicative of heavier fuels are present In the sample and are Impacting the gasoline result.
P The RPD of the detected concentrations between the two columns is greater than 40.
Q Surrogate recovery is outside of the control limits.
S Surrogate recovery data Is not available due to the necessary dilution of the sample.
T The sample chromatogram is not similar to a typical
U The analyte was analyzed for but was not detected above the reported sample quantitation limit.
U1 The practical quantitation limit is elevated due to interferences present in the sample.
Matrix Spike/Matrix Spike Duplicate recoveries are outside control limits due to matrix effects.
W Matrix Spike/Matrix Spike Duplicate RPD are outside control limits due to matrix effects.
X Sample extract treated with a mercury cleanup procedure,
Y Sample extract treated with an acid/silica gel cleanup procedure.
ND Not Detected at PQL
PQL Practical Quantitatlon Umit
RPD Relative Percent Difference
OnSite Environmental, Inc_ 14648 NE 9e Street, Redmond, WA 98052 (425) 883 -3881
This report pertains to the samples analyzed in accordance with the gain or custody
and is intended only h the use of the individual or company to shun it Is addressed,
30
,ded to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc For usage Conditions Agreement see www bxwa.com Always Verify Scale
7
alE /VOA SAI=PAIV Lucr0 /#,Aon■ ofirs lueureall3y suompu00 eBbsrl JOA oul 'vt JO abue40x3 sJapana 04 pep!.
LE G
1 `"3
0 0
4
INWTPI-1-HCID
AllAirPH-Gx/BTEX
14W7PH-Dx
1 i t 1 Volaulas by 42608
1 HalogeriMed Volatiles by 82608
.1...,
....14..44. I mud stiles by $,Z700
i PPM. try 82700 SIM
1PCeis by 841132
iPftsticIdes by 8081
1
11-7 erbleit;a9 by 8151A
I rola, RaAMeIals (8)
CLP Moak; L eit h ap 01 i
ii try 1564
novISIU00
888C
i ■=1••••••
The Riley Group Inc.
ASBESTOS-CONTAINING
MATERIALS SURVEY
METHODS PROCEDURES
SERVING THE PACIFIC NORTHWEST
Main Office: 17522 Bothell Way NE. Suite A, Bothell, WA 98011
Tel (425) 415 -0551 Fax (425) 415 -0311 Seattle Tel. (206) 417 -0551
e 32 Appendix C Asbestaa5- Containing Materials Survey Methods Procedures
.+ided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc For usage Conditions Agreement see www bxwa.com Always Verify Scale
Inspection and sampling procedures were performed in accordance with the guidelines published
by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) in 40 CFR Part 763 Subpart E, October 30,
1987 Sampling procedures include collection of one or more samples of all suspect friable and
non- friable materials.
GENERAL ORGANIZATION
The survey consisted of three major activities: visual inspection, sampling, and quantification of
building materials. Although these activities are listed separately, they are integrated tasks.
VISUAL INSPECTION OF SUSPECT ACMs
An initial building vralkthrough was conducted to determine the presence and condition of
suspect materials that were accessible and/or exposed. Materials that were similar in general
appearance or in date of construction were grouped into homogeneous sampling areas.
Homogeneous Material Classifications
A preliminary walkthrough of the building was conducted to determine areas of materials
which were visually similar in color, texture, general appearance, and which appeared to
have been installed at the same time. Such materials are termed "homogeneous materials" by
the EPA. During this walkthrough, the approximate locations of these homogeneous
materials were also noted.
Following the EPA inspection protocol, each identified suspect homogeneous material was
placed in one of the following EPA classifications.
1 Surfacing Materials (spray or trowel applied to building members)
2. Thermal System insulation (materials generally applied to various mechanical systems)
3 Miscellaneous Materials (any materials which do not fit either of the above categories)
Friability Cieastfications
A regulated asbestos containing material (RACM) as defined by National Emissions
Standard for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP) is any (a) Friable asbestos material, (b)
Category I non friable ACM that has become friable, (c) Category I non- friable ACM that
will be or has been subjected to sanding, grinding, cutting, or abrading, or (d) Category II
non friable ACM that has a high probability of becoming or has become crumbled,
pulverized, or reduced to powder by the forces expected to act on the material in the course
of demolition or renovation operations.
Following the EPA inspection protocol, each identified suspect homogeneous material was
placed in one of the following EPA classifications
Friable Materials NESHAP defines a friable ACM as any material containing more than
one percent asbestos, that, when dry, can be crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder
by band pressure.
Category I Non friable NESHAP defines a Category I non friable ACM as packing,
gaskets, resilient floor covering (except vinyl sheet flooring products which are
considered friable), and asphalt roofing products which contain more than one percent
asbestos.
Category II Non friable NESHAP defines a Category II non friable ACM as any
material, except for a Category I non friable ACM, which contains more than one percent
asbestos and cannot be reduced to a powder by hand pressure when dry
)e 33
vi d ed to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see wesw.tav atom Always Verify Scale
SAMPLING PROCEDURES
Following the walkthrough, the inspector collected selected samples of accessible materials
identified as suspect asbestos containing building materials (ACM). Samples were collected by
Riley's asbestos building inspector certified under the EPA AHERA regulation 40 CFR 763,
Subpart E (AHERA certification attached in Appendix B) Sampling was consistent with the
requirements of NESHAPs and AHERA as well as meeting the requirements set forth by State
and local regulatory agencies.
QuAstrincknori
Quantities of accessible and/or exposed building marenals which were found to contain asbestos
were estimated. This estimation was performed by taking approximate measurements in the field.
Drywall, joint compound, plasters, and ceiling and floor tiles, were measured in square feet of
surface area. Piping insulation (if any) was measured in linear feet.
LABORATORY PROCEDURES
Method of Analysis
Samples were analyzed by an accredited laboratory, specified in Section 3.0 of this report. A
chain-of- custody, documenting the possession of the samples from the time they were collected
until they have been analyzed and stored, accompanied the materials at all times.
All bulk samples were analyzed by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) with dispersion staining
as described by the method for determination of asbestos in bulk insulation, EPA/600/R.- 93/116,
July 1993 This is a standard method of analysis in optical mineralogy and the currently accepted
method for the determination of asbestos in bulk samples.
It should be noted that some ACM may not be accurately identified and/or quantified by PLM.
As an example, the original fabrication of vinyl floor tiles routinely involved milling of asbestos
fibers to extremely small sizes. As a result, these fibers may go undetected under the standard
polarized light microscopy method. Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) is required for a
more definitive analysis of these materials.
For bulk samples which are found to contain, <1% asbestos, Point Count Analysis as described
by the method for the determination of asbestos in accordance with Environmental. Protection
Agency s (EPA) "Interim Method for Identification of Asbestos in Bulk Insulation Samples' (40
CFR 763, Appendix, A, Subpart F), is often utilized. Follow -up Point Count Analysis was not
conducted for this project unless specified in Section 3.0 of this report.
.ge34
ovided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc, For usage Conditions Agreement see %Now bxwa.corn Allays Verify Scale
U S Department of Transportation (DOT) including but not limited to
Hazardous Substances. Final Rule
Regulation 49 CFR, Parts 171 and 172
Uniform Fire Code:
Asbestos Removal
UFC Section 87 106, 87 102
Standards which govern asbestos abatement work or hauling and disposal of asbestos
waste materials include but are not limited to the following.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
Fundamentals Governing the Design and
Operation of Local Exhaust Systems
Publication Z9.2 -79
Practices for Respiratory Protection
Publication Z88.2 -80
STATE
Washington State Department of Ecology
Dangerous Waste Reeulati ons
WAC 173 -303
Washington Labor Industries (WISHA, L&I)
Asbestos. Tremolite. Anthonhvllite, and Actinotite
WAC 296 62477 through. 07761
Safety Standards for Asbestos Removal and Encapsulation
WAC 296 -65 -001 through 050
Respiratory Protection
WAC 296-62-071 through 07121
WISHA Regional Directive Occupational Exposure to Asbestos
WRD 23 10 April 30, 1997
WISHA Reaionai Directive Asbestos Containing Joint Commou nd
ip Wallboard Systems
WRD 23 30 December 28, 2000
Local Air Pollution. Control Authorities (e.g. Puget Sound Clean Air Agency)
36
Jed In Builders Exchange ange of WA, Inc For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com Always Verify Scale
ABATEMENT BUDGET ESTIMATE METHODOLOGY
Riley used recognized standard engineering principles in developing the unit cost
budgetary estimate for removal of the listed asbestos containing building materials
(ACM), suspect ACM and assumed asbestos containing material contained in this
facility This is an estimate for removal only, intended for general policy decisions
regarding program development and planning. The Client is advised to verify the
estimated quantities prior to obtaining contractor bids. The amounts are estimated as
of the date of the report and are an estimate of only the removal contractor's fees. Not
included are items such as indirect or hidden costs, such as employee relocation during
the project, lost revenues, etc. These items are considered during the development of an
engineering cost estimate, which is beyond the scope of this study Other variables
included in an engineering cost estimate are the project schedule and phasing, size of the
project, and other factors that can affect project cost.
Prior to the initiation of a project that would involve abatement, a detailed engineering
cost estimate and project design is recommended. The engineering cost estimate will
incorporate such variables as scheduling and phasing of the project, the size and extent of
the project, seasonal factors, operational factors and other restrictions, respiratory
protection, alternate abatement options, and type of replacement material. An engineering
cost estimate would also include professional fees, such as for project design and
management, and other expenses, such as on -site air monitoring and construction
supervision.
ABATEMENT COST SCHEDULE
Material Descriotion Description of the homogenous asbestos containing material.
Ouantlt This indicates the quantity of material present, expressed in appropriate units.
Quantities have been determined by on -site measurement or plan take-offs. Where access
is restricted, best estimates were determined from whatever information was available
Unit Cost The cost of removal per linear foot or square foot or other unit.
Removal Cost (Quantity) x (Unit Cost)
37 Appencitz E ACM Abatement Cost Estimates
led to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see *wow bxwa_com Always Verify Scale
ESTIMATED ABATEMENT COST SCHEDULE FOR
ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS
Site Address.
1036 Hla 101 E. Port Anaeies, WA
Material Low est high est Units eUn* Subtotals
Quantity Low High
VAT (tile only) $0.60 $2.75 sq. ft. $0 $0
VAT mastic $0.80 $3.00 sq-. ff. SO SO
Sheet vinyl $3.50 $5.50 sq. ft. $0 SO
Mastic for sheet vinyl/carpet $1.00 $2.00 sq. ft- $O SO
Roofing $1.50 $2.50 sq. ft. $0 SO
Composition shingles S1 75 $3.25 sq. ft. SO SO
Roof coating (silver) 51 75 $2.50 sq. ft. $0 SO
Roof mating (asphalt) 51 75 $2.75 sq. ft. 7,000 $12,250 $19,250
TSI pipelwire straights $4.00 $12.00 lin. ft. SO $O
TSI fittings $6.00 $15.00 fitting $0 SO
Duct wrap $4.00 $10.00 sq. ft. $0 $0
Duct tape (seams) $4.00 $10.00 sq. ft. $0 SO
Boiler insulation $1,500.00 $1,800.00 boiler SO $0
CAB $1.50 $3.00 sq. ft. $0 SO
Exterior vapor barrier 51.50 $3.00 sq. ft. $0 $0
Sink at $25.00 $75.00 sink $0 SO
Electrical panel (surround) $10.00 $15.00 sq. ft. SO $0
Electrical switch $10.00 $25.00 switch $O $0
Window putty $8.00 $50.00 window $0 S0
Vermiculite insulation $5.00 $8.00 sq. ft $0 $0
Ceiling texture 52.50 $4.00 sq. ft. $0 SO
Walisurfacing exterior eaves) $2.75 $3.50 sq. ft $0 $0
mobilization, equipment, ate. 5700.00 $1.200.00 N/A 1 $700 $1,200
SUBTOTAL. $12,850 $20,450
15% Consultant Fee. $1,943 $3,068
TOTAL COST RANGE. 14,893 $23,518
39
ed to Builders E,ange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.b v ac m Afesaire Aiwa Very Scale
1